Sie sind auf Seite 1von 502

3UHIDFH 7DEOH RI &RQWHQWV ,QWURGXFWLRQ +DUGZDUH DQG &RQQHFWLRQV

L Y

SIPROTEC Differential Protection 7SD610


V4.0 Manual

*HWWLQJ 6WDUWHG 6,3527(&  'HYLFHV &RQILJXUDWLRQ )XQFWLRQV &RQWURO 'XULQJ 2SHUDWLRQ ,QVWDOODWLRQ DQG &RPPLVVLRQLQJ 0DLQWHQDQFH DQG )DXOW 7UDFLQJ 7HFKQLFDO 'DWD $SSHQGL[ ,QGH[

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A

C53000-G1176-C145-1

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Buch-Nr. C53000-G1176-C145-1

Preface
Purpose of This Manual This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and placing into service of the device. In particular, one will find: General information regarding operation of SIPROTEC 4 devices Chapter 4. Information regarding customizing of the device Chapter 5. Descriptions of device functions and settings Chapter 6. Instructions for operation while in service Chapter 7. Instructions for mounting and commissioning Chapter 8. Compilation of technical specifications Chapter 10. As well as a compilation of the most significant data for experienced users in the Appendix. Target Audience Protection engineers, commissioning engineers, personnel concerned with adjustment, checking, and service of selective protective equipment, automatic and control facilities, and personnel of electrical facilities and power plants. This manual is valid for SIPROTEC 4 7SD610 differential protection; firmware version 4.0. Indication of Conformity This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within certain voltage limits (Low-voltage Directive 73/23/EEC). This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 50081 and EN 50082 for EMC directive, and with the standards EN 602556 for the low-voltage directive. The product conforms with international standards of series IEC 60255 and the German standard DIN 57435 /Part 303 (corresponds to VDE 0435/Part 303).

Applicability of This Manual

Additional Support

For questions regarding SIPROTEC 4 devices, please contact your Siemens representative.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Preface

Training Courses

Individual course offerings may be found in our Training Catalog, or questions can be directed to our training centre. Please contact your Siemens representative. The following indicators and standard definitions are used:

Instructions and Warnings

DANGER
means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage will occur if safety precautions are disregarded.

Warning
means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage could occur if safety precautions are disregarded.

Caution
means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety precautions are disregarded. This particularly applies to damage to the device and to resulting damage of the protected equipment.

Note is an important piece of information regarding the product or the part of the manual that deserves special attention.

Warning!
During operation of electrical equipment, certain parts of these devices are under high voltage. Severe personal injury or significant equipment damage could result from improper behaviour. Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment or in the vicinity of this equipment. These personnel must be familiar with all warnings and service procedures described in this manual, as well as with safety regulations. Prerequisites to proper and safe operation of this product are proper transport, proper storage, setup, installation, operation, and maintenance of the product, as well as careful operation and servicing of the device within the scope of the warnings and instructions of this manual. In particular, the general facility and safety regulations for work with high-voltage equipment (e.g. ANSI, IEC, EN, or other national or international regulations) must be observed. Noncompliance may result in death, injury, or significant equipment damage.

QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
Within the meaning of safety precautions of this manual and the instructions, qualified personnel are those persons who are qualified to set up, install, place into service, and operate this device, and who possess the following qualifications:

q Training and instruction (or other qualification) for switching, grounding, and designating devices and systems. tain safety equipment.

q Training or instruction in accordance with safety standards for care and use of cerq First aid training.

ii

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Preface

Typographic and Graphical Conventions

The following text formats are used to identify concepts giving device information described by the text flow: 3DUDPHWHU QDPHV, or identifiers for configuration or function parameters that appear in the device display or on the screen of a PC (with DIGSI 4) are shown in monoscript (same point size) bold text. This also applies to header bars for selection menus. 3DUDPHWHU FRQGLWLRQV, or possible settings of parameters that appear in the device display or on the screen of a PC (with DIGSI 4), are additionally shown in italic style. This also applies to selection items for selection menus. $QQXQFLDWLRQV, or identifiers for information produced by the device or required by other devices or from the switch-gear is shown in mono-script (same point size) and placed into quotation marks. For diagrams in which the identifier type results from the representation itself, text conventions may differ from the above-mentioned. The following symbols are used in diagrams:
GND Fault

device-internal (logical) input signal


GND Fault

device-internal (logical) output signal internal input signal of an analog quantity external binary input signal with function number F# (binary input, respective annunciation to the device)

UL1L2
F#

>Release
F#

Dev. Trip
Parameter address

external binary output signal with function number F# (annunciation from device)

Qhhrrhr

 AVI8UDPI 2Q 2II


Parameter Conditions

example of a parameter switch designated )81&7,21 with address  and possible conditions 2Q and 2II

Besides these, graphical symbols are used according to IEC 6061712 and IEC 6061713 or similar. Some of the most frequently used are listed below:
Input signal of an analogue quantity
1

OR gate

&
signal inversion

AND gate

=1

ExclusiveOR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one of the inputs is active

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

iii

Preface

Coincidence gate (equivalence): output is active, if both input are active or inactive at the same time Dynamic inputs (edgetriggered) above with positive, below with negative edge Formation of one analogue output signal from a number of analogue input signals (example: 3)

 Du33

Iph>

Limit stage with setting address and parameter designator (name)

 UDu33
T 0

Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable) with setting address and parameter designator (name)

Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)

Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)


Q Q

S R

Static memory (RSflipflop) with setting input (S), resetting input (R), output (Q) and inverted output (Q)

Liability Statement We have checked the text of this manual against the hardware and software described. Exclusions and deviations cannot be ruled out; we accept no liability for lack of total agreement. The information in this manual is checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. We appreciate any suggested improvements. We reserve the right to make technical improvements without notice.

Copyright Copyright Siemens AG 2001. All rights reserved. Dissemination or reproduction of this document, or evaluation and communication of its contents, is not authorized except where expressly permitted. Violations are liable for damages. All rights reserved, particularly for the purposes of patent application or trademark registration. Registered trademarks SIPROTEC, SIMATIC, SIMATIC NET , SINAUT , and SICAM, and DIGSI 4 are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Other designations in this manual may be trademarks that if used by third parties for n their own purposes may violate the rights of the owner.

iv

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Table of Contents
Preface................................................................................................................................................... i

Table of contents ................................................................................................................................. v

Introduction....................................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Overall Operation ................................................................................................................ 1-2 Applications ......................................................................................................................... 1-5 Features .............................................................................................................................. 1-7 Scope of Functions.............................................................................................................. 1-8

Hardware and Connections ............................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 Version of 7SD610 for Panel Flush Mounting / Cubicle Mounting....................................... 2-2 Housing ............................................................................................................................... 2-2 Screw Terminal Connections............................................................................................... 2-5 Connections to Plug-In Terminals ....................................................................................... 2-9 Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces............................................................ 2-12 Connections to Electrical Communication Interfaces ........................................................ 2-14 Version of 7SD610 for Panel Surface Mounting................................................................ 2-15 Housing ............................................................................................................................. 2-15 Screw Terminal Connections............................................................................................. 2-17 Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces............................................................ 2-18 Connections to Electrical Communication Interfaces ........................................................ 2-20

Getting Started.................................................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 Unpacking and Re-packing ................................................................................................. 3-2 Inspections upon Receipt .................................................................................................... 3-3 Inspection of Features and Ratings..................................................................................... 3-3 Electrical Check................................................................................................................... 3-3

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Table of Contents

3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2

User Interface ...................................................................................................................... 3-4 Operation Using the Operator Control Panel....................................................................... 3-4 Operation Using DIGSI 4................................................................................................... 3-7

SIPROTEC 4 Devices....................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15 General ................................................................................................................................ 4-2 Protection and Control ......................................................................................................... 4-2 Communication.................................................................................................................... 4-3 Settings................................................................................................................................ 4-4 Operations ........................................................................................................................... 4-4 Oscillographic Fault Records............................................................................................... 4-4 Operator Control Facilities ................................................................................................... 4-5 Operator Control Panel On Device ...................................................................................... 4-5 DIGSI 4 Tool...................................................................................................................... 4-7 Information Retrieval............................................................................................................ 4-8 Annunciations ...................................................................................................................... 4-9 Measurements ................................................................................................................... 4-11 Oscillographic Fault Records............................................................................................. 4-12 Control ............................................................................................................................... 4-14 Manual Overwrite / Tagging............................................................................................... 4-16 General about the Setting Procedures .............................................................................. 4-17 Configuration of the Scope of Device Functions................................................................ 4-20 Configuration of Inputs and Outputs (Configuration Matrix) .............................................. 4-21 Programmable Logic CFC ................................................................................................. 4-24 Power System Data ........................................................................................................... 4-26 Setting Groups................................................................................................................... 4-27 General Device Settings .................................................................................................... 4-29 Time Synchronization ........................................................................................................ 4-30 Serial Interfaces................................................................................................................. 4-31 Passwords ......................................................................................................................... 4-33

Configuration .................................................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1 5.1.1 Configuration of the Scope of Functions.............................................................................. 5-2 Setting Overview.................................................................................................................. 5-4

vi

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Table of Contents

5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.3 5.4 5.5

Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands....................................... 5-6 Preparation .......................................................................................................................... 5-6 Structure and Operation of the Configuration Matrix ......................................................... 5-10 Establishing Information Properties................................................................................... 5-13 Performing Configuration................................................................................................... 5-19 Transferring Metering Values ............................................................................................ 5-24 Settings for Contact Chatter Blocking................................................................................ 5-25 Creating User Defined Functions with CFC....................................................................... 5-27 Serial Interfaces ................................................................................................................ 5-36 Date and Time Stamping................................................................................................... 5-40

Functions........................................................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1 6.1.1 6.1.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.2.1 6.1.2.2 6.1.3 6.1.3.1 6.1.3.2 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 General................................................................................................................................ 6-2 Power System Data 1.......................................................................................................... 6-7 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................... 6-12 Setting Groups .................................................................................................................. 6-13 Setting Overview .............................................................................................................. 6-15 Information Overview ........................................................................................................ 6-15 General Protection Data .................................................................................................... 6-15 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................... 6-20 Information Overview ........................................................................................................ 6-21 Differential Protection ........................................................................................................ 6-23 Function Description.......................................................................................................... 6-23 Setting the Function Parameters ....................................................................................... 6-31 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................... 6-34 Information Overview......................................................................................................... 6-34 Breaker Intertrip and Remote Tripping .............................................................................. 6-36 Function Description.......................................................................................................... 6-36 Setting the Function Parameters ....................................................................................... 6-37 Setting Overview .............................................................................................................. 6-38 Information Overview ........................................................................................................ 6-39 Protection Data Interfaces and Differential Protection Topology....................................... 6-40 Function Description.......................................................................................................... 6-40 Setting the Function Parameters ....................................................................................... 6-42 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................... 6-45 Information Overview......................................................................................................... 6-46

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

vii

Table of Contents

6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.6 6.6.1 6.7 6.7.1 6.7.2 6.7.3 6.7.4 6.8 6.8.1 6.8.2 6.8.3 6.8.4 6.9 6.9.1 6.9.2 6.9.3 6.9.4 6.10 6.10.1 6.10.2 6.10.3 6.10.4 6.11 6.11.1 6.11.2 6.11.3 6.11.4 6.12 6.12.1 6.12.1.1 6.12.1.2 6.12.1.3 6.12.1.4 6.12.1.5 6.12.1.6

Direct Local Trip................................................................................................................. 6-47 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 6-47 Setting the Function Parameters ....................................................................................... 6-47 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................... 6-48 Information Overview ........................................................................................................ 6-48 Direct Remote Trip or Transmission of Binary Information................................................ 6-49 Information Overview ........................................................................................................ 6-49 Instantaneous High-speed SOTF Protection ..................................................................... 6-50 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 6-50 Setting the Function Parameters ....................................................................................... 6-51 Setting Overview................................................................................................................ 6-53 Information Overview ........................................................................................................ 6-53 Time Overcurrent Protection.............................................................................................. 6-54 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 6-54 Setting the Function Parameters ....................................................................................... 6-60 Setting Overview................................................................................................................ 6-66 Information Overview ........................................................................................................ 6-68 Automatic Reclosure Function........................................................................................... 6-69 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 6-70 Setting the Function Parameters ....................................................................................... 6-82 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................... 6-88 Information Overview......................................................................................................... 6-91 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection...................................................................................... 6-95 Method of Operation .......................................................................................................... 6-95 Applying the Function Parameter Settings ...................................................................... 6-106 Setting Overview.............................................................................................................. 6-109 Information Overview ...................................................................................................... 6-110 Thermal Overload Protection........................................................................................... 6-111 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 6-111 Setting the Function Parameters ..................................................................................... 6-112 Setting Overview.............................................................................................................. 6-114 Information Overview ...................................................................................................... 6-114 Monitoring functions......................................................................................................... 6-115 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 6-115 Hardware Monitoring ....................................................................................................... 6-115 Software Monitoring......................................................................................................... 6-117 Monitoring of External Transformer Circuits .................................................................... 6-117 Trip Circuit Supervision.................................................................................................... 6-119 Fault Reactions................................................................................................................ 6-121 Group Alarms................................................................................................................... 6-123

viii

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Table of Contents

6.12.2 6.12.3 6.12.4 6.13 6.13.1 6.13.2 6.13.3 6.13.4 6.13.5 6.13.6 6.13.7 6.13.8 6.14 6.14.1 6.14.2 6.14.3 6.15 6.15.1 6.15.2 6.15.3 6.15.4 6.15.5 6.15.6 6.16 6.16.1 6.16.2

Setting the Function Parameters ..................................................................................... 6-123 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................. 6-124 Information Overview....................................................................................................... 6-125 Function Control .............................................................................................................. 6-127 Switch-in Recognition ...................................................................................................... 6-127 Recognition of the Circuit Breaker Status........................................................................ 6-128 Fault Detection Logic of the Entire Device ...................................................................... 6-131 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device.................................................................................. 6-132 Circuit Breaker Test......................................................................................................... 6-136 Setting the function parameters....................................................................................... 6-137 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................. 6-138 Information Overview....................................................................................................... 6-138 Commissioning Tools ...................................................................................................... 6-139 Function Description........................................................................................................ 6-139 Setting Parameters.......................................................................................................... 6-139 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................ 6-140 Ancillary Functions .......................................................................................................... 6-141 Processing of Messages ................................................................................................. 6-141 Measurement during Operation....................................................................................... 6-142 Fault Recording ............................................................................................................... 6-145 Setting the Function Parameters ..................................................................................... 6-146 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................ 6-147 Information Overview ...................................................................................................... 6-147 Processing of Commands ............................................................................................... 6-148 Types of Commands ....................................................................................................... 6-148 Steps in the Command Sequence................................................................................... 6-149

6.16.3 Interlocking ...................................................................................................................... 6-150 6.16.3.1 Interlocked/Non-Interlocked Switching ............................................................................ 6-150 6.16.4 6.16.5 Recording and Acknowledgement of Commands ........................................................... 6-153 Information Overview ...................................................................................................... 6-154

Control During Operation ................................................................................................................ 7-1 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.1.1 7.1.1.2 7.1.1.3 7.1.1.4 7.1.1.5 7.1.1.6 Read-out of Information....................................................................................................... 7-2 Messages ............................................................................................................................ 7-2 Output of Messages ............................................................................................................ 7-2 Event Log (Operating Messages)........................................................................................ 7-5 Trip Log (Fault Messages)................................................................................................... 7-6 Saving and Erasing the Messages ...................................................................................... 7-9 General Interrogation ........................................................................................................ 7-10 Spontaneous Messages .................................................................................................... 7-11

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

ix

Table of Contents

7.1.2 7.1.2.1 7.1.2.2 7.1.3 7.1.3.1 7.1.3.2 7.1.3.3 7.1.3.4 7.1.4 7.1.4.1 7.1.4.2 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.3 7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 7.4.5 7.4.6 7.4.7 7.4.8 7.4.9

Switching Statistics ............................................................................................................ 7-11 Viewing the Switching Statistics ........................................................................................ 7-12 Resetting and Setting the Switching Statistics................................................................... 7-13 Measured Values............................................................................................................... 7-14 Measured Values............................................................................................................... 7-14 Illustrating Measured Values ............................................................................................. 7-19 Setting and Retrieval of User Defined Set-points .............................................................. 7-23 Retrieval and Resetting of User Defined Pulse Metered Values (PMV) ............................ 7-24 Fault Records .................................................................................................................... 7-25 Viewing Fault Records....................................................................................................... 7-26 Saving the Fault Records .................................................................................................. 7-27 Control of Device Functions............................................................................................... 7-28 Read and Set Date and Time ............................................................................................ 7-28 Changeover of Setting Groups .......................................................................................... 7-33 Test Messages to the System (SCADA) Interface during Test Operation......................... 7-36 Changeover of Operating Mode ........................................................................................ 7-38 Circuit Breaker Test Function ............................................................................................ 7-41 Control of Switchgear ........................................................................................................ 7-45 Display Equipment Position and Control ........................................................................... 7-46 Manual Overwriting............................................................................................................ 7-49 Set Status .......................................................................................................................... 7-50 Interlocking ........................................................................................................................ 7-52 Tagging.............................................................................................................................. 7-53 Switching Authority ............................................................................................................ 7-54 Switching Mode ................................................................................................................. 7-55 Control Messages.............................................................................................................. 7-56 Other Commands .............................................................................................................. 7-56

Installation and Commissioning...................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.3.1 8.1.3.2 8.1.3.3 8.1.3.4 8.1.3.5 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 Mounting and Connections .................................................................................................. 8-2 Installation ........................................................................................................................... 8-2 Termination variants ............................................................................................................ 8-5 Hardware Modifications ....................................................................................................... 8-9 General ................................................................................................................................ 8-9 Disassembling the Device ................................................................................................. 8-10 Jumper Settings on Printed Circuit Boards........................................................................ 8-12 Interface Modules .............................................................................................................. 8-17 To Reassemble the Device................................................................................................ 8-19 Checking the Connections................................................................................................. 8-20 Data Connections .............................................................................................................. 8-20 Checking the Differential Protection Communication ........................................................ 8-22 Checking Power Plant Connections .................................................................................. 8-22

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Table of Contents

8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6 8.3.7 8.3.8 8.3.9 8.3.10 8.3.11 8.4

Commissioning .................................................................................................................. 8-25 Testing mode and transmission blocking .......................................................................... 8-26 Checking the System (SCADA) Interface.......................................................................... 8-26 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs ........................................................................... 8-28 Checking for Breaker Failure Protection............................................................................ 8-30 Checking the Communication Topology............................................................................ 8-32 Checking the Instrument Transformer Connections of One Line End ............................... 8-37 Checking the Instrument Transformer Connections of Both Line Ends............................. 8-38 Remote Tripping, Remote Signalling etc. .......................................................................... 8-46 Testing User Defined Functions ........................................................................................ 8-47 Trip and Close Test with the Circuit Breaker ..................................................................... 8-47 Stability Check and Triggering Oscillographic Recordings................................................ 8-47 Final Preparation of the Device ......................................................................................... 8-49

Maintenance and Fault Tracing ....................................................................................................... 9-1 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.4 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.6 General................................................................................................................................ 9-2 Routine Checks ................................................................................................................... 9-3 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 9-4 Replacing the Buffer Battery................................................................................................ 9-4 Replacing Interface Modules ............................................................................................... 9-6 Fault Tracing ....................................................................................................................... 9-7 Corrective Action/Repairs ................................................................................................... 9-9 Software Procedures ........................................................................................................... 9-9 Hardware Procedures.......................................................................................................... 9-9 Return................................................................................................................................ 9-13

10

Technical Data ................................................................................................................................ 10-1 10.1 10.1.1 10.1.2 10.1.3 10.1.4 10.1.5 10.1.6 10.1.7 10.1.8 10.1.9 10.2 General Device Data ......................................................................................................... 10-2 Analog Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................ 10-2 Power Supply .................................................................................................................... 10-2 Binary Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................. 10-3 Communications Interfaces ............................................................................................... 10-4 Electrical Tests .................................................................................................................. 10-6 Mechanical Stress Tests ................................................................................................... 10-7 Climatic Stress Tests......................................................................................................... 10-8 Service Conditions............................................................................................................. 10-9 Construction ...................................................................................................................... 10-9 Differential Protection ...................................................................................................... 10-10

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

xi

Table of Contents

10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 10.10 10.11 10.12 10.13

Intertripping, External Direct Local and Remote Tripping ................................................ 10-12 Direct Remote Trip or Transmission of Binary Information (optional).............................. 10-12 Protection Data Interface and Differential Protection Topology....................................... 10-13 Time Overcurrent Protection............................................................................................ 10-14 High-Current Switch-on-to-Fault Protection..................................................................... 10-19 Automatic Reclosure Function (optional)......................................................................... 10-19 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (optional).................................................................... 10-20 Thermal Overload Protection........................................................................................... 10-21 Monitoring Functions ....................................................................................................... 10-23 Supplementary Functions ................................................................................................ 10-24 Dimensions ...................................................................................................................... 10-26

Appendix........................................................................................................................................... A-1 A.1 A.1.1 A.2 A.2.1 A.2.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 A.7 Ordering Information and Accessories ...............................................................................A-2 Accessories .........................................................................................................................A-4 General Diagrams................................................................................................................A-6 Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Mounting .........................................................................A-6 Panel Surface Mounting ......................................................................................................A-7 Connection Examples..........................................................................................................A-8 Preset Configurations ........................................................................................................A-10 Protocol Dependent Functions ..........................................................................................A-12 List of Settings ...................................................................................................................A-13 List of Information .............................................................................................................A-24

Index............................................................................................................................................Index-1

xii

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Introduction

1
The SIPROTEC 4 devices 7SD610 are introduced in this chapter. An overview of the devices is presented in their application, characteristics, and scope of functions. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Overall Operation Applications Features Scope of Functions 1-2 1-5 1-7 1-8

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

1-1

Introduction

1.1

Overall Operation
The numerical differential protection SIPROTEC 7SD610 is equipped with a powerful 32 Bit microprocessor. This provides fully numerical processing of all functions in the device, from the acquisition of the measured values up to the output of commands to the circuit breakers as well as the exchange of measured data with the other end of the protected area. Figure 1-1 shows the basic structure of the device.

Analogue Inputs

The measuring inputs MI transform the currents and voltages derived from the instrument transformers and match them to the internal signal levels for processing in the device. The device has 4 current and 4 voltage inputs. Three current inputs are pro-

MI
IL1 IL2 IL3 I4

IA

AD

OA
ERROR RUN

Output Relays userprogrammable

UL1 UL2 UL3 U4

LEDs on the front panel, userprogrammable

Display on the Front Panel Front Serial Operating Interface

to PC radio clock PC/ modem to SCADA remote end

Operator control panel


(6&

(17(5

7 4 1 .

8 5 2 0

9 6 3 +/-

Time Synchronization Rear Serial Service Interface

Binary inputs, programmable Serial System Interface

PS
Uaux
Power supply Protection Data Interface 1

Figure 1-1

Hardware structure of the numerical device 7SD610

1-2

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Overall Operation

vided for measurement of the phase currents, a further measuring input (I4) may be used for the earth current (current transformer starpoint or a separate earth current transformer). A voltage measuring input is provided for each phaseearth voltage. In principle, the differential protection does not require measured voltages. However, voltages that allow to measure voltages and powers and voltages that enable the user to measure the line voltage also for automatic reclosure can be switched to the device. A further voltage input (U4) may optionally be used to measure the displacement voltage (envoltage). The analogue signals are then routed to the input amplifier group IA. The input amplifier group IA ensures that there is high impedance termination for the measured signals and contains filters which are optimized in terms of band-width and speed with regard to the signal processing. The analogue/digital converter group AD has a multiplexer, analogue/digital converters and memory modules for the data transfer to the microcomputer C. Microcomputer System Apart from processing the measured values, the microcomputer system also executes the actual protection and control functions. In particular, the following are included: Filtering and conditioning of the measured signals, Continuous supervision of the measured signals, Supervision of pickup conditions of each protection function, Formation of the local differential protection values (phasor analysis and charge computation) and creation of the transmission protocol, Decoding of the received transmission protocol, synchronism of differential protection values and summing up of the differential currents and charges, Monitoring of the communication with the device of the opposite end, Interrogation of threshold values and time sequences, Processing of signals for the logic functions, Reaching trip and close command decisions, Storage of fault messages, fault annunciations as well as fault recording data for system fault analysis, Operating system and related function management such as e.g. data storage, real time clock, communication, interfaces etc., The information is provided via output amplifier OA. Binary Inputs and Outputs The microcomputer system obtains external information through the binary inputs such as remote resetting or blocking commands for protective elements. The C issues information to external equipment via the output contacts. These outputs include, in particular, trip commands to the circuit breakers and signals for remote annunciation of important event and conditions. Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and a display screen (LCD) on the front panel provide information such as targets, measured values, messages related to events or faults, status, and functional status of the 7SD610.

Front Elements

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

1-3

Introduction

Integrated control and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD facilitate local interaction with the 7SD610. All information of the device can be accessed using the integrated control and numeric keys. The information includes protective and control settings, operating and fault messages, and measured values (see also Chapter 7). The settings can be modified as are discussed in Chapter 6. If the device incorporates switchgear control functions, the control of circuit breakers and other equipment is possible from the 7SD610 front panel. Serial Interfaces A serial operating interface on the front panel is provided for local communications with the 7SD610 through a personal computer. Convenient operation of all functions of the device is possible using the SIPROTEC 4 operating program DIGSI 4. A separate serial service interface is provided for remote communications via a modem, or local communications via a substation master computer that is permanently connected to the 7SD610. DIGSI 4 is required. All 7SD610 data can be transferred to a central master or main control system through the serial system (SCADA) interface. Various protocols and physical arrangements are available for this interface to suit the particular application. Another interface is provided for the time synchronization of the internal clock via external synchronization sources. Protection Data Interface Via additional interface modules further communication protocols may be created. The operating and service interface allows the communication from one PC with both devices at the line ends during commissioning, checking and also during operation of the device, using a standard browser. There is a range of PC-tools supporting this function (e.g. IBS-tool) which have been optimized with regard to the differential protection system.

The protection data interfaces are a particular case. Via these interfaces the measured value data of each end of the protected object is transmitted to the other end; during this procedure measured values from the other end may also be added. Further information such as closing the local circuit breaker, pickup of the inrush stabilization as well as other external trip commands or binary information can be transmitted to other end via the protection data interfaces. The 7SD610 can be supplied with any of the common power supply voltages. Transient dips of the supply voltage which may occur during short-circuit in the power supply system, are bridged by a capacitor (see Technical Data, Sub-section 10.1.2).

Power Supply

1-4

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Applications

1.2

Applications
The numerical Differential Protection SIPROTEC 7SD610 functions as a selective short-circuit protection for overhead lines and cables with single- and multi-ended infeeds in radial, ring or any type of meshed systems of any transmission level. Dealing with the system star-point is irrelevant, as measuring data are compared separately for each phase. High sensitivity and the inrush current stabilization allow for the application of the 7SD610 even when there is a power transformer within the protected range whose star point(s) might also be isolated, earthed or provided with a Petersen coil (option). A major advantage of the differential protection function is the instantaneous tripping in the event of a short circuit at any point in the entire protected zone. The current transformers limit the protected zone at the ends towards the line. This rigid limit is the reason why the differential protection scheme shows such an ideal selectivity. The differential protection system requires a 7SD610 device as well as a set of current transformers at either end of the protected zone. Voltage transformers are not required, they can, however, be connected for the purpose of detecting and indicating measured values (voltages, power, power factor). The devices located at the ends of the protected zone exchange measuring information via protection data interfaces using dedicated communication links (usually fibre optic cables) or a communication network. Two type 7SD610 devices can be used for an object with two ends to be protected: cables, overhead line or both, with or without unit-connected transformer (option). A fault-free data transfer being the prerequisite for the proper operation of the protective system, it is continuously monitored internally.

Protective Functions

Recognition of short circuits in the protection zone even of weak-current or highresistive shorting is the basic function of the device. Also complex multiphase faults are precisely detected, as the measured values are evaluated phase segregated. The protection system is stabilized against inrush currents of power transformers. When switching onto a fault on the entire line, an undelayed trip signal can be emitted. In the event of a communication failure, the devices can automatically be switched to emergency operation using an integrated overcurrent time protection until communication is healthy again. This overcurrent time protection has three definite-time overcurrent stages and one inverse-time (IDMT) stage; a series of characteristics according to various standards is available for the inverse-time stage. Alternatively, the overcurrent time protection can be used as a back-up overcurrent time protection, i.e. it operates independent of and parallel to the differential protection at either end. The communication link can be used for transmitting further information. Apart from measured values, binary commands or other information can be transmitted (option). Depending on the version ordered, the short-circuit protection may also trip singlepole. It may work in co-operation with an integrated automatic reclosure (available as an option) with which single-pole, three-pole or single- and three-pole rapid automatic reclosure as well as multi-shot automatic reclosure are possible on overhead lines. Apart from the short-circuit protection functions mentioned, a thermal overload protection has been integrated which protects in particular cables and power transformers from undue heating through overload. An optional circuit breaker failure protection

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

1-5

Introduction

provides rapid back-up fault clearance instruction to the adjacent circuit breakers in case the local breaker fails to respond. Messages and Measured Values; Storage of Data for Fault Recordings A series of operating messages provides information about conditions in the power system and the 7SD610 itself. Measurement quantities and values that are calculated can be displayed locally and communicated via the serial interfaces. Messages of the 7SD610 can be indicated by a number of programmable LEDs on the front panel, externally processed through programmable output contacts, and communicated via the serial interfaces (see Communication below). With the help of the CFC graphic tool (Continous Function Chart), user-defined annunciations and logical combinations of internal or external signals can also be generated. During a system fault important events and status changes are saved in fault event records. The instantaneous quantities of the fault values are also recorded in the devices themselves, synchronized in the devices and are then available for fault analysis. Communication Serial interfaces are available for communications with PCs, RTUs and SCADA systems. A 9-pin D-subminiature female connector on the front panel is used for local communications with a personal computer. DIGSI 4 software is required to communicate via this port. Using the DIGSI 4 software, settings and configuration can be made to the relay, Real-time operating quantities can be viewed, Waveform capture and Event Log records can be displayed, and controls can be issued. A DIGSI 4 service interface port, a system (SCADA) port and a time-sync port (IRIGB or DCF77) are optionally available on the rear of the device. A rear service interface can be supplied as RS-232, RS-485, or multimode fibre optics type ST. DIGSI 4 software is required to communicate via this port. A rear system interface can be supplied as RS-232, RS-485, or multimode fibre optics type ST for communications between the 7SD610 and a PCs, RTUs or SCADA systems Standard Protocols, IEC 60870-5-103 are available via the system port. Integration of the devices into the automation systems SINAUT LSA and SICAM also take place with this profile. Alternatively, the device can be interrogated remotely or locally by means of a standard browser. A further port provides the communication between the devices at the ends of the protected object. This protection data interface has been mentioned above with the Protective Functions.

1-6

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Features

1.3

Features
Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system. Complete digital processing of measured values and control, from the sampling of the analogue input values, the processing and organization of the communication between devices up to the closing and tripping commands to the circuit breakers. Complete galvanic and reliable separation between the internal processing circuits of the 7SD610 and the external measurement, control, and DC supply circuits because of the design of the analogue input transducers, binary inputs and outputs, and the DC/DC or AC/DC converters. Differential protection system with 2 ends with digital protection data transmission. Permanent supervision of the protection data transmission concerning disturbance, failure, and transfer time deviation in the transmission network, with automatic transfer time correction. Independent of the method of system starpoint earthing. Suited for transformers in the protected area (optional). Detection of high-resistant current-weak faults due to high sensitivity. Additional functions can be ordered according to requirements. Continuous calculation and display of measured quantities on the front of the device. Indication of measured quantities of the remote line end. Integrated help tools for operation and commissioning can be visualized by means of a standard browser. Simple device operation using the integrated operator panel or by means of a connected personal computer running DIGSI 4. Storage of operational data, fault data, and oscillographic fault records with SER information to be used for analysis and troubleshooting. Communication with central control and data storage equipment via serial interfaces through the choice of data cable, modem, or optical fibres, as an option. Continuous monitoring of the measurement quantities, as well as self-diagnostics covering the hardware and software.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

1-7

Introduction

1.4

Scope of Functions
The numerical differential protection relay SIPROTEC 7SD610 has the following functions:

Differential Protection

protection for all types of short-circuits in systems with any starpoint conditioning; reliable distinction between load and short-circuit conditions, also on high-resistant, current-weak faults; high sensitivity during of a weak load condition, extreme stability against load jumps and power swings; due to phase segregated measurement the pickup sensitivity is independent of the type of fault; insensitive measurement against in-rush and charge currents also for transformers in the protected area and against higher-frequency switching transients; high stability also for different current transformer saturation; adaptive stabilization that is automatically derived from the measured values and the configured current transformer data; low dependence on frequency due to frequency tracking; communication between devices via dedicated communication connections (in general optical fibre) or a communication system; communication possible via ISDN-networks or two-wire telephone connections (up to approx 8 km or 4.8 miles); fast phase segregated tripping also on weak or zero infeed ends; steady monitoring of the communication ways and the signal propagation delay with automatic re-adjustment; phase segregated tripping (in conjunction with single-pole or single- and three-pole auto-reclosure) is possible (order option).

External Direct and Remote Tripping

tripping of the local end by an external device via binary input; tripping of the remote end by internal protection functions or an external device via binary input. transmission of measured values from both ends of the protected object; transmission of up to 4 fast commands or binary signals to the remote end (order option). selectable as emergency function for communication failure or as back-up function or as both; up to a maximum of three definite time stages (DT) and one inverse time stage (IDMT), each for phase currents and earth current; for IDMT protection a selection from various characteristics based on several standards is possible;

Transmission of Information

Time Delayed Overcurrent Protection

1-8

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Scope of Functions
blocking options e.g. for reverse interlocking with any stage; non-delayed tripping with any stage when switching on to a fault is possible. High-Speed Switchonto-Fault Protection fast tripping for all faults on total line length; selectable for manual closure or following each closure of the circuit breaker; with integrated line energization detection. for reclosure after single-pole, three-pole or single and three-pole tripping; single or multiple shot reclosure (up to 8 reclosure attempts); with separate action times for every reclosure attempt, optionally without action times; with separate dead times after single-pole and three-pole tripping, separate for the first four reclosure attempts; with the option of an adaptive dead time: in this case only one device controls the automatic reclosure cycles while at the other end the automatic reclosure solely depends on the one controlling device; the following criteria may apply: voltage measurement and/or close command transmission (Remote close); automatic reclosure controlled optionally by protection start with separate dead times after single, two and three-pole starting. Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (optional) with independent current detectors for monitoring of current flow through each individual circuit breaker pole; with independent delay timers for single-pole trip and three-pole trip; initiation by each of the internal trip functions; initiation by external trip functions possible via binary inputs; single-stage or two-stage delay; short reset and overshoot times. Thermal Overload Protection provides thermal replica of the current heat losses of the protected object; true r.m.s. measurement of all three conductor currents; adjustable thermal and current-dependent warning stages. User Defined Logic Functions freely programmable linkage between internal and external signals for the implementation of user defined logic functions; all common logic functions; time delays and measured value set point interrogation. Commissioning; Operation indication of the local and remote measured values, amplitudes and phase relation; indication of the calculated differential and restraint currents, indication of the characteristic values of the communication connection, as transfer delay times and availability.

Automatic Reclosure (optional)

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

1-9

Introduction
monitoring of the internal measuring circuits, the auxiliary voltage supply, as well as the hard- and software, resulting in increased reliability; monitoring of the current and voltage transformer secondary circuits by means of summation and symmetry checks; monitoring of communication with a statistic showing the availability of transmission telegrams; check of the consistency of protection settings at both line ends: no processor system start-up with inconsistent settings which could lead to a malfunction of the differential protection system; trip circuit supervision is possible; check of local and remote measured values and comparison of both; broken wire supervision for the secondary CT circuits with fast phase segregated blocking of the differential protection system in order to avoid malfunction. Further Functions battery buffered real time clock, which may be sychronized via a synchronization signal (e.g. DCF77, IRIG B via satellite receiver), binary input or system interface; automatic time synchronization between the devices at the ends of the protected object via the protection data transmission; fault event memory for the last 8 network faults (faults in the power system), with real time stamps (ms-resolution); fault recording memory and data transfer for analogue and user configurable binary signal traces with a maximum time range of 15 s, synchronized between the devices of the differential protection system; switching statistics: counter with the trip commands issued by the device, as well as record of the short-circuit current and accumulation of the interrupted short-circuit currents; commissioning aids such as connection and direction checks as well as interface check and circuit breaker test functions; the IBS-tool (installed on a PC or a laptop) widely supports the testing and commissioning procedure: the communication topology of the differential protection and communication system, phasor diagrams of all currents and (if applicable) voltages at both ends of the differential protection system are displayed as a graph. n

Monitoring Functions

1-10

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Hardware and Connections

This chapter describes the construction and connection of the 7SD610. The different housing versions and available termination techniques are described. The recommended and permitted data for the wiring is stated and suitable accessories and tools are given.

2.1 2.2

Version of 7SD610 for Panel Flush Mounting / Cubicle Mounting Version of 7SD610 for Panel Surface Mounting

2-2 2-15

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

2-1

Hardware and Connections

2.1

Version of 7SD610 for Panel Flush Mounting / Cubicle Mounting


The numerical differential protection SIPROTEC 7SD610 for panel and cubicle flush mounting is enclosed in a 7XP20 housing, size 1/3 (of 19 inch). It can be used for rack mounting either. Each device version offers different ways of connection.

2.1.1

Housing
The housing consists of a rectangular tube with a rear plate specific to the device version and a front cover. Guide rail mats are mounted at the top and bottom on the inside of the tube, to guide the modules during insertion. The connection between the modules and to the front cover is by means of flat ribbon cables and the corresponding plug connectors. The rear plate screwed to the tube contains the required connectors for the external connections to the device. The front cover can be detached after removal of the covering caps located on the 4 corners of the front cover and the 4 screws that are then revealed. The front cover has a membrane keypad containing the control and indication elements required for the user interface with the device. All terminations to the control and indication elements are combined by a converter module on the front cover, and routed to the processor module (CPU) via a plug connector. The name plate containing the principal data of the device, such as auxiliary supply voltage, the rated test voltage and the ordering code (MLFB) is located on the external top of the housing and on the inside of the front cover. The mechanical dimension drawings can be found in Section 10.13.

Front View

11) 10)
SIEMENS
RUN

11)
SIPROTEC
ERROR

7SD610

H6DIH@IV # 6pvhv Hrhrr!

1) 2)

MENU

3)

9)

8)

4)
LED ESC ENTER

Meldungen

F1 F2 F3 F4

7 4 1

8 5 2 0

9 6 3 +/-

7)

Messwerte Strfallmeldung

5) 6) 11)

11)
Figure 2-1

Front view of a 7SD610 for panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting

2-2

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Version of 7SD610 for Panel Flush Mounting / Cubicle Mounting

Referring to the operating and display elements in Figure 2-1: 1. Display (LCD) The LCD shows process and device information as text in various lists. Commonly displayed information includes measured values, counter values, binary information regarding the condition of circuit breakers, status of the device, protection information, general reports, and alarms. 2. Navigation keys These keys serve for navigation through operating menus. 3. MENU key This key activates the main menu. 4. ESC and ENTER keys These keys serve to escape from specific menues or execute changes (such as setting changes). 5. Numerical keys These keys serve for entry of numerical values, such as limit value settings. 6. Function keys Four function keys allow the quick and simple execution of frequently used actions. Typical applications include, for example, jumping to a particular position in the menu tree such as the fault data in the Trip Log or the measured values. The function keys are programmable, and may be used to execute control functions such as closing or tripping circuit breakers. Next to the keypad, a labelling strip is provided on which the user-specified key functions may be written. 7. 9-pin female D-subminiature connector This serial interface is for the connection of a local PC running DIGSI 4. 8. LED key This key has the dual purpose of resetting latched LEDs and the latched contacts of output relays, as well as testing of the LEDs. 9. Light emitting diodes (LEDs) The function of these indicators can be programmed. There is a vast selection of signals from which to choose. Some examples are device status, process or control information, and binary input or output status. Next to the LEDs on the front cover, a labelling strip is provided on which the user-specified LED functions may be written. 10. Operating condition indicators The two LEDs RUN (green) and ERROR (red) indicate the operating condition of the device. 11. Covering caps for the screws that secure the front cover.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

2-3

Hardware and Connections

Rear View

Figure 2-2 is a simplified view of the rear panel of the version of the device with screwtype terminals.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

UH 4 6

UH +
3 5

7 8 9 10 11 12

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

1 2 3

D
Ch1

Ch2

Q 4
5 6 7 8

RS232-LWL RS232 RS485

Figure 2-2

Rear view of a 7SD610, (terminal arrangement example only)

2-4

P-Slave AME

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Version of 7SD610 for Panel Flush Mounting / Cubicle Mounting

2.1.2

Screw Terminal Connections


The following must be distinguished in the case of connection via screw terminals: terminal plugs for voltage connections and terminal plugs for current connections. The terminal screws have a slot head for tightening or loosening with a flat screw driver, sized 6 x 1 mm.

Terminal Blocks for Voltage Connections

The voltage connection terminal modules are available in 2 variants (Figure 2-3).

2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 18 17 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

18 terminal Figure 2-3

12 terminal

Connection plug module with screw terminals for voltage connections rear view

Figure 2-4 shows an example of the allocation of an individual screw terminals to their terminal numbers.

connection terminal 1
1

connection terminal 2 Figure 2-4

Allocation of screw terminal to terminal number example

Terminal Block for Current Connections

There is one version of a terminal block for current connections to a 7SD610. The terminal block is illustrated in Figure 2-5.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

2-5

Hardware and Connections

8 terminal Figure 2-5 Terminal block of screw terminals for current connections rear view

The relation between the terminals and their terminal numbers is the same for the current terminals as shown in Figure 2-4. The available poles are arranged into pole pairs, each containing two poles. In this manner, the two neighbouring terminals form one pair. Accordingly the current terminal module with 8 poles contains 4 pairs. In combination with the plug connection on the module side, these terminal pairs have an integrated short-circuiting function which short-circuits the two neighbouring current passages when the module is withdrawn. If the current transformer secondary circuits should become open circuited, large voltages can arise, which may endanger operating personnel and the insulation of the CTs. When the module is inserted, the current paths have a low impedance termination via the measuring inputs on the module. During insertion of the module, the short-circuit of the current path is automatically removed. The interruption of the short-circuit only occurs once a reliable contact to the plug connector on the module is established. This does not reduce the care that must be taken when working on the current transformer secondary circuits! The short-circuiting contacts of the current terminals are located on the housing side, inside the terminal module connector, while the operating pins are located on the module side of the plug connector. Connections to Voltage Terminals Ring-type and fork-type lugs may be used. To ensure that the insulation paths are maintained, insulated lugs must be used. Alternatively, the crimping area must be insulated with other methods, e.g. by covering with a shrink sleeve. The following must be observed: Connections with cable lugs: inner diameter of lugs, 4 mm; maximum outer diameter of lugs, 10 mm; conductor with cross-section of 1 mm2 to 2.6 mm2 (AWG 16 to 14). Use copper wires only! Cable lugs of series PIDG from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP are recommended, e.g. Ring cable lug: PIDG PN 3205650 Forc lug: PIDG PN 3212330. Direct cable connections: solid or stranded conductor with connector sleeve; conductor with cross-section of 0.5 mm2 to 2.6 mm2 (AWG 20 to 14).

2-6

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Version of 7SD610 for Panel Flush Mounting / Cubicle Mounting

When using one single conductor, the conductor end must be inserted such that it will be drawn into the contact cavity while tightening the screw. Use copper wires only! Wire strip length: solid conductor 9 to 10 mm (0.35 to 0.39 in). Maximum tightening torque: 1.8 Nm (16 in-lb). Connections to Current Terminals Ring-type and fork-type lugs may be used. To ensure that the insulation paths are maintained, insulated lugs must be used. Alternatively, the crimping area must be insulated with other methods, e.g. by covering with a shrink sleeve. The following must be observed: Connections with cable lugs: inner diameter of lugs, 5 mm; maximum outer diameter of lugs, 12 mm; conductor with cross-section of 2.6 mm2 to 6.6 mm2 (AWG 14 to 10). Use copper wires only! Cable lugs of series PIDG from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP are recommended, e.g. Ring cable lug: PIDG PN 1301710 Forc lug: PIDG PN 3268650 Direct cable connections: solid or stranded conductor with connector sleeve; conductor with cross-section of 2.6 mm2 to 3.3 mm2 (AWG 14 to 12). When using one single conductor, the conductor end must be inserted such that it will be drawn into the contact cavity while tightening the screw. Use copper wires only! Wire strip length: solid conductor 10 to 11 mm (0.39 to 0.43 in). Maximum tightening torque: 2.7 Nm (24 in-lb). Short-Circuit Links Short-circuit links are available for convenience in making terminal connections. The short-circuit links can connect two neighbouring terminals located on the same side of the terminal module. By connecting further links, neighbouring terminals can be included in the short-circuit. On each terminal it is possible to connect two shotcircuiting links, or one short-circuit link and one lug, or one individual conductor. The links meet the safety requirements for protection against electric shock. There are two types of links, one for voltage connections and one for current connections. The links are illustrated in Figure 2-6. Ordering information for the links is provided in Section A.1 in the Appendix.

Short-circuit links for voltage connections Figure 2-6

Short-circuit links for current connections

Short-circuit links for voltage connections and current connections

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

2-7

Hardware and Connections

Covering Caps

Terminal covering caps are available for the screw terminal modules, to increase the protection of personnel against hazardous voltages (degree of protection against access to dangerous parts) on the terminal modules. The degree of protection is increased from the standard back of the hand protection (IP1x) to finger protection (IP2x). The terminal covering caps provide an enclosure which securely covers all voltage carrying components. They are simply snapped onto the terminal module. It must be noted that all screws on the terminal module must be screws in before snapping the cover on. The terminal covering cap can simply be removed with a screw driver 6x1. There are two types of covering caps, as shown in Figure 2-7. Ordering information is provided in Section A.1 in the Appendix.

:AMP

>PCGF<

C73334-A1-C31-1

:AMP

>PCGF<

SIEMENS

Covering cap for 18 terminal voltage connection terminal block Figure 2-7

Covering cap for 12 terminal voltage or 8 Terminal Current connection terminal block

Covering caps for terminal blocks with screw terminals

2-8

SIEMENS

C73334-A1-C32-1

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Version of 7SD610 for Panel Flush Mounting / Cubicle Mounting

2.1.3

Connections to Plug-In Terminals


Plug-in terminals are only available for voltage connections. Current connections are made with screw terminals on all 7SD610.

Terminal Blocks for Voltage Connections

There are two versions of plug-in terminal blocks. They are shown in Figure 2-8.

a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 a 11 12 a 9 10 7 8 5 6 3 4 c b a 1 2

18 terminal Figure 2-8

12 terminal

Terminal blocks of plug-in terminals for voltage connections rear view

The system of numbers and letters used to designate the plug-in terminals is illustrated in Figure 2-9.

a 1

Plug-in terminal 1
2 12 a

Plug-in terminal 2

Figure 2-9

Correlation between plug-in terminals and connection numbers/letters

Each plug-in terminal forms a complete set of connections that consists of three pins arranged as follows: Pin a: Pin b: Pin c: Signal connection Common connection Shielding connection

The signal pins are the only terminal pins that are directly connected to the internal printed circuit boards of the 7SD610. Depending on the version of the terminal block, 18 or 12 signal connections are provided. Refer to Figure 2-10.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

2-9

Hardware and Connections

There are two isolated groups of common pins. Within a group the pins are inter-connected as shown in Figure 2-10. The common pins b are not connected to the boards inside the 7SD610. Each common group can, for example, be used for signal multiplication or as a common point for a signal (independent of the signals on the pin a terminals). Depending on the version of the terminal block, 18 or 12 common connections are available. Grouping of common connections within a terminal block is as follows: 12 terminal block: 18 terminal block: Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 Group 2 Terminals 1 through 6 Terminals 7 through 12 Terminals 1 through 9 Terminals 10 through 18

All shielding pins are connected together as shown in Figure 2-10. The shielding pins are also connected to the housing. Depending on the version of the terminal block, 18 or 12 shielding connections are provided.

12 terminal

Signal connection Common connection

18 terminal

Shielding connection
c c c c c c b b b b b b a 2 a 4 a 6 a 8 a a 9 10 11 12 7 a b a b a b c c c c c b b b b a a a a b a 5 a b c c b a 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 3 a b c 1 a b c c c c b b b a 2 a 4 a 6 7 a b a b a b a b a b a b c c c c c c 5 a b c 1 a b 3 a b c c

Common connections, group 1 looped together

Common connections, group 2 looped together

c c

Shielding connections looped together

Figure 2-10

Schematic diagram of the plug-in terminal blocks

Connections to Plug-In Terminals

Connections to plug-in terminals are made with pin connectors. There are two versions of pin connectors: Version 1: 2-pin connector Version 2: 3-pin connector

2-10

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Version of 7SD610 for Panel Flush Mounting / Cubicle Mounting

b a

a c b

Figure 2-11

2-pin connector and 3-pin connector

Ordering information for the pin connectors is provided in Section A.1 of the Appendix. The design of the pin connectors is such that only correct connections can be made. For example, the design of the 2-pin connector allows connection only to pins a and b. An erroneous connection to pins b and c is excluded. The pin connectors snap in to the plug-in terminals. The connectors can be removed without tools. Control wires are connected to contacts of the pin connectors. Wires with 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 diameter (AWG 20 to 14) can be accommodated. Use only flexible copper control wire! The following crimp connectors can be used: Tin-plated version: Diameter 0.5 mm2 to 1.0 mm2: e.g. Bandware 4000 pieces type: 08270391 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP Individual piece type: 08273961 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP Diameter 1.0 mm2 to 2.5 mm2: e.g. Bandware 4000 pieces type: 08270401 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP Individual piece type: 08273971 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP Connection of a conductor to a contact is performed using the following tools: e.g. Hand crimping tool type: 07343721 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP Stencil type: 17343871 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP The use of individual pieces is recommended. Gold-plated version (recommended): Diameter 0.75 mm2 to 1.5 mm2: e.g. Bandware 4000 pieces type: 01630837 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP Individual piece type: 01630842 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP Connection of a conductor to a contact is performed using the following tools: e.g. Hand crimping tool type: 05396351 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP Stencil type: 15396682 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP The use of individual pieces is recommended. After the wires are crimped, the contacts are pressed into the terminals of the connector until they snap into place. Stress relief for individual pin connector must be provided with cable ties. Stress relief must also be provided for the entire set of cables, e.g., cable ties.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

2-11

Hardware and Connections

The following separation tool is needed to remove the contacts from the pin connectors: Type: 7258401 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP. The separation tool contains a small tube that is subject to wear. The tube can be ordered separately: Type: 7258411 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP.

2.1.4

Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces


The three available versions of optical communication interfaces are shown in Figure 2-12. The ports are supplied with caps to protect the optical components against dust or other contaminants. The caps can be removed by turning them 90 to the left.

Optical Interfaces STConnectors

P-Master Ch2

AMO

Ch1 P-Slave

2 channel Figure 2-12

Ch1 P-Slave

1 channel

1 channel

Optical communication interfaces with protective caps

Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces

Optical connector type: Fibre type:

STconnector Multimode graded-index (G) optical fibre G50/125 m, G62.5/125 m, G100/140 m = 820 nm (approximately) For indoor cable rmin = 5 cm (2 in) For outdoor cable rmin = 20 cm (8 in)

Wavelength: Allowable bending radius:

Laser class 1 (acc. EN 608251) is achieved with fibre type G50/125 m and G62.5/125 m.

2-12

UART
7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Version of 7SD610 for Panel Flush Mounting / Cubicle Mounting

Optical Interfaces FC-Connectors

The optical communication interfaces with FC-connectors and screw connections also provide caps to protect the optical components against dust or other contaminants.

Figure 2-13

Optical communication interfaces with caps

Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces with FC-Connectors

Optical connector type: Fibre type: Wavelength:

FCconnector Monomode 9/125 m, = 1300 nm (approximately)

Allowable bending radius:For indoor cable rmin = 5 cm (2 in) For outdoor cable rmin = 20 cm (8 in)

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

2-13

Hardware and Connections

2.1.5

Connections to Electrical Communication Interfaces


9-pin D-subminiature female socket connectors are provided for all electrical communication interfaces of the 7SD610. The connector is illustrated in Figure 2-14. The pin assignments are described in Sub-section 8.2.1.

Electrical Communication Interfaces

5 9 6 1
Service interface (front side)

RS232-LWL RS232 RS485

1 6 9 5

1 6 9 5 Time synchronization (rear side)

Serial interface (rear side) Figure 2-14 9 pin D-subminiature connector

Connections to Serial Communication Interfaces

Standard 9-pin D-subminiature plug connectors per MILC24308 and DIN 41652 can be used. The necessary communication cables are dependent on the type of interface: RS232/EIA232: Five-wire, twisted and shielded, e.g. interface cable 7XV51004. RS485/EIA485: Three-wire, twisted and shielded. Profibus: Two-wire or four-wire, twisted and shielded: Wire type A, DIN 19245, part 2 and EN 50170 vol. 2, twisted and shielded, Wire Resistance: 135 to 165 (f > 100 kHz) Capacitance: < 30 nF/km (48 nF/mile) Circuit resistance: < 110 /km (177 /mile) Conductor diameter: > 0.64 mm Conductor cross-sectional area: > 0.34 mm2 e.g., SINEC L2 Industrial twisted pair installation wire (see catalog 1K 10 SIMATIC NET, Industrial Communications Networks). Time synchronization: At least two-wire, shielded.

2-14

P-Slave AME

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Version of 7SD610 for Panel Surface Mounting

2.2

Version of 7SD610 for Panel Surface Mounting


The numerical differential protection SIPROTEC 7SD610 for surface mounting is enclosed in a 7XP20 housing, 1/3 (of 19 inch). The device is fitted into a surface mounting housing.

2.2.1

Housing
The housing consists of a rectangular tube with a rear plate which is specific to the device version, and a front cover. Guide rail mats which aid the insertion of the modules are mounted on the inside of the rectangular tube. Connections between the modules and from the modules to the front cover are established with flat ribbon cables and corresponding plug connectors. The rectangular tube fitted into a surface mounting housing and secured with 4 screws, which are located behind covering caps at the four corners of the front cover. The surface mounting housing contains the wiring from the back plate specific to the device version to the screw terminal. The front cover can be detached after removal of the covering caps located on the 4 corners of the front cover and the 4 screws that are then revealed. The front cover has a membrane keypad containing the control and indication elements required for the user interface with the device. All terminations to the control and indication elements are combined by a converter module on the front cover, and routed to the processor module (CPU) via a plug connector. The name plate containing the principal data of the device, such as auxiliary supply voltage, the rated test voltage and the ordering code (MLFB) is located on the external top of the housing and on the inside of the front cover. The mechanical dimension drawings are located in Section 10.13.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

2-15

Hardware and Connections

Front View

31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

11) 10)
SIEMENS
RUN

11)
SIPROTEC
ERROR

7SD610

H6DIH@IV # 6pvhv Hrhrr!

1) 2) 3)

MENU

9)

8) 7)

LED

ESC

ENTER

4) 5)

Annunciations Measured values Trip log

F1 F2 F3 F4

7 4 1

8 5 2 0

9 6 3 +/-

6) 11)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

11)
8 9 L+ L- 12 13 14 15

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Figure 2-15

Front view, 7SD610 for panel surface mounting, without optical connections

Referring to the operating and display elements in Figure 2-15: 1. Display (LCD) The LCD shows process and device information as text in various lists. Commonly displayed information includes measured values, counter values, binary information regarding the condition of circuit breakers, status of the device, protection information, general reports, and alarms. 2. Navigation keys These keys serve for navigation through operating menus. 3. MENU key This key activates the main menu. 4. ESC and ENTER keys These keys serve to escape from specific menus or execute changes (such as setting changes). 5. Numerical keys These keys serve for entry of numerical values, such as limit value settings. 6. Function keys Four function keys allow the quick and simple execution of frequently used actions. Typical applications include, for example, jumping to a particular position in the menu tree such as the fault data in the Trip Log or the measured values. The

2-16

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Version of 7SD610 for Panel Surface Mounting

function keys are programmable, and may be used to execute control functions such as closing or tripping circuit breakers. Next to the keypad, a labelling strip is provided on which the user-specified key functions may be written. 7. 9-pin female D-subminiature connector This serial interface is for the connection of a local PC running DIGSI 4. 8. LED key This key has the dual purpose of resetting latched LEDs and the latched contacts of output relays, as well as testing of the LEDs. 9. Light emitting diodes (LEDs) The function of these indicators can be programmed. There is a vast selection of signals from which to choose. Some examples are device status, processing or control information, and binary input or output status. Next to the LEDs on the front panel, a labelling strip is provided on which the user-specified LED functions may be written. 10. Operating condition indicators The two LEDs RUN (green) and ERROR (red) indicate the operating condition of the device. 11. Covering caps for the screws that secure the front panel.

2.2.2

Screw Terminal Connections


All connections to the device are by means of 60 two-tier screw terminals located at the top and bottom of the surface mounting housing. The plug connection module in the device for the current terminals automatically shortcircuits the current transformer circuits when the modules are withdrawn. This does not reduce necessary care that must be taken when working on the current transformer secondary circuits.

Terminal Blocks

Connections to Terminals

Solid conductor or stranded wire with lugs can be used. The following specifications must be observed: Direct cable connections: solid or stranded conductor with connector sleeve conductor with cross-section of 0.5 mm2 to 5 mm2 (AWG 20 to 10). Use copper wires only!

Note: For the connection of the time synchronization: At least two-wire, shielded.
Wire strip length: solid conductor 7 mm to 8 mm (0.27 in to 0.31 in). Maximum tightening torque: 15 in-lb (1.7 Nm).

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

2-17

Hardware and Connections

2.2.3

Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces


Optical communication interfaces are located in inclined housing. The inclined housings may be located at the top side (channels D and E) and/or at the bottom side of the device (channel B and C), see Figure 2-16. A table indicating the available channel designations B to E is printed onto the inclined housing. Standardly the device is equipped with the housing of the top side (channel D). Depending on the version there may be a second inclined housing mounted to the bottom side of the device (channel B and/or channel C). If it that is not the case, a cover plate is mounted instead.

Housing for optical communication interfaces, channel D and E

Housing for optical communication interfaces, channel B and C Figure 2-16 Side view of 7SD610, panel surface mounting, possible optical communication interfaces

There are two versions of optical communications interfaces: STconnectors and FCconnectors.

2-18

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Version of 7SD610 for Panel Surface Mounting

Optical Interfaces (STConnector)

Fibre-optic connections with STconnectors are supplied with caps to protect the optical components against dust or other contaminants. They can be removed by turning them 90 to the left. The ports are provided with 1 or 2 channels. A maximum of one fibre optic channel is located in each inclined housing (channel B and/or channel C). Fibre-optic connections that are not needed are replaced by plastic studs (see Figure 2-17).

Kanal C Kanal E

Kanal B Kanal D

plastic studs Figure 2-17 Inclined housing with fibre optic connections (example: channel B fitted)

Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces (STConnector)

Optical connector type: Fibre type:

STconnector Multimode graded-index (G) optical fibre G50/125 m, G62.5/125 m, G100/140 m = 820 nm (approximately) For indoor cable rmin = 5 cm (2 in) For outdoor cable rmin = 20 cm (8 in)

Wavelength: Allowable bending radius:

Laser class 1 (acc. EN 608251) is achieved with fibre type G50/125 m and G62.5/125 m. Optical Interfaces (FCConnector) Fibre optic connections with FCconnectors are supplied with caps to protect the optical components against dust or other contaminants. They can be removed from the connectors. There is only one version with 1 channel. The fibre optic channel is located in an inclined housing (channel D). Fibre optic connections that are not needed are replaced by plastic studs (see Figure 2-18).

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

2-19

Hardware and Connections

Kanal C Kanal E

Kanal B Kanal D

plastic studs

Figure 2-18

Inclined housing with fibre optic connections (channel D fitted)

Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces (FCConnector)

Optical connector type: Fibre type: Wavelength: Allowable bending radius:

FCconnector Monomode 9/125 m, = 1300 nm (approximately) For indoor cable rmin = 5 cm (2 in) For outdoor cablermin = 20 cm (8 in)

2.2.4

Connections to Electrical Communication Interfaces


9-pin D-subminiature female socket connectors are provided for electrical communication interfaces. The connectors are located in the inclined housing at the bottom side of the device (see Figure 2-19). The pin assignments are described in Sub-section 8.2.1. Fibre optic connections that are not needed are replaced by plastic studs. The connections for the time synchronization interface are by means of the two-tier screw terminals (see Sub-section A.2.2 in the Appendix).

Electrical Communication Interfaces

2-20

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Version of 7SD610 for Panel Surface Mounting

Kanal C Kanal E

Kanal B Kanal D

Kanal C Kanal E

Kanal B Kanal D

plastic studs Figure 2-19 9-pin D-subminiature connector

Connections to Serial Communication Interfaces

Standard 9-pin D-subminiature plug connectors per MILC24308 and DIN 41652 can be used. The necessary communication cables are dependent on the type of interface: RS232/EIA232: Five-wire, twisted and shielded, e.g. interface cable 7XV51004. RS485/EIA485: Three-wire, twisted and shielded. n

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

2-21

Hardware and Connections

2-22

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Getting Started

This chapter describes the initial inspections that should be carried out upon recept of the SIPROTEC 4 device 7SD610. Unpacking and re-packing is explained. Visual and electrical checks that are appropriate for initial inspection are discussed. The electrical tests include navigating through the operating menus of the device using the operator control panel on the front of the device, and the operator control windows in DIGSI 4. For personnel inexperienced with the 7SD610, these checks also provide a quick and simple method for understanding the operation of the control panel and DIGSI 4. The electrical tests can be done without measuring quantities being applied. Observations relevant to long-term storage of the device are noted.

3.1 3.2 3.3

Unpacking and Re-packing Inspections upon Receipt User Interface Storage

3-2 3-3 3-4 3-12

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

3-1

Getting Started

3.1

Unpacking and Re-packing


The 7SD610 is packaged at the factory to meet the requirements of IEC 6025521. Unpacking and re-packing must be done with usual care, without using force, and with appropriate tools. Visually check the device immediately upon arrival for correct mechanical condition. Please observe also the brief reference booklet and all notes and hints that are enclosed in the packaging. The transport packaging can be reused in the same manner for further transport. Storage packaging alone, for the individual devices, is not sufficient for transport. If alternative packaging is used, shock requirements according to IEC 60255211 Class 2 and IEC 60255212 Class 1 must be met. The device should be in the final operating area for a minimum of two hours before the power source is first applied. This time allows the device to attain temperature equilibrium, and dampness and condensation to be avoided.

3-2

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Inspections upon Receipt

3.2
3.2.1

Inspections upon Receipt


Inspection of Features and Ratings
Verify that the 7SD610 has the expected features by checking the complete ordering number with the ordering number codes given in Sub-section A.1 of the Appendix. Also check that the required and expected accessories are included with the device. The ordering number of the device is on the nameplate sticker attached to the top of the housing. The nameplate also indicates the current, voltage, and power supply ratings of the device. A verification that these ratings are the expected values is especially important. The jumpers for the control voltage of the binary inputs are set at the factory for a DC control voltage equal to the DC voltage rating of the power supply. The jumpers can be changed if a different control voltage is to be used.

Ordering Number

3.2.2

Electrical Check
Operating conditions that meet VDE 0100/5.73 and VDE 0105 Part 1/7.83, or national and international standards, are to be observed. Before applying power supply voltage or any measuring quantities for the first time, be sure the device has been in the operating area for at least two hours. This time period allows the device to attain temperature equilibrium, and prevents dampness and condensation from occurring.

Warning!
The following inspection steps are done in the presence of dangerous voltages. Only appropriately qualified personnel familiar with and adhering to safety requirements and precautionary measures shall perform these steps.

Power-Up

For a first electrical inspection of the device it is sufficient to ensure safe grounding of the housing and to apply the power supply voltage:

o o o o o

Connect the ground of the device solidly to the ground of the location. The ground of a 7SD610 designed for flush mounting is on the rear panel; the ground of a device designed for surface mounting is on the terminal with the grounding symbol. Prepare the connections to the power supply. Verify that the power supply voltage has the correct magnitude. Check polarity connections to the device inputs. Follow the appropriate connection diagram in the Appendix, Section A.2. Close the protective switches to apply the power supply. The green RUN LED on the front panel must light after no more than 0.5 second, and the red ERROR LED must go out after no more than 10 seconds. After no more than 15 seconds, the start-up messages must vanish from the display (in which the complete ordering number, the version of firmware implemented, and the factory number are shown), and the default display must appear. Depending on the assignment of the LEDs, some indicators may light up during and after power-up.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

3-3

Getting Started

3.3
3.3.1

User Interface
Operation Using the Operator Control Panel
The device has a hierarchically structured operating tree, within which movements and actions are made using the , , , keys and the MENU, ENTER , CTRL , and ESC keys on the front panel. The brief discussions below illustrate the navigation techniques using the integrated operations in the operator control panel. Some typical operations are covered. For easier understanding, the accompanying figures show the entire contents of the menus, while only a limited number of lines can be seen in the display at any time.

Operator Control Panel

Reading Ordering Number/Version

To view the complete ordering number of the device, the version of firmware implemented, and the serial number:

q When the device is ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,1
pears.

0(18 ap-

q Using the
using the

key, select the menu item 6HWWLQJV, and move to the device settings key. The 6(77,1*6 menu appears, as shown in Figure 3-1.

q Using the

key, select the menu item 6HWXS([WUDV and switch to the selection 6(783(;75$6 using the key. See Figure 3-2.

0$,1 0(18   $QQXQFLDWLRQ !  0HDVXUHPHQW !  &RQWURO !  !6HWWLQJV !  7HVW'LDJQRVH ! 

6(77,1*6   'HYLFH &RQILJ !  0DVNLQJ ,2 !  36\VWHP 'DWD !  *URXS $ !  *URXS % !  *URXS & !  *URXS ' !  &KDQJH *URXS !  2VF)DXOW 5HF !  !6HWXS([WUDV !  'HYLFH ! 

Figure 3-1

Main menu and sub-menu 6(77,1*6 example

q Using the

key, select the menu 0/)%9HUVLRQ and view the selection 0/)% 9(56,21 using the key. key as necessary

The device-specific data appear in two or three lines. Press the to view all of the data:

3-4

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

User Interface

6(783(;75$6   'DWH7LPH !  &ORFN 6HWXS !  6HULDO 3RUWV !  'HYLFH,' !  !0/)%9HUVLRQ !  &RQWUDVW ! 

0/)%9(56,21  0/)% 6' +$ %)1U  0/)%9(56,21 )LUPZDUH %RRWV\VWHP   

Figure 3-2

Display of device-specific data example

Viewing Measured Values

To view the measured values:

q If the main menu is not shown, press the MENU key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears. q Using the key, select the menu item 0HDVXUHPHQW, and move to the measurement values using the key. The 0($685(0(17 sub-menu appears.

q Using the

key, select the menu item 2SHUDWLRQ VHF (operating measured values, secondary), and switch to the 23(5$7,21 6(& sub-menu using the key. and keys, all operating measured values can be viewed.

q Using the

Since no measured AC voltages or currents are present at this time, all operating measured values show near zero. Deviations of the last digit are insignificant. Viewing Operational Messages Reading the operational messages is described to serve as an additional example.

q If the main menu is not shown, press the MENU key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears. q Using the key, select the menu item $QQXQFLDWLRQ, and switch to the annunciations using the key. The $1181&,$7,21 sub-menu appears.

q Using the

key, select the menu item (YHQW /RJ, and move to the (9(17 /2* sub-menu using the key.

The last number in the upper right corner of the display indicates the number of operational messages stored in memory. The number before the slash indicates the message presently being displayed. Upon entering the menu, the latest (newest) message is shown. The date and time of the event are shown in the display line above the message.

q Use the key to read other operational messages. q Press the LED key; all LEDs should illuminate. Press the
To return to the main menu, press the or the key.
MENU

key. The newest message in the event log should be 5HVHW /(', and the number of messages in memory should increase by one (maximum of 200). key once, or repeatedly press the
ESC

key

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

3-5

Getting Started

Setting the Display Contrast

If the image in the integrated LCD does not have satisfactory contrast, adjustments can be made. A stronger contrast serves, among other purposes, to improve the readability of the image from an angle. With increasing numbers, the contrast is increased and the picture gets darker. If the contrast is too weak or too strong, there is a risk that the display will be unreadable and that no operation will be possible using the integrated operator control panel. Therefore, the preset contrast value should only be changed in small steps (1 or 2 levels).

q When the device is ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,1
pears. the

0(18 ap-

q Using the q Using the

key, select the menu item 6HWWLQJV, and switch to the settings using key. The 6(77,1*6 sub-menu appears.

key, select the menu item 6HWXS([WUDV and switch to the selection 6(783(;75$6 using the key. See Figure 3-3.

q Using the key, select the sub-menu item &RQWUDVW. q If a change of the contrast of the integrated LCD is desired, press the ENTER key. The
existing setting appears in a frame with a blinking cursor. setting range is 11 to 22.

q Overwrite the present setting with the desired setting using the numerical keys. The q Confirm the change with the ENTER key, or cancel the change with the
Exit the sub-menu using the
ESC ESC

key.

key, or return to the main menu using the MENU key.

6(783(;75$6   'DWH7LPH !  &ORFN 6HWXS !  6HULDO 3RUWV !  'HYLFH,' !  0/)%9HUVLRQ !  !&RQWUDVW ! 

ENTER

6(783(;    0/)%9H Q !  &RQWUDVW ! 

Figure 3-3

Operating sub-menu for adjusting the display contrast

3-6

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

User Interface

3.3.2

Operation Using DIGSI 4


DIGSI 4 has the typical PC application Windows operating environment to guide the user. The software has a modern, intuitive, user-interface. Further details are found in Section 4, as well as in the DIGSI 4 handbook Device Configuration. Some applications of DIGSI 4 which are described below concern viewing the measurement values, reading messages, and setting the time clock. The handling of the operator control windows of DIGSI 4 can be learned quickly by following the simple examples as described below. To perform the steps in the examples, first connect the SIPROTEC 4 device to the PC and match the DIGSI 4 interface data with the equipment. To accomplish this:

DIGSI 4 User Interface

q Establish a physical connection between a serial interface of the PC and the operating serial interface of the device on the front panel.

q Open the DIGSI 4 application in the PC. q Generate a new project by clicking on )LOH 1HZ in the DIGSI 4Manager menu
bar.

Figure 3-4

Dialogue box to open a new project in DIGSI 4

q Enter a name for the new project in the 1DPH entry field (e.g. test 1) and close the
box with 2..

q Select )ROGHU by clicking on the item in the newly opened window. Then click in

the menu bar the item 'HYLFH and select the option ',*6, ! 'HYLFH 3OXJ 3OD\ , as shown in Figure 3-5. The Plug & Play dialogue box opens, as shown in Figure 3-6.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

3-7

Getting Started

Figure 3-5

Window with selection of Plug and Play

q Enter the designation of the PC serial interface (COM 1,2, 3, or 4) and select in the q Click on 2.. DIGSI 4 automatically determines the type of device present and
reads the settings needed for communication (transfer format, transfer speed) through the interface.

dialogue box under )UDPH the transfer format, to be used in making the connection.

Figure 3-6

Plug & Play dialogue box for communication between device and PC

A direct connection is then established (on-line), the data are exchanged between the PC and the device, and the initial screen for DIGSI 4 opens, as shown on Figure 3-7.

q By double clicking 2QOLQH in the navigation window (left window), the structure
opens (directory tree).

q By clicking on one of the menu items offered there, the associated contents become
visible in the right window.

3-8

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

User Interface

Figure 3-7

DIGSI 4 online initial screen example

Viewing Measured Values

As an example the procedure for viewing the measured values is described.

q Double click on 0HDVXUHPHQW in the navigation window (left). q Double click on the subdirectory 6HFRQGDU\ 9DOXHV in the navigation window. q Click on 2SHUDWLRQDO YDOXHV VHFRQGDU\. q The present date and time are shown in the data window (right), as illustrated in Figure 3-8.

q Double click on this entry in the data window.

Figure 3-8

DIGSI 4 Viewing the secondary operating measured values example

A table of the secondary operating measured values appears, as shown in Figure 3-9. Since no measured AC currents or voltages are present at this time, all operating measured values are close to zero. Deviations of the last digit are insignificant. The measured values are automatically updated. In the same manner, other measured and counter values can be read out.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

3-9

Getting Started

Figure 3-9

DIGSI 4 Table of secondary operating measured values example

Viewing Operational Messages

The read-out of operating messages is described to serve as an additional example.

q Double click on $QQXQFLDWLRQ in the navigation window. q Click on (YHQW /RJ in the function selection.
The present date and time are shown in the data window.

q Double click on this entry in the data window.


A table of the accumulated event messages is displayed. See Figure 3-10as an example. The number designation for an event is provided with a description of the message. The corresponding cause, value (ON or OFF), and date and time of the event are given. The events are listed chronologically; the newest message is shown first.

Figure 3-10

DIGSI 4 Operational messages window example

q Press the LED key on the device; all LEDs should light while the key is pressed. q The message Reset LED appears as the newest message as soon as the window
is updated. The window can be updated by clicking on 9LHZ in the menu bar, and then on 5HIUHVK. Pressing the F5 function key on the keyboard also updates the window.

The operating messages can be saved in DIGSI 4, and also deleted from the devices memory as described in Sub-section 7.1.1.

3-10

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

User Interface

Setting Date and Time

To enter the date and time:

q Click on 'HYLFH in the menu bar. See Figure 3-11. q Select 6HW &ORFN.

Figure 3-11

DIGSI 4 Selection of the option 6HW &ORFN

The dialog field 6HW FORFN GDWH LQ GHYLFH opens. The field shows the present date and the approximate present time according to the device. The day of the week is automatically derived from the date and cannot be edited. Edit the input fields 'DWH and 7LPH. The format depends on your regional settings of the PC. See Figure 3-12. Date: mm/dd/yyyy or dd.mm.yyyyy Time: hh.mm.ss Click 2. to download the entered values to the device. The former values are changed and the dialog field is closed.

Figure 3-12

DIGSI 4 Dialog Field: 6HW FORFN

GDWH LQ GHYLFH

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

3-11

Getting Started

Storage If the device is to be stored, note: SIPROTEC 4 devices and associated assemblies should be stored in dry and clean rooms, with a maximum temperature range of 25 C to +55 C (12 F to 131 F). See Sub-section 10.1.7 under Technical Data. To avoid premature aging of the electrolyte capacitors in the power supply, a temperature range of +10 C to +35 C (50 F to 95 F), is recommended for storage. The relative humidity must not lead to condensation or ice buildup. After extended storage, the power supply of the device should be energized, approximately every two years, for one or two days to regenerate the electrolytic capacitors in the power supply. This procedure should also be done prior to the device being put in service. Under extreme climatic conditions (tropics), pre-warming is achieved at the same time, and condensation is prevented. After long storage, power should not be applied until the device has been in the operating area for a minimum of two hours. This time period allows the device to attain temperature equilibrium, and prevents dampness and condensation from occurring. In order to save the energy of the buffer battery inside the device the battery is switched off automatically without auxiliary supply voltage after a time period of 12 to 24 hours. n

3-12

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

SIPROTEC 4 Devices

This chapter provides an overview of the family of SIPROTEC 4 devices and the integration of the devices into power plants and substation control systems. Principle procedures are introduced for setting the devices, controlling primary equipment with the devices, and performing general operations with the devices. Please note the SIPROTEC 4 family of devices is described in general in this chapter, and the examples shown may differ in detail from a specific device. Also, depending on the type and version of a specific device, some of the functions discussed may not be available. Details about the extent of the functions of the devices, the individual settings, and the representation structure of the system data are found in the following chapters and the DIGSI 4 instruction book.

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15

General Operator Control Facilities Information Retrieval Control Manual Overwrite / Tagging General about the Setting Procedures Configuration of the Scope of Device Functions Configuration of Inputs and Outputs (Configuration Matrix) Programmable Logic CFC Power System Data Setting Groups General Device Settings Time Synchronization Serial Interfaces Passwords

4-2 4-5 4-8 4-14 4-16 4-17 4-20 4-21 4-24 4-26 4-27 4-29 4-30 4-31 4-33

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

4-1

SIPROTEC 4 Devices

4.1

General
The SIPROTEC 4 family is an innovative product series of numerical protective and control devices with open communication interfaces for remote control and remote setting, ergonomically designed operator panels, and highly flexible functionality.

4.1.1

Protection and Control


The devices utilize numerical measuring techniques. Complete numerical signal processing offers high measurement accuracy and long-term consistency, as well as reliable handling of harmonics and transients. Digital filtering techniques and adaptive stabilization of measured values ensure the highest security in establishing the devices correct responses. Device errors are recognized and quickly annunciated by integrated self-monitoring routines. Failure of protection during a fault is therefore almost entirely prevented. You may choose devices with separate protective and process control functions, or select a solution that implements both requirements. The following solutions are available:

q Protection and control in separate devices, q Protective devices that provide the capability of control of a circuit breaker or primary switching device through a communication interface,

q Devices with combined features that, in addition to protective functions, offer on-site
operation for several circuit breakers and primary switching devices and extensive substation control functions.

4-2

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

General

4.1.2

Communication
SIPROTEC 4 devices are completely suited for the requirements of modern communication technology. They have interfaces that allow for integration into higher-level control centres, and user friendly operation through an on-site PC or via a modem connection. Simple, comfortable device setup and operation are provided. SIPROTEC 4 devices support the widespread, internationally accepted communication standards, e.g.

q EC 60870-5-103, q PROFIBUS FMS/DP, q DNP 3.0, q Modbus, q UCA II / Ethernet (future)


Operation and Observation SICAM WinCC DIGSI 4 To Network Control Centers
IEC60870-5-101

DCF, GPS
Time Synchronization

SICAM SC
IEC60870-5-103 Profibus FMS

Field Devices

Figure 4-1

Integration of field devices in the SICAM substation control system example

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

4-3

SIPROTEC 4 Devices

In the sample configuration in Figure 4-1, data transmitted from the field devices can be processed in the sub-station control device SICAM SC, displayed at the operating and observation station SICAM WinCC, and transferred by the remote terminal unit interfaces (via the network channels) to network control centres (SCADA). In the case when commands are sent to the devices, equally flexible processing is possible; that is, substation switching operations can be initiated from the network control centres, as well as from the operation and observation unit of the substation control system.

Note:
All SIPROTEC 4 devices also operate with the proven star coupler (e.g. 7XV5). Thus, for simple applications, you can retrieve all information from your office or while on the road. The protocol PROFIBUS DP enables the uncomplicated integration of SIPROTEC devices into PLC-based process control systems (e.g. SIMATIC S5/S7). The protocols DNP3.0 and MODBUS ASCII/RTU allow the integration into a large number of process control systems and control systems of different manufacturers.

4.1.3

Settings
The devices in the SIPROTEC 4 family are delivered with default settings. After settings are made for specific applications, the devices are suitable for direct use in power systems. The windows-based DIGSI 4 software program offers an application-oriented interface with thorough guidance for quick and simple setting of the devices. DIGSI 4 is installed on a normal personal computer. For local use, the PC is connected to the operating serial interface on the front panel of the device.

4.1.4

Operations
All on-site operations of a SIPROTEC 4 device can be done with DIGSI 4. Examples of operations are switching, retrieval of information, or changing of setting groups. These operations can also be performed using the operator control panel on the front of the SIPROTEC 4 device.

4.1.5

Oscillographic Fault Records


DIGSI 4 can also be used to retrieve oscillographic fault data captured by the SIPROTEC 4 device. The DIGRA 4 software program can then be used to provide several different graphical representations of the captured signals. DIGRA 4 also calculates additional values on the basis of the captured signals. The program presents the data in analogue curves with time base, phasor diagrams, locus diagrams, and harmonic charts.

4-4

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Operator Control Facilities

4.2
4.2.1

Operator Control Facilities


Operator Control Panel On Device
The operating panels of SIPROTEC 4 devices are ergonomically designed and easy to read. The operating panels allow on-site control operations to be done, individual settings to be entered, and all information required for operations to be displayed. The operating panel contains either a full graphical display or a four-line display, depending on the specific device of the SIPROTEC 4 family.

Operating Panel with Four-Line Display


SIEMENS
RUN ERROR

SIPROTEC
7SA522

MAIN MENU Annunciation Measurement

01/05 SIEMENS 1 2
RUN ERROR

SIPROTEC
7SA522

MENU

MAIN MENU 01/04 SIEMENS Annunciation 1 Measurement 2

SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR

7SJ61/62

MAIN MENU Annunciation Measuremen


MENU

01/05 1 2

LED

ESC

ENTER

Trip Pickup A Pickup B Pickup C Pickup GND Device faulty


ENTER

MENU

Event Log Operation. Pri

F1 F2 F3 F4

7 4 1

8 5 2 0

9 6 3 +/LED

ESC

Meldungen Mewerte LED

F1 F2 F3 F4

7 4 1 Event Log
Operation. Pri Trip Log

8 5 2

9 6 3 7 +/4 1 5 2 0 6 3 +/8 9
ESC ENTER

F1
0

F2 F3 F4

Figure 4-2

SIPROTEC 4 Device, operator control panel with four-line display examples

Note:
Refer to Chapter 2 to determine the type of operating field for your specific SIPROTEC4 device.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

4-5

SIPROTEC 4 Devices

The functions of the operating and display elements on the operator control panel are described below. Display Process and device information are displayed in the LCD. Commonly displayed information includes measured values, counter values, binary information regarding the condition of the device, protection information, general messages, and alarms. The light for the display is normally off. The light automatically turns on whenever a key is pressed on the operating field. If no input from the operator control panel occurs for ten minutes, then the light turns off again. The light can be controlled via a binary input that is configured (programmed) for this purpose. Keys The keys have various functions.

q Navigation through the operating menus of the device are accomplished with the
, , , keys.

q The main menu is opened with the MENU key. q Changes are cancelled or confirmed with the ESC and ENTER keys, respectively. q Numerical values are entered with the 0 to 9 keys, the . key for a decimal q The
the

point, and the +/ key for a negative sign. If a value of infinity () is desired, press the decimal point key twice; appears in the display.
F1 to F4 keys are programmable. The keys are typically used to execute commonly performed actions. Labelling strips are provided.

q Latched LEDs and output relays are reset and the group of LEDs are tested with
LED

key.

LEDs

q RUN and ERROR LEDs indicate the condition of the device. q All other LEDs are freely configured to indicate process information, status, events,
etc. Labelling strips are provided. Local communication with the device is established through the front operating serial interface with a PC running DIGSI 4. The interface on the device is a 9-pin, female, D-subminiature port.

Operating Serial Interface

4-6

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Operator Control Facilities

4.2.2

DIGSI 4 Tool
DIGSI 4 uses the familiar Windows operating environment.

User Guide

In DIGSI 4 only the settings that are available within a specific device are shown in the specific windows. If a protective feature is changed from disabled to enabled in the Device Configuration, then the settings relevant to that feature become available. Entering settings for SIPROTEC 4 devices is easy due to many types of assistance offered, such as context menus, pop-up lists for the selection of available options, and specific limits for the entry of numerical values.

Configuring Inputs and Outputs

A configuration matrix is used to assign the binary inputs, output relays, and LEDs. Information to be stored in the various buffers and transmitted via the system interface is also selected in this matrix. The setting options are presented in an easy-to-read tabular format. Parts of the matrix can be minimized or expanded as desired to simplify the displayed sections, and therefore the setting process. Filter functions can reduce the size of the matrix to display only relevant information. Password entry is required for tasks such as changing settings, executing control commands, or exercising the test and diagnostics features. The passwords protect against unauthorized access to these critical tasks. DIGSI 4 simplifies commissioning with test functions for the binary inputs, outputs and LEDs. Control of primary equipment can be done. The measured values of the device can be viewed with the program. Oscillographic fault records can be triggered with DIGSI 4. The help system clarifies the individual functions and settings, and provides additional support.

Passwords

Commissioning Aids

Help System

Note:
Detailed information about DIGSI 4 can be found in the DIGSI 4 Manual, order number E50417-H1176-C097.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

4-7

SIPROTEC 4 Devices

4.3

Information Retrieval
A SIPROTEC 4 device has an abundance of information that can be used to obtain an overview of the present and past operating conditions of the device and the portion of the power system being protected or controlled by the device. The information is represented in separate groups:

q Annunciations, q Measurements, q Oscillographic fault records.


Remote If the device is integrated into a substation control system, then information transfer can take place, via a connection to the system interface of the SIPROTEC 4 device, to:

q higher level control systems, or q substation control devices, e.g. SICAM SC.
Local On site, the operator control panel of the SIPROTEC 4 device can be used to retrieve information. Information retrieval is simple and fast when DIGSI 4 is used. For local use, connect a PC to the operating serial interface at the front of the SIPROTEC 4 device. For remote retrieval of information, communication occurs via a modem connected to the service serial interface. DIGSI 4 must operate in the Online mode to obtain information from the device.

DIGSI 4

4-8

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Information Retrieval

4.3.1

Annunciations
The scope of the indication (messages) that are given under Annunciation is determined when settings for the configuration of functions are applied to the SIPROTEC device. The messages are divided into the following categories, and displayed using DIGSI 4 or the operator control panel of the device:

q Operating messages: Messages independent of network faults, e.g. messages


about switching operations or monitoring functions;

q Fault messages; q Ground fault messages (for devices with sensitive ground fault detection); q General interrogation; display of present condition messages; q Spontaneous messages; continuous display of important messages from the device; e.g., after faults, switching operations, etc.

Figure 4-3

DIGSI 4, annunciations

Display in DIGSI 4

To view the indications in DIGSI 4 2QOLQH: Select $QQXQFLDWLRQ in the navigation (left) window. All annunciation groups are shown in the data (right) window. Double click on an annunciation group in the data window, such as (YHQW /RJ. The data and time appear. Double click on the entry. The list of indications appears.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

4-9

SIPROTEC 4 Devices
To display messages in the operating field of the SIPROTEC 4 device: Select 0DLQ 0HQX $QQXQFLDWLRQ e.g. (YHQW /RJ or 7ULS /RJ.

Display on the Device

0$,1 0(18   !$QQXQFLDWLRQ !  !0HDVXUHPHQW ! 

$1181&,$7,21   !(YHQW /RJ !  !7ULS /RJ ! 

(9(17 /2*     5HVHW /(' 21

Figure 4-4

SIPROTEC 4, device display of operating messages in the event log example

75,3 /2*   !/DVW )DXOW !  !QG /DVW )DXOW ! 

/$67 )$8/7     1HWZRUN )DXOW  21

Figure 4-5

SIPROTEC 4, device display of fault messages example

4-10

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Information Retrieval

4.3.2

Measurements
The measured values that are registered are divided into the following categories for display in DIGSI 4 or on the operating field of the device:

q Primary values, based on the measured secondary values and the settings entered
for the current transformers and voltage transformers. ured values.

q Secondary values, which are the measured values or are derived from the measq Percentage values, relative to nominal ratings. q Other values calculated by the device, e.g. thermal values or user-defined values. q Statistics values.

Figure 4-6

DIGSI 4 measured value display example

Display in DIGSI 4

To display the measured values in the DIGSI 4 2QOLQH: Select 0HDVXUHPHQW in the navigation (left) window. The measured value groups appear in the data (right) window. Double click on a group, for example 3ULPDU\ 9DOXHV. Double click on the next item in the data window, 2SHUDWLRQDO YDOXHV SUL PDU\ in the example. The date and time appear. Double click on the date and time, and the measured values appear.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

4-11

SIPROTEC 4 Devices
To display the measured values in the operating field of the SIPROTEC 4 device: Select 0DLQ 0HQX 0HDVXUHPHQW e.g. 2SHUDWLRQ SUL.

Display on the Device

0$,1 0(18   !$QQXQFLDWLRQ !  !0HDVXUHPHQW ! 

0($685(0(17   !2SHUDWLRQ SUL !  !2SHUDWLRQ VHF ! 

0($685(0(17   !2SHUDWLRQ SUL !  !2SHUDWLRQ VHF ! 

23(5$7,21 35,   !,/ $ !,/ $

Figure 4-7

SIPROTEC 4, device display of measured values example

4.3.3

Oscillographic Fault Records


As an option, SIPROTEC 4 devices can have waveform capturing and event recording. Furthermore, the elements that are shown in the fault records can be selected by the user. The fault record data are retrieved from the device memory by DIGSI 4 and are stored as oscillographic records in standard COMTRADE format. The DIGRA 4 program is used to convert the oscillographic data into graphical representations that can be used to analyse the fault or the event captured by the device. DIGRA 4 calculates additional values from the waveform data, e.g. impedances and rms values, and displays the captured and calculated values in:

q analogue curves with timebase (time signals), q phasor diagrams, q locus diagrams, and q harmonic graphs.

4-12

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Information Retrieval

digra009

Figure 4-8

DIGRA 4 graphical representations of the waveform data view examples Details can be found in the DIGSI 4 manual, order number E50417-H1176-C097, and the DIGRA 4 manual, order number E50417-H1176-C070.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

4-13

SIPROTEC 4 Devices

4.4

Control
The multiple application possibilities for SIPROTEC 4 devices allow an equally flexible concept for command processing and control.

Remote

If the device is integrated into a master control system, then command outputs can be remotely controlled via the system interface using telegrams from

q Higher-level control systems, or q substation control devices such as SICAM SC.


Local On-site, the SIPROTEC 4 device offers the possibility to control a circuit breaker or primary switching equipment using the operator control panel. For devices with a four-line display, switching operations are controlled using: 0DLQ PHQX &RQWURO %UHDNHU6ZLWFK &RQWURO Equipment and intended direction 21 or 2)) (Figure 4-9), or The Function Keys F1 to F4. The functionality of these keys is programmable.

0$,1 0(18   0HDVXUHPHQW !  !&RQWURO ! 

&21752/   !%UHDNHU6ZLWFK!  !7DJJLQJ ! 

&21752/   !%UHDNHU6ZLWFK!  !7DJJLQJ ! 

%5($.(56:,7&+   !'LVSOD\ !  !&RQWURO ! 

Figure 4-9

On-site control using the operator control panel

The status of a primary switch can be read out on the display using %5($.(56:,7&+ 'LVSOD\ (Figure 4-10).

%5($.(56:,7&+   !'LVSOD\ !  !&RQWURO ! 

',63/$<   !%UHDNHU 23(1 'LVF6ZLW &/26

Figure 4-10

Determining primary switch status using the operator control panel

4-14

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Control
DIGSI 4 Control operations can be carried out using the DIGSI 4 Tool. Connect a PC to the operating interface of the device on site, or communicate with the SIPROTEC device using a modem and the service interface. DIGSI 4 must operate in the Online mode for this function. Select &RQWURO in the Navigation window and double click on %UHDNHU  6ZLWFKHV in the data window. In the dialogue window that follows, all relevant primary switching equipment is displayed in a table with the present status. Enter the intended switching direction in the Scheduled column. Answer the question with <HV. The password is requested, the interlocking conditions are checked, and the command is issued.

Note:
The control option of DIGSI 4 is typically used during commissioning, and for test and diagnostic purposes. Using the graphically supported design tool CFC for logic functions in DIGSI 4, information can be logically combined. Command outputs can be derived from the output of logic functions. The link of the output of the CFC functions to the respective device outputs is determined in the configuration matrix. Only authorized personnel can perform switching operations. Switching operations are protected by passwords. Command outputs may be subject to interlocking checks, which can be configured individually and graphically using the CFC logic too. Standard interlocking, such as ground switch closed status indication, may be already contained in the basic settings of certain device types when delivered from the factory. Details about the command output time, checkback indication monitoring time, etc., are entered within the framework of the settings. All switching operations are recorded in the message list with date and time.

CFC

Passwords

Interlocking

Command Processing Times Event Recording

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

4-15

SIPROTEC 4 Devices

4.5

Manual Overwrite / Tagging


If the breaker/switch position is not available from the switch-gear, the status of the switchgear device can be manually set to the actual present position using the operator control panel: 0DLQ 0HQX &RQWURO %UHDNHU6ZLWFK 0DQ 2YHU ZULWH. The simulated switching status is used for interlocking checks, and for automatically initiated switching operations. For convenience during commissioning or at other times, decoupling of the information exchange between the switchgear and the protective device may be desired for a short period, without disconnecting the wires. This function is activated using the operator control panel: 0DLQ 0HQX &RQWURO %UHDNHU6ZLWFK 6HW 6WDWXV. To identify unusual operating conditions in the power system, tagging can be done. The tagging can, for example, be entered as additional operating conditions in interlocking checks, which are set up with CFC. Tagging is configured in the same way as for operating devices. The status of the tagging is displayed on the operating panel, 0DLQ 0HQX &RQ WURO 7DJJLQJ 'LVSOD\ (Figure 4-11), or changed using 0DLQ 0HQX &RQWURO 7DJJLQJ 6HW.

Manual Overwrite

Set Status

Tagging

0$,1 0(18   $QQXQFLDWLRQ !  0HDVXUHPHQW !  &RQWURO ! 

&21752/   %UHDNHU6ZLWFK !  7DJJLQJ !  ,QWHUORFN ! 

7$**,1*   'LVSOD\ !  6HW ! 

Figure 4-11

Tagging equipment from the operator control panel

Note:
The Manual Overwrite function is always done using the operator control panel on the SIPROTEC 4 devices.

4-16

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

General about the Setting Procedures

4.6

General about the Setting Procedures


The SIPROTEC 4 devices are delivered with standard default settings. Changes to the settings are done with DIGSI 4. The setting procedure for a SIPROTEC 4 device consists of q Overall Protection and Control Design:

q determining the functions that are to be used (device configuration), q assigning the binary inputs, outputs, LEDs, buffers, system port, etc. (I/O-configuration

q defining user-definable logic functions (CFC).


q Specific Settings:

q settings for all elements to be used, q settings of the protective functions, q settings of the process control functions.
Settings are first done Off-line. The settings are then loaded into the SIPROTEC 4 device on-site using the operating serial interface, or remotely by modem and the service interface.

Figure 4-12Setting a SIPROTEC 4 device using DIGSI 4

The transfer of data from DIGSI 4 to the SIPROTEC 4 device is indicated in the display. The progress of the transfer is displayed. See Figure 4-13.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

4-17

SIPROTEC 4 Devices

/2$' 3$5$0(7(5 

 'RZQORDG DFWLYH


Figure 4-13

Screen of Device during Settings Transfer

Setting Sequence

When setting a SIPROTEC 4 device, adhere to the following sequence:

q Specify the interfaces, the device data, and the time synchronization, q Determine the device functions to be used, q Design the assignment of the inputs and outputs using the configuration matrix, q Set the default display (optional), q Design all of the special logic that is to be employed using CFC (optional), q Enter the power system data, q Apply the settings to groups A to D (groups B to D optional), q Set the passwords.
Setting steps partially build on the decisions from the previous steps. By following the sequence listed, unnecessary changes and rework are avoided. The sequence ensures that information required for an individual step will be available.

Note:
Changes to the configuration matrix and the control display are protected by password No. 7 (Password for parameter set).

4-18

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

General about the Setting Procedures

Settings for Protective Elements

Setting changes to individual protective elements and functions can be done using the operator control panel on the SIPROTEC 4 device. Other settings such as input/output and device configuration can be viewed from the front panel, but not changed. Display the settings on the LCD using 0DLQ 0HQX 6HWWLQJV e.g. 0DVNLQJ ,2 . Change settings such as date and time using 0DLQ 0HQX 6HWWLQJV 6HWXS ([WUDV.

0$,1 0(18   $QQXQFLDWLRQ !  0HDVXUHPHQW !  &RQWURO !  6HWWLQJV !  7HVW'LDJQRVH ! 

6(77,1*6   'HYLFH &RQILJ !  0DVNLQJ ,2 !  36\VWHP 'DWD !  *URXS $ !  *URXS % !  *URXS & !  *URXS ' !  &KDQJH *URXS !  2VF)DXOW 5HF !  6HWXS([WUDV !  'HYLFH !   $FWLYH *URXS LV $

Figure 4-14

Changing settings using the operator control panel example

Note:
Changes to the individual settings are protected by Password No. 5 (Password for single settings).

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

4-19

SIPROTEC 4 Devices

4.7

Configuration of the Scope of Device Functions


The individual devices within the SIPROTEC 4 family can be supplied with various protective functions. The ordering number of the device determines the available functions. The functions are specified more precisely through the process of enabling and disabling in the Device Configuration area of the settings. To specify the active functions using DIGSI 4: Double click on 'HYLFH &RQILJXUDWLRQ in the data window. Click on the individual fields and select the functions to be enabled.

Figure 4-15

DIGSI 4, setting the device configuration example

The device configuration can be viewed from the operator control panel on the SIPROTEC 4 device. In the main menu, select 6HWWLQJV 'HYLFH &RQILJ.

'(9,&( &21),*    &ROGORDG 3LFNXS (QDEOHG


Figure 4-16 Viewing device configuration from the operator control panel example

4-20

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Configuration of Inputs and Outputs (Configuration Matrix)

4.8

Configuration of Inputs and Outputs (Configuration Matrix)


A configuration matrix is used to determine processing of the binary inputs, outputs, LEDs, and indication buffers. Configuration is performed with DIGSI 4. The configuration matrix is primarily divided into the following columns: q q Device functions Information, e.g. indications or command with

q information number, identification of the information, q display text, representative brief text of the information on the device display, q long text, extensive description of the information, q type, identification of the information, e.g. CF_D2 double command with 2 output
contacts and feedback indication; q Source, that is, origin of the information with

q binary inputs q function keys F, freely programmable keys on the operating field, e.g. assigned
switching operations, etc. as the origin of the information, mation;

q CFC C (programmable logic), user-specific logic outputs as the origin of the inforq Destination of the information, with

q binary outputs for the output of signals, q LED, display of information on the device front, e.g. messages, q system interface S, transmission of information, e.g. to a substation control system, q CFC C (programmable logic), information as an input to a user-specified logic, q buffer, in which the information should be entered,
operation annunciation buffer or fault annunciation buffer,

q control menu CR, primary device can be controlled or tagging can be set.
The user determines the configurations by

q clicking on the appropriate column, or by q Using the context menu: L (latched), U (unlatched), H (activate high),
L (activate low), (configured), (not configured), etc. DIGSI 4 checks the entry for plausibility and locks the input field if necessary. A locked input field is shown in gray.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

4-21

SIPROTEC 4 Devices

Figure 4-17

DIGSI 4, input/output assignment with the configuration matrix example

Filter Functions

With the use of filters, either all information can be displayed or a selection can be done according to indications, commands, or measured values. Additionally, there is a filter setting that differentiates between information configured and not configured. The filters allows for a quick overview and simple checking of the configuration settings. Also, columns and rows can be temporarily hidden from view, so that you can view only the sections of the total matrix that are relevant.

New Information

A further function of the configuration matrix is the capability to define new information. This is accomplished by inserting a new line, defining the appropriate information type, and assigning it to a source and a destination. The new information can also be displayed in the LCD of the SIPROTEC 4 device after it has been downloaded to the device. The function keys on the operator control panel of the SIPROTEC 4 device can be assigned to commonly performed operating functions, e.g. initiation of a switching operation. Select the appropriate function key F1 to F4 in the Source F column for the related information (e.g. switching command).

Function Keys

4-22

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Configuration of Inputs and Outputs (Configuration Matrix)


SIPROTEC 4 device information can be connected in a user-specified manner using the programmable logic components of the DIGSI 4 CFC. For example, the user can implement interlocking checks, create grouped messages, or derive limit value violation messages. Information can be both a source and a destination in combined CFC editing. The specific logics inputs, e.g. the individual messages that are to be combined to form a grouped message, must be marked in the Destination C column. The logics output, the grouped message in this example, is derived from the Source C column. Viewing the Configuration on the Operating Panel The configuration can be seen on the operating panel of the SIPROTEC 4 device. In the main menu, select 6HWWLQJV 0DVNLQJ ,2 .

CFC

0$6.,1* ,2   !%LQDU\ ,QSXWV !  !/(' !  In the next menu, select 0DVNLQJ ,2 e.g. %LQDU\ ,QSXWV.

%,1$5< ,13876   !%LQDU\ ,QSXW  ! !%LQDU\ ,QSXW  !


Figure 4-18 Reading the configuration using the operator control panel, example assignment of binary input 2

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

4-23

SIPROTEC 4 Devices

4.9

Programmable Logic CFC


The CFC program in DIGSI 4 can be used to create additional logic in SIPROTEC 4 devices. For example, special interlocking conditions for controlled equipment can be designed. Limit checks for measured values can be created, and corresponding control can be designed. SIPROTEC 4 devices may have some CFC functions set at the factory, according to the type and version of the device. User-defined CFC functions are done in graphical form. Generic logic modules (AND, OR, NAND, etc.) and analog modules that are specially created for the requirements of process control engineering (e.g., MAX, MIN, etc.) are available. The CFC-modules are combined to form complete CFC-logic functions in order to

q perform system-specific checks (e.g. interlocking), q generate messages if measured values approach a critical value, or q build group messages for transfer to a substation control systems.

Figure 4-19

DIGSI 4, CFC basic options example

4-24

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Programmable Logic CFC

CFC Designing

Figure 4-20 shows the graphical nature of the CFC logic tool, and some of the components that can be used to build the logic.

Note:
CFC settings are protected in DIGSI 4 by Password No. 7 (Password for parameter set).

Details about designing with the CFC program can be found in the instruction book, order number E50417-H1176-C098.

Figure 4-20

CFC Logic example

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

4-25

SIPROTEC 4 Devices

4.10

Power System Data


In the window for Power System Data 1, important settings are entered that relate to the power system and primary equipment connected to the device. The settings include:

Power System Data 1

q system data such as frequency, voltage, etc. q data for the main current transformers and voltage transformers, q circuit breaker or primary switch-gear information.

Figure 4-21

DIGSI 4 window for setting the power system data 1 example

Power System Data 2

Power System Data 2 are part of the setting groups, which can be switched over during operation (see chapter 4.11). These include for example:

q Primary Operating Voltage q Primary Operating Current q Characteristic Data of the protected object etc.

4-26

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Setting Groups

4.11

Setting Groups
A SIPROTEC 4 device has up to four setting groups A through D. The setting options for each group are the same; however, the applied settings can be, and are typically intended to be, different in each group. The active setting group can easily be changed while the device is in-service. A major advantage of multiple setting groups is the capability of optimizing the protection and control for the existing configuration of the network being protected. In other words, the protection and control can be changed as the network changes. The setting groups are saved in the device. The setting groups can be changed during operation using DIGSI 4, from the operator control panel on the device, by triggering binary inputs, or via the system interface.

Figure 4-22

DIGSI 4, Entering Settings in Setting Group A; Other Groups are Similar

Note:
Settings that are common to all protective functions, such as Power System Data 2, can be dynamically activated like the settings in Groups A through D.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

4-27

SIPROTEC 4 Devices

Settings

Double click on a protective function shown in the listbox of Figure 4-22 to obtain a dialogue box for entering the settings associated with this function (Figure 4-23).

Figure 4-23

DIGSI 4, entering settings for a protective function example

Changing Setting Groups

The setting groups can be changed during operation using DIGSI 4, from the operator control panel on the device, by triggering binary inputs, or via the system interface. The active setting group is indicated.

&+$1*( *5283    $&7,9( *5283 *URXS $  &+$1*( WR *URXS $ *URXS $ *URXS % *URXS & *URXS ' %LQDU\ ,QSXW ,(&
Figure 4-24 SIPROTEC 4 device, changing setting groups on the operator control panel

4-28

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

General Device Settings

4.12

General Device Settings


The settings of the display to show information of network faults on the LEDs and the LCD on the front of the SIPROTEC 4 device are defined in the DIGSI 4 window shown in Figure 4-25.

Figure 4-25

DIGSI 4, general device settings (targets) example

The setting can also be changed at any time using the operator control panel on the SIPROTEC 4 device: 0DLQ 0HQX 6HWWLQJV 'HYLFH.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

4-29

SIPROTEC 4 Devices

4.13

Time Synchronization
Time tracking in a SIPROTEC 4 device can be implemented using:

q DCF77 Radio Receiver (Time Signal from PTB Braunschweig), q IRIG-B Radio Receiver (Time Signal from the global positioning satellite (GPS) system),

q signals via the system interface from, for example, a substation control system, q radio clock using a system-specific synchronizer box, q minute impulses on a binary input.
Setting of the time synchronization is done exclusively with DIGSI 4: Double click on 7LPH 6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ in the data window and enter the settings.

Figure 4-26

DIGSI 4, setting of the time synchronization example

Read-out on the Operator Control Panel

Using the SIPROTEC 4 device operator control panel, the time synchronization settings can be retrieved: 0DLQ 0HQX 6HWWLQJV 6HWXS([WUDV &ORFN 6HW XS.

6(783(;75$6   'DWH7LPH !  &ORFN 6HWXS !  6HULDO 3RUWV !  'HYLFH,' !  0/)%9HUVLRQ !   &RQWUDVW ! 
Figure 4-27

&/2&. 6(783   2IIVHW PLQ (UURU 7LPH PLQ 6RXUFH ,QWHUQDO

Read-out of time synchronization settings from the operator control panel

4-30

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Serial Interfaces

4.14

Serial Interfaces
Devices in the SIPROTEC 4 family can be equipped with up to four serial interfaces and a time.

q The system interface is used for connection with higher-level control centers. The
following protocols are presently available: IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS FMS, PROFIBUS DP, DNP3.0 Level 2, MODBUS ASCII/RTU

q The time control interface is used for time synchronization (e.g. IRIG B), q The service interface (DIGSI 4, Modem) is for connection to remote diagnostic
facilities, e.g. DIGSI 4 via modem and/or a star connection. All DIGSI 4 operations are possible via this interface,

q The PC-interface at front is used for on-site connection of a PC, on which DIGSI 4
In the DIGSI 4 Interface Settings window (under Serial Ports) you can define, among other items, settings for:

is installed. All operations that are possible using DIGSI 4 can be done at this interface.

q Transmission protocols and q Transmission speeds.

Note:
The service (DIGSI 4, Modem) and system interface (SCADA) can be equipped with different modules for connection to other devices via optical fibers or an RS 232/485 bus.

The following an example for the configuring of an IEC-interface. In Chapter 5 you will learn more about how to configure further protocols. To set the framing and baud rate: Double click on 6HULDO 3RUWV in the data window and enter the specific settings in the window that follows.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

4-31

SIPROTEC 4 Devices

Figure 4-28

DIGSI 4, interface settings window

Read-out on the Operator Control Panel

The interface settings can be checked using the SIPROTEC 4 device operator control panel. In the main menu, select 6HWWLQJV 6HWXS([WUDV 6HULDO 3RUWV following menus.

6(783(;75$6   'DWH7LPH !  &ORFN 6HWXS !  6HULDO 3RUWV !  'HYLFH,' !  0/)%9HUVLRQ !   &RQWUDVW ! 
Figure 4-29

6(5,$/ 32576   )URQW 3RUW !  6\VWHP 3RUW !  6HUYLFH 3RUW ! 

Read-out of serial interface settings from the operator control panel, example

Note:
The interface for connecting a time control device is described in the Sub-section 4.14, Time Synchronization.

4-32

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Passwords

4.15

Passwords
Passwords are assigned to a SIPROTEC 4 device to protect against unintended changes to the device or unauthorized operations from the device, such as switching. The following access levels are defined:

q Switching/tagging/manual overwrite, q Non-interlocked switching, q Test and diagnostics, q Hardware test menus, q Individual settings, q Setting Groups.

Figure 4-30

DIGSI 4, window indicating the active passwords example

When using DIGSI 4 or the operator control panel on the SIPROTEC 4 device, a password is requested for the specific functions.

Note:
Password protection against unauthorized access is only in place during on-line operation. The passwords for setting changes are first activated when the settings are loaded into the device. The passwords are irrelevant in the DIGSI 4 off-line mode.

To deactivate a password, you must know the password.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

4-33

SIPROTEC 4 Devices
Passwords can only be changed using DIGSI 4. To change an existing password: In the Passwords window shown in Figure 4-30, double click on the password to be changed. In the next window (Figure 4-31), enter the present password, the new password, and confirm with the new password again and 2..

Figure 4-31

DIGSI 4, changing passwords

Passwords are numbers up to 8 digits.

At delivery all passwords are set to 000000.

Note:
If the password for setting group switching has been forgotten, a temporary password can be received from Siemens. The temporary password can be used to define a new password for this function.

The registration number of the DIGSI 4 software package will be required to receive the temporary password.
n

4-34

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Configuration

Configuration is the process of customizing the relay for the intended application. To accomplish this, the following questions must be answered: Which functions do you need? Which information and measured quantities need to be retrieved via which inputs? Which information, measured data, and control actions need to be issued via which outputs? Which user-definable functions need to be performed in CFC (Continuous Function Chart)? Which information should be displayed on the front panel of the device? Which interfaces are to be used? Which time source is to be used to synchronize the internal clock? This chapter describes in details how to configure the 7SD610.

5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5

Configuration of the Scope of Functions Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands Creating User Defined Functions with CFC Serial Interfaces Date and Time Stamping

5-2 5-6 5-27 5-36 5-40

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-1

Configuration

5.1
General

Configuration of the Scope of Functions


The 7SD610 relay contains a series of protective and additional functions. The scope of hardware and firmware is matched to these functions. Furthermore, commands (control actions) can be suited to individual needs of the protected object. In addition, individual functions may be enabled or disabled during configuration, or interaction between functions may be adjusted. Example for the configuration of the scope of functions: 7SD610 devices should be intended to be used for overhead lines and transformers. Overload protection should only be applied on transformers. If the device is used for overhead lines this function is set to 'LVDEOHG and if used for transformers this function is set to (QDEOHG

Note:
Available functions and default settings are depending on the ordering code of the relay (see ordering code in the Appendix for details).

Figure 5-1

Device Configuration dialogue box in DIGSI 4 example

Before closing the dialogue box, transfer the modified functional setting to the relay by clicking on the item ',*6, 'HYLFH. The data is stored in the relay in a non-volatile memory buffer. The configured functional scope can be viewed at the front of the relay itself, but cannot be modified there. The settings associated with the functional scope can be found in the 0$,1 0(18 under 6HWWLQJV 'HYLFH &RQILJ. Special Cases Most settings are self-explanatory. The special cases are described below.

5-2

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Configuration of the Scope of Functions


If the setting group change-over function is to be used, the setting in address  *US &KJH 237,21 must be set to (QDEOHG. In this case, it is possible to apply up to four different groups of settings for the function parameters (refer also to Subsection 6.1.2). During normal operation, a convenient and fast switch-over between these setting groups is possible. The setting 'LVDEOHG implies that only one function parameter setting group can be applied and used. Address  7ULS PRGH applies only to devices with single-pole or three-pole tripping. Set SROH if single-pole is also desired, i. e. if the device is supposed to operate with single-pole or with single-pole/three-pole automatic reclosure. It must be provided that the device is equipped with an automatic reclosure function or that an external device is used to carry out the automatic reclosure. Additionally the circuit breaker must be suited for single-pole tripping.

Note:
When changed address , then first save this alteration by clicking 2.. Reopen the dialogue box, since there are other settings which are dependent on the selection in address . The differential protection function ',))3527(&7,21 (address ) as a main function of the device should always be (QDEOHG. This also implies the supplementary functions of the differential protection such as breaker intertrip. The Direct Local Trip (address  '77 'LUHFW 7ULS) is a command that is initiated from an external device for tripping the local circuit breaker. A preselection of the tripping characteristic of the time overcurrent protection can be made in address  %DFN8S 2&. In addition to the definite-time overcurrent protection (definite time) an inverse-time overcurrent protection can be configured that either operates according to an IEC characteristic (2& ,(&) or to an ANSI characteristic (2& $16,). The characteristics are shown in the Technical Data (Section 10.6). The time overcurrent protection may naturally also be set to 'LVDEOHG. If the device provides an automatic reclosure function, the addresses  and  are relevant. If no automatic reclosure is desired for the feeder the device 7SD610 is connected to, or if an external device carries out the automatic reclosure, address  $872 5(&/26( is set to 'LVDEOHG. Automatic reclosure is only permitted for overhead lines. It may not be used in any other case. If the protected object consists of a combination of overhead lines and other equipment (e.g. overhead line in a block with a transformer or overhead line/cable), reclosure is only permissible if it can be ensured that it can only take place in the event of a fault on the overhead line. In the address mentioned the number of desired reclosure cycles is be set. Choose the desired number of AR-cycles from a total scope of  $5 F\FOHV. You can also set $'7 (adaptive dead time): in this case the behaviour of the automatic reclosure depends on the cycles of the remote end. However, at one end of the line the number of cycles must be configured. This end must provide an infeed. The other end may operate with adaptive dead time. See Subsection 6.9.1 for detailed information. The $5 FRQWURO PRGH under address  allows a total of four options. You can determine whether the sequence of automatic reclosure cycles is defined by the fault situation of the pick-up of the starting protection function(s) or by the type of trip command. The automatic reclosure can also operate with or without action time.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-3

Configuration
The 7ULS ZLWK 7DFWLRQ or 7ULS ZLWKRXW 7DFWLRQ command setting is preferred when single-pole or single/three-pole automatic reclosure cycles are planned and are possible. In this case different dead times (for every AR-cycle) are possible after single-pole tripping and after three-pole tripping. The tripping protection function determines the type of tripping: single-pole or three-pole. The dead time is controlled dependent on this. Using the 3LFNXS ZLWK 7DFWLRQ or 3LFNXS ZLWKRXW 7DFWLRQ setting, different dead times can be set for the auto-reclosure cycles after single-, two- and threephase pickup on faults. The fault detection image of the protection functions at the instant the trip command disappears is decisive. This operating mode also enables the dead times to be made dependent on the type of fault for three-pole AR-cycles. Tripping is always three-pole. The 7ULS ZLWK 7DFWLRQ or 3LFNXS ZLWK 7DFWLRQ setting provides an action time for every AR-cycle. This is started by the general pickup signal (i. e. logic OR combination of all internal and external pickup signals of all protection functions which are configured to start the automatic reclosure function). If there is yet no trip command when the action time has expired, the corresponding automatic reclosure cycle cannot be executed. See Subsection 6.12.1 for more information. For the time graded protection this setting is recommended. If the protection function to operate with reclosure does not have a general fault detection signal for starting the action times, select the setting 7ULS ZLWKRXW 7DFWLRQ or 3LFNXS ZLWKRXW 7DFWLRQ. For the trip circuit supervision the number of trip circuits that shall be monitored is set in address  7ULS&LUF6XSHUY with the following settings:  WULS FLUFXLW,  WULS FLUFXLWV or  WULS FLUFXLWV. If the device is connected to voltage transformers, set this condition in address  975$16)250(5. Only if set FRQQHFWHG, the voltage dependent functions (measured values of voltages, power and power factor) can be registered by the device. If a transformer is located within the protected zone, set this condition in address  75$16)250(5. The data of the transformer are registered by the device during the configuration of the general protection data (see Topological Data for Transformers (optional) in Subsection 6.1.3).

5.1.1

Setting Overview

Note: Depending on the type and version of the device it is possible that addresses are missing or have different default settings.
Addr. 103 110 112 Setting Title Grp Chge OPTION Trip mode DIFF.PROTECTION Setting Options Disabled Enabled 3pole only 1-/3pole Enabled Disabled Default Setting Disabled 3pole only Enabled Comments Setting Group Change Option Trip mode Differential Protection

5-4

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Configuration of the Scope of Functions

Addr. 122 124 126

Setting Title DTT Direct Trip SOTF Overcurr. Back-Up O/C

Setting Options Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled TOC IEC TOC ANSI Disabled 1 AR-cycle 2 AR-cycles 3 AR-cycles 4 AR-cycles 5 AR-cycles 6 AR-cycles 7 AR-cycles 8 AR-cycles ADT Pickup w/ Tact Pickup w/o Tact Trip w/ Tact Trip w/o Tact Disabled Enabled Disabled 1 trip circuit 2 trip circuits 3 trip circuits Disabled Enabled 2 relays 3 relays 4 relays 5 relays 6 relays connected not connected NO YES

Default Setting Disabled Disabled Disabled

Comments DTT Direct Transfer Trip Instantaneous HighSpeed SOTF Overcurrent Backup overcurrent

133

Auto Reclose

Disabled

Auto-Reclose Function

134

AR control mode

Pickup w/ Tact

Auto-Reclose control mode

139 140

Breaker Failure TripCirc.Superv

Disabled Disabled

Circuit breaker failure protection Trip Circuit Supervision

142 143

Therm.Overload NUMBER OF RELAY

Disabled 2 relays

Thermal Overload Protection Number of relays

144 145

V-TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER

not connected NO

Voltage transformers Transformer inside protection zone

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-5

Configuration

5.2
General

Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands


Upon delivery, the display on the front panel of the relay, some of the function keys, the binary inputs and outputs (output contacts) are assigned to certain information. These assignments may be modified, for most information, allowing adaptation to the local requirements. During configuration, certain information within the relay is assigned to certain physical interfaces (e.g., binary inputs and output contacts) or logical interfaces (e.g. userdefined logic, CFC). It must be determined which information should be linked with which device interface. It may also be determined which properties the information should have. Messages and statistical values from earlier events can be lost during configuration; therefore, operational and fault data and statistic counters which are memorized in the relay should be read and saved if desired, prior to changing the configuration.

5.2.1

Preparation
Before configuration is started, the overall interfacing requirements must be assessed. The required inputs and outputs must be coordinated with the number of physical inputs and outputs present on the relay. The types of indications and commands, and their requirements, must be taken into account.

Indications

Indications may be information of the device regarding events and conditions that can be transmitted via output contacts (e.g. start-up of the processor system or a trip signal of a protective function). These are defined as output indications. Indications also include information from the plant to the relay regarding plant events and conditions (e.g. position of a circuit breaker). These are defined as input indications. Depending on the type, indications may be further classified. Figures 5-2 and 5-3 show typical indication types schematically. Two binary inputs whose normal conditions are opposite, and which are monitored by the relay, are required for a double point indication.

(Internal logic information)

Restart

(Plant)
L+

(7SD610) Figure 5-2

Output indication via relay contact

Output indication (OUT)

5-6

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands

e.g. mcb

(7SD610)
Binary input (e.g. BI1)

e.g. Isoloator

(7SD610)
Binary input (e.g. BI 2) Binary input (.e.g. BI 3)

L+ L

L+

(Plant)
L Single point indication (SP)

(Plant)

Double point indication (DP)

Figure 5-3

Input indications (SP & DP)

Control Commands

Control commands are output indications which are specially configured for the transmission of control signals to power plant switching devices (circuit breakers, isolators, etc.). Once the type of a command has been established, DIGSI 4 reserves a corresponding number of output relay contacts. For this, the corresponding output relays are numbered consecutively. This must be observed when wiring the relays to the corresponding power plant devices to be controlled. Table 5-1 shows the most important command types. The following Figures 5-4 through 5-8 show time diagrams, control settings, and the order of relay positioning for frequently used command types.

Table 5-1

Most important command types

Single Command with Single Output Double Command with Single Outputs Double Command with Single Outputs plus Common Output Double Command with Double Outputs Double Command with Double (Close) and Single (Trip) Outputs

With 1 relay With 2 relays With 3 relays With 4 relays With 3 relays

without feedback with feedback without feedback with feedback without feedback with feedback without feedback with feedback without feedback with feedback

&B6 &)B6 &B' &)B' &B' &)B' &B' &)B' &B' &)B'

For double commands, the first output relay is selected using DIGSI 4. The other output relays will be automatically selected by DIGSI 4. In the sequence of output relays, each TRIP command is placed before the associated CLOSE command. For commands with feedback indications, DIGSI 4 reserves another line in the configuration matrix for the switching device feedback indications. Here, the OPEN position feedback is placed before the CLOSED position feedback as well. For Figures 5-4 through 5-8, the following abbreviations apply: C+ Relay contact for closing C Relay contact for tripping CC Relay contact is common CCC Relay contact is common to a bus L+; L Control voltage

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-7

Configuration

CLOSE command C+ C+
CLOSE

L+

t
1

Switching device L

Matrix configuration:

X
C+

Figure 5-4

Single command with single contact

CLOSE command C+

TRIP command C+
CLOSE

L+ C Switching TRIP device L

C
1 2

Matrix configuration:

XX
C C+

Figure 5-5

Double command with single contacts

CLOSE command C+

TRIP command

L+ C+
CLOSE

C Switching TRIP device

C CC

CC
1 2 3

Matrix configuration:

XXX
C C+ CC

Figure 5-6

Double command with single contacts plus common contact

5-8

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands

CLOSE command C+1 C+2 C1

TRIP command C+1


CLOSE

L+ C1 Switching TRIP device C2 L t

C+2 C2

1 2

3 4

Matrix configuration:

XXXX
C1 C+1 C2 C+2

Figure 5-7

Double command with double contacts (with 4 relays)

CLOSE command C+1

TRIP command

L+ C+1
CLOSE

C Switching TRIP device

C+2 C t
1 2 3

C+2 L

Matrix configuration:

XXX
C C+1 C+2

Figure 5-8

Double command with double and single contacts (with 3 relays)

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-9

Configuration

5.2.2
General

Structure and Operation of the Configuration Matrix


This section deals with the structure and operation of the configuration matrix. The configuration matrix can be viewed without making any configuration changes. Information characteristics and configuration steps are described in Subsection 5.2.3, and configuration is demonstrated in Subsection 5.2.4. Configuration of information is performed, using a PC and the DIGSI 4 software program, via the operator or service interface. The configuration is represented in DIGSI 4 as a matrix (Figure 5-9). Each row is assigned to an information of the device. It is identified by a function number No, LCD text (display text D), an explanation (long text L, minimized in Figure 5-9), and an information type T. The columns give the interfaces which should be the sources and/or destinations of the information. In addition to physical device inputs and outputs, there may be internal interfaces for user definable logic (CFC), message buffers, or the device display.

Filters

Information Catalog

Standard View

Short view

Figure 5-9

Extract from the configuration matrix in the DIGSI 4 user interface example

5-10

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands

Information in the rows is assigned to appropriate interfaces in the columns via an entry in the intersecting cell. This establishes which information controls which destination, or from which source which information is received. In the configuration matrix, not only the configuration is shown, but also the property of configuration. For example, information regarding an event which is configured for display on a LED may be latched or unlatched. The possible combinations of information and interfaces is dependent on the information type. Impossible combinations are filtered out by DIGSI 4 plausibility checks. The matrix columns are divided into three categories: Information, Source, and Destination. To the left of the matrix, information is divided into information groups. Reducing the Matrix The matrix may become very extensive because of the amount of information contained within. Therefore, it is useful to limit the display via filtering to certain information, thus reducing the number of rows. The tool-bar below the menu bar contains two pull-down menus by which information may be filtered. Using the first menu, the rows can be limited to indications, commands, indications and commands, or measured and metered values. The second menu allows to display only configured information, information configured to physical inputs and outputs, or non-configured information. A further reduction in the number of rows is possible, by compressing an information group to one row. This is done by double-clicking on the group label area (located to the far left). If this is done, the number of rows is reduced, allowing the user to focus on the information groups of interest. A second double-click restores all rows in the information group. To limit the width of the matrix, two possibilities exist: The tool bar allows to switch between standard view and short view, or individual columns can be hidden. In the latter case you double-click on the field with the column heading thus hiding the contents of the associated column. In the example of Figure 5-9, the long text (/) under IQIRUPDWLRQ is not shown. By double-clicking on long text field (/), the long text becomes visible again, and vice versa. With two options on the tool bar you may switch between standard view and short view, thus modifying the all columns under the 6RXUFH and 'HVWLQDWLRQ title blocks. The columns associated with the ,QIRUPDWLRQ block remain unchanged. In standard view, all binary inputs, binary outputs, and LEDs are accessible, as shown in Figure 5-9 for the binary outputs and LEDs. In short view (not illustrated in the figure), a common column is displayed for each of the sources and destinations. Within the individual cells of a common column, information regarding the configuration type is available in an abbreviated form. For example, the abbreviation H1 in a cell of the common binary input (BI) column means that the corresponding information is configured with active voltage (High) to binary input 1. If an information is assigned to several sources or destinations, the abbreviations of all destinations are shown, separated by commas. If there is not enough space in the cell for the simultaneous display of all abbreviations, a double-click on the cell and movement of the text cursor within the cell allows to scroll through the entire contents of the cell. To switch between standard view and short view, the menu item 9LHZ can also be used.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-11

Configuration

Information Groups

All information is organized into information groups. In addition to general relay information, information regarding individual device functions is also included. By clicking on an information group title area with the right mouse button, a context menu can be viewed, which contains information regarding the properties of that information group. This is particularly useful if the information group is associated with a function that contains parameter settings. If the information group belongs to a protective function for the relay, a dialogue window can be accessed in which the settings of the protective function may be read out and modified. The procedure for entering settings of a protective function is described in general in Chapter 4. Details regarding the settings for various functions are found in Chapter 6. The settings group to be processed may be selected via the menu item 9LHZ 6HW WLQJ *URXS.

Information

The column header ,QIRUPDWLRQ contains the function number, the LCD text (display text), an explanation (long text), and the information type. The following abbreviations are used for the information types: Annunciations: SP Single Point indication (binary input, e.g. LED reset, refer also to Subsection 5.2.1), DP Double Point indication (binary input, refer also to Subsection 5.2.1), OUT OUTput indication (protection output signals e.g. pickup, trip ...), IntSP Internal Single Point indication, IntDP Internal Double Point indication. Control Commands for switching devices: C_S Single Command with Single output without feedback, CF_S Single Command with Single output with Feedback, C_SN Single Command with Single output Negated without feedback, C_D2 Double Command (2 relays) with single outputs without feedback, CF_D2 Double Command (2 relays) with single outputs with Feedback, C_D12 Double Command with 1 trip outputs and 2 close outputs without feedback, CF_D12 Double Command with 1 trip outputs and 2 close outputs with Feedback, C_D3 Double Command (3 relays) with single outputs and common output without feedback, CF_D3 Double Command (3 relays) with single outputs and common output with Feedback, C_D4 Double Command (4 relays) with double outputs without feedback, CF_D4 Double Command (4 relays) with double outputs with Feedback, C_D2N Double Command (2 relays) with single outputs Negated without Feedback, CF_D2N Double Command (2 relays) with single outputs Negated with Feedback. Measured Values: MV Measured Value, MVU Measured Value, User defined, LVU Limit Value, User defined.

5-12

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands


Metered Values: PMV Pulse Metered Value. The information contains various properties depending on the information type, which are partially fixed and may be partially influenced. Source The source denotes the origin of the information which the matrix receives for further processing. Possible sources are: BI Binary Input, F Function key, which may serve to introduce a switching action, C CFC, i.e., message comes from user-definable logic. The destination indicates to which interface the information is forwarded. Possible destinations are: BO Binary Output, LED LED display on the device front panel, O Operation event buffer in the device, T Trip log buffer in the device, S System Interface, C CFC, Information is processed by CFC program of the user-definable logic, CM Control of switchgear if a switch plant is indicated in the Control Menu of the device.

Destination

5.2.3
General

Establishing Information Properties


Different types of information contain different types of properties. To view the properties associated with a specific information unit (indication, command, etc.), position the mouse on the specific row under ,QIRUPDWLRQ, and then use the right mouse button to access a context menu where 3URSHUWLHV can be selected. For example, if the cursor is positioned on a specific output indication, the right mouse button is pressed, and the menu item 3URSHUWLHV is selected, then a choice of whether the indication should appear in the oscillographic fault records (Figures 5-10, 5-11, and 5-12) is presented. For internal single point indications, the default status of the indication (on, off, or undefined) after device reset can be selected as well (Figure 5-11). Note that the possible properties of information for the system interface depend on the facilities of transmission protocol. See also Section Protocol Dependent Functions in the appendix.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-13

Configuration

Output Indication (OUT)

Figure 5-10

Information properties example for the information type Output Indication (OUT)

Internal Single Point Indication (IntSP)

Figure 5-11

Information properties example for the information type Internal Single Point Indication (IntSP)

5-14

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands

Singe Point Indication (SP)

Figure 5-12

Information properties example for information type Single Point Indication (SP)

Double Point Indication (DP)

In addition to the properties entered for single point indications, a Suppress intermediate position check box is available, which may be checked to suppress the intermediate indication during operations. If this field is marked, then the filter time, which can also be set (see margin heading Filtering/Contact Chatter Suppression below), is only effective for the intermediate (= undefined position) indication. Hence, briefly undefined conditions or contact chattering will not lead to an alarm; however, defined changes in the condition (final positions) are immediately reported.

Figure 5-13

Information properties example for information type Double Point Indication (DP)

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-15

Configuration
For input indications (single point indications 63, double point indications '3), filter times may be entered (pick-up and drop-out delays) to suppress momentary changes in potential at the binary input (e.g. contact chatter), refer also to Figure 5-12 and 513. Filtering occurs during an input change of state, with the same setting values whether coming or going. Information is only distributed when the new state continues to exist after a preset time interval (in milliseconds). The setting range is from 0 to 86,400,000 ms, or 24 hours. Whether or not the filter interval is restarted for each change of state during the filtering (filter re-triggering) is selectable. It is also possible to set chatter suppression for each indication (Figure 5-12 and 5-13). The contact chatter settings, themselves, are set the same for all input indications (see Subsection 5.2.6). User Defined Measured Values (MVU) and Limit Values (LVU) For the information type Measured Values User Defined (098), the units, the conversion factor, and the number of significant digits following the decimal point may be specified. For the information type Limit Values User Defined (/98), a limit value may be programmed (Figure 5-14).

Filtering/Contact Chatter Suppression

Figure 5-14

Information properties example for information type Limit Value User Defined (LVU)

If, for example, a low current reporter should be established using the CFC logic, and the percentage of the measured current should be matched to a certain amp value, the following values are entered in window according to Figure 5-14: The 'LPHQVLRQ is A (amps). The &RQYHUVLRQ )DFWRU is 150: 150 A corresponds to 100 % input current. The limit value upon start-up is set for 120 A.
Entering Your Own Information

The available information in the configuration matrix is determined by the device type and the configured functional scope. If necessary, you may extend the configuration matrix to information groups or individual information defined and entered by yourself.

5-16

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands

Such user defined groups and information may be deleted at any time, in contrast to predefined groups and information. In order to insert a new information group, click on a cell within a group that is next to the location where the new group should be located. After pressing the right mouse button, a context menu appears (Figure 5-15).

Figure 5-15

Dialogue box to insert a new information group

If one of the first two alternatives is selected, a second dialogue box opens, in which the name of the new information group is entered, in short text (display text) and in long text (Figure 5-16). After clicking 2., the new group is positioned.

Figure 5-16

Entry of the name of a user defined information group

Information may be entered into the new information group using the information catalog (Figure 5-17). The information catalog is found in the menu bar under the 9LHZ option, or via an icon in the toolbar. User information may be entered into both the user defined groups and any other available information group.

Figure 5-17

Information catalog window

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-17

Configuration
The information catalog is basically structured the same way as the DIGSI 4 Manager with folders and sub-folders. To proceed to information of sub-folders in the catalog, click on a plus symbol or double-click on an folder icon. The designation of the initial levels of the catalog correspond to the information groups $QQXQFLDWLRQV, &RP PDQGV, 0HDVXUHG 9DOXHV and &RXQWHU 9DOXHV. To insert a specific information unit into an information group, first select it in the catalog, and using the left mouse button, it should then be dragged from the information catalog window to a group area on the left of the matrix. After the mouse button is released, the new information unit is inserted into the proper group. In order to change the user defined information, double-click on the field containing the new information and edit the text.

Note:
When inserting information of the type &RQWURO ZLWK )HHG%DFN, two new rows will be created within the group: one line for the actual command, and one for the associated feedback message.

Deleting Groups and Information

Only user defined groups and information can be deleted. To delete an entire group, click on the field containing the group designator, then press the right mouse button to open the context menu, and select 'HOHWH *URXS. A confirmation window will appear (Figure 5-18).

Figure 5-18

Confirmation window before deleting a user defined group

Click <HV if you actually want to delete the group.

Note:
When deleting a group, all information definitions within this group will be deleted. To delete individual entries, click under ,QIRUPDWLRQ in the line with the entry to be deleted. Then press the right mouse button to open the context menu, and select 'H OHWH ,QIRUPDWLRQ. The remaining steps are the same as those for deleting a group.

5-18

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands

5.2.4

Performing Configuration
The actual assignment between the information (rows) and the sources and destinations (columns) of the information is made in the cell of intersection. You click into the cell and press the right mouse button. A pull down menu appears where you may determine the properties of the assignment. In certain cases, the pull down menu will offer ; (allocated) or B (not allocated) as the configuration choices. In other cases, three options will be offered (e.g. / = latched, 8 = unlatched, and B = not allocated). Entries resulting in an implausible configuration are blocked and inaccessible to the user.

Configuring Binary Inputs as Sources

Single point indications, double point indications, and pulse metered values can all be configured as binary inputs. In addition, whether or not binary inputs are activated by the presence of control voltage can be established. That is, H (High with voltage active): Control voltage at the binary input terminals activates the indication; / (Low with voltage active): Control voltage at the binary input terminals deactivates the indication.

Note:
A single logical indication shall not be configured to two binary inputs, since an ORcombination of both signals is not ensured. The operating program allows only one combination, and deletes the first combination when a second is established. In addition, a single point indication cannot be configured to a binary input and to CFC as a source at the same time. In this case, an error message would be displayed. Click on 2., and select another configuration.

Figure 5-19

Error message resulting from double configuration

If a double point indication (DP) is configured to one binary input (e.g. feedback indications from switching devices), the next binary input is also set in the matrix. If this configuration is undone, the second binary input is automatically de-configured. Configuring a Function Key as a Source The four function keys on the front of the relay may also be configured as sources in order to establish a link using CFC. In this situation, each function key may be linked with one single internal indication. A function key may be occupied because it has al-

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-19

Configuration

ready been set as an operating function for the relay. As delivered from the factory, the devices function keys F1, F2, and F3 are pre-configured:
F1 F2 F3 operating messages primary measured values overview of the last eight fault messages

Note:
When an indication is configured to a function key, its factory-assigned function is deleted. Re-establishment of the factory default function of the F-keys is only possible by initializing the relay with a new factory parameter set created within DIGSI 4. All device settings have to be re-entered. In order to configure a new indication, select one of the options (OPEN/CLOSE, ON/ OFF, etc.) from the indication group in the information catalog and drag it to the left side of the matrix. Upon release, a new row appears in the matrix. If the mouse is positioned at the intersection of this row with column F, and the right mouse button is pressed, a context menu opens (Figure 5-20) in which the function key may be set as a source by clicking the proper choice.

Figure 5-20

Selecting a function key as an information source

Configuring CFC as a Source

If certain information should be created as a result of the implementation of a user defined logic function (CFC), this information must appear in the matrix as a source from CFC. Otherwise, this information will not be available to the user when editing the CFC logic. You must not configure information to CFC as a source if it is already configured to a binary input.

Configuring Binary Outputs as a Destination

Up to ten (10) information units (commands and indications) may be configured to one binary output (output relay). One indication may be configured to up to ten (10) binary outputs (LEDs and output relays). During configuration of binary outputs, you may select, for each output relay (besides of the logic function itself), whether it should be latched (/) or unlatched (8). If you select latched, the output relay remains energized, even after the indication is no longer present. It must be manually reset by pressing the LED Reset button on the front panel of the device, or via a binary input with the indication function !/(' 5HVHW, or via the serial system interface. If unlatched is selected, the output relay disengages as soon as the indication disappears.

5-20

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands

Binary Outputs for Switching Devices

A special case is the configuring binary outputs for switching devices. For switching devices, the type of command (e.g., single or double commands, with or without feedback) is defined and configured to the output relay. If the preset command types are not desired, then appropriate command types can be selected from the Information catalog (see also Entering Your Own Information in the previous subsection) and inserted into the configuration matrix.

Example: Double Command with 2 relays (acc. Table 5-1)

Figure 5-21

Window information catalog (example for different command types)

If a command with multiple outputs is configured, all binary outputs required in the matrix for the configuration are automatically defined. If one of these outputs is de-configured, all other binary outputs associated with the command will be automatically deconfigured. Please pay attention to the comments and switching examples in Section 5.2.1, particularly the fixed defined sequence of relay assignments (TRIP before CLOSE). When configuring commands, the context menu is dependent on the type of command. In some cases, the selection latched/unlatched is not available. Instead, the alternatives are ; (configured), B (not configured), and ) (busy flag). The latter means, independent of the switching direction, an indication is issued during each operation of the switching device. For double commands with a common output, a fourth alternative & (Common contact) appears. Using this, one binary output may be defined as the common output (common contact). When this is the case, several double commands with common contacts may be assigned to the same common output (common contact), thus saving binary outputs. This assumes the signals at the common outputs have the same potential. Using the 2EMHFW 3URSHUWLHV dialogue window, additional properties for commands issued to the switching device may be defined. Thus, the operating mode (pulse or latched output of a switching command), the seal-in time for pulse commands, the output delay of the command, and feedback monitoring may be set (see Figure 5-22). The output delay is relevant for equipment which removes an indication before the switching is completed.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-21

Configuration

Figure 5-22

Dialogue box: object properties for a command with feedback

The conditional checks that should be conducted before execution of a switching command can also be defined: Device position (scheduled/actual): The switching command is ignored and a corresponding indication is issued if the switching device is already in the intended position. If this check is activated, switching direction control occurs not only for interlocked, but also for non-interlocked switching. Zone controlled (Bay Specific Interlocking): Logic functions created with CFC in the relay are processed for interlocked switching. Blocked by protection: CLOSE commands to the switchgear are blocked as soon as one of the protective functions or elements in the relay picks up. OPEN commands, in contrast, can always be executed. Double operation: Parallel switching operations are blocked with respect to each other: while one switching operation is being conducted, a second one cannot be performed with the same switching object. Switching Authority Local Commands: A local control switching command is only allowed if local control is enabled on the relay (via lock-switch or setting). Switching Authority Remote Commands: A remote control switching command is only allowed if remote control is enabled on the relay (via lock-switch or setting). Configuring a LED Display as a Destination Single point indications (SP), output indications (OUT), and internal single point indications (IntSP) may be assigned to LEDs. When this is done, you may select whether the indications are to be latched (/) or unlatched (8). Up to ten (10) indications may be assigned to a LED display. One indication may be assigned to a maximum of ten (10) outputs (LEDs and output relays).

5-22

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands

Configuring an Indication Buffer as a Destination

Dependent on the type and version of a relay, a maximum of three indication buffers may be available for messages: Operation (Event Log) Buffer (2), Fault (Trip Log) Buffer (7) and Earth Fault Message Buffer (E). The indications from protective functions are firmly assigned to these indication buffers. For the others, Table 5-2 provides an overview of which indication type may be configured to which buffer.

Table 5-2

Overview of Indication Buffers O X X X X X X X E T X

Information Type \Message Buffer Single Point Indications (SP) Double Point Indications (DP) Output Indications (OUT) Internal Single Point Indications (IntSP) Internal Double Point Indications (DP)

Select one of the following options for the named indication types: 2 (on or coming) the indication is stored in the buffer with the time of its arrival, 22 (on/off or coming/going) the indication is stored in the buffer with the time of its arrival and departure, B (not configured) the indication is not stored in a buffer. Configuring CFC as a Destination Single point, double point, and output indications, as well as limit and measured values, may be configured to CFC as the destination. This is a precondition for this information being processed by CFC. In addition to the measured values available in the relay, user defined measured and limit values may be configured into the measured value window. These values also become available in the device display in the assigned measurement window.

Configuring the Measured Value Window as a Destination Configuring the Metered Value Window as a Destination Retrieving Device Configurations from the Device Front

User defined pulse values derived from the measured values may be configured into the metered value window so that they may be displayed at the front relay panel.

Retrieving the configurations is also possible from the device front. You may access configuration information under 0DLQ 0HQX: 6HWWLQJV 0DVNLQJ ,2 .
The menu title 0$6.,1* ,2 appears in the title bar. Configuration information regarding each (physical) input and output is indicated in the display. Any new user defined information is also shown in the display once loaded into the relay from DIGSI 4. When selecting the 0$6.,1* ,2 menu, either binary inputs, LEDs, or binary outputs may be selected. Selection of binary inputs is illustrated in Figure 5-23.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-23

Configuration

0$6.,1* ,2   !%LQDU\ ,QSXWV !  !/(' !  %LQDU\ 2XWSXWV ! 


Figure 5-23

%,1$5< ,13876   !%LQDU\ ,QSXW ! !%LQDU\ ,QSXW !

Reading the configuration in the front display of the device example

Information regarding a binary input may be displayed by using the navigation keys to select the binary input. See Figure 5-24.

%,1$5< ,1387   !!5HVHW /(' 63 +  6WDWXV DW 7HUPLQDO 


Figure 5-24 Selection of binary input 2 example

In the example of Figure 5-24, information is displayed regarding binary input 2. The display for binary input 2 indicates that it is configured as reset of the latched LEDs using a single point indication with voltage active (High). The present conditions of binary input 2 is also given as 0 (not active). If a binary input is active, a 1 is displayed. Assignment of LEDs may be indicated at the relay, itself, using a replaceable labelling strip with plain text on the front panel located, directly next to the LEDs. Presettings The LED indication presettings, those of the binary inputs and outputs are summarized in Appendix A, Section A.4.

5.2.5

Transferring Metering Values


The transferring of metered values from the buffer of a SIPROTEC device to a substation controller may be performed both cyclically and/or by external polling. In the configuration matrix, click on 2SWLRQV and then on 5HVWRUH 0HWHUHG 9DO XHV. A dialogue box, which contains a register for editing the individual values for cyclical transferring will open.

Cyclical Restoration

Here, you may specify the source of the cyclical trigger for the transfer. Also, you may set the time interval and determine whether the metered value buffer should be deleted after transfer from the SIPROTEC device has taken place.

5-24

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands

Figure 5-25

Dialogue box to restore metered values and program cyclical restoration

Triggering occurs based on the absolute time set according to the set time interval.

5.2.6

Settings for Contact Chatter Blocking


The contact chatter filter checks whether the number of condition changes at a binary input exceeds a preset value during a predetermined time interval. If this occurs, the binary input will be blocked for a certain time, so the event list does not contain a large number of unnecessary entries. The setting values necessary for this feature may be entered in a dialogue box, as shown in Figure 5-26. This dialogue box can be found from the open configuration matrix by clicking 2SWLRQV in the menu bar and then selecting &KDWWHU %ORFNLQJ.

Contact Chatter Suppression

Figure 5-26

DIGSI 4: Setting the chatter blocking feature

Defining the Monitoring Criteria

The operating mode of the chatter blocking feature is determined by five settings: 1XPEHU RI SHUPLVVLEOH VWDWH FKDQJHV This setting establishes how often the state of a binary input within the ,QLWLDO 7HVW 7LPH may change. If this number is exceeded, the binary input is or remains blocked. If the setting is 0 the chatter blocking is disabled. ,QLWLDO WHVW WLPH Within this time interval (in seconds), the number of state changes of a binary input

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-25

Configuration

is checked. The time interval begins with the first activation of a signal to the binary input. 1XPEHU RI FKDWWHU WHVWV This number represents how many check cycles should be conducted before the binary input is finally blocked. Please consider that even a high set value can be reached over the normal life span of the device and could lead to blocking of the binary input. Therefore this value can also be set to infinity. For this, enter the character sequence of oo. &KDWWHU ,GOH 7LPH If the 1XPEHU RI SHUPLVVLEOH VWDWH FKDQJHV at a binary input is exceeded during the ,QLWLDO WHVW WLPH or the 6XEVHTXHQW WHVW WLPH, the &KDWWHU LGOH WLPH interval is initiated. The affected binary input is blocked for this time interval. The &KDWWHU LGOH WLPH setting is entered in minutes. This settings can only be programmed if the 1XPEHU RI FKDWWHU WHVWV is not set to zero. 6XEVHTXHQW WHVW WLPH Within this time interval, the number of state changes at a binary input is checked again. This interval begins after the &KDWWHU LGOH WLPH interval has expired. If the number of state changes is within allowable limits, the binary input is released. Otherwise, the idle interval is restarted, until the maximum 1XPEHU FKDWWHU WHVWV is reached again. The 6XEVHTXHQW WHVW WLPH setting is entered in seconds. This settings can only be programmed if the 1XPEHU RI FKDWWHU tests is not set to zero. The settings for the monitoring criteria of the chatter blocking feature are set only once for all binary inputs; however, the status of the chatter suppression can be set individually for each binary input. See Filtering/Contact Chatter Suppression in Subsection 5.2.3.

Note:
Chatter blocking cannot be activated for any of the standard protective indications.

The following should be noted: If there is contact chatter at a binary input and the input is blocked, the corresponding indication will be displayed with CCF (example: !'RRU RSHQ &&) 21). Also, the indication &RQWDFW FKDWWHU ILOWHU reports this condition. Both messages are shown in the operating buffer (event log). Chattering of a single point indication is set as ON (coming) if the binary input is activated by energization (configured High-active). Chattering of a single point indication is set as OFF (going) if the binary input is deactivated by energization (configured Low-active). If this behaviour causes undesired results in individual situations, an interlocking may be configured in CFC. Chattering of a double point indication will be considered as an intermediate condition.

5-26

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Creating User Defined Functions with CFC

5.3
General

Creating User Defined Functions with CFC


The 7SD610 relay is capable of implementing user defined logic functions which may be processed by the relay. This CFC feature (Continuous Function Chart) is needed to process user defined supervision functions and logic conditions (e.g. interlocking conditions for switching devices) or to process measured values. Interlocking conditions and command sequences, for example, may be programmed, using pre-defined function modules, by persons without any specialized software programming abilities. A total of 21 types of functional modules (FM), with which the desired functions may be composed, are saved in a library. Detailed explanations are in the CFC manual, order number E50417H1176C098, or in the DIGSI 4 manual, order number E50417H1176C097. The creation of a logical PLC function is performed by means of a personal computer using application DIGSI 4 and transferred via the operator or service interface. In order to create user defined logic functions, the indications and measured values required by these functions must first be configured in the matrix with CFC as the source or destination (see Section 5.2). CFC can be started by double-clicking on &)&. The names of all available CFC charts will appear. The desired CFC chart for processing can be selected via a double-click of the mouse. The CFC program will start, and the chart will be displayed. If no chart is available yet, you can create a new chart via the menu &UHDWH &)&&KDUW.

Run-Time Properties

The functions to be implemented in CFC may be divided into four task levels: Measured values: This task is processed cyclically every 600 milliseconds (09B%($5% = measurement value processing) and might become slower if the device is in pick-up state. System logic: Operation is triggered by events (i.e. these functions are processed for each change of state at one of its inputs). System logic has lower priority than a protection function and will be suppressed as soon as the relay picks up (3/&B%($5% = slow PLC processing). Protective functions: These functions have the highest priority, and, like the system logic functions, are event-controlled and processed immediately after a change of state (3/&B%($5% = fast PLC processing). Switchgear Interlocking: This task is triggered by commands. In addition it is processed cyclically approximately every second. It might becomes slower if device is in pick-up state (6)6B%($5% = interlocking). The function to be implemented must be associated to one of these four task levels. To implement a function from the 6HWWLQJV &)& menu, activate the menu by selecting (GLW, then 5XQ 6HTXHQFH, and then the desired task level (See Figure 5-27).

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-27

Configuration

Figure 5-27

Establishing the task level

Within the Run Sequence menu, select (GLW, and then 3UHGHFHVVRU IRU ,Q VWDOODWLRQ, to ensure that the function modules selected from the library will be implemented into the desired task level (Figure 5-28).

Figure 5-28

Assignment of function modules to the selected task level

The proper assignment is important for several reasons. For example, if interlocking logic were to be set up in the measured values task level, indications would constantly be created by the cyclical processing, filling the buffer unnecessarily. On the other hand, the interlocking condition at the moment of a switching operation may not be processed at the right time, since measured value processing is done only every 600 ms.

Table 5-3

Selection guide for function modules and task levels Run-Time Level Description Absolute value AND-gate Boolean to control (conversion)

Function Modules ABSVALUE AND BOOL_TO_CO

MW_BEARB Meter process.

PLC1_BEARB Slow PLC

PLC_BEARB Fast PLC

SFS_BEARB Interlocking

X X

X X

5-28

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Creating User Defined Functions with CFC

Table 5-3

Selection guide for function modules and task levels Run-Time Level Description Boolean to double point (conversion) Boolean to internal annunciation (conversion) Create double point annunciation Command information Connection D-flipflop Double point to boolean Live-zero, non linear curve X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Function Modules BOOL_TO_DI BOOL_TO_IC BUILD_DI CMD_INF CONNECT D_FF DI_TO_BOOL LIVE_ZERO

MW_BEARB Meter process.

PLC1_BEARB Slow PLC

PLC_BEARB Fast PLC

SFS_BEARB Interlocking

LOWER_SETPOINT Lower limit NAND NEG NOR OR RS_FF SR_FF TIMER LONG_TIMER NAND-gate Negator NOR-gate OR-gate RS-flipflop SR-flipflop Timer Long timer (max. 1193 h)

UPPER_SETPOINT Upper limit X_OR ZERO_POINT XOR-gate Zero suppression

Configuration Sheet

The configuration is performed within the configuration sheets (see Figure 5-29).

Configuration sheet 1
IS1
1

FM1
3 1

Input signals

FM2
3 1

FM3
2

IS2 IS3

2 2

OS4

Output signals

Function modules

Figure 5-29

Principal representation of function modules in a CFC working page

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-29

Configuration

The left border column of the configuration sheet shows the inputs; the right border column shows the outputs of a function. In the above diagram the inputs are connected with input signals IS1 to IS3. These may be indications from the breaker (via binary inputs), from device function keys, or from a protective function. The output signal (OS4 in the diagram) may control an output relay, for example, and can create entries in the message buffers, depending on the preset configuration. Configuring and Connecting Function Modules The default run-time sequence is determined by the sequence of the insertion of the logic modules. You may redefine the run-time sequence by pressing <CTRL> <F11> on the PC keyboard. Please refer to the CFC manual. The necessary function modules (FM) are contained in a library located to the right of the configuration chart. The module also indicates to which of the four run-time levels it is assigned. The modules possess at least one input and one output. In addition to these inputs and outputs, which are displayed on the configuration sheet, a module may have additional inputs. The additional inputs can be made visible by selecting the module title block, pressing the right mouse button, selecting the menu option 1XPEHU 2I ,2V (see Figure 5-30), and then increasing the number.

Figure 5-30

Example of an OR gate: module menu

Under the 2EMHFW 3URSHUWLHV menu, you may edit the name of the module, insert a comment, or edit run-time properties and connection parameters. Connecting modules with each other, and linking them with system input and output signals, is performed by selection of the desired modules input or output and subsequently pressing the right mouse button, and selecting the menu option ,QVHUW &RQ QHFWLRQ WR 2SHUDQG (see Figure 5-31).

Figure 5-31

Example of module input menu

5-30

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Creating User Defined Functions with CFC

A window with a list of input signals will appear. By selecting one of these signals and activating with 2., the selected signal is entered into the left border panel and, from there, a connection is created to the module input. Selection of an output is done in the same manner. A connection between two modules is established by a simple sequential clicking on the two connections. If the link line display becomes unwieldy or impossible because of space limitations, the CFC editor creates a pair of connectors (target icons) instead. The link is recognizable via correlated numbering (see Figure 5-32).

Connector

Figure 5-32

Connector

Consistency check

In addition to the sample configuration chart 1, other configuration sheets may exist. The contents of any particular configuration sheet is compiled by DIGSI 4 into a program and processed by the protective device. For CFC charts developed by the user, syntactic correctness can be verified by clicking the menu command &KDUW, and then &KHFN &RQVLVWHQF\. The consistency check will determine if the modules violate conventions of various task levels, or any of the space limitations described below. Check of functional correctness must be performed manually. The completed CFC chart can be saved via menu item &KDUW, and &ORVH. Likewise, the CFC chart may be reopened and edited by clicking on &KDUW, selecting the appropriate chart, and clicking on 2SHQ. Please note that certain limits and restrictions exist due to the available memory and processing time required. For each of the four PLC task levels there is only a finite processing time available within the processor system. Each module, each input to a module (whether connected or not), each link generated from the border columns demands a specific amount of processing time. The sum total of the individual processing times in a task level may not exceed the defined maximum processing time for this level. The processing time is measured in so called TICKS. In the 7SD610 the following maximum TICKS are permitted in the various task levels:

Table 5-4

Maximum number of TICKS in the task levels of 7SD610 Run-Time Level Limits in TICKS 10000 1900 200 10000

0:B%($5% (Measured value processing) 3/&B%($5% (Slow PLC processing) 3/&B%($5% (Fast PLC processing) 6)6B%($5% (Interlocking)

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-31

Configuration

In the following table, the amount of TICKS required by the individual elements of a CFC chart is shown. A generic module refers to a module for which the number of inputs can be changed. Typical examples are the logic modules AND, NAND, OR, NOR.

Table 5-5

Processing times in TICKS required by the individual elements Individual Element Amount of TICKS 5 1 6 7 1

Module, basic requirement each input more than 3 inputs for generic modules Connection to an input Connection to an output signal Additional for each configuration sheet

The utilized processor capacity which is available for the CFC can be checked under 2SWLRQ 5HSRUWV in the register &KHFN FRQVLVWHQF\. By scrolling, an area is reached, where information regarding the cumulated memory consumption of the memory reserved for CFC can be read in percent. Figure 5-33 is an example showing an over-utilization by 56 % in the task level PLC_BEARB (marked in the Figure), while the other task levels are within the permissible range.

Figure 5-33

Read-out of the CFC configuration degree of utilization

If the limits are exceeded during configuration of the CFC, DIGSI 4 issues a warning (refer to Figure 5-34). After acknowledgement of this alarm, the system utilisation can be viewed as described above.

5-32

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Creating User Defined Functions with CFC

Figure 5-34

Warning message on reaching the limits

A few examples are given below. Example 1 (MW): Low Current Monitor A configuration for low-current monitoring alarm (see Figure 5-35) which can be produced using CFC, should be a first example. This element may be used to detect operation without load, or to recognize open circuited conditions. By connecting measured current values with a limit function via an OR function, an indication may be generated which can be used to cause switching operations. The configuration sheet is assigned to task level MW_BEARB. Four function modules (3 lower-value limit modules and an OR gate), are taken from the function module library and copied into the configuration sheet. In the left panel, the measurement values to be monitored (IL1, IL2, IL3 in % of the nominal current) are each selected and connected with the measured value inputs of each limit module function. A lower limit setpoint value (IL<) is linked with the limit inputs of each of three limit sensor functions. The limit value function outputs are passed on to the OR gate. The output of the OR gate is connected to the right border column at annunciation , DODUP. The limit value message is triggered when the preset limit value is below the setpoint (low current) in at least one of the three phases. The hysteresis of the limit values is fixed and need not be entered (5 % of set point plus 0.5 % of nominal value).

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-33

Configuration

Lower Setpoint Set points IL<


Limit

Measurement IL2

Vol

FM: Lower Setpoint


Annunciation BO

Annunciation BO

Measurement IL1

Vol

FM:

FM:

>1

I< alarm OUT

Set points IL<

Limit

Lower Setpoint

Set points IL<

Figure 5-35

Under-current monitoring as an example of user defined measurement value processing

Example 2: Isolation Switch Interlocking

Interlocking logic (see Figure 5-36) is to be implemented for the operation of an isolating switch using function key 4. The user must take the switch position indications of the corresponding isolation switch and the grounding switch into account. The CLOSE and TRIP indications from the auxiliary contacts of each switch are used. Function modules NOR (2 required), XOR, and AND are taken from the library and copied into the working page. The number of inputs of the AND gate is increased to 7. The CLOSE indications from the circuit breaker (CB) and from the grounding switch (GS) are supplied to the inputs of the NOR functions. The OPEN indications from the circuit breaker (CB) and from the grounding switch (GS) are supplied to the inputs of the AND function. The switch position indications from the disconnect switch (IS) are linked to the inputs of the XOR function. The outputs of the NOR and XOR gates are connected to the inputs of the AND function. Function key 4 is linked with an input of the AND function. The output of the AND gate is linked to the right border column at the switching command Disconnector Close.

5-34

Limit

Annunciation BO

Measurement IL3

FM:
Vol

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Creating User Defined Functions with CFC

Function Key 4

CB is CLOSED CB is OPEN GS is CLOSED GS is OPEN IS is CLOSED IS is OPEN Door is CLOSED

&
Disconnector Close

=1

Figure 5-36

Interlocking an disconnect switch as an example of a user defined interlock protective function

Example 3 (PLC1): Additional Logic

By using slow PLC processing, an additional, event-driven logic condition may be constructed which delivers indications regarding switch-gear operating status. These indications may be passed externally via LEDs or relay contacts, or used as input signals for further logical links. In the example (see Figure 5-37), the output information indication from the circuit breaker interlocking logic (CB TRIP) and a joint indication from all protective element trip signals (Protection TRIP) are linked to a new &LUFXLW %UHDNHU 2SHUDWLRQ message. Furthermore, the single point indication (SP) 7HVW 2SHU, which may be coupled via a binary input, is linked with an internal reusable 7HVW RSHU message.

CB TRIP
Protection TRIP

Circuit Breaker Operation

>Test Oper.

Test Oper.

Figure 5-37

Additional logic as an example for a PLC_1 event-driven logic condition

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-35

Configuration

5.4

Serial Interfaces
The device contains one or more serial interfaces: an operator interface integrated into the front panel, and depending on the model ordered a service interface and a system interface for connection of a central control system. Certain standards are necessary for communication via these interfaces, which contain device identification, transfer protocol, and transfer speed. Configuration of these interfaces is performed using the DIGSI 4 software program. Click on 6HWWLQJ in the navigation window and double-click in the data window on 6HULDO 3RUWV. Next, select the specific data in the resulting dialogue box (Figure 538). The dialogue box contains a varying number of tabs (depending on the capabilities of the PC and the relay) with setting options for the interfaces.

Figure 5-38

DIGSI 4, Settings of the PC interface

Serial port on PC

In the first tab, you enter the communication interface of the PC which is connected to the 7SD610 relay (&20 &20 etc.). Manual entry of settings for data format and baud-rate need not be made if these values were taken from the RSHUDWRU LQWHU IDFH tab or the VHUYLFH LQWHUIDFH tab (if present). In fact, many settings are read from DIGSI 4 directly via the interface, and the corresponding setting fields are then inaccessible (see Figure 5-38). Alternatively, the option ,QGHSHQGHQW RI GH YLFH may be selected. Data exchange is monitored by the PC for the reaction times of the device. You may, within preset limits, configure maximum relay reaction times. The displayed values RQ 1 and RQ 2 correspond to the preset reaction times in milliseconds. In general, these values should not be modified. Modification is only necessary if a time-out often occurs during communication with the device. In order to modify these values, enter an integer value for RQ 1, between 200 and 9999, and for RQ 2, from 0 to 9999.

5-36

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Serial Interfaces

Service and Operator Interface

Settings for the interfaces at the device can performed in these tabs. The link addresses and maximum message gap appear in the 6HUYLFH ,QWHUIDFH and 2SHUDWRU ,QWHUIDFH tab besides the settings for data format and transfer speed (example Figure 5-39).

Figure 5-39

DIGSI 4, Settings for the service interface example

For the ,(& communication, each SIPROTEC device must have a unique IEC address assigned to it. Only the addresses which are within the current address range and have not yet been occupied are displayed. The setting for the maximum message gap is only applicable when the device is to communicate using a modem via one of the interfaces. A gap is the maximum allowable time duration of interrupted transmission within one telegram transmission. Transfer gaps are created when using modems as a result of data compression, error correction, and baud-rate differences. For good data transmission between modems, a setting of  sec is recommended. For poor connections, this value should be increased. Large values slow down communications in case of errors. When using a direct PC connection, 0D[ PHVVDJH JDSV may be set to  sec.

Note:
Do not use operator interface for modem communication!.

Other Interfaces

Enter specific settings and addresses to identify devices in the other tabs, if necessary, or check the preset values.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-37

Configuration

Device addresses are used by the system to identify each device and must be unique throughout the substation. Detailed instructions for setting the interfaces are available in the DIGSI 4 Communications manual. If you desire to expand or modify interfaces later, refer to the modification instructions for the interfaces, and if necessary for the hardware, see also instructions in Sub-section 8.1.3 of this manual. Profibus FMS on the PC For a Profibus connection if available between a SIPROTEC device and the SICAM SAS or DIGSI 4, a minimum transfer rate of 500 kBaud is recommended for disturbance-free communication. For optical connections, the signal idle state is preset for light off. Modification of the signal idle state is accomplished in the tab for the interface settings (see Figure 5-40).

Signal Idle State

Figure 5-40

Settings for an optical interface example

Reading and Modifying Interface Settings at the Device

Reading and partial modification of the most important interface settings is possible, using the key-pad and display on the device panel. You may access the setting page for the interface via 0$,1 0(18 through 6HWWLQJV 6HWXS([WUDV 6HULDO 3RUWV. Under the sub-menu title 6(5,$/ 32576, you will find )URQW, 6\VWHP, and 6HUYLFH 3RUW, and selections may be made using the navigation button. By pressing the button, the sub-menu for a particular interface can be accessed. The display and the ability to change settings directly at the device are the same at both the front and service interfaces. Figure 5-41 shows the data of the front (operator) interface, as an example.

5-38

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Serial Interfaces

)5217 3257   !3K\V$GGU !!!!! !%DXGUDWH  %DXG 3DULW\ ( ',*6, *DSV VHF
Figure 5-41 Reading and setting the front interface at the device panel

The type and number of system interface(s) is dependent on the device type and version and might be completely missing. The system interface data may be read at the device, but cannot be modified there, whereas the data for the operator and service interface can be modified. In addition to the settings already mentioned for the operator and service interfaces, the signal idle state for an optical link may also be read at the device. For an electrical interface, the response 2))6LJ ,QDFWLYH appears as shown in Figure 5-42.

6<67(0 3257  !,(& !  >3URILEXV ! 

,(&  !3K\V$GGUHVV !  !%DXGUDWH  %DXG 3DULW\ ( ',*6, *DSV VHF 2))6LJ ,QDFWLYH

Figure 5-42

Read-out of system interface setting values in the device display example

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-39

Configuration

5.5

Date and Time Stamping


Integrated date and time stamping allows for the exact evaluation of sequence of events, e.g. operational or fault messages (event log or trip log), or limit violations. The following clock settings are available: Internal RTC clock (Real Time Clock), External synchronization sources (DCF, IRIG B, SyncBox, IEC 60870-5-103), External minute impulses via binary input.

Note:
The device is delivered from the factory with the internal RTC clock selected as the time source. For the differential protection with 7SD610 devices the time usually is synchronized in only one device, the so-called Timing Master device; generally it is the device with index 1. It synchronizes the other device via the protection communication. Thus it can be assured that both devices of the protection system operate on the same time basis. Note that this time synchronization is different from synchronization of the measured values of the differential protection system. The operation of the differential protection system including the synchronous exchange of measured values works automatically and independent on this time synchronization. Time Synchronization Settings for time synchronization may be found in DIGSI 4 under 6HWWLQJV 7LPH V\QFKURQL]DWLRQ (Figure 5-43).

Figure 5-43

Setting Window in DIGSI 4 example

5-40

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Date and Time Stamping


To open the 7LPH 6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ 6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ. See Figure 5-44. )RUPDW window, double-click on 7LPH

Figure 5-44

Dialogue box for time synchronization and format in DIGSI 4

You may select the time standard for internal time stamping from the following modes:

Table 5-6 Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Operating modes for time synchronization Operating Mode Explanations Internal synchronization using RTC External synchronization using the system interface and the IEC 608705103 protocol External synchronization using IRIG B External synchronization using DCF 77 External synchronization using SIMEAS Sync. Box External synchronization with pulse via binary input

IQWHUQDO &ORFN ,(&  ,5,* % 7LPH VLJQDO '&) 7LPH VLJQDO SIMEAS time signal 6\QF %R[ 3XOVH YLD ELQDU\ LQSXW ,QWHUQDO RU 7LPLQJ 0DVWHU ,E&  RU 7LPLQJ 0DVWHU ,R,* % RU 7LPLQJ 0DVWHU '&F RU 7LPLQJ 0DVWHU 6\QF BR[ RU 7LPLQJ 0DVWHU %LQDU\ LQSXW RU 7LPLQJ 0DV WHU

as Item 1 to 6 but the time is normally synchronized by the timing master; only in case if transmission failure the time is synchronized by the selected source

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-41

Configuration

The RTC runs, even when the auxiliary voltage is absent, by means of an internal battery. During the device powering up, or if the auxiliary voltage has failed, this RTC is the first synchronization source for the internal clock, independent of operating mode selected. In ,QWHUQDO mode, the system time is controlled using only the RTC as the synchronization source. It may be set manually. The procedure for manual date/time setting is given in Section 7.2.1. If an external source is selected, only the selected synchronization source is used. If the source fails, the internal clock continues unsynchronized. If time synchronization is to take place via a master control system, the option ,(& must be selected (Figure 5-44). When using radio clock signals, you must take into account that it can take up to three minutes after device start-up or restored reception for the received time signal to be decoded. The internal clock is not re-synchronized until then. With IRIG B, the year must be set manually, because this standard does not include a year value. Note: If in IRIG B the year date is erroneously set to a year date before 1991, the year is set to 1991 during the first synchronization. For synchronization using pulses via a binary input, the present device time will advance to 00 seconds of the next minute for values greater than or equal 30 seconds when the positive slope of the pulse arrives. For second values less than 30, the device time will be set to 00 seconds of the current minute. Because this signal is not monitored, each pulse has a direct effect on the internal clock. For the device wherein the time is normally synchronized by the Timing Master, set one of the options adding RU WLPLQJ PDVWHU (Item 7 to 12 in Table 5-6). The indicated time is then only applied by the device if it does not receive a time from the Timing master. Synchronization Offset The Synchronization Offset (7LPH FRUUHFWLRQ) setting allows correlation of the time signal received from the radio clock to local time (time zone). The maximum settable offset is 23 h 59 min = 1439 min. The tolerance time (0RQLWRULQJ / )DXOW LQGLFDWLRQ DIWHU) for time synchronization fault indicates how long cyclical synchronization may be absent until an alarm is given. External or internal synchronization normally occurs every minute. The setting for the tolerance time must, therefore, always be at least two minutes. Under poor radio clock reception conditions, you may delay the trigger of the error status condition even longer. Changing the Synchronization Mode When changing synchronization mode, the hardware will change over to the new source within one second. This causes breakdown of cyclical synchronization, and the internal clock will be disrupted as at start-up until the new synchronization source takes over. After modification to the synchronization offset in the time signal/operating mode, or when changing year in IRIG B, the cyclical synchronization is not lost, but there is a jump. To call attention to this, the time value causing a jump is reported with 7LPH

Error Message Based on Tolerance Time

5-42

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Date and Time Stamping


LQWHUUXSWLRQ 21 without the synchronization offset, and subsequently with 7LPH LQWHUUXSWLRQ 2)) with the synchronization offset. Operating Messages from the Timing System After the 7LPH LQWHUUXSWLRQ 21 message, the you must take into account that the clock will jump. This message is issued under the following circumstances: if a synchronization interruption lasts longer than the tolerance time interval mentioned above, or as mentioned above, if the synchronization mode is changed; if a time jump is anticipated. The message itself is stamped with the old time. The message 7LPH LQWHUUXSWLRQ 2)) is triggered: when the synchronization is re-established (e.g., after a break in reception by the radio clock); immediately after a time jump. This message is stamped with the new time after the jump, thus allowing determination of the jump interval. Time Format The time display may be set using either the European format (DD.MM.YYYY) or the US format (MM/DD/YYYY). n

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

5-43

Configuration

5-44

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Functions

6
This chapter describes the numerous functions available in the SIPROTEC 7SD610 relay. The setting options for each function are defined, including instructions for reporting setting values and formulae where required. 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.13 6.14 6.15 6.16 General Differential Protection Breaker Intertrip and Remote Tripping Protection Data Interfaces and Differential Protection Topology Direct Local Trip Direct Remote Trip or Transmission of Binary Information Instantaneous High-speed SOTF Protection Time Overcurrent Protection Automatic Reclosure Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Thermal Overload Protection Monitoring functions Function Control Commissioning Tools Ancillary Functions Processing of Commands 6-2 6-23 6-36 6-40 6-47 6-49 6-50 6-54 6-69 6-95 6-111 6-115 6-127 6-139 6-141 6-148

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-1

Functions

6.1

General
A few seconds after the device is switched on, the initial display appears in the LCD. In the 7SD610 the measured values are displayed. The setting parameters can be entered via the keypad and display on the front of the device, or by means of a personal computer connected to the front or service interface of the device utilising the DIGSI 4 software package. The level 5 password (individual parameters) is required.

From the Device Front

Select the 0$,1 0(18 by pressing the MENU key. Using the key, select 6HWWLQJV, and then press the key to navigate to the 6(77,1*6 display (see Figure 6-1). In the 6(77,1*6 display, use the key to select the desired function, and then use the key to navigate to that function (e.g., use the key to select the 36\VWHP 'DWD function, and then use the key to navigate to the 36<67(0 '$7$display, as shown in Figure 6-2. In general, an item number appears in the menu list to the right of each selection. Navigation can be accomplished using the item number in place of the and keys. This feature is particularly helpful in large menus (e.g., setting lists). Based on the example above, from the 0$,1 0(18, the 6(77,1*6 display can be reached by pressing 4 on the keypad, and then the 36<67(0 '$7$ display can be reached by pressing 0 3 on the keypad.

0$,1 0(18   $QQXQFLDWLRQ !  0HDVXUHPHQW !  &RQWURO !  6HWWLQJV !  7HVW'LDJQRVLV! 

6(77,1*6   'HYLFH &RQILJ!  0DVNLQJ ,2 !  36\VWHP 'DWD!  $FWLYH *URXS LV $

Figure 6-1

Example of navigation from the front control panel

Each setting contains a four-digit address number followed by the setting title as shown in Figure 6-2. The value of the current setting is displayed in the line just below the setting address number and title. The value may be text (Figure 6-2, setting ) or numerical (Figure 6-2, setting ).

36<67(0 '$7$    &7 6WDUSRLQW WRZDUGV /LQH  8QRP 35,0$5< N9
Figure 6-2 Example of power system data display

6-2

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

General

Settings are selected using the and keys. When the ENTER key is pressed, the user is prompted for a password. The user should enter Password No. 5 and then press the ENTER key. The current value of the setting appears in a text box, with a blinking text insertion cursor. Text Values A text setting may be modified using the options. and keys to select one of two or more

Numerical Values (including )

A numerical setting may be modified by overwriting the current value using the numerical keypad. See Figure 6-3. A value of infinity may be entered by pressing the decimal key twice . . . The symbol will appear in the display. If the number entered is not within allowable limits, the maximum or minimum allowable value will appear in the lower portion of the display. To enter a new, allowable value, the ENTER key should be pressed again. Note that measured values and limit values must be entered in secondary quantities when using the front control panel of the device.

Confirmation

Any modification to a setting value must be confirmed by pressing the ENTER key. A blinking asterisk is an indication that setting modification mode is still open. Other modifications can be made to settings, even in sub-menus (if present), as long as setting modification mode is still open. The actual modification of settings occurs once setting modification mode is closed (see below, Exiting the Setting Mode).

36<67(0 '$7$   !8QRP 35,0$5< ! !N9 3: 6HWWLQJV"   8QRP 35,0$5<

Example for numerical setting:


ENTER

Enter password No. 5 and confirm with


ENTER



Enter the new value and confirm with

ENTER

36<67(0 '$7$ [   8QRP 35,0$5< > > > N9
Figure 6-3

The modified setting value appears in the list; a blinking asterisk in the title bar indicates setting modification mode is still open.

Example of setting modification using the front control panel

If a setting modification is not confirmed with the ENTER key, the original value reappears after one minute, and a message window appears after three minutes notifying the user that the setting modification period has expired. When the ENTER key is pressed, a further message window appears, notifying the user that the setting modifications were discarded. Further modification of settings is possible by pressing the ENTER key and re-entering the password.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-3

Functions

Exiting the Setting Mode

If an attempt is made to exit setting modification mode using the key or the MENU key, the message $UH \RX VXUH" will be displayed followed by the responses <HV 1R and (VFDSH (see Figure 6-4). If the response <HV is selected, modification of settings can be confirmed by pressing the ENTER key. To cancel pending modifications to settings and exit setting modification mode, the response 1R must be selected. Press the key until the response 1R is highlighted. Press the ENTER key to confirm and exit. Incorrect entries may be retracted in this manner. To remain in the setting modification mode, press the key until the response (VFDSH is highlighted. Press the ENTER key to confirm, and the user can remain in setting modification mode without down-loading modifications.

$UH \RX VXUH" !<HV 1R (VFDSH 6HWWLQJV DUH RN !&RQWLQXH


Figure 6-4

ENTER

ENTER

Ending the setting mode using the front control panel

From PC with DIGSI 4

When using DIGSI 4, the settings can be carried out 2IIOLQH. Double-click on 3DUDPHWHUV to display the relevant selection. Select the desired option, e.g. 3RZHU 6\VWHP 'DWD , in the right-hand panel of the window and double-click it (Figure 6-5).

Figure 6-5

Parameterizing with DIGSI 4 an example

The dialogue box for defining the individual parameters of the selected function is displayed. In our example we selected 3RZHU 6\VWHP GDWD  (Figure 6-6). For extensive functions, the parameters may be span several pages that can be accessed by clicking on the tabs at the top border (in example Figure 6-6 3RZHU V\VWHP data and %UHDNHU).

6-4

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

General

Figure 6-6

Power system data with DIGSI 4 an example

Each parameter has a 4-digit address number (under 1R) followed by the designation of the parameter (under 6HWWLQJV). Column 9DOXH can contain a figure or text. If you position the cursor in the column 9DOXH on a field with a numerical value, the admissible input range will be indicated. Click on the value which you want to alter. Text Values A drop-down list with the possible statuses is displayed for text parameters. Click on the desired option. The drop-down list closes and the new value appears in the text field. Numerical values are entered by direct input, if necessary with decimal comma (not dot!). For infinite you enter two small letters oo one after the other. Confirm the input with the button $FFHSW or proceed to a different value which you want to alter. If the value entered is not within the admissible range of values or if a symbol has been entered which is not admissible, a corresponding message will appear on the display. After acknowledging with 2., the unaltered value is displayed. You can now make a new input or alter a different parameter. Primary or Secondary Values Numerical values derived from measured quantities can be entered as either primary or secondary values. DIGSI 4 converts them automatically provided that the CT data and the transformation ratios have been entered correctly.

Numerical Values (incl. )

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-5

Functions

To toggle between the input of secondary and primary values, proceed as follows:

q Click on 2SWLRQV in the menu bar (see Figure 6-7). q Select the desired alternative by clicking on it.

Figure 6-7

Selecting the input of primary or secondary values - an example

Additional Settings

Some parameters which are only used in exceptional cases or for special applications may be hidden initially. They can be viewed if you click on 'LVSOD\ $GGLWLRQDO 6HWWLQJV. Each entry may be confirmed by clicking $SSO\. Valid values are accepted automatically when another field is selected. The final acceptance of a modified setting takes place once the setting mode is exited (see below Exiting the Setting Mode). The dialogue box may be closed by clicking 2.. Once closed, another function may be selected for setting modification, or you can exit the setting mode.

Confirmation

Exiting the Setting Mode

In order to transfer the modified setting values to the relay, the user should click on ',*6, 'HYLFH. The user will be prompted for Password No. 5. After entering the password and confirming with 2., data is transferred to the relay where modifications become effective.

6-6

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

General

6.1.1

Power System Data 1


The device requires some plant and power system data in order to be able to adapt its functions accordingly. The data required include for instance rated data of the station and the measuring transformer, polarity and connection of the measured quantities, if necessary features of the circuit breakers, and others. These data are grouped under Power System Data 1. Press MENU to open the main menu. Select the option 6(77,1*6 with key and with key the menu 6HWWLQJV. Select 3RZHU 6\VWHP 'DWD  in the menu 6(77,1*6 to enter the power system data. With DIGSI 4 double-click on 6HWWLQJV to display the relevant selection.

Polarity of the Current Transformers

Address  &7 6WDUSRLQW asks for the polarity of the current transformers, i.e. the position of the transformer star-point (Figure 6-8). The setting defines the measuring direction of the device (current in line direction is defined as positive at both line ends). The reversal of this parameter also reverses the polarity of the ground current input IE.

Busbar

IL1 IL2 IL3 IE

IE IL1 IL2 IL3

Line

Line

! 8UThv 2/LQH


Figure 6-8

! 8UThv 2%XVEDU

Polarity of the current transformers

Rated Quantities of the Instrument Transformers

In principle, the differential protection is designed such that it can operate without measured voltages. However, voltages can be connected. These voltages allow to display and log voltages, and to calculate various components of power. If necessary, they can also serve for determining the line voltage in case of automatic reclosure. During configuration of the device functions (Section 5.1), it has been determined whether the device is to work with or without measured voltages. In the addresses  8QRP 35,0$5< and  8QRP 6(&21'$5< you inform the device of the primary and secondary rated voltage (phase-to-phase) of the voltage transformers. These settings are not relevant if no voltage transformers are connected and configured when determining the functional scope according to Section 5.1. In the addresses  &7 35,0$5< and  &7 6(&21'$5< you inform the device of the primary and secondary rated currents of the voltage transformers (phases). Address  &7 6(&21'$5< must correspond to the nominal current of the device, otherwise the processor system cannot be started. Also make sure that the secondary rated CT currents are in accordance with the rated current of the device, because otherwise the device will calculate wrong primary data.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-7

Functions

The correct primary data are required for the calculation of the proper primary information of the operational measured values. If the device is configured with primary values using DIGSI 4, these primary data are an indispensable requirement for the fault-free operation of the device. Connection of the Voltages Four inputs for measured voltages are available if the device is connected to the voltage transformers. This section is not relevant if no voltages are connected. Three voltage inputs are connected to the voltage transformer set. Various possibilities exist for the fourth voltage input U4: Connect the input U4 to the open delta winding en of the voltage transformer set, see also Appendix A, Figure A-6: Address  is set in that case to: 8 WUDQVIRUPHU = 8GHOWD WUDQVIRUPHU. With U4 connected to the enwindings of the voltage transformer set, the voltage transformation of the transformer is normally U Nprim ---------------3
Nsec Nsec --------------- --------------3 3

The factor Uph/Uen (secondary voltage, address  8SK  8GHOWD) must be set to 3/3 = 3 1.73. For other transformation ratios, e.g. for the calculation of the residual voltage via interposed transformer set, the factor must be adapted accordingly. This factor is important for the monitoring of measured quantities and the scaling of the measured values and fault values. If the input U4 is not required, set: Address  8 WUDQVIRUPHU = QRW FRQQHFWHG. In this case as well, the factor 8SK  8GHOWD (address , see above) is important, since it is used for the scaling of the measured values and the fault values. Connection of the Currents The device has four measured current inputs, three of which are connected to the current transformer set. Various possibilities exist for the fourth current input I4: Connect the input I4 to the residual current of the CT star-point of the protected line (standard circuit arrangement, see also Appendix A, Figure A-3): Address  is set in that case to: , WUDQVIRUPHU = 1HXWUDO FXUUHQW and Address  ,,SK &7 = . Connect the input I4 to a separate ground current transformer of the protected line (e.g. a summation current transformer, see also Appendix A, Figure A-4). Address  is set in that case to: , WUDQVIRUPHU = 1HXWUDO FXUUHQW and Address  ,,SK &7 is set to: Transformation of ground current transformer I 4 I ph CT = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Transformation of phase current transformers Example: Phase-current transformer Ground-leakage current transformer 60 1 I 4 I ph CT = ---------------- = 0.600 500 5 500 A/5 A 60 A/1 A

6-8

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

General
If the input I4 is not required, set: Address  , WUDQVIRUPHU = QRW FRQQHFWHG, Address  ,,SK &7 is not relevant. In this case, the neutral current is calculated from the sum total of the phase currents. Rated Frequency The rated frequency of the network is set under address  5DWHG )UHTXHQF\. The default setting is made in the factory in accordance with the design variant and needs to be changed only if the device is to be used for a different purpose than ordered for. It can be set to  +] or  +]. The minimum trip command duration 70LQ 75,3 &0' is set in address $. This duration is valid for all protection and control functions which can issue a trip command. It also determines the duration of a tripping pulse during the circuit breaker test via the device. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. The maximum duration of a closing command 70D[ &/26( &0' is set in address $. This setting is valid for all closing commands of the device. It also determines the duration of a closing pulse during the circuit breaker test via the device. This duration must be long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker has closed. There is no risk in setting it too long, because the closing command is interrupted in any case as soon as a protective function trips the circuit breaker again. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. Circuit Breaker Test 7SD610 allows a circuit breaker test during operation by means of a tripping and a closing command entered on the front panel or via DIGSI 4. The duration of the commands is set as explained above. Address  7&%WHVWGHDG determines the time from the end of the tripping command until the beginning of the closing command during the test. It should not be less than 0.1 s. The basic principle of the differential protection assumes that all currents flowing into a healthy protected section add up to zero. If the current transformer sets at the line ends have different transformation errors in the overcurrent range, the sum of the secondary currents can reach considerable peaks due to the saturation of the transformers when a short-circuit current flows through the line. These peaks may feign an internal short-circuit. The features included in the 7SD610 to prevent errors in case of current-transformer saturation work completely satisfying if the protection knows the response characteristic of the current transformers. For this, the characteristic data of the current transformers and of their secondary circuits are set (see also Figure 6-15 in Subsection 6.2.1, page 6-25). The preset values are adequate in most cases; they correspond to usual current transformers for protection purposes. The rated accuracy limit factor n of the current transformers and the rated power PN are usually stated on the rating plate of the current transformers. The information stated refers to reference conditions (rated current, rated burden). For example (according to DIN 0414/Part 1 or IEC 60185) Current transformer 10P10; 30 VA n = 10; PN = 30 VA Current transformer 10P20; 20 VA n = 20; PN = 20 VA

Trip Command Duration

Current Transformer Characteristics

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-9

Functions

The operational accuracy limit factor n is derived from this rated data and the actual secondary burden P: PN + Pi n' --- = -----------------n P' + P i with n = n = PN= Pi = P = operational accuracy limit factor (effective accuracy limit factor) rated accuracy limit factor of CTs (distinctive number behind P) rated burden of current transformers [VA] for rated current inherent burden of the current transformers [VA] at rated current actually connected burden (devices + secondary lines) [VA] at rated current

Usually, the inherent burden of current transformers is stated in the test report. If unknown, it can be calculated roughly from the d.c. resistance Ri of the secondary winding. P i Ri I N 2 The ratio between the operational accuracy limit factor and the rated accuracy limit factor n'/n is parameterized under address  .B$/).B$/)B1. The CT error at rated current is set under address  ( $/)$/)B1. It is equal to the current measuring deviation for primary rated current intensity F1 according to DIN 0414/ Part 1 or IEC 60185. It is 1 % for a 5P transformer, 3 % for a 10P transformer. The CT error for rated accuracy limit factors is set under address  ( It is derived from the number preceding the P of the transformer data. .B$/)B1.

With this data the device establishes an approximate CT error characteristic and calculates the restraint (see also Section 6.2.1). Exemplary calculation: Current transformer 5P10; 20 VA transformation 600 A/5 A inherent burden 2 VA Secondary lines 4 mm2 Cu length 20 m Device 7SD610 burden at 5 A IN = 5 A 0.3 VA

The resistance of secondary lines is (with the resistivity for copper Cu = 0.0175 mm2/m) 20 m mm R i = 2 0.0175 ----------------- ----------------- = 0.175 2 m 4 mm Here, the most unfavourable case is assumed, i.e. the current (as it is the case with single-phase faults) flows back and forth via the secondary lines (factor 2). From that the power for rated current IN = 5 A is calculated Pi = 0.175 (5 A)2 = 4.375 VA The entire connected burden consists of the burden of the incoming lines and the burden of the device: 6-10
2

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

General

P = 4.375 VA + 0.3 VA = 4.675 VA Thus the ratio of the accuracy limit factors is as follows PN + Pi n' 20 VA + 2 VA --- = ------------------ = ------------------------------------------- = 3.30 n 4.375 VA + 2 VA P' + P i This leads to the following setting values: Address  .B$/).B$/)B1 =  Address  ( $/)$/)B1 =  Address  ( .B$/)B1 =  (from the calculation above) (from the accuracy for rated current) (from 5 P10) $/)$/)B1 is set

The presettings correspond to current transformers 10P with rated burden. Naturally only those settings are sensible where address  ( lower than address  ( .B$/)B1. Power Transformer with Voltage Regulation

If the protected object covers a power transformer with voltage regulation, a differential current may occur even during normal healthy operation under steady-state conditions. This differential current depends on the current intensity as well as on the position of the tap changer of the transformer. Since this current is current-proportional it is meaningful to consider it like a current transformer error. You may calculate the maximum differential current at the limits of the tap changer under nominal conditions (referred to the mean current) and add it to the current transformer error as discussed above (addresses  and ). This correction is performed only at that relay facing the regulated winding of the power transformer. Exemplary calculation: Transformer YNd5 35 MVA 110 kV/25 kV Yside regulated

10 %

From this resulting: rated current at nominal voltage I N = 184 A rated current at UN + 10 % Imin = 167 A rated current at UN 10 % Imax = 202 A I min + I max 167 A + 202 A mean current value I mean = -------------------------- = ------------------------------------ = 184.5 A 2 2 The maximum deviation from this mean current is I max I mean 202 A 184.5 A max. deviation max = ------------------------------ = ----------------------------------------- = 0.095 = 9.5 % 184.5 A I mean This maximum deviation max [in %] is added to the current transformer errors as determinded above, addresses  ( $/)$/)B1 and  ( .B$/)B1. It must be considered that this deviation is referred to the mean current value between the extrema of the tap changer position at rated apparent power, not to the current value at rated voltage and rated power. This demands a further correnction of the data of the pretected object as discussed in Sub-section 6.1.3 under subtitle Topological Data for Transformers (optional) (page 6-16).

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-11

Functions

6.1.1.1

Setting Overview

Note: The setting ranges and presettings listed in this table refer to a nominal current value IN = 1 A. For a secondary nominal current value IN = 5 A the current values are to be multiplied by 5. For setting primary values the transformation ratio of the transformers also must be taken into consideration. The presetting of the nominal frequency corresponds to the nominal frequency according to the device version.
Addr. 201 203 204 205 206 210 211 220 Setting Title CT Starpoint Unom PRIMARY Unom SECONDARY CT PRIMARY CT SECONDARY U4 transformer Uph / Udelta I4 transformer Setting Options towards Line towards Busbar 0.4..800.0 kV 80..125 V 10..5000 A 1A 5A not connected Udelta transformer 0.10..9.99 not connected Neutral Current (of the protected line) 0.010..5.000 50 Hz 60 Hz 0.02..30.00 sec 0.01..30.00 sec 0.00..30.00 sec 1.00..10.00 0.5..50.0 % 0.5..50.0 % Default Setting towards Line 11.0 kV 100 V 400 A 1A not connected 1.73 not connected Comments CT Starpoint Rated Primary Voltage Rated Secondary Voltage (L-L) CT Rated Primary Current CT Rated Secondary Current U4 voltage transformer is Matching ratio Phase-VT To Open-Delta-VT I4 current transformer is

221 230 240A 241A 242 251 253 254

I4/Iph CT Rated Frequency TMin TRIP CMD TMax CLOSE CMD T-CBtest-dead K_ALF/K_ALF_N E% ALF/ALF_N E% K_ALF_N

1.000 50 Hz 0.10 sec 1.00 sec 0.10 sec 1.00 5.0 % 10.0 %

Matching ratio I4/Iph for CTs Rated Frequency Minimum TRIP Command Duration Maximum Close Command Duration Dead Time for CB test-autoreclosure k_alf/k_alf nominal CT Error in % at k_alf/k_alf nominal CT Error in % at k_alf nominal

6-12

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

General

6.1.2

Setting Groups
A setting group is a collection of setting values to be used for a particular application. In the 7SD610 relay, four independent setting groups (A to D) are possible. The user can switch between setting groups locally, via binary inputs (if so configured), via the operator or service interface using a personal computer, or via the system interface. A setting group includes the setting values for all functions that have been selected as (QDEOHG during configuration (see Chapter 5). Whilst setting values may vary among the four setting groups, the selected functions of each setting group remain the same. Multiple setting groups allows a specific relay to be used for more than one application. While all setting groups are stored in the relay, only one setting group may be active at a given time. If multiple setting groups are not required, Group A is the default selection, and the rest of this sub-section is of no importance. If multiple setting groups are desired, address  *US &KJH 237,21 must have been set to (QDEOHG in the relay configuration. Refer to Chapter 5. Each of these sets (A to D) is adjusted one after the other.

Purpose of Setting Groups

Copying Setting Groups

In most cases, only a few settings will vary from setting group to setting group. For this reason, an option exists to copy stored setting values from one setting group to another setting group using DIGSI 4: To copy the setting values from setting group to another setting group, you should highlight the setting group in the list whose setting values are to be copied. Next, go to the menu bar, click on (GLW and select &RS\ (see Figure 6-9).

Figure 6-9

Copying a setting group in DIGSI 4

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-13

Functions

The next step is to highlight the name of setting group in the list into which the setting values should be copied. Go to the menu bar, click on (GLW and select 3DVWH. A confirmation box will appear (see Figure 6-10). Select <HV to copy the setting values.

Note:
All existing setting values in the setting group that has been copied to will be overwritten. An inadvertent copy operation can be reversed by closing and reopening the DIGSI 4 session without saving changes.

Figure 6-10

DIGSI 4: Confirmation before copying a setting group

Setting groups may be copied more easily using the Drag & Drop feature. To use the Drag & Drop feature, the name of the setting group in the list whose setting values are to be copied should be highlighted. Holding down the left mouse button, the cursor can then be dragged to the name of the setting group into which the setting values are to be copied. After copying setting groups, it is only necessary to modify those setting values that are to be set differently. Restoring Factory Settings The factory settings may be restored for a modified setting group. To restore factory settings to a setting group, the name of the setting group whose settings are to be restored is highlighted. Next, select the menu option (GLW and then click on 5HVHW. A confirmation box appears, click on <HV to confirm restoration of factory settings.

Note:
All setting values in the setting group being restored to factory settings will be overwritten. An inadvertent reset operation can be reversed by closing and reopening the DIGSI 4 session without saving changes.

Switching between Setting Groups

The procedure to switch from one setting group to another during operations is described in Sub-section 7.2.2. The option of switching between several setting groups externally via binary inputs is described in Subsection 8.1.2.

6-14

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

General

6.1.2.1
Addr. 301

Setting Overview
Setting Title ACTIVE GROUP Setting Options Group A Group B Group C Group D Group A Group B Group C Group D Binary Input Protocol Default Setting Group A Comments Active Setting Group is

302

CHANGE

Group A

Change to Another Setting Group

6.1.2.2
F.No. 7 8

Information Overview
Alarm >Set Group Bit0 >Set Group Bit1 Group A Group B Group C Group D >Setting Group Select Bit 0 >Setting Group Select Bit 1 Group A Group B Group C Group D Comments

6.1.3

General Protection Data


General protection data (36<67(0 '$7$) includes settings associated with all functions rather than a specific protective or monitoring function. In contrast to the 36<67(0 '$7$ as discussed in Sub-section 6.1.1, these settings can be changed over with the setting groups. To modify these settings, select the 6(77,1*6 menu option *URXS $ (setting group A), and then 36\VWHP 'DWD. The other setting groups are *URXS % *URXS &, and *URXS ', as described in Subsection 6.1.2.

Rated Values of Protected Lines

The statements under this subtitle refer to protected lines (cables or overhead lines) if no power transformer is situated within the protected zone, i.e. for models without transformer option or if the transformer option is disabled during configuration of the scope of function (address  75$16)250(5 = 12, see Section 5.1). If a transformer is part of the protected zone, proceed with the next subtitle Topological Data for Transformers (optional).

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-15

Functions
With address  )XOO6FDOH9ROW you inform the device of the primary rated voltage (phase-to-phase) of the equipment to be protected. This setting influence the displays of the operational measured values in %. The primary rated current (address  )XOO6FDOH&XUU) is that of the protected object. For cables the thermal continuous current-loading capacity can be selected. For overhead lines the rated current is usually not defined; set the rated current of the current transformers (as set in address , Section 6.1.1). If the current transformers have different rated currents at the ends of the protected object, set the highest rated current value for both ends. This setting will not only have an impact on the indication of the operational measured values in per cent, but must also be exactly the same for both ends of the protected object, since it is the base for the current comparison at both ends. Topological Data for Transformers (optional) The statements under this subtitle apply to protected objects which cover a power transformer being situated within the protected zone, i.e. for models with transformer option and if the transformer option is enabled during configuration of the scope of function (address  75$16)250(5 = <(6, see Section 5.1). If no transformer is part of the protected zone, this subtitle can be passed over. The topological data make it possible to relate all measured quantities to the rated data of the power transformer. With address  )XOO6FDOH9ROW you inform the device of the primary rated voltage (phase-to-phase) of the transformer to be protected. This setting is also needed for computing the current reference value of the differential protection. Therefore, it is important to set the correct rated voltage for each end of the protected object even if no measured voltages are connected to the relay. In general, select the rated voltage of the transformer winding facing the device. But, if the protected transformer is equipped with a voltage tap changer at one winding, then do not use the rated voltage of that winding but the voltage that corresponds to the means value of the currents at the ends of the control range of the tap changer. In this way the fault currents caused by voltage regulation are minimized. Exemplary calculation: Transformer YNd5 35 MVA 110 kV/25 kV Yside regulated 10 %

Thus resulting for the regulated winding (110 kV): maximum voltage Umax = 121 kV minimum voltage Umin = 99 kV Setting value for the rated voltage at this side (address ) 2 2 FullScaleVolt. = ------------------------------- = ---------------------------------------- = 108.9 kV 1 1 1 1 ------------ + --------------------------- + -------------U max U min 121 kV 99 kV The 23(5$7,21 32:(5 (address ) is the direct primary rated apparent power for transformers and other machines. The same operation power value must be indicated for both ends of the protected object since it is the basis for the current comparison at both ends.

6-16

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

General

The power must always be entered as a primary value, even if the device is generally configured in secondary values. The device calculates the rated current of the protected object from this power. The 9(&725 *5283 , (address ) is the vector group of the power transformer, always from the devices perspective. The device which is used for the reference end of the transformer, normally the one at the high voltage side, must keep the numerical index  (default setting). The relevant vector group index must be stated for the other winding. Example: Transformer Yd5 For the Yend is set: for the dend is set: 9(&725 *5283 , = , 9(&725 *5283 , = .

If the other winding is chosen as reference winding, i.e. the d-winding, this has to be taken into consideration: For the Yend is set: 9(&725 *5283 , =  (12 - 5), For the dend is set: 9(&725 *5283 , =  (5 5 = 0 = reference side). Address  9(&725 *5283 8 is set in the same way as address  9(&725 *5283 ,. If the vector group of the transformer is adapted with external means, e.g. because there are matching transformers in the measuring circuit that are still used, set 9(& 725 *5283 , , at both ends. In this case the differential protection operates without proper matching computation. Then the measuring voltages transmitted via the transformer would not be adapted via the transformer and therefore not correctly calculated and displayed. Address  9(&725 *5283 8 serves to remove this disadvantage. Indicate the correct vector group of the transformer according to the above-mentioned criteria. Address  9(&725 *5283 , is therefore relevant for the differential protection, whereas address  9(&725 *5283 8 serves as a basis for the computation of measured voltages beyond the transformer. Address  75$16 673 ,6 is used to set whether the power transformer starpoint facing the device is grounded or not. If the starpoint is grounded, the device will eliminate the neutral current of the relevant side, since this neutral current may cause a spurious tripping in case of a ground fault outside of the protected zone. Circuit Breaker Status Various protection and ancillary functions require information on the status of the circuit breaker for faultless operation. The device has a circuit breaker status recognition which processes the status of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and it also contains a metrological opening and closing recognition (see also Section 6.13). The cutoff current 3ROH2SHQ&XUUHQW, which safely falls short when the circuit breaker pole is open, is set in address $. High sensitivity may be set if parasitic currents (e.g. from induction) can be excluded when the line is de-energized. Otherwise the value must be increased correspondingly. The seal-in time 6, 7LPH DOO &O (address $) determines how long the protection functions that are effective when the line is energized (e.g. the increased pickup threshold for the differential protection) are enabled when the internal status recognition has recognized the closing of the breaker or when the device receives a signal via a binary input and the CB auxiliary contact that the circuit breaker has been

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-17

Functions

closed. Therefore, the seal-in time must be longer than the CB operating time during the closing plus the command duration of the relevant protective function plus the CB operating time during opening. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. Address  /LQH VWDWXV determines the criteria for the functioning of the integrated status recognition. With &XUUHQW2SHQ3ROH the rise of the residual current above the threshold set in address $ (3ROH2SHQ&XUUHQW, see above) is interpreted as the closing of the circuit-breaker. &XUUHQW $1' &%, on the other hand, means that both the currents and the position of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are processed for the status recognition. This means, that &XUUHQW $1' &% should be set if the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker exist and are connected and allocated to corresponding binary inputs, and &XUUHQW2SHQ3ROH in all other cases. Note that the I>>>stage of the instantaneous high-speed trip (see Section 6.7) can only work if the auxiliary contacts for both devices at the ends of the protected object are connected. While the 6, 7LPH DOO &O (address $, see above) becomes effective with each energization of the line, 6, 7LPH 0DQ&O (address $) determines the time during which a possible influence on the protection functions becomes effective after the manualclosing (e.g. the switch-on pickup threshold for differential protection or overcurrent protection, see loc cit). This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. Three-Pole Coupling Three-pole coupling is only relevant if single-pole auto-reclosures are carried out. If not, tripping is always three-pole. The rest of this subtitle is then irrelevant. Address  SROH FRXSOLQJ determines whether any multi-phase pickup leads to a three-pole tripping command or whether only multi-pole tripping decision results in a three-pole tripping command. This setting is only relevant for versions with singlepole and three-pole tripping and is only available there. It does not have an impact on the differential protection since pickup and tripping are equivalent. The time overcurrent protection function, however, can also pick up in the event of a short-circuit occurred outside the protected object, without tripping. More information on the functions is also contained in Section 6.13.3, Fault Detection Logic of the Entire Device. With the setting ZLWK 3LFNXS, each multiphase pickup causes a three-pole tripping, even if only a single-phase ground fault has occurred in the protected area and a further external fault, e.g. through overcurrent, is recognized. Even if a single-pole tripping command is already present, each further pick-up will lead to a three-pole coupling. If, on the other hand, the address is set on ZLWK 7ULS (normal setting for differential protection), only multi-pole tripping commands will lead to a three-pole tripping. Therefore, if a single-phase fault occurs within the protected zone and a further fault outside of it, single-pole tripping is possible. A further fault during the single-pole tripping will only lead to a three-pole coupling, if it occurs within the protected zone. This parameter is valid for all protection functions of 7SD610 which are capable of single-pole tripping. Standard setting: ZLWK 7ULS. Applying the time overcurrent protection function the difference is noticeable if multiple faults occur, which means faults that nearly occur at the same time at different places in the system. If, for example, two single-phase ground faults occur on different lines these may also be parallel lines (Figure 6-11), the protective relays of all four line ends detect

6-18

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

General

a fault L1L2E, i.e. the pickup image is consistent with a two-phase ground fault. But since each of the two lines has only a single-phase fault, a single-phase auto-reclosure on each of the two lines is desirable. This is possible with setting  SROH FRXSOLQJ to ZLWK 7ULS. Each of the four devices recognizes a single-pole internal fault and is therefore able to perform a single-pole trip.

L1E

L2E

Figure 6-11

Multiple fault on a double-circuit line

In some cases, however, a three-pole trip would be preferable in this fault scenario, e.g. if the double-circuit line is located next to a large generator unit (Figure 6-12). This is because the generator considers the two single-phase ground faults as one double ground fault, with correspondingly high dynamic stress of the turbine shaft. With  SROH FRXSOLQJ set to ZLWK 3LFNXS, the two lines are switched off, since each device picks up as with L1L2E, i.e. as with a multi-phase fault.

L1E

~
L2E

Figure 6-12

Multiple fault on a double-circuit line next to a generator

Address $ 7ULSSK)OW determines that the short-circuit protection functions perform only a single-pole trip in case of isolated two-phase faults (clear of ground), provided that single-pole tripping is possible and permitted. This allows a single-pole reclosure cycle for this kind of fault. The trip type can be set to SROH OHDGLQJ SKDVH or SROH ODJJLQJ SKDVH. The parameter is only available in versions with single-pole and three-pole tripping. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. If this possibility is to be used, you have to bear in mind that the phase selection should be the same throughout the entire network and that it must be the same at all ends of one line. More information on the functions is also contained in Section 6.13.3 Fault Detection Logic of the Entire Device. The usual default setting is WULSOHSROH.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-19

Functions

6.1.3.1

Setting Overview

Note: The setting ranges and presettings listed in this table refer to a nominal current value IN = 1 A. For a secondary nominal current value IN = 5 A the current values are to be multiplied by 5. For setting primary values, the transformation ratio of the transformers must also be taken into consideration.

Add. 1106 1161 1162 1163 1103 1104 1130A 1132A 1134

Setting Title OPERATION POWER VECTOR GROUP U VECTOR GROUP I TRANS STP IS FullScaleVolt. FullScaleCurr. PoleOpenCurrent SI Time all Cl. Line status

Setting Options 0.2..1000.0 MVA 0..11 0..11 Solid Earthed Not Earthed 0.4..800.0 kV 10..5000 A 0.05..1.00 A 0.01..30.00 sec with Pole Open Current Threshold only with CBaux AND Pole Open Current 0.01..30.00 sec with Pickup with Trip 3pole 1pole, leading phase 1pole, lagging phase

Default Setting 7.6 MVA 0 0 Solid Earthed 11.0 kV 400 A 0.10 A 0.10 sec with Pole Open Current Threshold only

Comments Operational power of protection zone Vector group numeral for voltage Vector group numeral for current Transformer starpoint is Measurement: Full Scale Voltage (100%) Measurement: Full Scale Current (100%) Pole Open Current Threshold Seal-in Time after ALL closures Line status

1150A 1155 1156A

SI Time Man.Cl 3pole coupling Trip2phFlt

0.30 sec with Trip 3pole

Seal-in Time after MANUAL closures 3 pole coupling Trip type with 2phase faults

6-20

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

General

6.1.3.2
F.No. 301 302 351 352 353 356 357 361 366 367 368 371 378 379 380 381 382 383 385 386 410 411 501 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512

Information Overview
Alarm Pow.Sys.Flt. Fault Event >CB Aux. L1 >CB Aux. L2 >CB Aux. L3 >Manual Close >CloseCmd.Blo >FAIL:Feeder VT >CB1 Pole L1 >CB1 Pole L2 >CB1 Pole L3 >CB1 Ready >CB faulty >CB 3p Closed >CB 3p Open >1p Trip Perm >Only 1ph AR >Enable ARzones >Lockout SET >Lockout RESET >CB1 3p Closed >CB1 3p Open Relay PICKUP Relay PICKUP L1 Relay PICKUP L2 Relay PICKUP L3 Relay PICKUP E Relay TRIP L1 Relay TRIP L2 Relay TRIP L3 Relay CLOSE Relay TRIP Relay TRIP 1pL1 Power System fault Fault Event >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Pole L1 >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Pole L2 >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Phase L3 >Manual close signal >Block all close commands from external >Failure: Feeder VT (MCB tripped) >CB1 Pole L1 (Pos. Contact=Breaker) >CB1 Pole L2 (Pos. Contact=Breaker) >CB1 Pole L3 (Pos. Contact=Breaker) >Circuit Breaker 1 READY for reclosing >CB faulty (for breaker failure protection) >CB aux. contact 3pole Closed >CB aux. contact 3pole Open >Single-phase trip permitted from ext.AR >External AR programmed for 1phase only >Enable all AR Zones / Stages >Lockout SET >Lockout RESET >CB1 aux. 3p Closed (for AR, CB-Test) >CB1 aux. 3p Open (for AR, CB-Test) Relay PICKUP Relay PICKUP Phase L1 Relay PICKUP Phase L2 Relay PICKUP Phase L3 Relay PICKUP Earth Relay TRIP command Phase L1 Relay TRIP command Phase L2 Relay TRIP command Phase L3 General CLOSE of relay Relay GENERAL TRIP command Relay TRIP command - Only Phase L1 Comments

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-21

Functions

F.No. 513 514 515 530 533 534 535 536 545 546 560 561 563

Alarm Relay TRIP 1pL2 Relay TRIP 1pL3 Relay TRIP 3ph. LOCKOUT IL1 = IL2 = IL3 = Final Trip PU Time TRIP Time Trip Coupled 3p Man.Clos.Detect CB Alarm Supp

Comments Relay TRIP command - Only Phase L2 Relay TRIP command - Only Phase L3 Relay TRIP command Phases L123 LOCKOUT is active Primary fault current IL1 Primary fault current IL2 Primary fault current IL3 Final Trip Time from Pickup to drop out Time from Pickup to TRIP Single-phase trip was coupled 3phase Manual close signal detected CB alarm suppressed

6-22

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Differential Protection

6.2

Differential Protection
The differential protection is the main feature of the device. It is based on current comparison. For this, one device must be installed at each end of the zone to be protected. The devices exchange their measured quantities via communications links and compare the received currents with their own. In case of an internal short-circuit the allocated circuit breaker is tripped. 7SD610 is designed for protected objects with 2 ends. A version which covers power transformers or machines in unit connection is available as an option. The protected zone is limited selectively at its ends by the current transformer sets.

6.2.1

Function Description
Differential protection is based on current comparison. It makes use of the fact that e.g. a line section L (Figure 6-13) carries always the same current i (dashed line) at its two ends in healthy operation. This current flows into on one side of the considered zone and leaves it again on the other side. A difference in current marks is a clear indication of a fault within this line section. If the actual current transformation ratio is the same, the secondary windings of the current transformers CT1 and CT2 at the line ends can be connected to form a closed electric circuit with a secondary current I; a measuring element M which is connected to the electrical balance point remains at zero current in healthy operation. When a fault occurs in the zone limited by the transformers, a current I1 + I2 which is proportional to the fault currents i1 + i2 flowing in from both sides is fed to the measuring element. As a result, the simple circuit shown in Figure 6-13 ensures a reliable tripping of the protection if the fault current flowing through the protected zone during a short-circuit is high enough for the measuring element M to respond.

Basic Principle

i Station 1
CT1

i1

i2

i Station 2
CT2

I I1 M

i1 + i2

I I2

I1 + I 2 Figure 6-13 Basic principle of differential protection for a line

Transmission of Measured Values

If the entire protected object is located in one place as is the case with generators, transformers, busbars , the measured quantities can be processed immediately. This is different for lines where the protected zone spans a certain distance from one station to the other. To be able to process the measured quantities of both line ends

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-23

Functions

at each line end, these have to be transmitted in a suitable form. In this way, the tripping condition at each line end can be checked and the respective local circuit breaker can be operated if necessary. 7SD610 transmits the measured quantities as digital telegrams via communication channels. For this, each device is equipped with a protection data interface. Figure 6-14 shows this for a line. Each device measures the local current and sends the information on its intensity and phase relation to the opposite end. The interface for this communication between protection devices is called the protection data interface. As a result, the currents can be added up an processed in each device.

1
i1
I2 I1 I2 I1 I2 I1 + I2

2
i2

I1 I1 + I2

7SD610

7SD610

Figure 6-14

Differential protection for a line

You will find detailed information on the topology of device communication in Section 6.4. Measured Value Synchronization The devices measure the local currents asynchronously. This means that each device measures, digitizes and pre-processes the associated currents of the current transformers with its own, random processor pulse. If the currents of two line ends are to be compared, it is necessary, however, to process all currents with the same time base. Both devices exchange their time with each telegram. The device with index 1 functions as a timing master thus determining the time base. The other device then calculates the time delay from the transmission and processing times related on the timing master. With this rough synchronization the equality of the time bases with a precision of 0.5 ms is provided. To reach a sufficiently precise synchronization all current values are marked with a time stamp before they are transmitted from one device to the other as digital telegrams. This time stamp indicates at which point in time the transmitted current data were valid. Therefore, the receiving device can carry through an ideal synchronization of the current comparisons from the received time stamp and its own time management, i.e. it can compare the currents (<5 s tolerance) which were actually measured at exactly the same time. The transmission periods are permanently monitored by the devices with measuring messages and considered at the respective receiving end. The frequency of the measured quantities, which is decisive for the comparison of complex phasors, is also continuously measured and, if necessary, corrected to achieve a synchronous comparison of the phasors. If the device is connected to voltage transformers and at least one voltage of a sufficient level is available, the frequency is derived from this voltage. If not, the measured currents are used for the determination of the frequency. The measured frequencies are interchanged between the de-

6-24

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Differential Protection

vices via the communication link. Under these conditions both devices work with the currently valid frequency. Restraint The precondition for the basic principle of differential protection is that the sum total of all currents flowing into the protected object is zero in healthy operation. This precondition is only valid for the primary system and even there only if shunt currents of a kind produced by line capacitances or magnetizing currents of transformers and reactors can be neglected. The secondary currents which are offered to the devices via the current transformers, are subject to measuring errors caused by the response characteristic of the current transformers and the input circuits of the devices. Transmission errors such as signal jitters can also cause deviations of the measured quantities. As a result of all these influences, the sum total of all currents processed in the devices in healthy operation is not zero. The differential protection is stabilized against these influences. Charging Currents Due to the capacitances of the three phases flowing against ground and against one another, charging currents are present even in healthy operation and cause a difference of currents at the ends of the protected zone. Especially when cables are used, the capacitive charging currents can reach considerable peaks. Charging currents do not depend on the intensity of the measured currents. In healthy operation they can be considered as being almost constant under steady-state conditions, since they are only determined by the voltage and the capacitances of the lines. They can therefore be taken into account during the setting of the sensitivity of the differential protection (see also Section 6.2.2 under Pickup Value of Differential Current). The same is true of the stationary magnetizing currents before shunt reactances. For transient inrush currents the devices have a separate inrush restraint (see below under the subtitle Inrush Restraint). Current Transformer Errors To consider the influences of current transformer errors, each device calculates a selfstabilizing quantity I. This is calculated by estimating the possible local transformer errors from the data of the local current transformers and the intensity of the measured currents. The transformer data have been parameterized under the power system data (cf. Sub-section 6.1.1 under Current Transformer Characteristics) and are valid individually for each device.

Ifault IN
Approximation

Current Tansformer Error

n/n

Itransformer/IN

Figure 6-15

Approximation of the current transformer error

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-25

Functions

Further Influences

Further measuring errors which can be caused in the device itself by hardware tolerances, calculation tolerances, deviations in time or which are due to the quality of the measured quantities such as harmonics and deviations in frequency, are also estimated by the device and increase the local self-stabilizing quantity automatically. Here, the permissible variations in the transmission and processing periods are also considered. Deviations in time are caused by residual errors during the synchronization of measured quantities, transmission and operating time variations, and similar events. If an influencing parameter cannot be determined e.g. the frequency if no sufficient measured quantities are available it will be set by definition to the maximum permissible deviation. For the frequency this means that if the frequency cannot be determined, because no sufficient measured quantities are available, the device will assume rated frequency. But since the actual frequency can deviate from the rated frequency within the permissible range (20 % of the rated frequency), the stabilization will be increased automatically. As soon as the frequency has been determined (max. 100 ms), the stabilization will be decreased correspondingly. This is important during operation if no measured quantities are existing in the protected area before a shortcircuit occurs, e.g. if a line with the voltage transformers on the line side is switched onto a fault. Since the frequency is not yet known at this point of time, an increased restraint will be active until the actual frequency is determined. This may delay the tripping somewhat, but only at the pickup threshold, i.e. in case of very low-current faults. These self-restraining quantities are calculated by each device from the sum total of the possible deviations and transmitted to the other device. In the same way as the total currents (differential currents) are calculated (see above, Transmission of Measured Values), each device calculates thus the sum total of the restraining quantities and thereby stabilizes the differential currents. It is due to the self-restraint that the differential protection works with a maximum of sensitivity at all times, since the restraining quantities adapt themselves automatically in a dynamic way to possible errors. In this way, even high-resistance faults with high load currents at the same time, can be detected effectively.

Inrush Restraint

If the protected area includes a power transformer, a high inrush current is to be expected when connecting the transformer. This inrush current flows into the protected zone but does not leave it again. The inrush current can reach a multiple of the rated current and is characterized by a relatively high content in second harmonics (double rated frequency) which is almost absent in the case of a short-circuit. If the content in second harmonics exceeds an adjustable threshold in differential current, the tripping will be prevented. The inrush restraint has an upper limit: if a certain (adjustable) current value is exceeded, it will not be effective any more, since there must be an internal current-intensive short-circuit. Figure 6-16 shows a simplified logic diagram. The conditions for the inrush restraint are examined in each device in which this function has been activated. The blocking condition is transmitted to both devices so that it is effective at both ends of the protected object.

6-26

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Differential Protection

!"
1

DISVTCS@TU Pss P

!qC6SHPID8 !"!
ILx

fN

&
2fN

Inrush detect. Lx

H6YDISQ@6F!"$

Lx = L1, L2, L3 depending on phase

Figure 6-16

Logic diagram of the inrush restraint for one phase

Since the inrush restraint works individually for each phase, the protection is fully effective even with the transformer switched onto a single-phase fault, whereas it is possible that an inrush current may be flowing in a different, healthy phase. It is, however, possible to set the protection in a way that when the permissible harmonic content in the current of only one single phase is exceeded, not only the phase with the inrush current but also the remaining phases of the differential stage are blocked. This socalled crossblock function can be limited in time. Figure 6-17 shows the logic diagram. The crossblock function affects both devices as well, since it extends the inrush restraint to all three phases.

Opposite end Inrush detect. L1

Inrush block. L1

Inrush detect. L2

Inrush block. L2

Inrush detect. L3

1
!"  8SPTT7!CH

Inrush block. L3

!"" 8SPTT7GP8F
1

I `r

&

Figure 6-17

Logic diagram of the crossblock function for one end

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-27

Functions

Evaluation of Measured Values

The evaluation of measured values is performed separately for each phase. Additionally the earth current is evaluated. Each device calculates a differential current from the total of the current phasors that were formed at each end of the protected zone and transmitted to the other end. The differential current value is equal to the value of the fault current that is registered by the differential protection system. In the ideal case it is equal to the short-circuit current value. In a healthy system the differential current value is low and nearly similar to the charging current. The stabilizing current counteracts the differential current. It is the total of the maximum measured errors at the ends of the protected object and is calculated from the actual measured values and power system parameters that were set. Therefore the highest possible error value of current transformers within the nominal range and/or the short-circuit current range is multiplied with the current flowing through each end of the protected object. The total value, including the measured internal errors, is then transmitted to the other end. This is the reason why the stabilizing current is adequate to the greatest possible measurement error of the differential protection system. The pickup characteristic of the differential protection (Figure 6-18) derives from the stabilizing characteristic Idiff = Irest (45curve) that is cut below the setting value , ',))!. It complies with the formula
Irest = ,',))! + (fault currents)

If the calculated differential current exceeds the pickup limit and the greatest possible measurement error, the fault must be internal (hatched area in Figure 6-18)

Idiff

Tripping

,',))!

Irest Figure 6-18 Pickup characteristic of the differential protection Idiff>stage

6-28

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Differential Protection

Fast Charge Comparison

The charge comparison protection function is a differential stage which is part of the current comparison (the actual differential protection). If a high-current fault occurs, very fast tripping decision is then possible. The charge comparison protection function does not sum up the complex current phasors at the ends of the protected object, but the integral of currents calculated according to the following formula:
t2

Q =

i(t) dt
t1

It includes the integration interval from t1 to t2, for the 7SD610 device determined as a quarter a.c. cycle. The calculated charge Q is a scalar value which is easier to determine and to transmit than a complex phasor. The charges of both ends of the protected object are added in the same way as done with the current phasors of the differential protection. Thus the total of the charges is available at both ends of the protected zone. Right after a fault occurrence within the protected zone a charge difference emerges. For high fault currents that can lead to a saturation of current transformers a decision is taken no later than the saturation begins. The charge difference of external faults is theoretically equal to zero at the beginning. The charge comparison protection function immediately registers the external fault and blocks its own function. If saturation begins in one or more current transformers which limit the protected zone, the before-mentioned function keeps being blocked. Thus possible differences resulting from the saturation are excluded. Generally it is assumed that an initial saturation of transformers only takes place after the expiration of at least one integration interval (1/4 cycle) that commenced with the occurrence of a fault. Each phase is subject to the charge comparison. Therefore an internal fault (evolving fault) in a different phase after the external fault occurred is registered immediately. The limitation of the charge comparison is reached, if an internal fault (evolving fault) coming after an external fault appears with considerable transformer saturation in the same phase; this must be detected by the actual differential protection. Furthermore the charge comparison is influenced by charge currents from lines and shunt currents from transformers (steady-sate and transient) that also cause a charge difference. Therefore the charge comparison is, as aforesaid, a function suited to complete the differential protection ensuring a fast tripping for high-current short-circuits. Blocking/Interblocking The differential protection can be blocked via a binary input. The blocking at one end of a protected object affects via the communications link both ends (interblocking). If the overcurrent protection is configured as an emergency function, both devices will automatically switch over to this emergency operation. Figure 6-19 shows the logic diagram of the differential protection. The phase-segregated stages are totalled to phase information. Additionally the device informs the user which stage picked up.

Pickup of the Differential Protection

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-29

Functions

As soon as the differential protection function registered a fault within its tripping zone, the signal 'LII *HQ )OW (general fault detection of the differential protection) is issued. For the differential protection function itself, this pickup signal is of no concern since the tripping conditions are available at the same time. This signal, however, is necessary for the initiation of internal or external supplementary functions (e.g. fault recording, automatic reclosure).

FNr "$!$ 39vssiypx Qrest L1 Qrest L2 Qrest L3

see Figure 6-20

+
Q>

!"" D9DAA33
Q>

& 1
FNr " "& D9vss33Ay

Qdiff L1 Qdiff L2 Qdiff L3 Irest L1 Irest L2 Irest L3

Diff>> L1 Diff>> L2 Diff>> L3 1


FNr " "" ... " "$ 9vssAyG 9vssAyG! 9vssAyG" FNr " "( D9vss3Ay

+
I>

!  D9DAA3
I>

Idiff L1 Idiff L2 Idiff L3

&

! " D9DA3TXDU8CPI
I>

&

Diff> L3 Diff> L2 Diff> L1

Rushblock. L1 Rushblock. L2 Rushblock. L3

see Figure 6-20

L1 L2 L3
Add on recognition

Figure 6-19

Logic diagram of the differential protection

Tripping Logic of the Differential Protection

The pickup signals that identify the concerned stages of the differential protection can be delayed via the time stage 7,',)>. Independently from this condition, a singlephase pickup can be blocked for a short time in order to bridge the transient oscillations on occurrence of a simple earth fault in a resonant-earthed system. The output signals generated by the stages are combined to the output signals 'LII *HQ 75,3, 'LII 75,3 S /, 'LII 75,3 S /, 'LII 75,3 S /, 'LII 75,3 / in the tripping logic. Here, the single-pole information indicates that only single-pole tripping is to be carried out. The actual generation of the commands for the tripping (output) relay is executed in the tripping logic of the entire device (see Section 6.13.4).

6-30

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Differential Protection

from Figure 6-19

Diff>> L1 Diff>> L2 Diff>> L3

FNr " # 9vssBrUSDQ

! ' U"D QC6T


L1 L2 L3

=1

FNr " #! 9vssUSDQ G FNr " #" 9vssUSDQ G! Tripping logic of the unit FNr " ## 9vssUSDQ G" FNr " #$ 9vssUSDQG !"

! & U9@G6`D9DAA3
L1 L2 L3

1 &

Diff> L1
from Figure 6-19

L1 L1

& Diff> L2
L2 L2

FNr " #% 9vssUSDQ yr FNr " #& 9vssUSDQ"yr

& Diff> L3
L3 L3

Figure 6-20

Tripping logic of the differential protection

6.2.2
General

Setting the Function Parameters


The differential protection can be switched RQ or RII with address  67$7( 2) ',)). If a single device is switched off at any end of a protective object, the calculation of measured values becomes impossible. The entire differential protection system of both ends then is blocked. The current sensitivity is set with address  ,',))!. It is determined by the entire current flowing into a protected zone in case of a short-circuit. This is the total fault current regardless of how it is distributed between the ends of the protected object. This pick-up value must be set to a value that is higher than the total steady-state shunt current of the protected object. For cables and long overhead lines, the charging current is to be considered in particular. It is calculated from the service capacitance: IC = 3.63 10-6 UN fN CB' s With IC UN fN CB' s Charging current to be calculated in A primary Rated voltage of the network in kV Rated frequency of the network in Hz Per unit line length service capacitance of the line in nF/km or nF/mile Length of the line in km or miles

Pickup Value of Differential Current

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-31

Functions

Considering the variations of voltage and frequency, the value set should be at least two to two and a half times higher than the calculated charging current. Moreover, the pick-up value should not be less than 15 % of the operating rated current. The operating rated current either derives from the rated apparent power of a transformer in the protected area (see Topological Data for Transformers (optional) in Subsection 6.1.3, page 6-16) or from the addresses  )XOO6FDOH&XUU according to Subsection 6.1.3, Rated Values of Protected Lines (page 6-15). It must be equal at both ends of the protected objects. If the parameterization is performed from a personal computer using DIGSI 4, the parameters can be set either as primary or as secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are set, all currents must be converted to the secondary side of the current transformers. Exemplary calculation: 110 kV single-conductor oil-filled cable 240 mm2 in a 50-Hz-network with the data: s (length) = CB = 16 km 310 nF/km

Current transformers 600 A/5 A From that the steady-state charging current is calculated: IC = 3.63 10-6 UN fN CB' s = 3.63 10-6 110 50 310 16 = 99 A For the setting with primary values approximately the double value is to be set, i.e.: Setting value ,',))! = 198 A For the setting with secondary values this value has to be converted to secondary quantity: 198 A Setting value ,',))! = -------------- 5 A = 1.65 A 600 A Pickup Value during Switch-on When switching on long, unloaded cables, overhead lines and arc-compensated lines, pronounced higher-frequency transient reactions may take place. Although these are damped considerably by means of digital filters in the differential protection, a pickup value ,',)!6:,7&+ 21 (address ) can be set to reliably prevent one-sided pickup of the protection. This pickup value is always active when a device has recognized the connection of its line end. For the duration of the seal-in time 6, 7LPH DOO &O which was set with the general protection data under address $ (Section 6.1.3), both devices are then switched over to this particular pickup value. A setting to three or four times the steady-state charging current ensures usually the stability of the protection during switch-on of the line. For switch-on of a transformer or shunt reactor, an inrush restraint is incorporated (see below under Subtitle Inrush Restraint, page 6-33). Final checks will be carried out during commissioning (see Section 8.3.11). Delays In special cases of application it can be useful to delay the tripping of the differential protection with an additional time stage, e.g. in case of reverse interlocking. The delay time 7'(/$< ,',))! (address $) is only started upon detection of an internal fault. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings.

6-32

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Differential Protection

If the differential protection is applied to an isolated or resonant-earthed network, it must be ensured that the tripping is avoided during the transient oscillations of a simple earth fault. With address $ 7, 3+$6 the pickup to a simple earth fault is therefore delayed for 0.04 s. In extended resonant-earthed networks this time should be risen. Setting the address to the single-phase tripping is totally suppressed. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. Pickup Value of Charge Comparison Stage The pickup threshold of the charge comparison stage is set in address  , ',))!!. The r.m.s. value of the current is decisive. The conversion into charge value is carried out by the device itself. Setting near the operational nominal current is adequate in most cases. Since this stage reacts very fast, a pickup of capacitive charging currents (for lines) and inductive magnetizing currents (for transformers or reactors) also for switch-on operation must be excluded. For overhead lines and cables the setting value should not be lower than 4 times the steady-state load current value (as already calculated in the above calculation example). In resonant-earthed systems also the value of the non-compensated system earth fault current may not be undershot. It derives from the total capacitive earth fault current without considering the Petersen coil. As the Petersen coil serves to compensate nearly the total earth fault current, its rated current can be taken as a base. For transformers set the value INTrafo/ukTrafo. The pickup thresholds are finally checked during commissioning (Section 8.3.11). Inrush Restraint The inrush restraint of the differential protection is only necessary when the devices are operated on a transformer or on lines which end on transformers. It can be switched RQ and RII with address  ,1586+ 5(67. It is based on the evaluation of the second harmonic which exists in the inrush current. Ex-works a ratio of  % of the QG +$5021,& I2fN/IfN is set under address , which can normally be taken over. The fraction necessary for the stabilization can however be configured. In order to be able to achieve a higher degree of restraint in case of exceptionally unfavourable inrush conditions, you may also set a smaller value. However, if the local measured current exceeds a value set in address  0$; ,1 586+ 3($., there will be no inrush restraint. The peak value is decisive. The value should be higher than the maximum inrush current peak value that can be expected. For transformers a value of above 2INTrafo/ukTrafo can be set. If a line ends on a transformer, a smaller value may be selected, considering the damping of the current by the line. The crossblock function can be activated (<HV) or deactivated (1R) with address  &5266 %/2&.. The time after exceeding of the current threshold for which this crossblock is to be activated is set under address  &5266% +0. With setting the crossblock function is always active until the second harmonic content in all phases has dropped below the set value.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-33

Functions

6.2.3

Setting Overview
Note: The indicated setting ranges and default settings refer to a secondary rated current of IN = 1 A. For the secondary rated current of IN = 5 A these values are to be multiplied by 5. For the setting of primary values the transformation ratio of the transformers must also be taken into consideration.

Addr. 1201 1210 1213 1217A 1218A 1233 2301 2302 2303 2305 2310

Setting Title STATE OF DIFF. I-DIFF> I-DIF>SWITCH ON T-DELAY I-DIFF> T3I0 1PHAS I-DIFF>> INRUSH REST. 2nd HARMONIC CROSS BLOCK MAX INRUSH PEAK CROSSB 2HM OFF ON

Setting Options

Default Setting ON 0.30 A 0.30 A 0.00 sec 0.00 sec 1.2 A OFF 15 % NO 15.0 A 0.00 sec

Comments State of differential protection I-DIFF>: Pickup value I-DIFF>: Value under switch on condition I-DIFF>: Trip time delay Delay 1ph-faults (comp/isol. star-point) I-DIFF>>: Pickup value Inrush Restraint 2nd. harmonic in % of fundamental Cross Block Maximum inrush-peak value Time for Crossblock with 2nd harmonic

0.10..20.00 A 0.10..20.00 A 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.00..60.00 sec; 0.8..100.0 A OFF ON 10..45 % NO YES 1.1..25.0 A 0.00..60.00 sec;

6.2.4

Information Overview

F.No. 3102 3103 3104 3120 3132 3133 3134

Alarm 2nd Harmonic L1 2nd Harmonic L2 2nd Harmonic L3 Diff active Diff. Gen. Flt. Diff. Flt. L1 Diff. Flt. L2

Comments Diff: 2nd Harmonic detected in phase L1 Diff: 2nd Harmonic detected in phase L2 Diff: 2nd Harmonic detected in phase L3 Diff: Active Diff: Fault detection Diff: Fault detection in phase L1 Diff: Fault detection in phase L2

6-34

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Differential Protection

F.No. 3135 3136 3137 3139 3141 3142 3143 3144 3145 3146 3147 3148 3149 3176 3177 3178 3179 3180 3181 3182 3183 3184 3185 3186 3187 3188 3189 3190 3191 3192 3193 3194 3195 3525 3526 3528 Diff. Flt. L3 Diff. Flt. E I-Diff>> Flt. I-Diff> Flt. Diff. Gen. TRIP Diff TRIP 1p L1 Diff TRIP 1p L2 Diff TRIP 1p L3 Diff TRIP L123 Diff TRIP 1pole Diff TRIP 3pole Diff block Diff OFF Diff Flt. 1p.L1 Diff Flt. L1E Diff Flt. 1p.L2 Diff Flt. L2E Diff Flt. L12 Diff Flt. L12E Diff Flt. 1p.L3 Diff Flt. L3E Diff Flt. L31 Diff Flt. L31E Diff Flt. L23 Diff Flt. L23E Diff Flt. L123 Diff Flt. L123E Test Diff. Comm. Diff TestDiff.remote Comm.Diff act. >Test Diff. >Comm. Diff > Diff block Diffblk.rec PI1 Diffblk.sen PI1

Alarm Diff: Earth fault detection

Comments Diff: Fault detection in phase L3

Diff: Fault detection of I-Diff>> Diff: Fault detection of I-Diff> Diff: General TRIP Diff: TRIP - Only L1 Diff: TRIP - Only L2 Diff: TRIP - Only L3 Diff: TRIP L123 Diff: TRIP 1pole Diff: TRIP 3pole Diff: Differential protection is blocked Diff: Diff. protection is switched off Diff: Fault detection L1 (only) Diff: Fault detection L1E Diff: Fault detection L2 (only) Diff: Fault detection L2E Diff: Fault detection L12 Diff: Fault detection L12E Diff: Fault detection L3 (only) Diff: Fault detection L3E Diff: Fault detection L31 Diff: Fault detection L31E Diff: Fault detection L23 Diff: Fault detection L23E Diff: Fault detection L123 Diff: Fault detection L123E Diff: Set Teststate of Diff. protection Diff: Set Commissioning state of Diff. Diff: Remote relay in Teststate Diff: Commissioning state is active Diff: >Test Diff. Diff: >Comm. Diff >Differential protection blocking signal Differential blocking received at PI1 Differential blocking sending via PI1

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-35

Functions

6.3

Breaker Intertrip and Remote Tripping


7SD610 allows to transmit a tripping command created by the local differential protection to the other end of the protected object (intertripping). Likewise, any desired command of another internal protection function or of an external protection, monitoring or control equipment can be transmitted for remote tripping. The reaction when such a command is received can be set individually for each device. Commands are transmitted separately for each phase, so that a simultaneous singlepole auto-reclosure is always possible, provided that devices and circuit-breakers are designed for single-pole tripping.

6.3.1

Function Description
The transmission signal can originate from two different sources (Figure 6-21). If the parameter ,75,3 6(1' is set to <HV, each tripping command of the differential protection is routed immediately to the transmission function ITrp.sen. L1 to ...L3 (intertrip) and transmitted to the protection data interfaces via the communications links. Furthermore, it is possible to trigger the transmission function via binary inputs (remote tripping). This can be done either separately for each phase via the input functions !,QWHUWULS /, !,QWHUWULS / and !,QWHUWULS /, or for all phases together (three-pole) via the binary input function !,QWHUWULS SRO. The transmission signal can be delayed with 7,75,3 %, and prolonged with 7,75,3 352/ %,.

Transmission Circuit

"" UDUSDQ7D DUSDQT@I9 " I


Diff TRIP L1 Diff TRIP L2 Diff TRIP L3 >Intertrip L1 >Intertrip L2 >Intertrip L3

"# UDUSDQQSPG7D

`r
1 1
T T

ITrp.sen. L1 ITrp.sen. L2 ITrp.sen. L3

L1 L2 L3
>Intertrip 3pol

Protection Data Interface

Protection Data Interface

Figure 6-21

Logic diagram of the intertrip transmission cycle

6-36

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Breaker Intertrip and Remote Tripping

Receiving Circuit

On the receiving end the signal can lead to a trip. Alternatively it can also cause only an alarm. Figure 6-22 shows the logic diagram. If the received signal is supposed to cause a trip, it will be forwarded to the tripping logic. The tripping logic of the device (see also Section 6.13.4) ensures, if necessary, that the conditions for single-pole tripping are fulfilled (e.g. single-pole tripping permissible, auto-reclosure device ready).

"! DUSDQS@8

AI"$ '
ITrp.TRIP 1p L1

AI"$ (
ITrp.TRIP 1p L2

Uv
Protection Data Interface

AI"$!
1 Tripping logic ITrp.TRIP 1p L3

6yh

AI"$!
ITrp.TRIP L123

AI"$!!
ITrp.TRIP 1pole

AI"$!"
ITrp.TRIP 3pole

AI"$ &
ITrip. Gen. TRIP

AI"$$"$ 

L1 L2 L3 Figure 6-22 Logic diagram of the intertrip receiving cycle

I-TRIP REC PIx L1 I-TRIP REC PIx L2 I-TRIP REC PIx L3

2 !

Further Options

Since the signals for remote tripping can be set to cause only an alarm, any other desired signals can be transmitted in this way as well. After the binary input(s) have been activated, the signals which cause an alarm at the receiving end are transmitted. These alarms can in turn execute any desired actions at the receiving end.It should be noted that for the transmission of remote commands or alarms a further 4 fast transmission channels are optionally available (see also Section 6.6).

6.3.2

Setting the Function Parameters


The intertrip function for tripping caused by the differential protection can be activated (<HV) or deactivated (1R) with address  ,75,3 6(1'. Since the differential protection devices theoretically operate with the same measured values at both ends of the protected object, a tripping in the event of an internal fault normally is also carried out at both ends, regardless of the infeed conditions at the ends. In special cases, i.e. if short-circuit currents are to be expected near to the pickup threshold, it may occur that one end do not issue a tripping command due to inevitable device tolerances. For these cases ,75,3 6(1' <HV ensures the tripping at both ends of the protected object.

General Information

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-37

Functions

Intertrip/Remote Tripping

If the intertrip function is activated, it will automatically start when the differential protection trips. If the relevant binary inputs are allocated and activated by an external source, the intertrip signal is transmitted as well. In this case, the signal to be transmitted can be delayed with address  7,75,3 %,. This delay stabilizes the transmitted signal against dynamic interferences which may possibly occur on the control lines. Address  7,75,3 352/ %, is used to extend a signal which was effectively injected from an external source. The reaction of a device to receiving an intertrip/remote tripping signal is set in address  ,75,3 5(&(,9(. If it is supposed to cause tripping, 7ULS must be set. If the received signal, however, is supposed to cause only an alarm, $ODUP RQO\ must be set even if this annunciation is to be processed externally. The setting times depend on the individual case of application. A delay is necessary if the external control signal originates from a disturbed source and a stabilization seems appropriate. Of course, the control signal has to be longer than the delay for the signal to work. If the signal is processed externally at the receiving end, a prolongation time might become necessary for the transmitting end so that the reaction desired at the receiving end can be executed reliably.

6.3.3
Addr. 1301 1302 1303 1304

Setting Overview
Setting Title I-TRIP SEND I-TRIP RECEIVE T-ITRIP BI T-ITRIP PROL BI YES NO Alarm only Trip 0.00..30.00 sec 0.00..30.00 sec Setting Options Default Setting NO Trip 0.02 sec 0.00 sec Comments State of transmit. the intertrip command Reaction if intertrip command is receiv. Delay for intertrip via binary input Prolongation for intertrip via bin.input

6-38

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Breaker Intertrip and Remote Tripping

6.3.4
F.No. 3501 3502 3503 3504 3505 3506 3507 3511 3512 3513 3517 3518 3519 3520 3521 3522 3523

Information Overview
Alarm >Intertrip L1 >Intertrip L2 >Intertrip L3 >Intertrip 3pol ITrp.rec.PI1.L1 ITrp.rec.PI1.L2 ITrp.rec.PI1.L3 ITrp.sen.PI1.L1 ITrp.sen.PI1.L2 ITrp.sen.PI1.L3 ITrp. Gen. TRIP ITrp.TRIP 1p L1 ITrp.TRIP 1p L2 ITrp.TRIP 1p L3 ITrp.TRIP L123 Diff TRIP 1pole Diff TRIP 3pole Comments I.Trip: >Intertrip L1 signal input I.Trip: >Intertrip L2 signal input I.Trip: >Intertrip L3 signal input I.Trip: >Intertrip 3 pole signal input I.Trip: Received at Prot.Interface 1 L1 I.Trip: Received at Prot.Interface 1 L2 I.Trip: Received at Prot.Interface 1 L3 I.Trip: Sending at Prot.Interface 1 L1 I.Trip: Sending at Prot.Interface 1 L2 I.Trip: Sending at Prot.Interface 1 L3 I.Trip: General TRIP I.Trip: TRIP - Only L1 I.Trip: TRIP - Only L2 I.Trip: TRIP - Only L3 I.Trip: TRIP L123 I.Trip: TRIP 1pole I.Trip: TRIP 3pole

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-39

Functions

6.4

Protection Data Interfaces and Differential Protection Topology


As described in the explanation of the function principle of differential protection (Section 6.2.1), the devices which belong to the protected object limited by the current transformer sets, have to exchange the data of the ends of the protected object. This does not only apply for the measured quantities relevant for the differential protection itself, but also for all data which are to be available at both ends. This includes the synchronization and topological data as well as the intertripping, transfer trip, remote annunciation signals and measured values. The layout of the protected object, the allocation of the devices to the ends of the protected object and the allocation of the ways of communication to the devices protection data interface form the topology of the differential protection system and its communication.

6.4.1

Function Description
For each device you require one protection data interface PI 1. Both protection data interfaces are connected with each other (see also Figure 6-23). When setting the function parameters, each device are identified with an index number: Index 1 and Index 2.

Communication Topology

PI1 Index 1

PI1 Index 2

7SD52

7SD52

Figure 6-23

Differential protection with two 7SD610 devices, using the protection data interface (transmitter/receiver)

Communication Media

The communication is enabled via direct optical fibre connections or via communication networks. Which kind of media is used, depends on the distance and on the communication media available. For shorter distances a direct connection via optical fibres having a transmission rate of 512 kBit/s is possible. Otherwise we recommend communication converters. A transmission via modem and communication networks can also be realized. Please take into consideration that the tripping times of the differential protection devices depend on the transmission quality and that they are prolonged in case of a reduced transmission quality and /or an increased transmission time. Figure 6-24 shows some examples for communication connections. In case of a direct connection the distance depends on the type of the optical fibre. Table 6-1 lists the available options. Different types of communication modules can be installed in the device. For ordering information see Appendix A, Subsection A.1.1.

6-40

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Protection Data Interfaces and Differential Protection Topology

Table 6-1 Module type FO5 FO6 FO7 FO8

Communication via direct connection Connector type ST ST ST FC Fibre type Multimode 62,5/125 m Multimode 62,5/125 m Monomode 9/125 m Monomode 9/125 m Optical wavelength 820 nm 820 nm Permissible path attenuation 8 dB 16 dB 7 dB 18 dB Distance, typical 1,5 km 3,5 km 10 km 35 km

1300 nm 1300 nm

If communication converters are used, the device and the communication converter are always linked with a FO5 module via optical fibres. The converter itself is equipped with different interfaces for the connection to the communication network. For ordering information see Appendix A, Subsection A.1.1.

typical 1,5 km with 62,5/125 m Multimode fibre

typical 3,5 km with 62,5/125 m Multimode fibre

7SD610
FO5 with ST-connector at both ends

7SD610

7SD610
FO6 with ST-connector at both ends

7SD610

typical 10 km with 9/125 m Monomode fibre

typical 35 km with 62,5/125 m Monomode fibre

7SD610
FO7 with ST-connector at both ends

7SD610

7SD610
FO7 with FC-connector at both ends

7SD610

typical 1,5 km with 62,5/125 m Multimode fibre

Communication Converter

Communication Converter

7SD610
FO5 with ST-connector at both ends

e
X21 or G703.1

Communication Network
X21 or G703.1

e o

typical 1,5 km with 62,5/125 m Multimode fibre

7SD610
FO5 with ST-connector at both ends

Figure 6-24

Examples for communication connections

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-41

Functions

Transmission Fault and Transmission Failure

The communication is continuously monitored by the devices. Single faulty data telegrams are not a direct risk if they occur only occasionally. They are recognized and counted in the device which detects the disturbance and can be read out as statistical information. If several faulty telegrams or no data telegrams at all are received, this can be regarded as a data fault as soon as a time delay for data disturbance alarm (default setting 100 ms, can be altered) is exceeded. A corresponding alarm is output. The differential protection will stop operating. Both devices are affected by the disturbance, since the formation of differential currents and restraint currents is no longer possible at any of the ends. If the backup overcurrent protection is configured, it will be the only shortcircuit protection still active. As soon as the data traffic works faultlessly again, the devices will automatically switch back to differential protection operation. Transmission time jumps that, for example, can occur in case of switchover in the communication network can be recognized and corrected by the device. The differential protection system continues to operate without any loss of sensitivity. After at least 2 seconds the transmission times are measured again. If the communication is interrupted for a permanent period (which is longer than a settable time period), this can be regarded as a transmission failure. A corresponding alarm is output. The same reactions apply as for the data fault.

6.4.2

Setting the Function Parameters


The protection data interfaces connect the devices with the communication media. The communication is permanently monitored by the devices. Address  7'$7$ ',6785% defines after which delay time the user is informed about a faulty or missing telegram. Address  7'$7$)$,/ is used to set the time after which a transmission failure alarm is output. The protection data interface 1 can be switched RQ or RII with address  67$7( 3527 , . If it is switched RII, this can be regarded as a transmission failure. The differential protection and all functions which require the transmission of data, cannot continue their operation. Address  &211(&  29(5 to set the transmission media that you want to connect to protection data interface PI 1. The following media are possible ) RSWLF GLUHFW, i.e. communication directly by fibre-optic cable with 512 kBit/s, &RP FRQY  N%, i.e. via communication converters with 64 kBit/s (G703,1 or X21) &RP FRQY  N%, i.e. via communication converters 128 kBit/s (X21) &RP FRQY  N%, i.e. via communication converters 512 kBit/s (X21). The possibilities may vary for the different device versions. The data must be identical at both ends of a communication route. The setting depends on the features of the communication media. As a general rule, it can be said that the higher the transmission rate is the shorter the response time of the differential protection system will be.

General Information on Protection Data Interfaces

Protection Data Interface 1

6-42

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Protection Data Interfaces and Differential Protection Topology

The devices measure and monitor the transmission times. Deviations are corrected, as long as they are within the permissible range. These permissible ranges are set under addresses $ and $ and can normally be left at their default setting. The maximum permissible delay time (address $ 3527  7'(/$<) is preset to a value that does not exceed the usual value of communication networks. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. If it is exceeded (e.g. when a different way of transmission is used), the message 3, 77 DODUP is issued. Increased delay times only have an impact on the tripping times of the differential protection. The maximum transmission time difference (outgoing signal vs. return signal) can be altered in address $ 3527  816<0. With a direct fibre-optic connection, this value can remain at . For transmission via communication networks a higher value must be set. The reference value is 100 s (presetting). This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. The permissible transmission time difference (addresses $ and $) have a direct influence on the sensitivity of the differential protection. The automatic self-restraint of the protection adapts the restraint quantities to these tolerances so that a spurious operation of the differential protection due to these influences is prevented. Thus, higher tolerance values reduce the sensitivity of the protection, which may be noticeable in case of very low-current faults. Communication Topology First of all, define the device index numbers: One relay gets index no. 1, the other index no. 2. For the differential protection system the device with index 1 is always the timing master, i.e. the absolute time management of both devices which belong together depends on the absolute time management of this device. As a result the time information of both devices is comparable at all times. Allocate also an identification number (deviceID) for each device. The deviceID is used by the communication system to identify each individual device. It must be between 1 and 65534 and must be unique within the communication system. The ID number identifies the devices in the communication system since the exchange of information between several differential protection systems (thus also for several protected objects) can be executed via the same communication system. Please make sure that the communications link and the existing interfaces are in accordance with each other. Next, the addresses  ,' 2) 5(/$<  and  ,' 2) 5(/$<  are set, e.g. for device 1 the device-ID  and for device 2 the device-ID  (Figure 6-25, compare also with Figure 6-23). The indices of the devices and the device-IDs do not have to match here, as mentioned above.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-43

Functions

Figure 6-25

Differential protection topology for 2 ends with 2 devices - example

Finally, you enter in address  /2&$/ 5(/$< the index of the actual local device. Enter the index 1 or 2 of that relay which is under consideration. Make sure that the parameters of the differential protection topology for the differential protection system are consistent: Each device index can only be used once; Each device index must be allocated unambiguously to one device ID; Each device index must be the index of a local device once; The device with index 1 is the source for the absolute time management (timing master). During the start-up of the protection system, the above listed conditions are checked. If one out of these conditions is not fulfilled, no differential protection operation is possible. The device signals '7 LQFRQVLVWHQW (Device table inconsistent).

6-44

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Protection Data Interfaces and Differential Protection Topology

6.4.3

Setting Overview

Protection Data Interfaces


Addr. 1509 1510 1501 1502 Setting Title T-DATA DISTURB T-DATAFAIL STATE PROT I 1 CONNEC. 1 OVER Setting Options 0.05..2.00 sec 0.0..60.0 sec ON OFF Direct connection with fibre optic cable Communication converter with 64 kBit/s Communication converter with 128 kBit/s Communication converter with 512 kBit/s 0.1..30.0 ms 0.000..3.000 ms Default Setting 0.10 sec 6.0 sec ON Direct connection with fibre optic cable Comments Time delay for data disturbance alarm Time delay for transmission failure alarm State of protection data interface 1 Connection 1 over

1505A 1506A

PROT 1 T-DELAY PROT 1 UNSYM.

30.0 ms 0.000 ms

Prot 1: Maximal permissible delay time Prot 1: Diff. in send and receive time

Topological Data
Addr. 1701 1702 1710 Setting Title ID OF RELAY 1 ID OF RELAY 2 LOCAL RELAY Setting Options 1..65534 1..65534 relay 1 relay 2 1 2 relay 1 Default Setting Comments Identification number of relay 1 Identification number of relay 2 Local relay is

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-45

Functions

6.4.4

Information Overview

Protection Data Interfaces


F.No. 3215 3217 3227 3229 3230 3233 3234 3235 3239 3243 Alarm Wrong Firmware PI1 Data reflec >PI1 light off PI1 Data fault PI1 Datafailure DT inconsistent DT unequal Par. different PI1 TT alarm PI1 with Comments Incompatible Firmware Versions Prot Int 1: Own Datas received >Prot Int 1: Transmitter is switched off Prot Int 1: Reception of faulty datas Prot Int 1: Total receiption failure Device table has inconsistent numbers Device tables are unequal Differences between common parameters Prot Int 1: Transmission time to high Prot Int 1: Connected with relay ID

Topological Data
F.No. 3451 3458 3464 3475 3476 3484 3487 >Logout Chaintopology Topol complete Rel1Logout Rel2Logout Logout Equal IDs Alarm > Logout input signal System operates in a open Chaintopology Communication topology is complete Relay 1 in Logout state Relay 2 in Logout state Local activation of Logout state Equal IDs in constellation Comments

6-46

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Direct Local Trip

6.5
6.5.1

Direct Local Trip


Function Description
Any signal from an external protection, monitoring or control device can be injected into the processing of 7SD610 via binary inputs. It can be delayed, output as an alarm and be routed to one or several output relays. Figure 6-26 shows the logic diagram. If the devices and circuit breakers are designed for single-pole control, single-pole tripping is possible. The tripping logic of the device ensures that the conditions for singlepole tripping are fulfilled (e.g. single-pole tripping permissible, reclosure device ready). The direct transfer trip can be switched on and off by parameters, and blocked via a binary input.

Direct Trip of the Local Circuit Breaker

AI## &
>DTT TRIP 3p

!!! UvUvr9@G6`
1 T 1 T 1 T
0

AI## !
>DTT TRIP L1

AI##"!
& DTT TRIP 1p L1

AI##""
DTT TRIP 1p L2 Tripping logic

AI## "
>DTT TRIP L2

&
0

AI##"#
DTT TRIP 1p L3

AI## #
>DTT TRIP L3

&

AI##"$
DTT TRIP L123

2201 1

A8U9vrpUv

AI##!
DTT TRIP off 1 &

PI PAA

AI##"
>DTT TRIP

AI##!!
DTT TRIP block

Figure 6-26

Logic diagram of the direct local trip (DTT)

6.5.2

Setting the Function Parameters


A precondition for the direct local trip is that during the configuration of the functions (Section 5.1) )&7 'LUHFW 7ULS = ([LVW has been configured in address . It can also be switched RQ and RII with address  )&7 'LUHFW 7ULS. For direct local trip a trip time delay can be set in address  7ULS 7LPH '(/$<. This delay can be used as a grading margin. A tripping command which has been issued is maintained for at least the minimum tripping command duration 70LQ 75,3 &0' which was configured for the device in address $ (Section 6.1.1). This ensures that the circuit breaker can be operated reliably even if the control pulse is very short.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-47

Functions

6.5.3
Addr. 2201 2202

Setting Overview
Setting Title FCT Direct Trip Trip Time DELAY ON OFF 0.00..30.00 sec; Setting Options Default Setting OFF 0.01 sec Comments Direct Transfer Trip (DTT) Trip Time Delay

6.5.4
F.No. 4403 4412 4413 4414 4417 4421 4422 4432 4433 4434 4435

Information Overview
Alarm >BLOCK DTT >DTT Trip L1 >DTT Trip L2 >DTT Trip L3 >DTT Trip L123 DTT OFF DTT BLOCK DTT TRIP 1p. L1 DTT TRIP 1p. L2 DTT TRIP 1p. L3 DTT TRIP L123 Comments >BLOCK Direct Transfer Trip function >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT Phase L1 >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT Phase L2 >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT Phase L3 >Direct Transfer Trip INPUT 3ph L123 Direct Transfer Trip is switched OFF Direct Transfer Trip is BLOCKED DTT TRIP command - Only L1 DTT TRIP command - Only L2 DTT TRIP command - Only L3 DTT TRIP command L123

6-48

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Direct Remote Trip or Transmission of Binary Information

6.6

Direct Remote Trip or Transmission of Binary Information


7SD610 allows the transmission of up to 4 items of binary information of any type from one device to the other via the communications links provided for protection tasks. These are transmitted like protection signals with high priority, i.e. very fast, and are therefore especially suitable for the transmission of external protection signals which are generated outside of 7SD610. Of course, they are suitable for any information, such as information on the events taking place in a station which may also be useful in the other station as well. The information is injected into the device via binary inputs and can be output at the other end again via binary outputs. The integrated user-defined CFC logic allows to perform on both the transmitting and the receiving side logical operations on the signals and on other information from the devices protection and monitoring functions. The binary outputs and the binary inputs to be used must be allocated appropriately during the configuration of the input and output functions (see Section 5.2). The signals, arrive at the device via the binary inputs !5HPRWH 7ULS to !5HPRWH 7ULS, transmitted to the device at the other end and can be processed at the receiving side with the output functions 5HPRWH7ULS UHF to 5HPRWH7ULS UHF. No settings are required for the transmission of binary information. Each device sends the injected information immediately to the other.

6.6.1
F.No. 3541 3542 3543 3544 3545 3546 3547 3548

Information Overview
Alarm >Remote Trip1 >Remote Trip2 >Remote Trip3 >Remote Trip4 RemoteTrip1 rec RemoteTrip2 rec RemoteTrip3 rec RemoteTrip4 rec >Remote Trip 1 signal input >Remote Trip 2 signal input >Remote Trip 3 signal input >Remote Trip 4 signal input Remote Trip 1 received Remote Trip 2 received Remote Trip 3 received Remote Trip 4 received Comments

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-49

Functions

6.7
6.7.1

Instantaneous High-speed SOTF Protection


Function Description
The instantaneous high-speed SOTF O/C function is provided to disconnect immediately and without delay feeders that are switched onto a high-current fault. It serves e.g. as a rapid protection for connecting a feeder with closed grounding disconnector. In order to function properly, the devices at both ends of the protective object must know the circuit breaker positions (breaker auxiliary contacts). A second stage works fast and without delay, regardless of the circuit breaker position.

General Information

,!!! 6WDJH

The pickup of the I>>> stage measures each phase current and compares it to the setting value ,!!!. The currents are numerically filtered so that only the fundamental component is evaluated. This high-current pickup is practically unaffected by d.c. components in short-circuit current as well as in secondary current after switching off high currents. If the setting value is exceeded by more than twice its value, the stage will automatically use the peak value of the unfiltered measured quantity so that extremely short command times are possible. This stage is only enabled when the local circuit breaker is connected while all remaining line ends of the protective object are open. The devices exchange the status of their respective circuit-breakers continuously via the communication link. If the protected object is already live (from the other end) the stage is not effective. An indispensable precondition for the functioning of the I>>> stage is that the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breakers are connected at both ends of the protected object and allocated on the relevant binary inputs. If this is not the case, this stage is not effective. A central function control communicates the information of the circuit breaker position to the high-current instantaneous tripping (see also Section 6.13.2) Figure 6-27 shows the logic diagram. The I>>> stage at the bottom of the diagram operates separately for each phase. During the manual closing of the circuit breaker all three phases are enabled via the signal +662) 75,3/ which is issued by the central functional control of the protection, provided that the manual closing can be recognized there (see Section 6.13). Tripping can also be enabled separately for each phase by the signals 62) 75,3 S/[. This applies also to e.g. automatic reclosure after single-pole tripping. Then, single-pole tripping with this stage is possible, but only if the device is designed for single-pole tripping.

I>>>> Stage

The I>>> stage trips regardless of the position of the circuit breakers. Here, the currents are also numerically filtered and the peak-value of the currents is measured from the double setting value onwards. Figure 6-27 shows the logic diagram in the upper part. Therefore, this stage is used when current grading is possible. This is possible with a small source impedance and at the same time a high impedance of the protected object (example can be found with the advice on setting, Section 6.7.2). The I>>> stage is enabled automatically by the current-step monitoring dI/dt of the device for a duration of 50 ms. This stage works separately for each phase.

6-50

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Instantaneous High-speed SOTF Protection

!#$ D3333
I>>>>
50 ms

d dt

AI#!'$#!'&
SOTF PU I>>>>L1 SOTF PU I>>>>L2 SOTF PU I>>>>L3

22I>>>>

!## D333
IL1 IL2 IL3

AI#!'(
SOTF TRIP 1pL1

AI#!(
SOTF TRIP 1pL2

I>>>

AI#!(
1 1 Tripping logic SOTF TRIP 1pL3

AI#!($
SOTF TRIP L123

22I>>> SOTF enab. L1 SOTF enab. L2. SOTF enab. L3 SOTF enab. L123

AI#!(!
SOTF TRIP 1p

AI#!(#
(all ends open)

SOTF TRIP 3p 1 &

AI#!'!#!'#
SOTF PU I>>> L1 SOTF PU I>>> L2 SOTF PU I>>> L3

L1 L2 L3 Figure 6-27

Logic diagram of the instantaneous high-speed SOTF overcurrent function

6.7.2

Setting the Function Parameters


A precondition for the use of the instantaneous high-speed SOTF overcurrent function is that during the configuration of the device functions (Section 5.1) 627) )XQF = ([LVW has configured in address . It can also be switched RQ and RII with address  )&7 +6627)2&.

,!!! Stage

The intensity of the short-circuit current which leads to the pickup of the I>>>-stage is set as ,!!! in address . This stage works only during the connecting of local end while the circuit breaker at the other end is open. Choose a value which is too high for the protection to respond to the r.m.s. value of the inrush current produced during the connection of the protected object. On the other hand, short-circuit currents flowing through the protected object need not be considered. During the configuration with a personal computer and DIGSI 4 the values can be entered in primary or secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are configured, the currents are converted to the secondary side of the current transformers.

I>>>> Stage

The ,!!!! stage (address 2405A) works regardless of the circuit breaker position. Since it trips extremely fast it must be set high enough not to respond to the short-circuit current flowing through the protected object. This means that it can be used only if the protected object allows current grading, as is the case with transformers, series reactors or long lines with small source impedance. In other cases it is set to (default

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-51

Functions
setting). This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. During the configuration with a personal computer and DIGSI 4 the values can be entered in primary or secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are configured, the currents are converted to the secondary side of the current transformers. Exemplary calculation: 110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 with the data: s (length) = 60 km R1/s = 0.19 /km X1/s = 0.42 /km Short-circuit power at the transmitting end: Sk" = 3.5 GVA (subtransient, since the I>>>> stage can respond to the first peak value) Current transformer 600 A/5 A From that the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZS are calculated: Z1/s = 0.192 + 0.422 /km = 0.46 /km ZL = 0.46 /km 60 km = 27.66 110 kV Z S = ----------------------------- = 3.46 3500 MVA The three-phase short-circuit current at the line end is I"k end: 1.1 U N 1.1 110 kV I" k end = ------------------------------------- = --------------------------------------------------------------- = 2245 A 3 (3.46 + 27.66 ) 3 ( ZV + ZL ) With a safety factor of 10 % the following primary setting value results: Setting value ,!!!! = 1.1 2245 A = 2470 A Or the secondary setting value: 2245 A Settingvalue I>>>> = 1.1 ------------------ 5 A = 20.6 A 600 A i.e. in case of short-circuit currents exceeding 2470 A (primary) or 20.6 A (secondary) you can be sure that a short-circuit has occurred on the protected line. This line can be disconnected immediately.
2 2

Note:
The calculation was carried out with absolute values, which is sufficiently precise for overhead lines. If the angles of the source impedance and the line impedance vary considerably, a complex calculation will have to be carried out.

6-52

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Instantaneous High-speed SOTF Protection

6.7.3

Setting Overview
Note: The indicated setting ranges and default settings refer to a secondary rated current of IN = 1 A. For the secondary rated current of IN = 5 A these values are to be multiplied by 5. For the setting of primary values the transformation ratio of the transformers must also be taken into consideration.

Addr. 2401 2404 2405A

Setting Title FCT SOTF-O/C I>>> I>>>> ON OFF

Setting Options

Default Setting ON 1.50 A

Comments Inst. High Speed SOTF-O/C is I>>> Pickup I>>>> Pickup

0.10..15.00 A; 1.00..25.00 A;

6.7.4
F.No. 4253 4271 4272 4273 4281 4282 4283 4284 4285 4286 4287 4289 4290 4291 4292 4293 4294 4295

Information Overview
Alarm >BLOCK SOTF-O/C SOTF-O/C OFF SOTF-O/C BLOCK SOTF-O/C ACTIVE SOTF-O/C PICKUP SOF O/CpickupL1 SOF O/CpickupL2 SOF O/CpickupL3 I>>>>O/C p.upL1 I>>>>O/C p.upL2 I>>>>O/C p.upL3 HS/SOF TRIP1pL1 HS/SOF TRIP1pL2 HS/SOF TRIP1pL3 HS/SOF TRIP 1p HS/SOF Gen.TRIP HS/SOF TRIP 3p HS/SOF TRIPL123 SOTF-O/C is switched OFF SOTF-O/C is BLOCKED SOTF-O/C is ACTIVE SOTF-O/C PICKED UP SOTF-O/C Pickup L1 SOTF-O/C Pickup L2 SOTF-O/C Pickup L3 High Speed-O/C Pickup I>>>> L1 High Speed-O/C Pickup I>>>> L2 High Speed-O/C Pickup I>>>> L3 High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP - Only L1 High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP - Only L2 High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP - Only L3 High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP 1pole High Speed/SOTF-O/C General TRIP High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP 3pole High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP command L123 Comments >BLOCK Instantaneous SOTF Overcurrent

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-53

Functions

6.8

Time Overcurrent Protection


The 7SD610 has a time overcurrent protection function which can be used as either a back-up or an emergency overcurrent protection. Whereas the differential protection can only operate correctly if each device receives the data of the other device properly, the emergency overcurrent protection requires only the local currents. The emergency overcurrent protection is automatically activated when the data communication of the differential protection is disturbed (emergency operation) and the differential protection is blocked as a result. This means that emergency operation will replace the differential protection for shortcircuit protection if the data communication fails. If the overcurrent protection is set as a back-up overcurrent protection, it will work independently of other protection and monitoring functions, i.e. also independently of the differential protection. The back-up overcurrent protection can also be used as sole short-circuit protection if no suitable channels for the communication between the protection devices are available during the initial commissioning. The overcurrent protection has a total of four stages for each phase current and for the ground current; these are: Two overcurrent stages with independent trip time (definite-time overcurrent protection), One overcurrent stage with current-dependent trip time (inverse-time overcurrent protection), A further overcurrent stage which has an additional enable input and can therefore be used as an emergency stage e.g. if the remaining stages are used as back-up stages. These four stages do not depend on one another and can be combined as desired. Blocking from external criteria is possible via binary inputs just like instantaneous tripping. It is also possible to switch to any one or more of the stages if the protected object is switched onto a fault. The stages not required can be deactived by setting the pickup value to .

General Information

6.8.1

Function Description
The phase currents are fed to the device via the input transformers of the measurement input. The ground current 3I0 is either measured directly or calculated, depending on the version ordered and the use of the devices fourth current input I4. If I4 is connected to the starpoint of the current transformer set, the ground current will be available directly as measured quantity. If I4 is connected to a separate ground current transformer, this will be used, while considering the factor ,,SK &7 (address , see Section 6.1.1) of the Power System Data 1.

Measured Quantities

6-54

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Time Overcurrent Protection


If the ground current is not connected to the fourth current input I4 (address  , WUDQVIRUPHU = QRW FRQQHFWHG, see Section 6.1.1), the device will calculate the ground current from the phase currents. Of course, all three phase currents of three star-connected current transformers must be available and connected in this case. Definite Time Highcurrent Stage I>> Each phase current is compared with the setting value ,SK!! after numerical filtering; the ground current is compared with ,!! 3,&.83. When the relevant delay times 7 ,SK!! or 7 ,!! are expired, a tripping command is issued. The reset value is approximately 5 % less than the pickup value, but at least 1.5 % of the rated current below it. Figure 6-28 shows the logic diagram of the I>> stages. They can be blocked via the binary input !%/2&. 2& ,!!. In addition, the ground current stage can be blocked separately via the binary input !%/2&. 2& ,H!!, e.g. during a single-pole pause before reclosure in order to avoid a spurious tripping with the zero phase-sequence system which is present then.

Du33 !% 

!%

UDu33
I>> PU L1 I>> PU L2 I>> PU L3 1 & I>> TRIP L1 I>> TRIP L2 I>> TRIP L3

IL1 IL2 IL3

Iph>>

&

L1 L2 L3
"D33 !% ! !% " U"D33
I>> PU E
IE

3I0>>

&

1 &

I>> TRIP E

AI& &
>O/C Ie>> blk

AI& #
>O/C I>> blk

AI&

!% # D33Uryr7D `r I
0

>O/C InstTRIP
Switching onto a fault T

`r I !% $ TPUAD33
further stages

UTPUA !%'

Figure 6-28

Logic diagram of the I>> stage

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-55

Functions
The binary input !2& ,QVW75,3 and the function block Switch onto fault are the same for all stages and explained in detail below. They can, however, affect the phase and/ or ground stages separately. This can be achieved with two parameters: ,!! 7HOHS%, (address ) defines whether an instantaneous tripping without delay of this stage is possible (<HV) via the binary input !2& ,QVW75,3 or impossible (1R). This parameter is also used for instantaneous tripping before automatic reclosure. ,!! 627) (address ) defines whether an instantaneous tripping is to be performed by this stage (<HV) or not (1R) if the line is switched onto a fault. Definite Time Overcurrent Stage I> Inverse Time Overcurrent Stage Ip The logic of the overcurrent stages I> is designed like the I>> stages, except that in all designations ,SK!! is replaced by ,SK! and ,!! 3,&.83 by ,!. The logic of the current-dependent (inverse time) stage works basically like the other stages. However, the time delay is calculated here from the type of the set characteristic (parameter ,(& &XUYH), the intensity of the current and a time multiplier (Figure 6-29). A preselection of the possible characteristics has been made during the configuration of the protection functions. Moreover, a constant additional time 7 ,S $GG or 7 ,S $GG can be selected which is added to the current-dependent time. The possible characteristics are shown in Section 10.6, Technical data. Figure 6-29 shows the logic diagram. Here, exemplary setting addresses for the IEC characteristics are shown. The setting notes (Section 6.8.2) explain the various setting addresses in detail.

6-56

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Time Overcurrent Protection

!%% D@88r !%# DQ3 !%#! UDUvr9vhy


Ip PU L1 Ip PU L2 Ip PU L3 IP &
T 0
t I

IL1 IL2 IL3

!%#% UDQ6qq U"DQ


&

Ip TRIP L1 Ip TRIP L2 Ip TRIP L3

L1 L2 L3

"DQD8FVQ !%$

!%$! U"DUvr9vhy
Ip PU E

IE

3I0P

t I

&

Ip TRIP E

!%$% U"DQ6qq
&

AI& (
>O/C Iep blk

AI& %
>O/C Ip blk

AI&
Switching onto a fault

!%& D"DUryr7D `r I
0

>O/C InstTRIP
T

`r I !%&
further stages

TPUAU9@G !%'

D"DTPUA

Figure 6-29

Logic diagram of the Ipstage (inverse-time overcurrent protection) example for IEC characteristics

Additional Overcurrent Stage I STUB

The additional definite time or instantaneous overcurrent stage Iph> STUB has an extra enable input (Figure 6-30) and is therefore also suitable e.g. as a stub protection or as an emergency stage if the remaining stages are used as back-up stages. The enable input !,678% (1$%/( can be assigned the output signal (PHU PRGH (either via binary outputs and inputs or via the user-definable logic CFC functions). The input is then automatically in operation when the differential protection is not effective any more due to a data disturbance.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-57

Functions

The Iph> STUB stage can, however, also be used as a standard additional and independent overcurrent stage, since it works independent of the other stages. In this case, the release input !,678% (1$%/( must be permanently activated (via a binary input or CFC).

Du3TUV7 !%"

!%" UDuTUV7
I-STUB PU L1 I-STUB PU L2 I-STUB PU L3 1 & I-STUB TRIP L1 I-STUB TRIP L2 I-STUB TRIP L3

IL1 IL2 IL3

Iph

&

L1 L2 L3
"D3TUV7 !%"! !%"" U"DTUV7
I-STUB PU E
IE

3I0

&

1 &

I-STUB TRIP E

AI& "! AI& "

>BLOCK O/CIe>>> >BLOCK I-STUB

AI& "
>I-STUB ENABLE

AI&

!%"# DTUV7Uryr7D `r

>O/C InstTRIP.
Switching onto a fault T 0

I `r I

TPUAU9@G !%'

!%"$ DTUV7TPUA
further stages

Figure 6-30

Logic diagram of the I>>> stage

Instantaneous Tripping before Automatic Reclosure

If an automatic reclosure is to be carried out, a rapid clearing of the fault is usually desirable before reclosure. A ready for reclosure signal from an external automatic reclosure device can be injected via binary input !2& ,QVW75,3. The internal automatic reclosure function if existent acts on this input as well. Any stage of the overcurrent protection can thus perform an instantaneous trip before reclosure via the parameters ,...7HOHS%,.

6-58

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Time Overcurrent Protection

Switching onto a Fault

To to perform an instantaneous trip if the circuit breaker is manually closed onto a dead fault, the manual closing command of the control-discrepancy switch can be fed to the device via a binary input. The overcurrent protection then perform a three-pole trip with no or almost no delay. The stage(s) for which the instantaneous trip after manual closing is valid are determined by parameters (see also logic diagrams Figure 628, 6-29 and 6-30). The pickup signals of the individual phases (or the ground) and of the stages are linked in such a way that both the phase information and the stage which has picked up are output (Table 6-2). For the tripping signals, the stage which caused the tripping is output as well. For single-pole tripping, the pole is identified (see also Section 6.13.4 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device).

Pickup and Tripping Logic

Table 6-2

Pickup signals of the overcurrent protection


Figure 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-28 6-29 6-30 6-28 6-28 6-28 6-28 2& 3LFNXS ( 7165 2& 3LFNXS / 7164 2& 3LFNXS / 7163 2& 3LFNXS / 7162 Output message FNo

Internal message I>> PU L1 I> PU L1 Ip PU L1 I-STUB PU L1 I>> PU L2 I> PU L2 Ip PU L2 I-STUB PU L2 I>> PU L3 I> PU L3 Ip PU L3 I-STUB PU L3 I>> PU E I> PU E Ip PU E I-STUB PU E I>> PU L1 I>> PU L2 I>> PU L3 I>> PU E I> PU L1 I> PU L2 I> PU L3 I> PU E Ip PU L1 Ip PU L2 Ip PU L3 Ip PU E I-STUB PU L1 I-STUB PU L2 I-STUB PU L3 I-STUB PU E (all pick-ups)

2& 3,&.83 ,!!

7191

2& 3,&.83 ,!

7192

6-29 6-29 6-29 6-29 6-30 6-30 6-30 6-30

2& 3,&.83 ,S

7193

,678% 3,&.83 2& 3,&.83

7201

7161

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-59

Functions

6.8.2

Setting the Function Parameters


During the configuration of the device functions (see Section 5.1, address ) the available characteristics have been defined. Depending on the configuration and depending on the version ordered, only those parameters are accessible which are valid for the available characteristics. Address  is set according to the desired mode of operation of the overcurrent protection: 2SHUDWLQJ 0RGH = 2Q means that the overcurrent protection works independently of other protection functions, i.e. as a backup overcurrent protection. If it is to work only as an emergency function in case of a transmission failure, 2QO\ (PHUJHQF\ SURWHFWLRQ must be set. Finally, it can also be set to 2II. If some stages are not needed, those not needed can be deactivated by setting the pickup value to . But if you set an associated time delay to this does not suppress the pickup signals but prevents the time from running. The I>>> stage is even effective if 2QO\ (PHUJHQF\ SURWHFWLRQ has been set for the operating mode of the overcurrent protection. One or several stages can be set as instantaneous tripping stages when switching onto a fault. This is chosen during the setting of the individual stages (see below). To avoid a spurious tripping due to transient overcurrents a delay 627) 7LPH '(/$< (address ) can be set. Normally the default setting  is correct. A short delay can be useful in case of long cables for which high inrush currents can be expected, or for transformers. This delay depends on the intensity and duration the of the transient phenomena and on the stages used for the instantaneous tripping.

General Information

High-Current Stages Iph>>, 3I0>> PICKUP

The I>> stages ,SK!! (address ) and ,!! 3,&.83 (address ) together with the I> stages or the Ip stages result in a two-stage characteristic. Of course, all three stages can be combined as well. If a stage is not required, the pickup value is set to . The I>> stages always operate with a defined delay. If the I>> stages are used for instantaneous tripping before the automatic reclosure, the current-setting corresponds to the I> or Ip stages. In this case only the different delay times are of interest. The times 7 ,SK!! (address ) and 7 ,!! (address ) can than be set to 0 or a very low value, as the fast reclosure of the short-circuit current takes priority over the selectivity before the automatic reclosure is initiated. In order to achieve the selectivity these stages have to be blocked before final reclosure. For very long lines with a small source impedance or before large reactances (e.g. transformers, series reactors), the I>> stages can also be used for current grading. In this case they must be set in such a way that they do not pick up in case of a fault at the end of the line. The times can then be set to  or to a small value. During the parameterization from a personal computer using DIGSI 4, the parameters can be set as primary or secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are used, all currents will be converted to the secondary side of the current transformers. Exemplary calculation: 110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 with the data: s (length) = 60 km R1/s = 0.19 /km X1/s = 0.42 /km

6-60

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Time Overcurrent Protection

Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line: = 2.5 GVA Sk Current transformers 600 A/5 A From that the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZS are calculated: Z1/s = 0.192 + 0.422 /km = 0.46 /km ZL = 0.46 /km 60 km = 27.66 110 kV Z S = ----------------------------- = 4.84 2500 MVA The three-phase fault current at the line end is Ik End: 1.1 U N 1, 1 110 kV I k End = ------------------------------------- = --------------------------------------------------------------- = 2150 A 3 ( 4.84 + 27.66 ) 3 ( ZS + ZL ) With a safety factor of 10 %, the following primary setting value is calculated: Setting value I>> = 1.1 2150 A = 2365 A Or the secondary setting value: 2150 A Settingvalue I>> = 1.1 ------------------ 5 A = 19.7 A 600 A i.e. in case of fault currents exceeding 2365 A (primary) or 19.7 A (secondary) you can be sure that a short-circuit has occurred on the protected line. It can be disconnected by the overcurrent protection immediately.
2 2

Note: the calculation was carried out with absolute values, which is sufficiently precise for overhead lines. If the angles of the source impedance and the line impedance vary considerably, a complex calculation will have to be carried out.
A similar calculation can be carried out for ground faults, with the maximum earth current occurring at the line end during a short-circuit being decisive. The set times are pure additional delays which do not include the inherent operating time of the protection. The parameter ,!! 7HOHS%, (address ) defines whether the time delays 7 ,SK!! (address ) and 7 ,!! (address ) can be bypassed by the binary input !2& ,QVW75,3 (FNo ) or by the operational automatic reclosure function. The binary input (if allocated) is the same for all stages of the overcurrent protection. With ,!! 7HOHS%, = <HV you define that the I>> stages trip without delay after pickup if the binary input was activated. For ,!! 7HOHS%, = 1R the set delays are always active. Instantaneous tripping by the operational auto-reclosure function should only be chosen if the overcurrent protection is set to emergency function. Since the differential protection guarantees a fast and selective tripping with or without autoreclosure, the overcurrent protection as a back-up protection may not perform a nonselective trip, even before auto-reclosure. If the I>> stage is to perform an instantaneous trip (when the line is switched onto a fault) or a trip with a short time delay 627) 7LPH '(/$< (address , refer to General Information above), set the parameter ,!! 627) (address ) to <HV. Any other stage can be selected as well for this instantaneous tripping.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-61

Functions
For the setting of the current pickup value, ,SK! (address ), the maximum operating current is most decisive. Pickup through overload must be excluded, since the device works in this operating mode as a short-circuit protection, not as an overload protection, and the command times are commensurately short. The pickup value should therefore be set to a higher value than the maximum (over-)load to be expected, i.e. approx. 10 % for lines and approximately 20 % for transformers and motors. During configuration from a personal computer using DIGSI 4 the parameters can be set either to primary or secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are used, all currents will be converted to the secondary side of the current transformers. Exemplary calculation: 110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 as above: Maximum transmitted power Pmax = 120 MVA corresponding to Imax = 630 A Current transformer 600 A/5 A Safety factor 1.1

Overcurrent Stages Iph>, 3I0> for Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

With settings in primary quantities the following setting value is calculated: Setting value I> = 1.1 630 A = 693 A With settings in secondary quantities the following setting value is calculated: 630 A Setting value I> = 1.1 --------------- 5 A = 5.8 A 600 A The ground current stage ,! (address ) should be set to detect the smallest ground fault current to be expected. The time delay 7 ,SK! (address ) results from the time grading schedule designed for the network. For use as an emergency overcurrent protection, shorter delay times make sense (one grading time step above instantaneous tripping), since this function is to work only in case of an interruption of the data communication of the differential protection. The time 7 ,! (address ) can normally be set shorter, according to a separate time grading schedule for ground currents. The set times are mere additional delays for the independent stages, which do not include the inherent operating time of the protection. If only the phase currents are to be monitored for a stage, set the pickup value of the ground current stage to . The parameter ,! 7HOHS%, (address ) defines whether the time delays 7 ,SK! (address ) and 7 ,! (address ) can be bypassed by the binary input !2& ,QVW75,3 (FNo ) or by the operational automatic reclosure function. The binary input (if allocated) is the same for all stages of the overcurrent protection. With ,! 7HOHS%, = <HV you define that the I> stages trip without delay after pickup if the binary input was activated. For ,! 7HOHS%, = 1R the set delays are always active. Instantaneous tripping by the operational auto-reclosure function should only be chosen if the overcurrent protection is set to emergency function. Since the differential protection guarantees a fast and selective tripping with or without autoreclosure, the overcurrent protection as a back-up protection may not perform a nonselective trip, even before auto-reclosure.

6-62

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Time Overcurrent Protection

If the I> stage is to perform an instantaneous trip, when the line is switched onto a fault, or a trip with a short time delay 627) 7LPH '(/$< (address , refer to General Information above), set the parameter ,! 627) (address ) to Yes. However, the stage selected for instantaneous tripping should not be too sensitive since a strong fault current is to be expected when switching onto a fault, and transient pickup of the selected stage on switching on must be avoided. Overcurrent Stages IP, 3I0P for Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection with IEC Characteristics Various characteristics can be chosen for the current-dependent stages, depending on the version ordered and the configuration (Section 5.1, address ). Under address  ,(& &XUYH the following IEC characteristics (address  3URW21 2)) = 2& ,(&) are available: ,QYHUVH (Type A in accordance with IEC 602553), 9HU\ ,QYHUVH (Type B in accordance with IEC 602553), ([WUHPHO\ ,QY (Type C in accordance with IEC 602553), and Inverse-time overcurrent /RQJWLPH (Type B in accordance with IEC 602553). The characteristics and the formula on which they are based, are shown in the technical data (Section 10.6). The considerations for the overcurrent stages of the definite-time overcurrent protection (see above) are also valid for the setting of the pickup values ,S! (address ) and ,S 3,&.83 (address ). It should be noted that a safety margin has already been included between the pickup value and the setting value and that the protection picks up only when the setting value is exceeded by 10 %. Referring to the above example, the maximum operational current to be expected can be set here: Primary: Setting value ,S! =  A, Secondary: Setting value ,S! =  A, i.e. (630 A / 600 A) 5 A. The time multiplier 7 ,S 7LPH 'LDO (address ) derives from the time grading schedule set for the network. For the use as emergency overcurrent protection shorter delay times make sense (one grading time step above instantaneous tripping), since this function is to work only in case of an interruption of the data communication of the differential protection. The time multiplier 7 ,S 7LPH'LDO (address ) can normally be set shorter, according to a separate time grading schedule for ground currents. If only the phase currents are to be monitored, set the pickup value of the ground current stage to . In addition to the current-dependent delays, a delay of constant length can be set, if necessary. The settings 7 ,S $GG (address  for phase currents) and 7 ,S $GG (address  for ground current) are added to the times of the set characteristics. The parameter , , S 7HOH%, (address ) defines whether the time delays 7 ,S 7LPH 'LDO (address ) including the additional time 7 ,S $GG (address ) and 7 ,S 7LPH'LDO (address ) including the additional time 7 ,S $GG (address ) can be bypassed by the binary input !2& ,QVW75,3 (FNo ) or by the operational automatic reclosure function. The binary input (if allocated) is the same for all stages of the overcurrent protection. With , , S 7HOH%, = <HV you define that the IPstages trip without delay after pickup if the binary input was activated. For , , S 7HOH%, = 1R the set delays are always active. Instantaneous tripping by the operational auto-reclosure function should only be chosen if the overcurrent protection is set to emergency function. Since the differential protection

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-63

Functions

guarantees a fast and selective tripping with or without auto-reclosure, the overcurrent protection as a back-up protection may not perform a non-selective trip, even before auto-reclosure. If the inverse time stage is to perform an instantaneous trip, when the line is switched onto a fault, or a trip with a short time delay 627) 7LPH '(/$< (address , refer to General Information above), set the parameter , , S 627) (address ) to Yes. However, the stage selected for instantaneous tripping should not be too sensitive since a strong fault current is to be expected when switching onto a fault, and transient pickup of the selected stage on switching on must be avoided. Overcurrent Stages IP, 3I0P for Inversetime Overcurrent Protection with ANSI Characteristics Various characteristics can be chosen for the current-dependent stages, depending on the version ordered and the configuration (Section 5.1, address ). Under address  $16, &XUYH the following ANSI characteristics (address  3URW21 2)) = 2& $16,) are available: ,QYHUVH, 6KRUW ,QYHUVH, /RQJ ,QYHUVH, 0RGHUDWHO\ ,QY, 9HU\ ,QYHUVH, ([WUHPHO\ ,QY and 'HILQLWH ,QY The characteristics and the formula on which they are based, are shown in the technical data (Section 10.6). The considerations for the overcurrent stages of the definite-time overcurrent protection (see above) are also valid for the setting of the pickup values ,S! (address ) and ,S 3,&.83 (address ). It should be noted that a safety margin has already been included between the pickup value and the setting value and that the protection picks up only when the setting value is exceeded by 10 %. Referring to the above example, the maximum operational current to be expected can be set here: Primary: setting value ,S! = 630 A, Secondary: setting value ,S! = 5.25 A, i.e. (630 A / 600 A) 5 A. The time multiplier 7LPH 'LDO 7' ,S (address ) derives from the time grading schedule set for the network. For the use as emergency overcurrent protection shorter delay times make sense (one grading time step above instantaneous tripping), since this function is to work only in the case of an interruption of the data communication of the differential protection. The time multiplier 7LPH'LDO 7',S (address ) can normally be set shorter, according to a separate time grading schedule for ground currents. If only the phase currents are to be monitored, set the pickup value of the ground current stage to . In addition to the current-dependent delays, a delay of constant length can be set, if necessary. The settings 7 ,S $GG (address  for phase currents) and 7 ,S $GG (address  for ground current) are added to the times of the set characteristics. The parameter , , S 7HOH%, (address ) defines whether the time delays 7LPH 'LDO 7' ,S (address  including the additional time 7 ,S $GG (address ) and 7LPH'LDO 7',S (address ) including the additional time 7

6-64

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Time Overcurrent Protection


,S $GG (address ) can be bypassed by the binary input !2& ,QVW75,3 (FNo ) or by the operational automatic reclosure function. The binary input (if allocated) is the same for all stages of the overcurrent protection. With , , S 7HOH %, = <HV you define that the IP stages trip without delay after pickup if the binary input was activated. For , , S 7HOH%, = 1R the set delays are always active. Instantaneous tripping by the operational auto-reclosure function should only be chosen if the overcurrent protection is set to emergency function. Since the differential protection guarantees a fast and selective tripping with or without auto-reclosure, the overcurrent protection as a back-up protection may not perform a non-selective trip, even before auto-reclosure. If the inverse time stage is to perform an instantaneous trip (when the line is switched onto a fault) or a trip with a short time delay 627) 7LPH '(/$< (address , refer to General Information above), set the parameter , , S 627) (address ) to Yes. However, the stage selected for instantaneous tripping should not be too sensitive since a strong fault current is to be expected when switching onto a fault, and transient pickup of the selected stage on switching on must be avoided. Additional Stage Iph> STUB The Iph> STUB stage can be used as an additional definite time overcurrent stage, since it works independently of the other stages. In this case, the enable input !, 678% (1$%/( (FNo ) must be activated permanently (via a binary input or CFC). Alternatively, it can be used as a stub bus protection. In this case, the enable input !,678% (1$%/( is activated by the indication of the open line disconnector. Since the Iph> STUB stage has an additional enable input, it is also suitable e.g. as an emergency stage if the remaining stages are used as back-up stages. The to release input !,678% (1$%/( (FNo ) can be assigned the output signal (P HU PRGH (either via binary outputs and inputs or via the user-definable logic CFC functions). The considerations for the use of the Iph> STUB stage as an emergency function are the same as for the I> stages. The setting value ,SK! 678% (address ) must here too be higher than the maximum operational current to be expected, in order to avoid pickup without short-circuit. The delay 7 ,SK 678% (address ), however, can be shorter than defined in the time grading schedule, since this stage works only in emergency operation, i.e. in case of a communication failure of the differential protection. Normally, one time step above the base time of the differential protection is sufficient. The ground current stage ,! 678% (address ) should correspondingly pick up on the smallest ground current to be expected during a ground fault and the delay 7 , 678% (address ) should exceed the base time of the differential protection by a grading time. If only the phase currents are to be monitored, set the pickup value of the ground fault stage to . The Iph> STUB stage can also be accelerated by the enable signal !2& ,QVW 75,3 (FNo ), e.g. before an auto-reclosure. This is defined with parameter , 678% 7HOHS%, (address ). Set it on <HV if the Iph> STUB stage is to trip without delay as long as the binary input !2& ,QVW75,3 is activated or the internal auto-reclosure function is ready to operate. Instantaneous tripping by the operational auto-reclosure should only be chosen if the Iph> STUB stage is set as an emergency function. If the differential protection is out of operation, this emergency stage guarantees instantaneous tripping before auto-reclosure.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-65

Functions

Instantaneous tripping when the line is switched onto a fault is also possible with the Iph> STUB stage. Set parameter ,678% 627) (address ) to Yes, if instantaneous tripping is desired.

6.8.3

Setting Overview
Note: The indicated setting ranges and default settings refer to a secondary rated current of IN = 1 A. For the secondary rated current of IN = 5 A these values are to be multiplied by 5. For the setting of primary values the transformation ratio of the transformers must also be taken into consideration.

Addr. 2601

Setting Title Operating Mode

Setting Options ON Only Emergency protection OFF 0.00..30.00 sec 0.10..25.00 A; 0.00..30.00 sec; 0.05..25.00 A; 0.00..30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES 0.10..25.00 A; 0.00..30.00 sec; 0.05..25.00 A; 0.00..30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES 0.10..4.00 A; 0.05..3.00 sec; 0.50..15.00; 0.00..30.00 sec 0.05..4.00 A; 0.05..3.00 sec;

Default Setting ON

Comments Operating mode

2680 2610 2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2620 2621 2622 2623 2624 2625 2640 2642 2643 2646 2650 2652

SOTF Time DELAY Iph>> T Iph>> 3I0>> PICKUP T 3I0>> I>> Telep/BI I>> SOTF Iph> T Iph> 3I0> T 3I0> I> Telep/BI I> SOTF Ip> T Ip Time Dial Time Dial TD Ip T Ip Add 3I0p PICKUP T 3I0p TimeDial

0.00 sec 2.00 A 0.30 sec 0.50 A 2.00 sec YES NO 1.50 A 0.50 sec 0.20 A 2.00 sec NO NO

Trip time delay after SOTF Iph>> Pickup T Iph>> Time delay 3I0>> Pickup T 3I0>> Time delay Instantaneous trip via Teleprot./ BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Iph> Pickup T Iph> Time delay 3I0> Pickup T 3I0> Time delay Instantaneous trip via Teleprot./ BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Ip> Pickup T Ip Time Dial Time Dial TD Ip T Ip Additional Time Delay 3I0p Pickup T 3I0p Time Dial

A
0.50 sec 5.00 0.00 sec

A
0.50 sec

6-66

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Time Overcurrent Protection

Addr. 2653 2656 2660

Setting Title TimeDial TD3I0p T 3I0p Add IEC Curve

Setting Options 0.50..15.00; 0.00..30.00 sec Normal Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long time inverse Inverse Short Inverse Long Inverse Moderately Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Definite Inverse NO YES NO YES 0.10..25.00 A; 0.00..30.00 sec; 0.05..25.00 A; 0.00..30.00 sec; NO YES NO YES

Default Setting 5.00 0.00 sec Normal Inverse

Comments Time Dial TD 3I0p T 3I0p Additional Time Delay IEC Curve

2661

ANSI Curve

Inverse

ANSI Curve

2670 2671 2630 2631 2632 2633 2634 2635

I(3I0)p Tele/BI I(3I0)p SOTF Iph> STUB T Iph STUB 3I0> STUB T 3I0 STUB I-STUB Telep/BI I-STUB SOTF

NO NO 1.50 A 0.30 sec 0.20 A 2.00 sec NO NO

Instantaneous trip via Teleprot./ BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault Iph> STUB Pickup T Iph STUB Time delay 3I0> STUB Pickup T 3I0 STUB Time delay Instantaneous trip via Teleprot./ BI Instantaneous trip after SwitchOnToFault

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-67

Functions

6.8.4
F.No. 7104 7105 7106 7107 7108 7109 7110 7130 7131 7132 7151 7152 7153 7161 7162 7163 7164 7165 7191 7192 7193 7201 7211 7212 7213 7214 7215 7221 7222 7223 7235

Information Overview
Alarm >BLOCK O/C I>> >BLOCK O/C I> >BLOCK O/C Ip >BLOCK O/C Ie>> >BLOCK O/C Ie> >BLOCK O/C Iep >O/C InstTRIP >BLOCK I-STUB >I-STUB ENABLE >BLOCK O/CIe>>> O/C OFF O/C BLOCK O/C ACTIVE O/C PICKUP O/C Pickup L1 O/C Pickup L2 O/C Pickup L3 O/C Pickup E O/C PICKUP I>> O/C PICKUP I> O/C PICKUP Ip I-STUB PICKUP O/C TRIP O/C TRIP 1p.L1 O/C TRIP 1p.L2 O/C TRIP 1p.L3 O/C TRIP L123 O/C TRIP I>> O/C TRIP I> O/C TRIP Ip I-STUB TRIP Comments >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent I>> >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent I> >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ip >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ie>> >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ie> >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Iep >Backup OverCurrent InstantaneousTrip >BLOCK I-STUB >Enable I-STUB-Bus function >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ie>>> Backup O/C is switched OFF Backup O/C is BLOCKED Backup O/C is ACTIVE Backup O/C PICKED UP Backup O/C PICKUP L1 Backup O/C PICKUP L2 Backup O/C PICKUP L3 Backup O/C PICKUP EARTH Backup O/C Pickup I>> Backup O/C Pickup I> Backup O/C Pickup Ip O/C I-STUB Pickup Backup O/C General TRIP command Backup O/C TRIP - Only L1 Backup O/C TRIP - Only L2 Backup O/C TRIP - Only L3 Backup O/C TRIP Phases L123 Backup O/C TRIP I>> Backup O/C TRIP I> Backup O/C TRIP Ip O/C I-STUB TRIP

6-68

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Automatic Reclosure

6.9

Automatic Reclosure
Experience shows that about 85 % of the arc faults on overhead lines are extinguished automatically after being tripped by the protection. The line can therefore be re-closed. Reclosure is performed by an automatic reclosure function (AR). An example of the normal time sequence of a double-shot reclosure is shown in Figure 6-31. If the circuit breaker poles can be operated individually, a single-pole auto-reclosure is often initiated in the case of single-phase faults and a three-pole auto-reclosure in the case of multi-phase faults in the network with earthed star point. If the fault still exists after reclosure (arc not extinguished or metallic short-circuit), the protection ultimately trips. Several reclosure attempts are made in some networks. Automatic reclosure is only permitted on overhead lines because the possibility of automatic extinguishing of a fault arc only exists there. It may not be used in any other case. If the protected object consists of a mixture of overhead lines and other equipment (e.g. overhead line in block with a transformer or overhead line/cable), it must be ensured that reclosure can only be performed in the event of a fault on the overhead line. In the version with single-pole tripping, 7SD610 allows phase-segregated, single-pole tripping. A single- and three-pole, single and multiple shot automatic reclosure function is integrated, depending on the order variant. 7SD610 can also operate together with an external automatic reclosure device provided the binary inputs and outputs are available. In this case the signal exchange between 7SD610 and the external reclosure device must take place via the binary inputs and outputs. It is also possible to have the integrated automatic reclosure function controlled by an external protection (e.g. alternate protection).

Pickup
aborted aborted

Action time Trip command Close command Reclaim time


1st reclosure unsuccessful; further tripping during off time

dead time 1st reclosure

dead time 2nd reclosure

aborted

reclaim time
2nd reclosure successful, no further tripping during off time

Reclosure active Figure 6-31

start with 1st trip command

Timing diagram of a double-shot reclosure with action time (2nd reclosure successful)

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-69

Functions

6.9.1

Function Description
The integrated automatic reclosure function allows up to 8 reclosure attempts. The first four reclosure cycles may operate with different parameters (active and dead times, single/three-pole). The parameters of the fourth cycle apply from the fifth cycle onwards.

Selectivity before Reclosure

In order for the automatic reclosure to be successful, all faults on the whole overhead line should be eliminated at both line ends at the same as short as possible time. This is the usual case in differential protection because the strict selective zone definition of the protected object by the current transformer sets always allows undelayed tripping. However, fast tripping of the protection may also be desired before reclosure after tripping by other short-circuit functions. For this purpose, every short-circuit protection which can start the automatic reclosure function has the possibility of initiating undelayed tripping in at least one stage when the automatic reclosure function is ready for the first reclosure cycle. Fast tripping before reclosure is also possible for multiple reclosures. Appropriate links between the output messages (e.g. 2nd reclosure ready: $5 &\F=RQH5HO) and the inputs for undelayed tripping of the protective functions can be established via the binary inputs and outputs or the integrated user-definable logic functions (CFC).

Start

Starting the automatic reclosure function means saving the first trip signal of a network fault generated by a protection function operating with automatic reclosure. In the case of multiple reclosure, starting therefore only takes place once with the first trip command. Saving this signal is the prerequisite for all subsequent activities of the automatic reclosure function. The starting is important when the first trip command does not appear until the end of an action time (see below under Action Times). Automatic reclosure is not started if the circuit breaker has not been ready for at least one TRIPCLOSETRIPcycle at the instant of the first trip command. This can be achieved by setting parameters. See also subtitle Interrogation of Circuit Breaker Ready (page 6-72). Setting parameters can be used for every short-circuit function to determine whether or not this is to operate with reclosure, i.e. whether or not it is to start the automatic reclosure function. The same applies accordingly for trip commands which are coupled in externally via binary inputs and/or generated by transfer trip signals/remote tripping. The protection and monitoring functions of the device which do not react to short-circuit-like phenomena do not start the automatic reclosure because reclosure is of no use here. In 7SD610, for example, this is the overload protection.

Action Times

It is often desirable to suppress the readiness for reclosure if the short-circuit has existed for a certain time, e.g. because it is assumed that the arc has burned in to such an extent that there is no longer any chance of automatic extinguishing during the dead time. For reasons of selectivity also (see above), frequently delayed tripped faults should not lead to reclosure.

6-70

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Automatic Reclosure

The automatic reclosure function of 7SD610 can be operated with or without action times (configuration parameter $5 FRQWURO PRGH, address , see Section 5.1). No starting signal is necessary for the protective functions or external protection equipment without action time. Starting takes place as soon as the first trip command appears. In operation with action time, an action time is available for every reclosure cycle. The action times are always started by the pickup signals linked with OR of all protective functions which can start the automatic reclosure function. If there is still no trip command available at the end of an action time, the corresponding reclosure cycle cannot be performed. For every reclosure cycle, it can be set whether or not it allows a start. With the first general fault detection, only those action times the cycles of which allow a start are important because the other cycles may not start. Using the action times and the start permission you can control which cycles can be run under different command time conditions. Example 1: 3 cycles are set. Starting is allowed for at least the first cycle. It is assumed that the action times are set as follows: $5 7$&7,21 = 0.2 s; $5 7$&7,21 = 0.8 s; $5 7$&7,21 = 1.2 s; Since reclosure is ready before the fault occurs, the first trip following a fault is fast, i.e. before the end of any action time. The automatic reclosure function is started as a result. After unsuccessful reclosure the 2nd cycle would then become active; but the time-overcurrent protection would not trip in this example until after 1 s according to its grading plan. Since the action time for the second cycle was exceeded here, it is disabled. The 3rd cycle with its parameters is therefore performed now. If the trip command after the 1st reclosure did not appear until after more than 1.2 s after the 1st reclosure, there would be no further reclosure. Example 2: 3 cycles are set. Starting is only allowed for the first. The action times are set as in example 1. The first protection trip takes place 0.5 s after starting. Since the action time for the 1st cycle has already expired at this time, this cannot start the automatic reclosure function. However, the 2nd and 3rd cycles cannot take place because they do not allow a start. There is therefore no reclosure, because no starting at all takes place. Example 3: 3 cycles are set. Starting is allowed for at least the first two cycles. The action times are set as in example 1. The first protection trip takes place 0.5 s after starting. Since the action time for the 1st cycle has already expired at this time, it cannot start the automatic reclosure function but the 2nd cycle, for which starting is allowed, is activated immediately. This starts the automatic reclosure function, the 1st cycle is practically skipped. Operating Modes of the Automatic Reclosure The dead times these are the times from elimination of the fault (drop off of the trip command or signalling via auxiliary contacts) to the start of the automatic close command may vary, depending on the automatic reclosure operating mode selected when determining the function scope (Section 5.1) and the resulting signals of the starting protective functions. In the ZLWK 75,3... operating mode single-pole or single/three-pole reclosure cycles are possible if the device and the circuit-breaker are suitable. In this case different dead times after single-pole tripping on the one hand and after three-pole tripping on the other hand are possible (for every reclosure cycle). The tripping protective function

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-71

Functions

determines the type of tripping: single-pole or three-pole. Control of the dead time depends on this. In the ZLWK 3,&.83... operating mode, different dead times can be set for every reclosure cycle after single-, two- and three-phase faults. Decisive here is the starting configuration of the protective functions at the time the trip command disappears. This operating mode enables the dead times to be made dependent on the type of fault in the case of three-pole reclosure cycles. Blocking Reclosure Different events lead to blocking of automatic reclosure. No reclosure is possible for example if it is blocked via a binary input. If the automatic reclosure has not yet been started, it cannot be started at all. If a reclosure cycle is already in progress, dynamic blocking takes place (see below). Every cycle can also be blocked individually by a binary input. In this case the cycle concerned is invalid and will be skipped in the sequence of permissible cycles. If blocking takes place while the cycle concerned is already running, this leads to aborting of the reclosure, i.e. no reclosure takes place even if other valid cycles have been parameterized. Internal blockings limited to certain times occur during the course of reclosure cycles: The reclaim time 75(&/$,0 begins with every automatic reclosure command. If the reclosure is successful, all the functions of the automatic reclosure return to the idle state at the end of the reclaim time; a fault after the end of the reclaim time is treated as a new fault in the network. Re-tripping of a protective function within this time initiates the next reclosure cycle in the case of multiple reclosure; if no further reclosure is permitted, the last reclosure is treated as unsuccessful in the case of re-tripping within the reclaim time. The automatic reclosure is blocked dynamically. The dynamic lock-out locks the reclosure for the duration of the dynamic lock-out time (0.5 s). This occurs for example after a final tripping or other events which block the automatic reclosure circuit after starting. Restarting is locked for this time. When the time runs out, the automatic reclosure returns to its idle position and is ready for a new fault in the network. If the circuit-breaker is closed manually (by the control discrepancy switch via a binary input, see also Section 6.13.1), the automatic reclosure is blocked for a manual closeblocking time 7%/2&. 0&. If a trip command is given during this time, it can be assumed that a metallic short-circuit has been reacted to (e.g. closed earthing isolator). Every trip command within this time is therefore final. With the user definable logic functions (CFC) other control functions such as a manualclose command can be handled. Interrogation of Circuit Breaker Ready Precondition for a reclose attempt after fault clearance is that the circuit breaker is ready for at least one TRIPCLOSETRIPcycle at the instant the automatic reclosure function is started (i.e. at the beginning of the first trip command). The readiness of the circuit breaker is signalled to the device through the binary input !&% 5HDG\ (FNo ). If no such signal is available, the circuit breaker interrogation can be suppressed (presetting) because no automatic reclosure at all would be possible otherwise. This interrogation usually suffices for a single reclosure. Since, for example, the air pressure or the spring tension for the circuit breaker actuation drops after the trip procedure, no further interrogation should take place.

6-72

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Automatic Reclosure

It is of advantage, particularly in the case of multiple reclosure, to interrogate the readiness of the circuit breaker not only at the instant of the first trip command but also before every reclosure. The reclosure is blocked as long as the CB does not signal its readiness for another TRIPCLOSEcycle. The recovery time of the circuit breaker can be monitored by the 7SD610. This monitoring time &% 7,0( 287 begins as soon as the CB sends no ready signal. The dead time may become longer if no readiness is signalled at the end of it. However, if the circuit breaker does not signal readiness for a longer period than the monitoring time, reclosure is locked out dynamically (see also above under subtitle Blocking Reclosure page 6-72). Processing the Auxiliary Contact Position of the Circuit Breaker If the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are connected to the device, the reaction of the circuit breaker is also checked for plausibility. In the case of individual control of the individual breaker poles this concerns every single breaker pole. This assumes that the auxiliary contacts are connected to the appropriate binary inputs (!&% 3ROH / (FNo ); !&% 3ROH / (FNo ) and !&% 3ROH / (FNo ) for each pole. If the series circuits of the pole make contacts and break contacts are connected instead of the individual poles, the CB is assumed to have all poles open when the series circuit of the break contacts is closed (binary input !&% S 2SHQ (FNo )). It is assumed to have all poles closed when the series circuit of the make contacts is closed (binary input !&% S &ORVHG (FNo )). If none of these input messages is available, it is assumed that the switch is open at one pole (even if this condition also exists theoretically in a two-pole open CB). The device checks the position of the circuit-breaker continuously: As long as the auxiliary contacts signal that the CB is not closed (three-pole), the automatic reclosure function cannot be started. This guarantees that a close command can only be given when the CB was previously tripped (out of the closed state). The valid dead time begins when the trip command disappears or a signal is available via the auxiliary contacts that the CB (pole) has opened. If the CB opens at three-pole after a single-pole trip command, this is considered as a three-pole tripping. If three-pole reclosure cycles are allowed, the dead time for threepole tripping becomes active in the operating mode with control by trip command (see above under subtitle Operating Modes of the Automatic Reclosure, page 6-71); in control by starting, the starting configuration of the starting protective function(s) is still decisive. If three-pole cycles are not allowed, the reclosure is blocked dynamically. The trip command was final. The latter also applies if the CB is tripped at two poles by a single-pole trip command. The device only detects this if the auxiliary contacts for every pole are connected individually. The device couples immediately with three poles resulting in a three-pole trip command. If the CB auxiliary contacts signal that at least one other pole has opened in the dead time after single-pole tripping, a three-pole reclosure cycle is initiated with the dead time for three-pole reclosure if allowed. If the auxiliary contacts are connected for every pole individually, the device can detect a two-pole open CB. In this case the device immediately sends a three-pole trip command providing the three-pole intertrip is activated (see Sub-section 6.9.2 under subtitle Three-pole Intertrip, page 6-84).

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-73

Functions

Sequence of a Three-pole Auto-reclosure

If the automatic reclosure is ready, the short-circuit protection trips at three poles for all faults within the stage parameterized for auto-reclosure. The automatic reclosure circuit is started. When the trip command drops off or the circuit breaker opens (auxiliary contact criterion) an (adjustable) dead time starts. At the end of this dead time the circuit breaker receives a close command. At the same time the (adjustable) blocking time is started. If $5 FRQWURO PRGH ZLWK 3,&.83 ... was set under address  during configuration of the protective functions, different dead times can be parameterized depending on the type of protection start. When the fault has been eliminated (successful reclosure), the reclaim time runs out and all functions return to their rest state. The fault is cleared. If the fault has not been eliminated (unsuccessful reclosure), the short-circuit protection finally trips after the protection stage valid without reclosure. Every fault during the reclaim time also leads to final tripping. After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping), the automatic reclosure is locked out dynamically (see also above under subtitle Blocking Reclosure, page 6-72). The sequence above applies for single-shot reclosure. In the 7SD610 multiple reclosure (up to 8 shots) is also possible (see below).

Sequence of a Single-pole Auto-reclosure

Single-pole auto-reclosure cycles are only possible if the device is designed for singlepole tripping and this has been allowed in the protective function configuration (address , see also Section 5.1). Of course, the circuit breaker must also be suitable for single-pole tripping. If the automatic reclosure is ready, the short-circuit protection trips at a single pole for all single-phase faults within the stage parameterized for reclosure. It can also be determined, by setting (address $ 7ULSSK)OW, see also Section 6.1.3), that single-pole tripping takes place for two-phase, earth-free faults. Single-pole tripping is only possible of course by short-circuit protective functions which can determine the faulty phase. In the case of multi-phase faults, the short-circuit protection trips finally at three poles with the stage valid without reclosure. Every three-pole tripping is final. The automatic reclosure is locked dynamically (see also above under subtitle Blocking Reclosure, page 6-72). The automatic reclosure is started in the case of single-pole tripping. The (adjustable) dead time for the single-pole auto-reclosure cycle begins with dropping off of the trip command or opening of the circuit breaker pole (auxiliary contact criterion). The circuit breaker gets a close command after this. At the same time the (adjustable) reclaim time is started. If the reclosure is blocked during the dead time after single-pole tripping, immediate three-pole tripping can take place as an option (Three-pole Intertrip, see below, page 6-84). When the fault has been eliminated (successful reclosure), the reclaim time runs out and all functions return to their rest state. The fault is cleared. If the fault has not been eliminated (unsuccessful reclosure), the short-circuit protection finally trips after the protection stage valid without reclosure. Every fault during the reclaim time also leads to final tripping. After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping) the automatic reclosure circuit is locked dynamically (see also above under subtitle Blocking Reclosure, page 6-72).

6-74

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Automatic Reclosure

The sequence above applies for single-shot reclosure. In the 7SD610 multiple reclosure (up to 8 shots) is also possible (see below). Sequence of a Single and Threepole Autoreclosure This operating mode is only possible if the device is designed for single-pole tripping and this was allowed in the protective functions configuration (address 110, see also section 5.1). Of course, the circuit-breaker must also be suitable for single-pole tripping. If the automatic reclosure circuit is ready, the short-circuit protection trips at one pole for single-phase faults within the stage(s) configured for automatic reclosure and at three poles for multi-phase faults. It can also be determined, by setting (address $ 7ULSSK)OW, see also Section 6.1.3), that single-pole tripping takes place for two-phase, earth-free faults. Single-pole tripping is only possible of course for shortcircuit protective functions which can determine the faulty phase. The stage valid before auto-reclosure applies for all fault types. The automatic reclosure function is started in the case of tripping. Depending on the type of fault the (adjustable) dead time for the single-pole auto-reclosure cycle or the (separately adjustable) dead time for the three-pole auto-reclosure cycle begins with the drop off of the trip command or opening of the circuit-breaker (pole). After this the circuit-breaker receives a close command. At the same time the (adjustable) reclaim time is started. If the reclosure is blocked during the pause after single-pole tripping, immediate three-pole tripping can take place as an option (Three-pole Intertrip, see below, page 6-84). When the fault has been eliminated (successful reclosure), the reclaim time runs out and all functions return to their rest state. The fault is cleared. If the fault has not been eliminated (unsuccessful reclosure), the short-circuit protection initiates a final three-pole tripping with the protection stage valid without autoreclosure. Every fault during the reclaim time also leads to final three-pole tripping. After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping) the automatic reclosure function is locked dynamically (see also above under subtitle Blocking Reclosure, page 6-72). The sequence above applies for single-shot reclosure. In the 7SD610 multiple reclosure (up to 8 shots) is also possible (see below). Multiple Auto-reclosure If a fault still exists after a reclosure attempt, further reclosure attempts can be made. Up to 8 reclosure attempts are possible with the automatic reclosure function integrated in 7SD610. The first four reclosure cycles are independent of each other. Each one has separate action and dead times, can operate with single- or three-pole trip and can be blocked separately via binary inputs. The parameters and intervention possibilities of the fourth cycle apply from the fifth cycle onwards. The sequence is the same in principle as in the different reclosure programs described above. However, if the first reclosure attempt is unsuccessful, the reclosure is not blocked and the next reclosure cycle begins. The appropriate dead time starts with the dropping off of the trip command or opening of the circuit breaker (pole) (auxiliary contact criterion). The circuit breaker gets a new close command after this. At the same time the reclaim time is started. Until the set number of permissible AR-shots has been reached, the reclaim time is reset with a new trip command after reclosure and starts again with the next close command.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-75

Functions

If one of the cycles is successful, i.e. the fault no longer exists after reclosure, the reclaim time expires and all functions go into their rest states. The fault is cleared. If none of the cycles is successful, a final three-pole tripping after the grading time valid without reclosure takes place after the last permissible reclosure of the short-circuit protection. The automatic reclosure is locked dynamically (see also above under subtitle Blocking Reclosure, page 6-72). Handling Evolving Faults When single-pole or single- and three-pole reclosure cycles are executed in the network, particular attention must be paid to evolving faults. Evolving faults are faults which occur during the dead time after eliminating the first fault. There are various ways of handling evolving faults in the 7SD610 depending on the requirements of the network: For detection of an evolving fault you can select whether the trip command of a protective function during the dead time or every further fault detection (pick-up) is the criterion for an evolving fault. There are also various selectable possibilities for the response of the internal autoreclosure to a detected evolving fault. a) (9 )/7 02'( Stops AutoRecl: The reclosure is blocked as soon as a evolving fault is detected. Tripping caused by the evolving fault is three-pole. This applies irrespective of whether three-pole cycles have been permitted or not. There are no further reclosure attempts; the auto-reclosure is locked dynamically (see also above under subtitle Blocking Reclosure, page 6-72). b) (9 )/7 02'( VWDUWV S $5: As soon as an evolving fault is detected it switches over to a cycle for three-pole auto-reclosure. Every trip command is three-pole. The separately settable dead time for evolving faults begins with elimination of the evolving fault; after this the circuit-breaker gets a close command. The further procedure is the same as for singleand three-pole cycles. The complete dead time in this case consists of the part of the dead time for the single-pole reclosure up to elimination of the evolving fault plus the dead time for the evolving fault. This is useful because especially the duration of the dead time during the three-pole tripping is important for the stability of the network. If auto-reclosure is blocked due to an evolving fault without the protection sending a three-pole trip command (e.g. for evolving fault detection with pickup), the device can send a three pole trip command so that the circuit-breaker does not remain open at one pole (Three-pole Intertrip, see below, page 6-84). Dead Line Check (DLC) If the voltage of a disconnected phase does not disappear after tripping on a fault, the auto-reclosure can be prevented. This presupposes that the voltage transformers are arranged on the line side and connected to the device. This has to be in accordance with the configuration described in Section 5.1. To do this the dead line check is switched active. The automatic reclosure function then checks the disconnected line for no-voltage: The line must have been dead for at least an adequate measuring time during the dead time. If not the reclosure is locked dynamically.

6-76

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Automatic Reclosure

This dead-line check on the line is of advantage if a small generator (e.g. wind generator) is linked along the line. Adaptive Dead Time (ADT) In all the previous possibilities it has been assumed that defined and equal dead times have been set at both line ends, if necessary for different fault types and/or auto-reclosure cycles. It is also possible to set the dead times (if necessary different for various fault types and/or auto-reclosure cycles) at one line end only and to configure the adaptive dead time at the other end. This presumes that the voltage transformers are arranged on the line side. Figure 6-32 shows an example. It is assumed that the device I is operating with defined dead times whereas the adaptive dead time is configured at position II. It is important that the line is fed from busbar A at least, i.e. the side with the defined dead times. With the adaptive dead time the automatic reclosure function at the line end II decides independently whether and when reclosure is useful and permissible and when it is not. The criterion is the line voltage at end II, which was through-connected from end I after fault clearance. Reclosure therefore takes place at end II as soon as it is clear that voltage has been re-applied to the line from end I. In the implied fault, the lines in the example are disconnected at positions I and II. In I reclosure takes place after the dead time parameterized there. I If the fault has been cleared (successful reclosure), line AB is re-connected to the voltage at busbar A through position I. Device II detects this voltage and also recloses after a short delay (to ensure a sufficient voltage measuring time). The fault is cleared. If the fault has not been cleared after reclosure at I (unsuccessful reclosure), the fault is re-connected at I, no healthy voltage appears at II. The device there detects this and does not reclose. In the case of multiple reclosure the process may be repeated several times in the case of unsuccessful reclosure until one of the reclosures is successful or a final tripping takes place.

A I
(defined pauses) Diffzone

B II
(ADT)

overreaching time-graded protection

A, B busbars I, II relais locations

Figure 6-32

Example of adaptive dead time (ADT)

As the example shows, the adaptive dead time has the following advantages: The circuit-breaker at position II is not reclosed at all if the fault persists and is conserved as a result. With non-selective tripping on an external fault due to an overreaching time-graded protection at position I no further auto-reclosure attempts can occur here because the fault path via busbar B and position II remains interrupted even after several reclosure attempts.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-77

Functions
At position I overreaching is allowed in the case of multiple reclosures and even in the case of final tripping because the line remains open at position II and no actual overreach can occur as a result at I. Close Command Transmission (Remote Close) With close command transmission the dead times are only set at one line end. The other is set to adaptive dead time. The latter only reacts to the received close commands from the transmitting end. The transmission of the close command at the transmitting line end is delayed long enough to make sure that a close command is only sent when the local reclosure was successful. This means one more possible local fault detection is awaited after reclosure. This delay prevents unnecessary closing at the remote end on the one hand but also lengthens the time until reclosure takes place there. This is not critical for a singlepole auto-reclosure or in radial or meshed networks because no stability problems are to be expected. In the differential protection the protection data interfaces are used to transmit the close command. Control of the Internal Automatic Reclosure by an External Protection Device If 7SD610 is equipped with the internal automatic reclosure function, this can also be controlled by an external protection device. This is useful for example for line ends with redundant protection or backup protection when a second protection is used for the same line end and is to work with the automatic reclosure function integrated in the 7SD610. The binary inputs and outputs provided must be observed in this case. It must be decided whether the internal auto-reclosure is to be controlled by the starting (pickup) or by the trip command of the external protection (see also above under Operating Modes of the Automatic Reclosure, page 6-71). If the auto-reclosure is controlled by the trip command, the following inputs and outputs are to be recommended: The auto-reclosure is started via the binary inputs:  !$5 6WDUW general fault detection (pickup for the automatic reclosure (only required for action time),

 !7ULS / $5 trip command L1 for automatic reclosure,  !7ULS / $5 trip command L2 for automatic reclosure,  !7ULS / $5 trip command L3 for automatic reclosure, The general fault detection is decisive for starting the action times. It is also necessary if the automatic reclosure is to detect evolving faults by fault detection. In other cases this input information is superfluous. The trip commands decide whether the dead time for single-pole or three-pole autoreclosure cycles is active or whether the reclosure is blocked in three-pole tripping (depending on the parameterization of dead times). Figure 6-33 shows the interconnection between the internal automatic reclosure of 7SD610 and an external protection device as a connection example. To couple the external protection at three poles and to release its accelerated stages before reclosure if necessary, the following output functions are suitable:

6-78

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Automatic Reclosure
 $5 S 7ULS 3HUP internal automatic reclosure ready for 1-pole reclose cycle, i.e. allows 1-pole tripping (logic inversion of the 3pole coupling).  $5 &\F=RQH5HO internal automatic reclosure ready for the first reclose cycle, i.e. enables the stage of the external protection decisive for reclosure, the appropriate outputs can be used for other cycles. The output can be omitted if the external protection requires no overreach stage (e.g. differential protection or comparison schemes with distance protection).  $5 3URJUDPSROHi internal automatic reclosure is programmed for singlepole AR, i.e. only reclosures after single-pole tripping. The output can be omitted if no overreach stage is used (e.g. differential protection or comparison schemes with distance protection). Instead of the three phase-dedicated trip commands, the single-pole and three-pole tripping can be signalled to the internal automatic reclosure providing the external protection device allows, i.e. assign the following binary inputs of the 7SD610:  !$5 6WDUW general fault detection for the internal automatic reclosure (only required for action time),

 !7ULS S IRU $5 trip command 1-pole for the internal automatic reclosure,  !7ULS S IRU $5 trip command 3-pole for the internal automatic reclosure. If only three-pole reclosure cycles are to be executed, it is sufficient to assign the binary input !7ULS S IRU $5 (FNo ) for the trip signal. Figure 6-34 shows an example. Any overreaching stages of the external protection are enabled again by $5 &\F=RQH5HO (FNo ) and of further cycles if necessary.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-79

Functions

external protection device


AR Start >AR Start

7SD610

Tripping L1

>Trip L1 AR

Tripping L2

>Trip L2 AR

Tripping L3

>Trip L3 AR

L+
Relay Pickup AR 1.CycZoneRel (if nec. for further AR) 3-phase coupling AR 1p Trip Perm

only 1-pole

AR Program1pole

L
Figure 6-33

L
Connection example with external protection device for 1-/3-pole reclosure; AR control mode = ZLWK 3,&.83

external protection device


trip >AR Start

7SD610

Tripping

AR 1p Trip Perm

L+
Relay Pickup AR 1.CycZoneRel (if nec. for further AR)

L
Figure 6-34

L+
Connection example with external protection device for 3-pole reclosure; AR control mode = ZLWK 75,3

If, on the other hand, the internal automatic reclosure function is controlled by the pickup, the phase-dedicated pickup signals must be connected by the external protection. The general trip command then suffices for tripping (FNo ). Figure 6-35 shows connection examples.

6-80

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Automatic Reclosure

external protection device


Pick-up L1

7SD610
3QvpxG 6S 3QvpxG!6S 3QvpxG"6S

Pick-up L2

Pick-up L3

Tripping

3Uvs6S

L+
Release AR Stage AR 1.CycZoneRel (if nec. for other AR)

L
Pickup signal for each phase

L+

external protection device


Pick-up 1-phase

7SD610
3Qvpx u6S 3Qvpx!u6S 3Qvpx"u6S 3Uvs6S

Pick-up 2-phase

Pick-up 3-phase

Tripping

L+
Release AR Stage

L
6S 8parSry
(if nec. for other AR)

L
Pickup signal 1-phase, 2-phase and 3-phase Figure 6-35

L+
Connection example with external protection device for fault detection dependent dead time dead time control by start signals of the protection device; AR control mode = ZLWK 3,&.83

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-81

Functions

6.9.2
General

Setting the Function Parameters


If no reclosure takes place on the branch for which the differential protection 7SD610 is used (e.g. for cables, transformers, motors or similar), the automatic reclosure function must be removed from the configuration (see Section 5.1, address ). The automatic reclosure circuit is then totally inactive, i.e. the automatic reclosure is not operated in the 7SD610. There are no signals to this effect, binary inputs for the automatic reclosure are ignored. All parameters for setting the automatic reclosure are inaccessible and insignificant. If, on the other hand, the internal automatic reclosure circuit is to be used, the type of reclosure must be set in the configuration of the device scope (see Section 5.1) under address  $872 5(&/26( and the $5 FRQWURO PRGH under address . Up to 8 reclosure attempts are possible with the integrated automatic reclosure function of 7SD610. Whereas the settings in the addresses  to  are common to all reclosure cycles, the individual settings of the cycles are made from address  onwards. You can set different individual parameters for the first four reclosure cycles. The parameters of the fourth cycle apply from the fifth cycle onwards. Under address  $872 5(&/26( the automatic reclosure function can be switched 2Q or 2II. Prerequisite for an automatic reclosure being possible after a short-circuit tripping is that the circuit breaker is ready for at least one TRIPCLOSETRIPcycle at the instant the auto-reclosure is started (i.e. at the start of the first trip command). The readiness of the circuit breaker is signalled to the device through the binary input !&% 5HDG\ (FNo ). If no such signal is available, leave the setting under address  &%" 75,3 = 1R because no auto-reclosure would be possible at all otherwise. If circuit breaker interrogation is possible, you should set &%" 75,3 = <HV. The readiness of the circuit breaker can still be interrogated before every reclosure. This is set when setting the individual reclosure cycles (see below). To check the circuit breaker is ready again during the dead times, you can set a circuit breakerreadymonitor time under address  &% 7,0( 287. The time is set slightly higher than the recovery time of the circuit breaker after a TRIPCLOSE TRIPcycle. If the circuit breaker is not ready again by the time this runs out, there is no reclosure, the auto-reclosure is locked dynamically. Waiting for the circuit breaker to be ready can lead to a lengthening of the dead times. Interrogation of a synchronism check (if used) can also delay reclosure. To avoid uncontrolled prolongation you can set a maximum lengthening of the dead time in this case under address $ 7'($' (;7. This lengthening is unlimited if you set . This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings. Remember that longer dead times are only permissible after three-pole tripping when no stability problems occur or a synchronism check takes place before reclosure. The reclaim time 75(&/$,0 (address ) is the time after which the network fault is considered ended after a successful reclosure. Re-tripping of a protective function within this time initiates the next reclosure cycle in the case of multiple reclosure; if no further reclosure is permitted, the last reclosure is treated as unsuccessful. The reclaim time must therefore be longer than the longest command time of a protective function which can start the automatic reclosure function.

6-82

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Automatic Reclosure

A few seconds are generally sufficient. In regions with frequent thunderstorms or storms a shorter reclaim time is advisable to reduce the danger of final tripping as a result of repeated lightning strikes or conductor flashovers (conductor vibration). A long reclaim time must be selected if there is no circuit breaker monitoring possibility in the case of multiple reclosure (see above) (e.g. due to missing auxiliary contacts and CBreadyinformation). Then the reclaim time must be longer than the recovery time of the circuit breaker. The blocking duration in manualclosedetection 7%/2&. 0& (address ) must guarantee safe switching on and off of the circuit-breaker (0.5 s to 1 s). If a fault was detected by a protective function within this time after detected closing of the circuit breaker, no reclosure takes place and final three-pole tripping takes place. If this is undesirable, address  is set to . The options for handling evolving faults are described in Section 6.9.1 under subtitle Handling Evolving Faults, page 6-76. The handling of evolving faults is not relevant for line ends where the adaptive dead time is applied (address  $XWR 5HFORVH = ADT, Section 5.1). Addresses  and  are therefore insignificant and inaccessible for these devices. You can define recognition of an evolving fault under address . (9 )/7 5(& 2* ZLWK 3,&.83 means that, during a dead time, every fault detection (pickup) of a protective function will be interpreted as an evolving fault. With (9 )/7 5(&2* ZLWK 75,3 a fault during a dead time is only interpreted as an evolving fault if it has led to a trip command of a protective function. This may also include trip commands which are coupled in externally via a binary input or which have been transmitted from the other end of the protected object. If an external protection device operates together with the auto-reclosure, evolving fault detection with pickup presupposes that a pickup signal of the external device is also connected to the 7SD610; otherwise an evolving fault can only be detected with the external trip command even if ZLWK 3,&.83 was set here. Select the reaction to evolving faults under address . (9 )/7 02'( EORFNV $5 means that no reclosure takes place after detection of an evolving fault. This is always useful when only single-pole reclosure is to take place or when stability problems are to be expected due to closing after an subsequent three-pole dead time. If a threepole reclosure cycle is to be initiated by tripping of the evolving fault, set (9 )/7 02'( 6WDUW 7GHDG (9. In this case a three-pole reclosure with separately adjustable dead time is started with the three-pole trip command on the evolving fault. This is only useful if three-pole reclosure is also permitted. Address  76WDUW 021,725 monitors the reaction of the circuit breaker after a trip command. If the CB has not opened after this time (from the beginning of the trip command), the automatic reclosure is locked dynamically. The criterion for opening is the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s) or the disappearance of the trip command. If a circuit breaker failure protection (internal or external) is used on the feeder, this time should be shorter than the delay time of the circuit breaker failure protection so that no reclosure takes place if the circuit breaker fails. If the reclosure command is transmitted to the other end, you can delay this transmission with address  7 5HPRWH&ORVH. This transmission requires that the device at the remote end operates with adaptive dead time (address  $872 5(&/26( = $GDSWLYH 'HDG 7LPH at the remote end, see also Section 5.1). This parameter is otherwise irrelevant. If no transmission of the close command is desired, although ASP is set at the other end, set 7 5HPRWH&ORVH = . On the one hand, this delay can prevent the device being reclosed unnecessarily at the remote end when local re-

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-83

Functions

closure is unsuccessful. It should therefore be a total of the closing time of the circuit breaker, the maximum response time and command duration of the protection function, the tripping time of the circuit breaker, the drop-off time of the protection function and a safety margin. On the other hand, it must be noted that the line is not available for energy transport until the remote end has also closed. It must therefore be added to the dead time in the consideration of the network stability. Configuration of the Automatic Reclosure The configuration concerns the interaction between the protective and additional functions of the device and the automatic reclosure function. Here you can determine which functions of the device are to start the automatic reclosure and which not. In 7SD610 this concerns: Address  $5 :,7+ ',)), i.e. with differential protection, Address  $5 Z 627)2&, i.e. with instantaneous highspeed overcurrent tripping, Address  $5 :,7+ ,75,3, i.e. with intertrip and remote trip, Address  $5 Z '77, i.e. with externally coupled direct trip command, Address  $5 Z %DFN8S2&, i.e. with time overcurrent protection. For the functions which are to start the automatic reclosure circuit, the corresponding address is set to <HV, for the others to 1R. The other functions (overload protection, breaker failure protection) cannot start the automatic reclosure because reclosure is of no use here. Three-pole Intertrip If reclosure is blocked during the dead time of a single-pole cycle without a three-pole trip command having been given, the breaker remains open at one pole. With address  $5 75,3 SROH you determine that the tripping logic of the device sends a three-pole trip command in this case (synchronized pole-unit operation). Set this address to <HV if the breaker can be controlled single-pole and has no pole discrepancy supervision itself. But otherwise the device pre-empts the pole discrepancy supervision of the CB because the three-pole transfer trip of the device is immediately active as soon as the reclosure is blocked after single-pole tripping or the CB auxiliary contacts report an implausible switch position (see also Section 6.9.1 under subtitle Processing the Auxiliary Contact Position of the Circuit Breaker, page 6-73). The three-pole intertrip is also active when only three-pole cycles are allowed but a singlepole tripping is signalled externally through a binary input. The transfer trip is unnecessary if only a common three-pole control of the circuit breaker is possible. Dead Line Check (DLC) Under address  the dead line check can be switched active. It presupposes that the voltage transformers are arranged on the line side of the feeder. If this is not the case or the function is not used, set '/&  5'7 = ZLWKRXW. '/&  5'7 = '/& means that the dead line check is used. An automatic reclosure is only possible if it was clear on beforehand that the line was dead. In this case, the phase-earth voltage limit is set in address  8OLYH! below which the line is to be considered voltage-free (disconnected). The setting is made in Volts secondary. This value can be entered as a primary value when parameterizing with a PC and DIGSI 4. Address  7 8VWDEOH determines the measuring time available for determining the no-voltage state. Adaptive Dead Time (ADT) When operating with adaptive dead time, it should be ensured in advance that one end per line operates with defined dead times and has an infeed. The other may operate

6-84

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Automatic Reclosure

with adaptive dead time. You will find details about the procedure in Section 6.9.1 under subtitle Adaptive Dead Time (ADT) on page 6-77 and Close Command Transmission (Remote Close), page 6-78. For the line end with defined dead times the number of desired reclosure cycles must be set in the configuration of the protective functions (Section 5.1) under address  $872 5(&/26(. Additionally the intertrip command of the differential protection should be activated (see Section 6.4.2, address  ,75,3 6(1' = <HV). For the devices operating with adaptive dead time $872 5(&/26( = $'7 must be set in the configuration of the protective functions (Section 5.1) under address . Only the parameters described below are interrogated in the latter case. No settings are then made for the individual reclosure cycles. The adaptive dead time may be voltage-controlled or RemoteCLOSEcontrolled. Both is even possible at the same time. In the first case, reclosure after tripping takes place as soon as the voltage from the re-energized remote end is detected. This requires that the voltage transformers are arranged on the line side of the feeder and connected to the device. With RemoteCLOSEcontrolled adaptive dead time, the auto-reclosure function waits for the reception of the remote close command from the remote end. The action time 7$&7,21 $'7 (address ) is the time after pickup by any protective function which can start the automatic reclosure and within which the trip command must appear. If the command does not appear until after the action time, there is no reclosure. Depending on the configuration of the functional scope (see Section 5.1) the action time may also be omitted; this applies especially when a starting protective function has no pickup signal. The dead times are determined by the reclosure command of the device at the line end with the defined dead times. In cases where this reclosure command is absent, e.g. because the reclosure has been blocked there in the meantime, the auto-reclosure function of the local device must return to the rest state at some time. This takes place after the maximum wait time 70$; $'7 (address ). It must be long enough to include the last reclosure of the remote end. In the case of single-shot reclosure, the sum of maximum dead time plus reclaim time of the device of the opposite end is sufficient. In the case of multiple reclosure the worst case is that all reclosures of the other end except the last are unsuccessful. The time of all these cycles must be taken into account. To save having to make exact calculations, you can use the sum of all dead times and all command times of the trippings plus a reclaim time. Under address  $'7 S DOORZHG you can determine whether single-pole tripping is to be allowed (on condition that single-pole tripping is at all possible). If 1R, the protection trips three-pole for all fault types. If <HV the tripping possibilities of the starting protective functions are decisive. Under address  $'7 &%" &/26( you determine whether circuit breaker ready is to be interrogated before reclosure after adaptive dead time. If you set <HV the dead time may be longer if at the end of this time the circuit breaker is not ready for a CLOSETRIPcycle, by the circuit-breakermonitoring time at the most; this was set for all reclosure cycles under address  (see above). You will find details about the circuit-breakermonitoring in the function description, Section 6.9.1, under subtitle Interrogation of Circuit Breaker Ready, page 6-72. If there is a danger of stability problems in the network during a three-pole reclosure cycle, you should set address  $'7 6\Q5HTXHVW to <HV. In this case a check is made before reclosure following three-pole tripping whether the voltages of the feeder and busbar are sufficiently synchronized. This on condition that an external

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-85

Functions

synchro-check device is available for this. If only single-pole reclosure cycles are executed or no stability problems are to be expected during three-pole dead times (e.g. due to close meshing of the network or in radial networks), set address  to 1R. Addresses  and  are only significant if the voltage-controlled adaptive dead time is used. Set under address  8OLYH! the limit voltage phaseearth above which the line is to be considered fault-free. It must be lower than the smallest operating voltage to be expected. The setting is made in Volts secondary. This value can be entered as a primary value when parameterizing with a PC and DIGSI 4. Address  7 8VWDEOH determines the measuring time available for determining the voltage. It should be longer than any transient oscillations when connecting the line. 1st Reclosure Cycle If you are working on a line with adaptive dead time, no other parameters are interrogated for the individual reclosure cycles here. All following parameters assigned to the individual cycles are then superfluous and inaccessible. Under address  $5 67$57 is only available, if the automatic reclosure operates with action time, i.e. if the address  $5 FRQWURO PRGH ZLWK 3LFNXS DQG 7DFWLRQ or ZLWK 7ULS DQG 7DFWLRQ (the first only for three-pole tripping) was already set during the configuration of the protective functions (refer to Section 5.1). It determines whether an automatic reclosure start is to take place at all with the first cycle. This address is included mainly for the sake of uniformity of the parameters for every reclosure attempt and must be answered with <HV for the first cycle. If several cycles are run you can control the effectivity of the cycles with this parameter and different action times. Notes and examples can be found in Section 6.9.1 under subtitle Action Times (page 6-70). The action time $5 7$&7,21 (address ) is the time after pickup of any protective function which can start the automatic reclosure function within which the trip command must appear. If the command does not appear until after the action time, there is no reclosure. Depending on the configuration of the functional scope (see Section 5.1) the action time may also be omitted; this applies especially when a starting protective function has no pickup information. Depending on the configured operating mode of the automatic reclosure (see Section 5.1 under address  $5 FRQWURO PRGH) only addresses  and  (if operating mode ZLWK 7ULS...) or the addresses  to  (if operating mode ZLWK 3LFNXS) are available. In the operating mode with Trip... you can set different dead times for single-pole and three-pole reclosure cycles. Whether single-pole or three-pole tripping takes place depends solely on the starting protective functions. Single-pole tripping is only possible of course if the device and the corresponding protective function are also suitable for single-pole tripping. Address  $5 7GHDG7ULS is the dead time after 1-pole tripping, address  $5 7GHDG7ULS is the dead time after 3-pole tripping. If you only want to allow a single-pole reclosure cycle, set the dead time for three-pole tripping to . If you only want to allow a three-pole reclosure cycle, set the dead time for single-pole tripping to ; the protection then trips three-pole for every fault type. The dead time after single-pole tripping (if set) $5 7GHDG7ULS (address ) should be long enough for the fault arc to be extinguished and the surrounding air is de-ionized so that the reclosure promises to be successful. The longer the line, the longer this time due to the recharging of the conductor capacitances. The usual values are 0.9 s to 1.5 s.

6-86

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Automatic Reclosure
For three-pole tripping (address  $5 7GHDG7ULS) the stability of the network is the main concern. Since the disconnected line cannot develop any synchronizing power, only a short dead time is often permitted. The usual values are 0.3 s to 0.6 s. If the device is operating with a synchronism checker, a longer dead time may be tolerated under certain circumstances. Longer three-pole pauses are also possible in radial networks. In the control mode with 3LFNXS... you can make the dead times dependent on the type of pickup of the starting protective function(s): address  $5 7GHDG )OW is the dead time after 1-phase pickup, address  $5 7GHDG )OW is the dead time after 2-phase pickup, address  $5 7GHDG )OW is the dead time after 3-phase pickup. If the dead time is to be the same for all types of faults, set all three parameters the same. Note that these settings only cause different dead times for different pickups. The tripping can only be three-pole. If you have set VWDUWV S $5 when setting the reaction to evolving faults (see above under General, page 6-82) address  (9 )/7 02'(, you can set a separate dead time $5 7GHDG (9 (address ) for the three-pole pause after tripping the evolving fault. Stability aspects are also decisive here. Normally it can be set such as address  $5 7GHDG7ULS. Under address  $5 &%" &/26( you determine whether circuit-breaker ready is to be interrogated before this first reclosure. If you set <HV, the dead time may be longer if at the end of it the circuit breaker is not ready for a CLOSETRIPcycle, by the circuit-breakermonitoring time at the most; this was set for all reclosure cycles together under address  (see above). You will find details about the circuit-breakermonitoring in the function description, Section 6.9.1, under subtitle Interrogation of Circuit Breaker Ready, page 6-72. If there is a danger of stability problems in the network during a three-pole reclosure cycle, you should set address  $5 6\Q5HTXHVW to <HV. In this case a check is made first before every reclosure following three-pole tripping whether the voltages of the feeder and busbar are sufficiently synchronized. This on condition that an external device is available for synchronism checking. If only single-pole reclosure cycles are executed or no stability problems are to be expected during three-pole dead times (e.g. due to close meshing of the network or in radial networks), set address  to 1R. 2nd to 4th Reclosure Cycle If several cycles have been set in the configuration of the function scope (Section 5.1), you can set individual reclosure parameters for the 2nd to 4th cycles. The possibilities are the same as for the 1st cycle. Only some of the following parameters may be available here depending on the configuration of the protective function (Section 5.1). For the 2nd cycle: Address  $5 67$57; start in 2nd cycle allowed at all Address  $5 7$&7,21; active time for the 2nd cycle Address  $5 7GHDG )OW; dead time after 1-phase starting Address  $5 7GHDG )OW; dead time after 2-phase starting Address  $5 7GHDG )OW; dead time after 3-phase starting Address  $5 7GHDG7ULS; dead time after 1-pole tripping Address  $5 7GHDG7ULS; dead time after 3-pole tripping Address  $5 7GHDG (9; dead time in case of sequential fault

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-87

Functions
Address  $5 &%" &/26(; check CB ready before reclosure Address  $5 6\Q5HTXHVW; synchronism check after 3-pole tripping For the 3rd cycle: Address  $5 67$57; start in 3rd cycle allowed at all Address  $5 7$&7,21; active time for the 3rd cycle Address  $5 7GHDG )OW; dead time after 1-phase starting Address  $5 7GHDG )OW; dead time after 2-phase starting Address  $5 7GHDG )OW; dead time after 3-phase starting Address  $5 7GHDG7ULS; dead time after 1-pole tripping Address  $5 7GHDG7ULS; dead time after 3-pole tripping Address  $5 7GHDG (9; dead time in case of sequential fault Address  $5 &%" &/26(; check CB ready before reclosure Address  $5 6\Q5HTXHVW; synchronism check after 3-pole tripping For the 4th cycle: Address  $5 67$57; start in the 4th cycle allowed at all Address  $5 7$&7,21; active time for the 4th cycle Address  $5 7GHDG )OW; dead time after 1-phase starting Address  $5 7GHDG )OW; dead time after 2-phase starting Address  $5 7GHDG )OW; dead time after 3-phase starting Address  $5 7GHDG7ULS; dead time after 1-pole tripping Address  $5 7GHDG7ULS; dead time after 3-pole tripping Address  $5 7GHDG (9; dead time in case of sequential fault Address  $5 &%" &/26(; check CB ready before reclosure Address  $5 6\Q5HTXHVW; synchronism check after 3-pole tripping 5th to 8th Reclosure Cycles If more than 4 cycles have been set in the configuration of the function scope (Section 5.1), the cycles following the fourth cycle operate with the same settings as the fourth cycle.

6.9.3
Addr. 3401 3402 3403 3404 3406 3407

Setting Overview
Setting Title AUTO RECLOSE CB? 1.TRIP T-RECLAIM T-BLOCK MC EV. FLT. RECOG. EV. FLT. MODE OFF ON YES NO 0.50..300.00 sec 0.50..300.00 sec; 4 with Pickup with Trip Stops Auto Reclose starts 3pole AR-cycle Setting Options Default Setting ON NO 3.00 sec 1.00 sec with Trip Comments Auto-Reclose Function CB ready interrogation at 1st trip Reclaim time after successful AR cycle AR blocking duration after manual close Evolving fault recognition

starts 3pole AR-cy- Evolving fault (during the dead cle time)

6-88

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Automatic Reclosure

Addr. 3408 3409 3410 3411A 3450 3451 3453 3454 3455 3456 3457 3458 3459 3460 3461 3462 3464 3465 3466 3467 3468 3469 3470 3471 3472 3473 3475 3476 3477

Setting Title T-Start MONITOR CB TIME OUT T RemoteClose T-DEAD EXT. 1.AR: START 1.AR: T-ACTION 1.AR Tdead 1Flt 1.AR Tdead 2Flt 1.AR Tdead 3Flt 1.AR Tdead1Trip 1.AR Tdead3Trip 1.AR: Tdead EV. 1.AR: CB? CLOSE 1.AR SynRequest 2.AR: START 2.AR: T-ACTION 2.AR Tdead 1Flt 2.AR Tdead 2Flt 2.AR Tdead 3Flt 2.AR Tdead1Trip 2.AR Tdead3Trip 2.AR: Tdead EV. 2.AR: CB? CLOSE 2.AR SynRequest 3.AR: START 3.AR: T-ACTION 3.AR Tdead 1Flt 3.AR Tdead 2Flt 3.AR Tdead 3Flt

Setting Options 0.01..300.00 sec 0.01..300.00 sec 0.00..300.00 sec; 0.50..300.00 sec; YES NO 0.01..300.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO 0.01..300.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO 0.01..300.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec;

Default Setting 0.50 sec 3.00 sec 0.20 sec

Comments AR start-signal monitoring time Circuit Breaker (CB) Supervision Time Send delay for remote close command Maximum dead time extension Start of AR allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip Dead time after evolving fault CB ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR AR start allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip Dead time after evolving fault CB ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR AR start allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults

sec
YES 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec 1.20 sec NO NO NO 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec

sec
0.50 sec 1.20 sec NO NO NO 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-89

Functions

Addr. 3478 3479 3480 3481 3482 3483 3484 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491 3492 3493 3420 3421 3423 3424 3425 3430 3431

Setting Title 3.AR Tdead1Trip 3.AR Tdead3Trip 3.AR: Tdead EV. 3.AR: CB? CLOSE 3.AR SynRequest 4.AR: START 4.AR: T-ACTION 4.AR Tdead 1Flt 4.AR Tdead 2Flt 4.AR Tdead 3Flt 4.AR Tdead1Trip 4.AR Tdead3Trip 4.AR: Tdead EV. 4.AR: CB? CLOSE 4.AR SynRequest AR WITH DIFF AR w/ SOTF-O/C AR WITH I.TRIP AR w/ DTT AR w/ BackUpO/C AR TRIP 3pole DLC / RDT

Setting Options 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO 0.01..300.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec; 0.01..1800.00 sec YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO Without Reduced Dead Time (RDT) Dead Line Check (DLC) 0.01..300.00 sec; 0.50..3000.00 sec YES NO

Default Setting

Comments Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip Dead time after evolving fault CB ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR AR start allowed in this cycle Action time Dead time after 1phase faults Dead time after 2phase faults Dead time after 3phase faults Dead time after 1pole trip Dead time after 3pole trip Dead time after evolving fault CB ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR AR with differential protection ? AR with switch-onto-fault overcurrent AR with intertrip ? AR with direct transfer trip AR with back-up overcurrent 3pole TRIP by AR Dead Line Check / Reduced Dead Time Action time Maximum dead time 1pole TRIP allowed

sec
0.50 sec 1.20 sec NO NO NO 0.20 sec 1.20 sec 1.20 sec 0.50 sec

sec
0.50 sec 1.20 sec NO NO YES YES YES YES YES NO Without

3433 3434 3435

T-ACTION ADT T-MAX ADT ADT 1p allowed

0.20 sec 5.00 sec NO

6-90

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Automatic Reclosure

Addr. 3436 3437 3438 3440 3441

Setting Title ADT CB? CLOSE ADT SynRequest T U-stable U-live> U-dead< YES NO YES NO

Setting Options

Default Setting NO NO 0.10 sec 48 V 30 V

Comments CB ready interrogation before reclosing Request for synchro-check after 3pole AR Supervision time for dead/live voltage Voltage threshold for live line or bus Voltage threshold for dead line or bus

0.10..30.00 sec 30..90 V 2..70 V

6.9.4

Information Overview
The most important device information is explained in brief insofar as it is not explained in the following lists or described in detail in the preceding text. !%/. $5F\FOH (FNo ) to !%/. Q $5 (FNo ) The appropriate interrupt cycle is blocked. If a blocking already exists when the autoreclosure is started, the blocked cycle is not run and may be skipped (if other cycles allow). The same applies accordingly if auto-reclosure was already started outside the blocked cycle. If a current cycle is blocked, automatic reclosure is locked out dynamically; there are then no further automatic reclosures. $5 &\F=RQH5HO (FNo ) to $5 &\F=RQH5HO (FNo ) The automatic reclosure is ready for the appropriate reclosure cycle. The information indicates which cycle will be run next. For example, external protective functions can be set to accelerated or overreaching tripping before the appropriate reclosure. $5 LV EORFNHG (FNo ) The automatic reclosure is blocked (e.g. circuit breaker not ready). The information indicates to the system management that there will be a final tripping, i.e. without reclosure for a coming network fault. If the automatic reclosure has been started, this information does not appear. $5 LV 127 UHDG\ (FNo ) The automatic reclosure is not ready for reclosure at the moment. In addition to the $5 LV EORFNHG (FNo ) mentioned above there are also obstructions during the course of the auto-reclosure cycles such as active time run out or last reclaim time running. The information is particularly helpful when testing because no protection test with reclosure can be initiated during this indication. $5 LQ SURJUHVV (FNo ) This information appears with starting of the automatic reclosure circuit, i.e. with the first trip command which can start the automatic reclosure circuit. If the reclosure attempt was successful (or all in the case of several), this information disappears at the end of the last reclaim time. If no reclosure attempt was successful or reclosure was blocked, it ends with the last the final trip command.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-91

Functions
$5 6\QF5HTXHVW (FNo ) Measuring request to an external synchronism checker. The information appears at the end of a dead time after three-pole tripping if a synchronism request was parameterized for the corresponding cycle. Reclosure only takes place when the synchronism checker has granted release !6\QFUHOHDVH (FNo ). !6\QFUHOHDVH (FNo ) Release of reclosure by an external synchronism checker if this was requested by the output information $5 6\QF5HTXHVW (FNo ).

F.No. 127 2701 2702 2703 2711 2712 2713 2714 2715 2716 2727 2731 2737 2738 2739 2740 2741 2742 2743 2744 2745 2746 2747 2748 2749 2750 2751 AR ON/OFF >AR ON >AR OFF >BLOCK AR >AR Start >Trip L1 AR >Trip L2 AR >Trip L3 AR >Trip 1p for AR >Trip 3p for AR

Alarm

Comments Auto Reclose ON/OFF (via system port) >Auto reclose ON >Auto reclose OFF >BLOCK Auto reclose >External start of internal Auto reclose >AR: Ext. Trip L1 for internal AR >AR: Ext. Trip L2 for internal AR >AR: Ext. Trip L3 for internal AR >Ext. 1pole Trip for internal Auto Recl. >Ext. 3pole Trip for internal Auto Recl. >AR: Remote Close signal >AR: Synchronism from ext. sync.-check >AR: Block 1pole AR-cycle >AR: Block 3pole AR-cycle >AR: Block 1phase-fault AR-cycle >AR: Block 2phase-fault AR-cycle >AR: Block 3phase-fault AR-cycle >AR: Block 1st AR-cycle >AR: Block 2nd AR-cycle >AR: Block 3rd AR-cycle >AR: Block 4th and higher AR-cycles >AR: External Trip for AR start >AR: External pickup L1 for AR start >AR: External pickup L2 for AR start >AR: External pickup L3 for AR start >AR: External pickup 1phase for AR start >AR: External pickup 2phase for AR start

>AR RemoteClose >Sync.release >BLOCK 1pole AR >BLOCK 3pole AR >BLK 1phase AR >BLK 2phase AR >BLK 3phase AR >BLK 1.AR-cycle >BLK 2.AR-cycle >BLK 3.AR-cycle >BLK 4.-n. AR >Trip for AR >Pickup L1 AR >Pickup L2 AR >Pickup L3 AR >Pickup 1ph AR >Pickup 2ph AR

6-92

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Automatic Reclosure

F.No. 2752 2781 2782 2783 2784 2787 2788 2801 2809 2810 2818 2820 2821 2839 2840 2841 2842 2843 2844 2846 2845 2847 2848 2851 2852 2853 2854 2861 2862 2863 2864 2865 2871 2889 >Pickup 3ph AR Auto recl. OFF Auto recl. ON AR is blocked

Alarm

Comments >AR: External pickup 3phase for AR start Auto recloser is switched OFF Auto recloser is switched ON AR: Auto-reclose is blocked Auto recloser is NOT ready AR: Circuit breaker not ready AR: CB ready monitoring window expired Auto-reclose in progress AR: Start-signal monitoring time expired AR: Maximum dead time expired AR: Evolving fault recognition AR is set to operate after 1p trip only AR dead time after evolving fault AR dead time after 1pole trip running AR dead time after 3pole trip running AR dead time after 1phase fault running AR dead time after 2phase fault running AR dead time after 3phase fault running AR 1st cycle running AR 3rd cycle running AR 2nd cycle running AR 4th or higher cycle running AR cycle is running in ADT mode Auto-reclose Close command AR: Close command after 1pole 1st cycle AR: Close command after 3pole 1st cycle AR: Close command after 2nd cycle AR: Reclaim time is running Auto reclose cycle successful Auto reclose Lockout AR: 1pole trip permitted by internal AR AR: Synchro-check request AR: TRIP command 3pole AR 1st cycle zone extension release

AR is NOT ready CB not ready AR T-CBreadyExp AR in progress AR T-Start Exp AR TdeadMax Exp AR evolving Flt AR Program1pole AR Td. evol.Flt AR Tdead 1pTrip AR Tdead 3pTrip AR Tdead 1pFlt AR Tdead 2pFlt AR Tdead 3pFlt AR 1stCyc. run. AR 3rdCyc. run. AR 2ndCyc. run. AR 4thCyc. run. AR ADT run. AR Close AR Close1.Cyc1p AR Close1.Cyc3p AR Close 2.Cyc AR T-Recl. run. AR Successful AR Lockout AR 1p Trip Perm AR Sync.Request AR TRIP 3pole AR 1.CycZoneRel

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-93

Functions

F.No. 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2796

Alarm AR 2.CycZoneRel AR 3.CycZoneRel AR 4.CycZoneRel AR Zone Release AR Remote Close AR on/off BI

Comments AR 2nd cycle zone extension release AR 3rd cycle zone extension release AR 4th cycle zone extension release AR zone extension (general) AR Remote close signal send AR: Auto-reclose ON/OFF via BI

6-94

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

6.10

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

6.10.1 Method of Operation


General The circuit breaker failure protection provides rapid back-up fault clearance, in the event that the circuit breaker fails to respond to a trip command from a feeder protection. Whenever e.g. a short-circuit protection relay of a feeder issues a trip command to the circuit breaker, this is repeated to the breaker failure protection (Figure 6-36). A timer TBF in the breaker failure protection is started. The timer runs as long as a trip command is present and current continues to flow through the breaker poles.

Busbar

Protection trip

Circuit breaker failure protection

Feeder protection (internal or external)

Feeder

I> BF

&

TBF

0 Trip busbar

Figure 6-36

Simplified function diagram of circuit breaker failure protection with current flow monitoring

Normally, the breaker will open and interrupt the fault current. The current monitoring stage I> BF quickly resets (typical 10 ms) and stops the timer TBF. If the trip command is not carried out (breaker failure case), current continues to flow and the timer runs to its set limit. The breaker failure protection then issues a command to trip the back-up breakers and interrupt the fault current. The reset time of the feeder protection is not relevant because the breaker failure protection itself recognizes the interruption of the current. For protection functions where the tripping criteria is not dependent on current (e.g. Buchholz protection), current flow is not a reliable criterion for proper operation of the breaker. In such cases, the circuit breaker position can be derived from the auxiliary contacts of the breaker. Therefore, instead of monitoring the current, the condition of the auxiliary contacts is monitored (see Figure 6-37). For this purpose, the outputs from the auxiliary contacts must be fed to binary inputs on the relay (refer also to Section 6.13.2).

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-95

Functions

Busbar

L+
Protection trip

Circuit breaker failure protection


TBF 0 Trip busbar

Feeder protection (internal or external)

Feeder

&

Figure 6-37

Simplified function diagram of circuit breaker failure protection controlled by the circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s)

Current Flow Monitoring

Each of the phase currents and an additional plausibility current (see below) are filtered by numerical filter algorithms so that only the fundamental frequency is used for further evaluation. Special features recognise the instant of current interruption. With sinusoidal currents, current interruption is detected after approx. 10 ms. With d.c. transient current components present in the fault current and/or in the current transformer secondary circuit after interruption (e.g. current transformers with linearized core) or if the current transformers are saturated by the d.c. component in the fault current, it can take one a.c. cycle before the disappearance of the primary current is reliably detected. The currents are monitored and compared with the set threshold. Besides the three phase currents, two further current detectors are provided in order to allow a plausibility check (see Figure 6-38): The earth current (residual current IE = 3I0) is preferably used as plausibility current. If the residual current from the starpoint of the current transformer set is connected to the device this is used for 3I0. If the residual current is not available the device calculates it with the formula 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3. Additionally, three times the negative sequence current 3I2 is used for plausibility check. This is calculated by the 7SD610 according to the equation: 3I2 = IL1 + a2 IL2 + a IL3 where a = ej120. These plausibility currents do not have any direct influence on the basic functionality of the breaker failure protection but they allow a plausibility check in that at least two current thresholds must have been exceeded before any of the breaker failure delay times can be started, thus providing high security against false operation.

6-96

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

 D37A
Current criterion

IL1

D3

&

>1

L1>

&
IL2

D3

&

>1

L2>

&
IL3

D3

&

>1

L3>

&
3I2

D3

>1

plausibility

3I0

D3
Current flow monitoring with the plausibility currents 3 I0 and 3I2

Figure 6-38

Processing of the Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts

The position of the circuit breaker is derived from the central function control of the device (refer also to Section 6.13.2). Evaluation of the breaker auxiliary contacts is carried out in the breaker failure protection function only when the current flow monitoring has not picked up. Once the current flow criterion has picked up during the trip signal from the feeder protection, the circuit breaker is assumed to be open as soon as the current disappears, even if the associated auxiliary contact does not (yet) indicate that the circuit breaker has opened (Figure 6-39). This gives preference to the more reliable current criterion and avoids overfunctioning due to a defect e.g. in the auxiliary contact mechanism or circuit. This interlock feature is provided for each individual phase as well as for three-pole trip. It is possible to disable the auxiliary contact criterion. If you set the parameter switch &KN %5. &217$&7 (Figure 6-40 above) to 1R, the breaker failure protection can only be started when current flow is detected. The position of the auxiliary contacts is then not evaluated even if the auxiliary contacts are connected to the device. On the other hand, current flow is not a reliable criterion for proper operation of the circuit breaker for faults which do not cause detectable current flow (e.g. Buchholz pro-

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-97

Functions

tection). Information regarding the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts is required in these cases to check the correct response of the circuit breaker. For this purpose, the binary input !%) 6WDUW ZR , is provided (Figure 6-40 left). This input initiates the breaker failure protection even if no current flow is detected.

L1>

&

S Q R

Start only L1

FNo 351

1) 1 2

&
>1

CBaux L1 closed

>CB1 Pole L1
FNo 354
2)

>CB1 3p Open

) if phase dedicated auxiliary contacts available ) if series connection of NC contacts available

Figure 6-39

Interlock of the auxiliary contact criterion example for phase L1

Common Phase Initiation

Common phase initiation is used, for example, for lines without automatic reclosure, for lines with only three-pole automatic reclosure, for transformer feeders, or if the busbar protection trips. This is the only available initiation mode if the actual 7SD610 model is able to trip three-pole only. If the breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by further external protection devices, it is recommended, for security reasons, to connect two starting criteria to the 7SD610 device: the trip command to the input !%) 6WDUW SROH and an additional release signal (e.g. fault detection, pickup) to the input !%) UHOHDVH. For Buchholz protection it is recommended that the trip command is connected to the 7SD610 by two separate wire pairs in order to achieve dual-channel initiation of the breaker failure protection. Nevertheless, it is possible to initiate the breaker failure protection in single-channel mode should a separate release criterion not be available. The binary input !%) 5H OHDVH must then not be assigned to any physical input of the device during configuration. The scheme functionality is shown in Figure 6-40. When the trip signal appears from any internal or external feeder protection and at least one current flow criterion (according to Figure 6-38) is present, the breaker failure protection is initiated and the corresponding delay time(s) is (are) started. If the current criterion is not fulfilled for any of the phases the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s) is interrogated provided that this is available. If the circuit breaker poles have individual auxiliary contacts, the series connection of the three normally closed (NC) auxiliary contacts is used. The circuit breaker has operated correctly after a three-pole trip command only when none of the phases carries current and when all three NC auxiliary contacts have closed. If an internal protection function or an external protection device trips without current flow, the internal input Start internal w/o I or the external input !%) 6WDUW ZR , is used to initiate the breaker failure protection. In these cases the breaker auxiliary contact position is the only criterion for the response of the circuit breaker.

6-98

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection


Initiation can be blocked via the binary input !%/2&. %NU)DLO (e.g. during testing of the feeder protection relay). Additionally, an internal blocking option is provided.

"(( 8ux7SF8PIU68U
(similar to Fig 6-39) CBaux1pole closed (from Fig 6-38)

L1> L2> L3>

<HV 1R

>1

>1

&
>1 >1

Start internal w/o l


FNo 1439

>BF Start w/o l


Start internal 3pole FNo 1415

&

&

Start L123

>1
Configuration
1 not allocated allocated

FNo 1461

BF Start

>BF Start 3pole


FNo 1432

>BF release
FNo 1403

>BLOCK BkrFail Internal blocking

&

Figure 6-40

Breaker failure protection with common phase initiation

Phase Segregated Initiation

Phase segregated initiation of the breaker failure protection is necessary if the circuit breaker poles can be operated individually, e.g. if single-pole automatic reclosure is used. This is possible if the device is able to trip single-pole. If the breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by further external protection devices, it is recommended, for security reasons, to connect an additional release signal (e.g. fault detection, pickup) at the input !%) UHOHDVH, besides the trip commands at the inputs !%) 6WDUW /, !%) 6WDUW /, and !%) 6WDUW /. Figure 6-41 shows the connections of this dual-channel initiation. Nevertheless, it is possible to initiate the breaker failure protection in single-channel mode should a separate release criterion not be available. The binary input !%) UH OHDVH must then not be assigned to any physical input of the device during configuration. If the external protection device does not provide a general fault detection signal, a general trip signal can be used instead. Alternatively, the parallel connection of a separate set of trip contacts can produce such a release signal as shown in Figure 6-42. The starting condition logic for the delay times is shown in Figure 6-43. In principle, it is designed similar to that for the common phase initiation, but, individually for each of the three phases. Thus, current flow and initiation conditions are processed for each phase. In case of single-pole interruption during an automatic reclose cycle, current disappearance is reliably monitored for the tripped breaker pole only.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-99

Functions

Initiation of a single-phase, e.g. Start L1 only is valid when the starting input (= trip command of any feeder protection) appears for only this phase and current flow is detected in at least this phase. If current flow is not detected, the auxiliary contact position can be interrogated according to Figure 6-39, dependent on the setting (&KN %5. &217$&7 = <HV).

external prot. device


Trip L1 >BF Start L1

7SD610

Trip L2

>BF Start L2

Trip L3

>BF Start L3

Pick-up

>BF Release

L+
Figure 6-41

L
Breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation example for initiation by an external protection device with release by a fault detection signal

external prot. device


Trip L1 Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L2 Trip L3 Trip L3 >BF Start L1

7SD610

>BF Start L2

>BF Start L3

L+

>BF Release

L
Figure 6-42 Breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation example for initiation by an external protection device with release by a separate set of trip contacts

The auxiliary contact criterion is also processed for each individual breaker pole. If however the breaker auxiliary contacts are not available for each individual breaker pole, then a single-pole trip command is assumed to be executed only once the series connection of the normally open (NO) auxiliary contacts is interrupted. This information is provided to the breaker fail protection by the function control of the device (refer to Section 6.13.2).

6-100

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

CBaux L1 closed

"(( 8ux7SF8PIU68U <HV 1R >1

L1>
Start internal L1 FNo 1435

>1

>BF Start L1

&
<HV 1R

&

Start only L1

CBaux L2 closed

>1

L2>
Start internal L2 FNo 1436

>1

>BF Start L2

&
<HV 1R

&

Start only L2

CBaux L3 closed

>1

L3>
Start internal L3 FNo 1437

>1

>BF Start L3

&
>2
<HV 1R

&

Start only L3

CBaux 1p closed

L1> L2> L3>

>1

>1

&
>1 >1

Start internal w/o I FNo 1439

>BF Start w/o I


Start internal 3pole FNo 1415

&

&

Start L123

>1
Configuration
1 not allocated allocated FNo 1461

>BF START 3pole


FNo 1432

>1

BF Start

>BF Release
FNo 1403

>BLOCK BkrFail
Internal blocking

&

Figure 6-43

Initiation conditions with phase segregated initiation

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-101

Functions

The three-phase starting signal Start L123 is generated if trip signals appear in more than one pole (regardless from which protection function). Phase segregated initiation is then blocked. The input !%) 6WDUW ZR , (e.g. from Buchholz protection) operates in three-phase mode as well. The function is the same as with common phase initiation. The additional release-signal !%) UHOHDVH (if assigned to a binary input) affects all starting conditions. Initiation can be blocked via the binary input !%/2&. %NU)DLO (e.g. during test of the feeder protection relay). Additionally, an internal blocking option is provided. Delay Timers When the starting conditions are fulfilled, the associated timers are started. The circuit breaker pole(s) must open before the associated time has elapsed. Different delay timers are provided for operation after common phase initiation and phase segregated initiation. A further time stage can be used for two-stage breaker failure protection. With single-stage breaker failure protection, the trip command is routed to the adjacent circuit breakers should the local feeder breaker fail (refer to Figure 6-36 or 6-37). The adjacent circuit breakers are all those which must trip in order to interrupt the fault current, i.e. the breakers which feed the busbar or the busbar section to which the feeder under consideration is connected. The possible initiation conditions for the breaker failure protection are those discussed above. Depending on the application of the feeder protection, common phase or phase segregated initiation conditions may occur. Tripping by the breaker failure protection is always three-pole. The simplest solution is to start the delay timer 7 (Figure 6-44). The phase-segregated initiation signals are omitted if the feeder protection always trips three-pole or if the circuit breaker is not capable of single-pole tripping. If different delay times are required after a single-pole trip and three-pole trip by the feeder protection it is possible to use the timer stages 7SROH and 7SROH according to Figure 6-45.

"(% U!
Start only L1 Start only L2 Start only L3

(Trip busbar)
FNo 1494

>1

U

BF T2-TRIP(bus)

Start L123

Figure 6-44

Single-stage breaker failure protection with common phase initiation

With two-stage breaker failure protection, the trip command of the feeder protection is usually repeated, after a first time stage, to the feeder circuit breaker, often via a second trip coil or set of trip coils, if the breaker did not responded to the original trip command. A second time stage monitors the response to this repeated trip command and trips the breakers of the relevant busbar section, if the fault has not yet been cleared after this second time.

6-102

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

"(# U  yr
Start only L1 Start only L2 Start only L3

>1

U

(Trip busbar)

"($ U "yr U

>1

FNo 1476

BF T1-TRIP L123

Start L123

Figure 6-45

Single-stage breaker failure protection with different delay timers

For the first time stage, different time delays can be selected for a single-pole trip and three-pole trip by the feeder protection. Additionally, you can select (parameter S 5(75,3 7 ) whether this repeated trip should be single-pole or three-pole.

"(# U  yr "(" S@USDQU 


Start only L1 Start only L2 Start only L3

>1

U

<HV 1R

(accordingly for other phases)


FNo 1472

Start only L1

&

BF T1-TRIP 1pL1 (Trip repetition feeder breaker)

"($ U "yr U

>1

FNo 1476

Start L123

BF T1-TRIP L123

"(% U!

(Trip busbar)
FNo 1494

> 1 U
Figure 6-46

BF T2-TRIP (bus)

Two-stage breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation one phase

Circuit Breaker not Operational

There may be cases when it is immediately apparent that the circuit breaker associated with a feeder protection relay cannot clear a fault, e.g. when the tripping voltage or the tripping energy is not available. In such a case it is not necessary to wait for the response of the feeder circuit breaker. If provision has been made for the detection of such a condition (e.g. control voltage monitor or air pressure monitor), the monitor alarm signal can be fed to the binary input !&% IDXOW\ (FNo ) of the 7SD610. On occurrence of this alarm and a trip command by the feeder protection, a separate timer 7%NU'HIHFWLYH, which is normally set to 0, is started (Figure 6-47). Thus, the adjacent circuit breakers (busbar) are tripped immediately in case the feeder circuit breaker is not operational.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-103

Functions

(all initiation FNo 1461 conditions BF Start Fig 6-40/6-43)


FNo 378 >CB faulty

"(& U"7x9rsrpvr
FNo 1493

&

BF TRIP CBdefec

Figure 6-47

Circuit breaker not operational

Transfer Trip to the Remote End Circuit Breaker

The 7SD610 has the facility to give an additional intertrip signal to the circuit breaker at the remote line end in the event that the local feeder circuit breaker fails. For this, the transmission of the trip command required. In 7SD610 the concerned trip command normally the command for the adjacent breakers is fed to the binary input for the intertrip function. This can be achieved externally by connection of the trip output to the binary input !,QWHUWULS SRO (see also Section 6.3). An easier way is to realize this intertrip using the user defined functions (CFC).

End Fault Protection

An end fault is defined here as a short-circuit which has occurred at the end of a line or protected object, between the circuit breaker and the current transformer set. This situation is shown in Figure 6-48. The fault is located as seen from the current transformers (= measurement location) on the busbar side, thus, it will not be regarded by the feeder protection relay as a feeder fault. It can only be detected by a bus-bar protection. Nevertheless, a trip command given to the feeder circuit breaker cannot clear the fault since the opposite end continues to feed the fault. Thus, the fault current does not stop flowing even though the feeder circuit breaker has properly responded to the trip command.

Busbar Trip by protection

ISC Feeder
Figure 6-48 End fault between circuit breaker and current transformers

The end fault protection has the task to recognize this situation and to transmit a trip signal to the remote end of the protected object to clear the fault. For this purpose, the output command %) (QG)OW 75,3 is available to trigger the intertrip input of the differential protection if applicable, together with other commands that need to be transferred. This can be achieved by external connection or via CFC. The end fault is recognized when the current continues flowing although the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts indicate that the breaker is open. In the 7SD610, an addi6-104

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

tional criterion is the presence of any breaker failure protection initiate signal. The scheme functionality is shown in Figure 6-49. If the breaker failure protection is initiated and current flow is recognized (current criteria L> according Figure 6-38), but no circuit breaker pole is closed (auxiliary contact criterion any pole closed), then a timer 7(QG)DXOW is started, after which an intertrip signal is transmitted to the opposite end of the protected object.

(from Fig 6-38)

L1> L2> L3>


FNo 1461

>1

"(!! U@I9Ahy

BF Start 1 pole closed

& &
T 0
FNo 1495

7A@qAyUSDQ

Figure 6-49

Function block diagram of end fault protection

Circuit Breaker Pole Discrepancy Supervision

The pole discrepancy supervision has the task to detect discrepancies in the position of the three circuit breaker poles. Under steady-state conditions, either all three poles of the breaker must be closed, or all three poles must be open. Discrepancy is permitted only for a short time interval during a single-pole automatic reclose cycle. The scheme functionality is shown in Figure 6-50. The signals which are processed here are the same as those used for the breaker failure protection. The pole discrepancy condition is established when at least one pole is closed (any pole closed) and at the same time not all poles are closed (any pole open). Additionally, the current criteria (from Figure 6-38) are processed. Pole discrepancy can only be detected when current is not flowing through all three poles (<3), i.e. through only one or two poles. When current is flowing through all three poles, all three poles must be closed even if the breaker auxiliary contacts indicate a different status. If pole discrepancy is detected, this is annunciated by a fault detection signal. This signal identifies the pole which was open before the trip command of the pole discrepancy supervision occurred.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-105

Functions

L1>
(from Figure 6-38)

& & &


<3
"("! UQyr9vpr

7A87qvpG
FNo 1498

FNo 1497

L2>

7A87qvpG!
FNo 1499

L3>

7A87qvpG"

any pole closed any pole open

&

FNo 1500

7A87qvpUSDQ

Figure 6-50

Function block diagram of pole discrepancy supervision

6.10.2 Applying the Function Parameter Settings


General The breaker failure protection and its ancillary functions (end fault protection, pole discrepancy supervision) can only operate if they were configured as HQDEOHG during setting of the scope of functions (see Section 5.1, address ). The complete breaker failure protection including its ancillary functions is switched Off or On under address  )&7 %UHDNHU)DLO. The current threshold ,! %) (address ) should be selected such that the protection will operate with the smallest expected short-circuit current. To ensure this, the value should be 10 % less than the minimum anticipated fault current. On the other hand, the value should not be set lower than necessary. Normally, the breaker failure protection evaluates the current flow criterion as well as the position of the breaker auxiliary contact(s). If the auxiliary contact(s) status is not available in the device, this criterion cannot be processed. In this case, set address  &KN %5. &217$&7 to 1R. The breaker failure protection in the 7SD610 can be operated single-stage or twostage Two-stage Breaker Failure Protection With two-stage operation, the trip command is repeated after a time delay T1 to the local feeder breaker, normally to a different set of trip coils of this breaker. A choice can be made whether this trip repetition shall be single-pole or three-pole if the initial feeder protection trip was single-pole (provided single-pole trip is possible). This choice is made in address  S5(75,3 7 . Set this parameter to <HV if you wish single-pole trip for the first stage, otherwise to 1R. If the breaker does not respond to this first stage trip, the adjacent circuit breakers must be tripped provided the fault has not yet been cleared. The adjacent breakers are

Breaker Failure Protection

6-106

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

those of the other feeders on the busbar or bus-bar section and if desired the breaker at the remote end of the protected object. In the 7SD610, after a further delay time 7 (address ), the adjacent circuit breakers (i.e. the breakers of the busbar zone and if desired the breaker at the remote end) are tripped provided the fault has not yet been cleared. An example of the time sequence is illustrated in Figure 6-51. Separate delay times can be set: for single- or three-pole trip repetition to the local feeder circuit breaker after 1-pole trip of the feeder protection under address  7SROH, for three-pole trip repetition to the local feeder circuit breaker after 3-pole trip of the feeder protection under address  7SROH, for trip of the adjacent circuit breakers (busbar zone and remote end if applicable) under address  7. The delay times are set dependant on the maximum operating time of the feeder circuit breaker and the reset time of the current detectors of the breaker failure protection, plus a safety margin which allows for any tolerance of the delay timers. The time sequence is illustrated in Figure 6-51. For sinusoidal currents one can assume that the reset time of the current detectors is less than 15 ms but if current transformer saturation is expected then 25 ms should be assumed.

Fault inception Fault clearance time normal Prot. trip CB operating time Reset (local) I> BF Initiation breaker failure protection Time delay T1 of breaker failure protection Trip command repetition Reset I> BF Safety margin Safety margin

Time delay T2 of breaker failure protection

CB operating time (adjacent CBs)

Total fault clearance time with breaker failure

Figure 6-51

Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and with circuit breaker failure, using two-stage breaker failure protection

Single-stage Breaker Failure Protection

With single-stage operation, the adjacent circuit breakers (i.e. the breakers of the busbar zone and if desired the breaker at the remote end) are tripped after a delay time 7 (address ) following initiation, should the fault not have been cleared within this time. The timers 7SROH (address ) and 7SROH (address ) are then set to since they are not needed.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-107

Functions

But you may use the T1timers for single-stage protection if you wish to utilize the facility of setting different delay times after single-pole trip and three-pole trip of the feeder protection. In this case, set the desired times under addresses  7SROH and  7SROH but set address  S5(75,3 7 to 1R to avoid a singlepole trip to the bus-bar. And set 7 (address ) to or equal to 7SROH. Be sure that the correct trip commands are assigned to the desired trip relay(s).

Fault inception Fault clearance time normal Prot. trip CB operating time Reset I> BF Initiation breaker failure protection Time delay T2 of breaker failure protection CB operating time (adjacent CBs) Safety margin

Total fault clearance time with breaker failure

Figure 6-52

Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and with circuit breaker failure, using single-stage breaker failure protection

The delay times are determined from the maximum operating time of the feeder circuit breaker, the reset time of the current detectors of the breaker failure protection, plus a safety margin which allows for any tolerance of the delay timers. The time sequence is illustrated in Figure 6-52. For sinusoidal currents one can assume that the reset time of the current detectors is less than 15 ms but if current transformer saturation is expected then 25 ms should be assumed. Circuit Breaker not Operational If the circuit breaker associated with the feeder is not operational (e.g. control voltage failure or air pressure failure), it is apparent that the local breaker cannot clear the fault. Time delay before tripping the adjacent breakers is not necessary in this case. If the relay is informed about this disturbance (via the binary input !&% IDXOW\, the adjacent circuit breakers (busbar and remote end if applicable) are tripped after the time 7%NU'HIHFWLYH (address ) which is usually set to . Address  7ULS %NU'HIHFW determines to which output the trip command is routed in the event that the breaker is not operational when a feeder protection trip occurs. Select that output which is used to trip the adjacent breakers (busbar trip). End Fault Protection The end fault protection can be switched 2Q or 2II separately under address  (QG )OW VWDJH. An end fault is a short-circuit between the circuit breaker and the current transformer set of the feeder. The end fault protection presumes that the device is informed about the circuit breaker position via breaker auxiliary contacts connected to binary inputs. If, during an end fault, the circuit breaker is tripped by a busbar protection (the fault is a busbar fault as determined from the location of the current transformers), the fault

6-108

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

current will continue to flow, because the fault is fed from the remote end of the feeder circuit. The time 7(QG)DXOW (address ) is started when, during the fault detection condition of the feeder protection, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts indicate open poles and, at the same time, current flow is detected (address ). The trip command of the end fault protection is intended for the transmission of an intertrip signal to the remote end circuit breaker. Thus, the delay time must be set such that it can bridge out short transient apparent end fault conditions which may occur during switching of the breaker. Pole Discrepancy Supervision The pole discrepancy supervision can be switched 2Q or 2II separately under address  3ROH'LVFUHSDQF\. It is only useful if the breaker poles can be operated individually. It avoids that only one or two poles of the local breaker are open continuously. It has to be provided with either the breaker auxiliary contacts of each pole or the series connection of the normally open contacts (NO contacts) and the normally closed contacts (NC contacts) to binary inputs on the device. If these conditions are not fulfilled, switch the pole discrepancy supervision 2II. The delay time 73ROH'LVFUHS (address ) determines how long a breaker pole discrepancy condition of the feeder circuit breaker, i.e. only one or two poles open, may be present before the pole discrepancy supervision issues a three-pole trip command. This time must clearly be longer than the duration of a single-pole automatic reclose cycle. The time should be less than the permissible duration of an unbalanced load condition which is caused by the unsymmetrical position of the circuit breaker poles. Conventional values are 2 s to 5 s.

6.10.3 Setting Overview


Note: The indicated secondary current values for setting ranges and default settings refer to IN = 1 A. For the nominal current 5 A these values are to be multiplied by 5.
Addr. 3901 3902 3903 3904 3905 3906 3907 3908 Setting Title FCT BreakerFail I> BF 1p-RETRIP (T1) T1-1pole T1-3pole T2 T3-BkrDefective Trip BkrDefect. ON OFF 0.05..20.00 A NO YES 0.00..30.00 sec; 0.00..30.00 sec; 0.00..30.00 sec; 0.00..30.00 sec; NO trips with T1-trip-signal trips with T2-trip-signal trips with T1 and T2-trip-signal Setting Options Default Setting ON 0.10 A YES 0.00 sec 0.00 sec 0.15 sec 0.00 sec NO Comments Breaker Failure Protection is Pick-up threshold I> 1pole retrip with stage T1 (local trip) T1, Delay after 1pole start (local trip) T1, Delay after 3pole start (local trip) T2, Delay of 2nd stage (busbar trip) T3, Delay for start with defective bkr. Trip output selection with defective bkr

3909

Chk BRK CONTACT NO YES

YES

Check Breaker contacts

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-109

Functions

Addr. 3921 3922 3931 3932

Setting Title End Flt. stage T-EndFault PoleDiscrepancy T-PoleDiscrep. ON OFF

Setting Options

Default Setting OFF 2.00 sec OFF 2.00 sec

Comments End fault stage is Trip delay of end fault stage Pole Discrepancy supervision Trip delay with pole discrepancy

0.00..30.00 sec; ON OFF 0.00..30.00 sec;

6.10.4 Information Overview


F.No. 1401 1402 1403 1432 1439 1415 1435 1436 1437 1440 1451 1452 1453 1461 1493 1472 1473 1474 1476 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 >BF on >BF off >BLOCK BkrFail >BF release >BF Start w/o I >BF Start 3pole >BF Start L1 >BF Start L2 >BF Start L3 BkrFailON/offBI BkrFail OFF BkrFail BLOCK BkrFail ACTIVE BF Start BF TRIP CBdefec BF T1-TRIP 1pL1 BF T1-TRIP 1pL2 BF T1-TRIP 1pL3 BF T1-TRIP L123 BF T2-TRIP(bus) BF EndFlt TRIP BF CBdiscrSTART BF CBdiscr L1 BF CBdiscr L2 BF CBdiscr L3 BF CBdiscr TRIP Alarm Comments >BF: Switch on breaker fail protection >BF: Switch off breaker fail protection >BLOCK Breaker failure >BF: External release >BF: External start 3pole (w/o current) >BF: External start 3pole >BF: External start L1 >BF: External start L2 >BF: External start L3 Breaker failure prot. ON/OFF via BI Breaker failure is switched OFF Breaker failure is BLOCKED Breaker failure is ACTIVE Breaker failure protection started BF Trip in case of defective CB BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L1 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L2 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L3 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - 3pole BF Trip T2 (busbar trip) BF Trip End fault stage BF Pole discrepancy pickup BF Pole discrepancy pickup L1 BF Pole discrepancy pickup L2 BF Pole discrepancy pickup L3 BF Pole discrepancy Trip

6-110

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Thermal Overload Protection

6.11

Thermal Overload Protection

6.11.1 Function Description


The thermal overload protection prevents damage to the protected object caused by thermal overloading, particularly in case of transformers, rotating machines, power reactors and cables. It is in general not necessary for overhead lines, since no meaningful temperature prize can be calculated because of the great variations in the environmental conditions (temperature, wind). In this case, however, a current-dependent alarm stage can signal an imminent overload. The unit computes the temperature rise according to a thermal single-body model as per the following thermal differential equation d 1 I 2 1 ------- + ------ = ------ ------------ th k I N dt th
with th k I IN currently valid temperature rise referred to the final temperature rise for the maximum permissible line current k IN thermal time constant for temperature rise kfactor which states the maximum permissible continuous current

referred to the rated current of the current transformers


currently valid r.m.s. current rated current of current transformers

The solution of this equation under steady-state conditions is an efunction whose asymptote shows the final temperature rise end. When the temperature rise reaches the first settable temperature threshold alarm, which is below the final temperature rise, a warning alarm is given in order to allow an early load reduction. When the second temperature threshold, i.e. the final temperature rise or tripping temperature, is reached, the protected object is disconnected from the network. The overload protection can, however, also be set on $ODUP 2QO\. In this case only an alarm is output when the final temperature rise is reached. The temperature rises are calculated separately for each phase in a thermal replica of the square of the associated phase current. This guarantees a true r.m.s. value measurement and also includes the effect of harmonic content. A choice can be made whether the maximum calculated temperature rise of the three phases, the average temperature rise, or the temperature rise calculated from the phase with maximum current should be decisive for evaluation of the thresholds. The maximum permissible continuous thermal overload current Imax is described as a multiple of the rated current IN: Imax = k IN In addition to the k-factor, the time constant th as well as the alarm temperature alarm must be entered in the protection. Apart from the thermal alarm stage, the overload protection also includes a current overload alarm stage Ialarm, which can output an early warning that an overload current is imminent, even when the temperature rise has not yet reached the alarm or trip temperature rise values. The overload protection can be blocked via a binary input. In doing so, the thermal replica are also reset to zero.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-111

Functions

#!" UDH@8PITU6IU #!! FA68UPS


IL1 IL2 IL3

#!% 86G8H@UCP9 #!# 6G6SH


max (Imax)

i2

> 1

AI $ %
& O/L Q Alarm

#!$ D6G6SH

&

AI $!
ThOverload TRIP

I>

1 &

AI $ $
O/L I Alarm

L1
AI $"
>BLK ThOverload

L2 L3
#! UurPW@SGP69 Pss 6yhy P
1

Figure 6-53

Logic diagram of the thermal overload protection

6.11.2 Setting the Function Parameters


General Information A precondition for the use of the thermal overload protection is that 2YHUORDG = H[LVW was configured under address  (Section 5.1). It can be switched 2Q or 2II under address  7KHU 29(5 /2$'. Furthermore $ODUP 2QO\ can be set. With that latter setting the protection function is active but only outputs an alarm when the tripping temperature is reached, i.e. the output function 2/ 2)) is not active. The rated current of the device is taken as the base current for detecting an overload. The setting factor k is set under address  .)$&725. It is determined by the relation between the permissible thermal continuous current and this rated current: I max k = ----------IN The permissible continuous current is at the same time the current at which the e function of the temperature rise has its asymptote. It is not necessary to determine the tripping temperature since it results automatically from the final rise temperature at k IN. Manufacturers of electrical machines usually state the permissible continuous current. If no data are available, k is set to 1.1 times the rated current of the protected object. For cables, the permissible continuous current depends on the cross section, the insulation material, the design and the way they are laid, and can be derived from the relevant tables. Please note that the overload capability of electrical equipment relates to its primary current. This has to be considered if the nominal primary current of the equipment differs from the rated current of the current transformers.

kFactor

6-112

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Thermal Overload Protection

Example: Belted cable 10 kV 150 mm2 Permissible continuous current Imax = 322 A Current transformers 400 A/5 A 322 A k = -------------- = 0.805 400 A Setting value .)$&725 =  Time Constant The thermal time constant th is set under the address  7,0( &2167$17. This is also to be stated by the manufacturer. Please note that the time constant must be set in minutes. Quite often other values for determining the time constant are stated which can be converted into the time constant as follows: 1s current th perm. 1-s current 2 1 -------- = ----- ------------------------------------------------------- 60 perm. contin. current min permissible current for application time other than 1 s, e.g. for 0.5 s th 0.5 perm. 0.5s current 2 -------- = ------- ------------------------------------------------------- min 60 perm. contin. current t6time; this is the time in seconds for which a current of 6 times the rated current of the protected object may flow th -------- = 0.6 t6 min Example: Cable as above with permissible 1s current 13.5 kA th 2 1 1 13500 A 2 -------- = ----- ---------------------- = ----- 42 = 29.4 60 min 60 322 A Setting value 7,0( &2167$17 =  min Alarm Stages By setting a thermal alarm stage $/$50 (address ) an alarm can be output before the tripping temperature is reached, so that a trip can be avoided by early load reduction or by switching over. The percentage is referred to the tripping temperature. The current overload alarm setpoint , $/$50 (address ) is stated as a factor of the rated device current and should be set equal to or slightly below the permissible continuous current k IN. It can also be used instead of the thermal alarm stage. In this case the thermal alarm stage is set to 100 % and thus practically ineffective. Calculating the Temperature Rise The thermal replica is calculated individually for each phase. Address  &$/& 0(7+2' decides whether the highest of the three calculated temperatures ( PD[) or their arithmetic average ($YHUDJH ) or the temperature calculated from the phase with maximum current ( # ,PD[) should be decisive for the thermal alarm and tripping stage.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-113

Functions

Since an overload usually occurs in a balanced way, this setting is of minor importance. If unbalanced overloads are to be expected, however, these options lead to different results. Averaging should only be used if a rapid thermal equilibrium is possible in the protected object, e.g. with belted cables. If the three phases are, however, more or less thermally isolated (e.g. single conductor cables or overhead lines), one of the maximum settings should be chosen at any rate.

6.11.3 Setting Overview


Note: The indicated setting ranges and default settings refer to a secondary rated current of IN = 1 A. For the secondary rated current of IN = 5 A these values are to be multiplied by 5. For the setting of primary values the transformation ratio of the current transformers must also be taken into consideration.
Addr. 4201 Setting Title Ther. OVER LOAD Setting Options OFF ON Alarm Only 0.10..4.00 1.0..999.9 min 50..100 % 0.10..4.00 A Theta Max Average \T \T @ Imax Default Setting OFF Comments Thermal overload protection

4202 4203 4204 4205 4206

K-FACTOR TIME CONSTANT ALARM I ALARM CALC. METHOD

1.10 100.0 min 90 % 1.00 A Theta Max

K-Factor Time Constant Thermal Alarm Stage Current Overload Alarm Setpoint Method of Acquiring Temperature

6.11.4 Information Overview


F.No. 1503 1511 1512 1513 1516 1515 1517 1521 Alarm >BLK ThOverload Th.Overload OFF Th.Overload BLK Overload ACT O/L Alarm O/L I Alarm Winding O/L ThOverload TRIP Comments >BLOCK Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload Protection OFF Thermal Overload Protection BLOCKED Overload Protection ACTIVE Overload Alarm! Near Thermal Trip Overload Current Alarm (I alarm) Winding Overload Thermal Overload TRIP

6-114

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Monitoring functions

6.12

Monitoring functions
The device incorporates comprehensive monitoring functions which cover both hardware and software; the measured values are continuously checked for plausibility, so that the current and voltage transformer circuits are also included in the monitoring system to a large extent. Furthermore, binary inputs are available for supervision of the trip circuits.

6.12.1 Function Description


6.12.1.1 Hardware Monitoring The complete hardware from the measurement inputs to the output relays is monitored for faults and inadmissible states by monitoring circuits and by the processor. Auxiliary and Reference Voltages The processor voltage of 5 V is monitored by the hardware as the processor cannot operate if the voltage drops below the minimum value. The device is put out of operation. When the voltage has returned the processor system is restarted. Failure or switch-off of the supply voltage puts the system out of operation; this status is signalled by a fail-safe contact. Transient dips in supply voltage will not disturb the function of the relay (see also Section 10.1.2 in the Technical Data). The processor monitors the offset and the reference voltage of the ADC (analog-todigital converter). In case of inadmissible deviations the protection is blocked; persistent faults are signalled. Back-up Battery The back-up battery guarantees that the internal clock continues to work and that metered values and alarms are stored if the auxiliary voltage fails. The charge of the battery is checked regularly. If the voltage drops below the permissible minimum the alarm )DLO %DWWHU\ is output. If the device is not fed with auxiliary voltage for more than 12 to 24 hours, the internal back-up battery is switched off automatically, i.e. the time is not registered any more. Messages and fault recordings keep stored. Memory Modules All working memories (RAMs) are checked during start-up. If a fault occurs, the start is aborted and an LED starts flashing. During operation the memories are checked with the help of their checksum. For the program memory (EPROM), the cross-check sum is cyclically generated and compared to a stored reference program cross-check sum. For the parameter memory (EEPROM), the cross-check sum is cyclically generated and compared to the cross-check sum that is newly calculated after each parameterization operation. If a fault occurs the processor system is restarted.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-115

Functions

Scanning Frequency

The scanning frequency and the synchronism between the internal back-up modules is continuously monitored. If deviations cannot be corrected by another synchronization, the device puts itself out of operation; the Device OK relay drops off. There are four measurement inputs in the current path. If the three phase currents and the ground current of the current transformer starpoint or of an separate summation current transformer of the protected line are connected to the device, the sum of the four digitized current values must always be zero. A fault in the current path is recognized when iF = |iL1 + iL2 + iL3 + kI iE | > , 7+5(6+2/' IN + , )$&725 |i| Factor kI (parameter ,H2ZQ,S) considers the possibly different ratio of a separate IEtransformer (e.g. summation current transformer). , 7+5(6+2/' and , )$& 725 are setting parameters. The component , )$&725 i takes into account permissible current proportional transformation errors in the input converters which may particularly occur under conditions of high short-circuit currents (Figure 6-54). The resetting ratio is approx. 97 %. i is the sum of all rectified currents. i = |iL1 |+|iL2 |+|iL3|+ |kI iE | As soon as a summation current fault is detected after or before a system disturbance, the differential protection is blocked. This fault is reported with )DLOXUH ,. For not causing a blocking due to a transformation ratio fault (saturation) in case of high shortcircuit currents, this monitoring function is not available during a system fault.

Measured Value Acquisition: Currents

Note:
Current sum monitoring can only operate properly when the residual current of the protected line is fed to the fourth current input (I4) of the relay.

iF IN
Slope:

DA68UPS

DUCS@TCPG9

i IN

Figure 6-54

Summation current monitoring

6-116

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Monitoring functions

6.12.1.2 Software Monitoring Watchdog For continuous monitoring of the program sequences, a watchdog timer is provided in the hardware (hardware watchdog) which will reset and completely restart the processor system in the event of processor failure or if a program falls out of step. A further software watchdog ensures that any error in the processing of the programs will be recognized. Such errors also lead to a reset of the processor. If such an error is not eliminated by restarting, another restart attempt is initiated. If the fault is still present after three restart attempts within 30 s, the protection system will take itself out of service, and the red LED Blocked lights up. The Device OK relay drops off and signals the malfunction by its break contact.

6.12.1.3 Monitoring of External Transformer Circuits The device detects and signals most of the interruptions or short-circuits in the secondary circuits of current or voltage transformers or wrong connections (an important commissioning aid). For this the measured values are checked in the background at cyclic intervals, as long as no pickup condition exists. Current Symmetry In healthy network operation it can be expected that the currents will be approximately balanced. The monitoring of the values in the device ensures this balance. For this the lowest phase current is set in relation to the highest. An unbalance is recognized when |Imin | / |Imax | Imax / IN < %$/ )$&725 , provided that > %$/$1&( , /,0,7 / IN

Imax is the highest, Imin the lowest of the three phase currents. The balance factor %$/ )$&725 , is the measure for the balance of the phase currents, limiting value %$/$1&( , /,0,7 is the lowest threshold of the operating range of this monitoring (see Figure 6-55). Both parameters can be set. The resetting ratio is approx. 97 %. This fault is indicated with )DLO , %DODQFH.

Imin IN

Slope:

76GA68UPSD

76G6I8@DGDHDU
Figure 6-55 Current balance monitoring

Imax IN

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-117

Functions

Voltage Symmetry

In healthy network operation it can be expected that the voltages are nearly balanced. If measured-circuit voltages are fed to the line, this symmetry is controlled by the device. For the monitoring function not picking up during a single earth fault, which can also be a permanent operating state in non-earthed networks, the phase-to-phase voltages are being considered. Thus the lowest phase-to-phase voltage is set in relation to the highest. An unbalance is recognized when |Umin | / |Umax | < %$/ )$&725 8 provided that |Umax| > %$/$1&( 8/,0,7

Umax is the highest, Umin the lowest of the three phase-to-phase voltages. The symmetry factor %$/ )$&725 8 is the measure for the asymmetry of the phase voltages, limiting value %$/$1&( 8/,0,7 is the lowest threshold of the operating range of this monitoring (see Figure 6-56). Both parameters can be set. The resetting ratio is approx. 97 %. This fault is indicated with )DLO 8 EDODQFH.

Umin V

Slope:

76GA68UPSV

76G6I8@VGDHDU
Figure 6-56 Voltage balance monitoring

Umax V

Broken-wire Monitoring

During steady-state operation the open-circuit supervision registers interruptions in the secondary circuit of the current transformers. In addition to the hazard potential caused by high voltages in the secondary circuit, this kind of interruptions simulates differential currents to the differential protection, such as those evoked by short-circuits in the protected object. The broken-wire monitor scans the current of each phase and picks up when the current experiences an abrupt drop to 0 (from > 0.1IN), however, in such a way that no corresponding drop appears in the earth current. The differential protection is blocked immediately in the relevant phase. This blocking has an impact on both ends of the protected object. The device issues the message %URNHQ ,ZLUH indicating also the phase. The blocking is cancelled as soon as the device is again fed with current in the relevant phase. It is also cancelled if, for the period the short-circuit current flows through the line, a high short-circuit current (> 1.5 IN) is registered by the other device of the differential protection system.

6-118

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Monitoring functions

Note:
The broken-wire monitor only operates if the earth current of a separate earth current transformer at the protected line or if no earth current is fed to the fourth current input (I4) of the relay.

6.12.1.4 Trip Circuit Supervision The differential protection 7SD610 is equipped with an integrated trip circuit supervision. Depending on the number of available binary inputs that are not connected to the common potential, supervision with one or two binary inputs can be selected. If the allocation of the necessary binary inputs does not comply with this monitoring mode, an alarm (with the number of the non-compliant circuit) is given. If two binary inputs are used, disturbances in the trip circuit can be recognized in any circuit state; with one binary input, circuit breaker disturbances cannot be recognized. If single-pole tripping is possible, trip circuit supervision can be performed for each circuit breaker pole as long as the necessary binary inputs are available. Supervision Using Two Binary Inputs If two binary inputs are used, they are connected according to Figure 6-57, one in parallel to the assigned command relay contact of the protection and the other parallel to the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact. A precondition for the use of the trip circuit supervision is that the control voltage for the circuit breaker is higher than the sum total of the minimum voltages drops at the two binary inputs (UCtrl > 2UBImin). As at least 19 V are needed at each binary input, supervision can be used with a control voltage over approximately 38 V.

L+

UCtrl UBI1 7SD610

7SD610

AI%'$# AI%'$$

>TripC1 TripRel

TR

>TripC1 Brk.Rel

Legend: TR CB CBC Aux.1 Aux.2 UCtrl UBI1 UBI2 Trip relay contact Circuit breaker Circuit breaker coil Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (make) Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (break)

UBI2

CB

CBC

Aux.1

Aux.2

Control voltage (trip voltage) Input voltage of 1st binary input Input voltage of 2nd binary input

L
Figure 6-57

Note: The diagram shows the circuit breaker in closed state.

Principle of the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs

The trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs recognizes not only interruptions of the trip circuit and failures of the control voltage but monitors also the reactions of the circuit breaker with the help of the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-119

Functions

Depending on the state of the trip relay and the circuit breaker, the binary inputs are triggered (logic state H in Table 6-3) or short-circuited (logic state L). A state in which both binary inputs are not activated (L) is only possible in intact trip circuits for a short transition phase (trip relay contact closed but circuit breaker not yet open). This state is only permanent in the event of interruptions or short-circuits in the trip circuit, a battery voltage failure or a malfunction in the mechanical system of the circuit breaker. Therefore, this state is one of the supervision criteria.

Table 6-3 No. 1 2 3 4

Status table of the binary inputs depending on TR and CB Trip relay open open closed closed Circuit breaker ON OFF ON OFF Aux.1 closed open closed open Aux.2 open closed open closed BI 1 H H L L BI 2 L H L H

The states of the two binary inputs are queried periodically, approximately every 500 ms. Only after n = 3 of these consecutive state queries have recognized a fault is an alarm output (see Figure 6-58). These repeated measurings determine the delay time of the alarm and thus avoid that an alarm is output during short-time transient phases. After the fault is removed in the trip circuit, the fault message is reset automatically after the same time.

AI%'$#

>TripC1Tr.Rel
AI%'$$

&

AI%'%$

FAIL: Trip cir.

>TripC1Br.Rel

T approx. 1 to 2 s

Figure 6-58

Logic diagram of the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs

Supervision Using One Binary Input

The binary input is connected in parallel according to Figure 6-59 to the assigned command relay of the protection device. The circuit breaker auxiliary-contact is bridged with the help of a high-impedance equivalent resistance R. The control voltage for the circuit breaker should be approximately twice as high as the minimum voltage drop at the binary input (UCtrl > 2UBImin). Since at least 19 V are necessary for the binary input, this supervision can be used with a control voltage over approximately 38 V.

6-120

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Monitoring functions

L+

UCtrl UBI 7SD610

7SD610

AI%'$#

>TripC1 TripRel

TR
Legend: TR CB CBC Aux.1 Aux.2 R UCrtl UBI Trip relay contact Circuit breaker Circuit breaker coil Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (make) Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (break) Equivalent resistance

R CB
CBC Aux.1 Aux.2

Control voltage (trip voltage) Input voltage of binary input

Note: The diagram shows the circuit breaker in closed state.

L
Figure 6-59 Principle of the trip circuit supervision with one binary input

In normal operation the binary input is energized when the trip relay contact is open and the trip circuit is intact (logic state H), as the monitoring circuit is closed via the auxiliary contact (if the circuit breaker is closed) or via the equivalent resistance R. The binary input is short-circuited and thus deactivated only as long as the tripping relay is closed (logic state L). If the binary input is permanently deactivated during operation, an interruption in the trip circuit or a failure of the (trip) control voltage can be assumed. As the trip circuit supervision does not work during a system fault condition, the closed trip contact does not lead to an alarm. If, however, the trip contacts of other devices also operate on the trip circuit in parallel, the alarm must be delayed with $ODUP 'H OD\ (see also Figure 6-60). After the fault in the trip circuit is removed, the alarm is reset automatically after approximately 1.5 to 2 seconds.

AI%'$#

#" 6yh9ryh

>TripC1 TripRel Fault

&

Tr

AI%'%$

FAIL: Trip cir.

Tr approx. 1 to 2 s

Figure 6-60

Logic diagram of the trip circuit supervision with one binary input

6.12.1.5 Fault Reactions Depending on the kind of fault detected, an alarm is output, the processor is restarted or the device is put out of operation. If the fault is still present after three restart attempts the protection system will take itself out of service and indicate this condition by drop-off of the Device OK relay, thus indicating the device failure. The red LED Blocked on the device front lights up, provided that there is an internal auxiliary voltage, and the green LED RUN goes out. If the internal auxiliary voltage fails, too, all

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-121

Functions

LEDs are dark. Table 6-4 shows a summary of the monitoring functions and the fault reactions of the device.

Table 6-4

Summary of the fault reactions of the device Possible causes External (aux. voltage) Internal (converter) Fault reaction Device out of operation or alarm, if possible Alarm All LEDs dark (UURU  9
2

Supervision Auxiliary voltage failure

Output DOK ) drops off DOK2) drops off as allocated DOK2) drops off DOK2) drops off DOK2) drops off

Measured value ac- Internal (converter or ref- Protection out of opera- LED ERROR quisition erence voltage) tion, alarm (UURU $'FRQY Back-up battery Internal (back-up battery) Alarm Device out of operation Restart attempt1) Restart attempt1), Restart abort device out of operation Restart attempt1) Restart attempt1) )DLO %DWWHU\ LED ERROR LED ERROR LED flashes

Hardware watchdog Internal (processor failure) Software watchdog Working memory Internal (program flow) Internal (RAM)

Program memory Parameter memory Scanning frequency 1 A/5 Asetting

Internal (EPROM) Internal (EEPROM or RAM)

LED ERROR LED ERROR LED ERROR

DOK2) drops off DOK2) drops off DOK2) drops off DOK2) drops off

Internal (clock generator) Device out of operation 1/5 A jumper wrong

Alarms: ,1 $ ZURQJ Protection out of opera- (UURU $'FRQY tion LED ERROR Alarm: Using default values $ODUP 12 FDOLEU

Calibration data Modules

Internal (EEPROM or RAM) Module does not comply with ordering number Internal (measured data acquisition) External (system or transformer) External (system or transformer) External (system or current transforme)r External (trip circuit or control voltage)

as allocated DOK2) drops off

Alarms: (UURU %RDUG  Protection out of opera- and if applicable tion (UURU $'FRQY Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm )DLOXUH , )DLO , %DODQFH %URNHQ :LUH )DLO 8 %DODQFH )$,/ 7ULS FLU

Summation current Current symmetry Wire break Voltage symmetry Trip circuit supervision
1) 2)

as allocated as allocated as allocated as allocated as allocated

After three unsuccessful attempts the device is put out of operation DOK = Device OK relay

6-122

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Monitoring functions

6.12.1.6 Group Alarms Certain messages of the monitoring functions are already combined to group alarms. Table 6-5 shows an overview of these group alarms an their composition.

Table 6-5

Group alarms Group alarm Designation Fail I Superv. Fail U Superv. Alarm Sum Event Composed of Designation Failure i Fail I balance Fail U balance Failure i Fail I balance Fail U balance >FAIL:Feeder VT Fail Battery Alarm NO calibr Error Board 1 Error Board 2 1) Error Board 3 1) Error Board 4 1) Error Board 5 1) Error Board 6 1) Error Board 7 1) Error 5V Error1A/5Awrong Error A/D-conv.

FNo 161 164 160

FNo 289 163 167 289 163 167 361 177 193 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 144 192 181

140

Error Sum Alarm

1)

depending on the identification number of printed circuit boards

6.12.2 Setting the Function Parameters


The sensitivity of the measurement supervision can be altered. Experiential values set ex works are sufficient in most cases. If an extremely high operational unbalance of the currents and/or voltages is to be expected in the relevant application, or if during operation some or other monitoring function is activated sporadically, the parameter should be set less sensitive. Symmetry Supervision The symmetry supervision can be switched 2Q or 2II in address  0($685( 683(59. Address $ %$/$1&( 8/,0,7 determines the threshold voltage (phase-tophase) above which the voltage symmetry supervision is effective (see also Figure 656). Address $ %$/ )$&725 8 is the associated balance factor, i.e. the gradient of the symmetry characteristic (Figure 6-56). This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-123

Functions
Address $ %$/$1&( , /,0,7 determines the threshold current above which the current balance supervision is effective (also see Figure 6-55). Address $ %$/ )$&725 , is the associated balance factor, i.e. the gradient of the balance characteristic (Figure 6-55). Wire Break Supervision Summated Current Supervision The wire break supervision can be switched 2Q or 2II in address  %52.(1 :,5(. The summated current supervision can be switched 2Q or 2II in address  )$67 6 L 683(59. Address $ , 7+5(6+2/' determines the threshold current above which the summation current supervision (see Figure 6-54) responds (absolute share, only referred to IN). The relative share (referred to the maximum phase current) for the response of the summated current supervision (Figure 6-54) is set in address $ , )$&725. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI 4 under Additional Settings.

Note:
Current sum monitoring can operate properly only when the residual current of the protected line is fed to the fourth current input (I4) of the relay. Trip Circuit Supervision When address  7ULS&LUF6XSHUY was configured (Section 5.1), the number of circuits that are to be monitored was set. If the trip circuit supervision function is not used at all, 1RQ H[LVW is set there. The trip circuit supervision can be switched 2Q or 2II in address  )&7 7ULS 6XSHUY. The number of the binary inputs per trip circuit is entered under address  1R RI %,. If the routing of the binary inputs required for this does not comply with the selected supervision mode, an alarm is output (with the number of the noncompliant trip circuit). The trip circuit alarm is delayed for approximately 1 s to 2 s in supervision with two binary inputs, whereas the delay can be set under address  $ODUP 'HOD\ in supervision with one binary input. 1 s to 2 s are sufficient if only device 7SD610 operates on the trip circuits as the trip circuit supervision does not operate during a system fault. If, however, the trip contacts of other devices work also on the trip circuit in parallel, the alarm must be delayed for longer than the longest possible duration of a tripping command.

6.12.3 Setting Overview


Measurement Supervision

Note: The indicated setting ranges and default settings refer to a secondary rated current of IN = 1 A. For the secondary rated current of IN = 5 A these values are to be

6-124

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Monitoring functions

multiplied by 5. For the setting of primary values the transformation ratio of the transformers must also be taken into consideration.
Addr. 2901 2902A 2903A 2904A 2905A 2908 2921 2906A 2907A Setting Title MEASURE. SUPERV BALANCE U-LIMIT BAL. FACTOR U BALANCE I LIMIT BAL. FACTOR I BROKEN WIRE FAST i SUPERV I THRESHOLD I FACTOR Setting Options ON OFF 10..100 V 0.58..0.95 0.10..1.00 A 0.10..0.95 ON OFF ON OFF 0.10..2.00 A 0.00..0.95 Default Setting ON 50 V 0.75 0.50 A 0.50 ON ON 0.25 A 0.50 Comments Measurement Supervision Voltage Threshold for Balance Monitoring Balance Factor for Voltage Monitor Current Balance Monitor Balance Factor for Current Monitor Fast broken current-wire supervision State of fast current summation supervis Summated Current Monitoring Threshold Summated Current Monitoring Factor

Trip Circuit Supervision


Addr. 4001 4002 4003 Setting Title FCT TripSuperv. No. of BI Alarm Delay ON OFF 1..2 1..30 sec Setting Options Default Setting OFF 2 2 sec Comments TRIP Circuit Supervision is Number of Binary Inputs per trip circuit Delay Time for alarm

6.12.4 Information Overview


Hardware and Software Monitoring
F.No. 140 144 160 177 181 182 183 Alarm Error Sum Alarm Error 5V Alarm Sum Event Fail Battery Error A/D-conv. Alarm Clock Error Board 1 Comments Error with a summary alarm Error 5 V Alarm Summary Event Failure: Battery empty Error: A/D converter Alarm: Real Time Clock Error Board 1

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-125

Functions

F.No. 184 185 186 187 188 189 192 193

Alarm Error Board 2 Error Board 3 Error Board 4 Error Board 5 Error Board 6 Error Board 7 Error1A/5Awrong Alarm NO calibr Error Board 2 Error Board 3 Error Board 4 Error Board 5 Error Board 6 Error Board 7

Comments

Error: 1A/5A jumper different from setting Alarm: NO calibration data available

Measurement Supervision
F.No. 161 289 163 164 167 197 295 296 290 291 292 Alarm Fail I Superv. Failure i Fail I balance Fail U Superv. Fail U balance MeasSup OFF Broken wire OFF i superv. OFF Broken Iwire L1 Broken Iwire L2 Broken Iwire L3 Comments Failure: General Current Supervision Alarm: Current summation supervision Failure: Current Balance Failure: General Voltage Supervision Failure: Voltage Balance Measurement Supervision is switched OFF Broken wire supervision is switched OFF Current summation superv is switched OFF Alarm: Broken current-wire detected L1 Alarm: Broken current-wire detected L2 Alarm: Broken current-wire detected L3

Trip Circuit Supervision


F.No. 6854 6855 6856 6857 6858 6859 6861 6865 6866 6867 6868 Alarm >TripC1 TripRel >TripC1 Bkr.Rel >TripC2 TripRel >TripC2 Bkr.Rel >TripC3 TripRel >TripC3 Bkr.Rel TripC OFF FAIL: Trip cir. TripC1 ProgFAIL TripC2 ProgFAIL TripC3 ProgFAIL Comments >Trip circuit superv. 1: Trip Relay >Trip circuit superv. 1: Breaker Relay >Trip circuit superv. 2: Trip Relay >Trip circuit superv. 2: Breaker Relay >Trip circuit superv. 3: Trip Relay >Trip circuit superv. 3: Breaker Relay Trip circuit supervision OFF Failure Trip Circuit TripC1 blocked: Binary input is not set TripC2 blocked: Binary input is not set TripC3 blocked: Binary input is not set

6-126

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Function Control

6.13

Function Control
The function control is the control centre of the device. It coordinates the sequence of protection and ancillary functions, processes their decisions and the information coming from the system. Among these are Switch-in recognition, Recognition of the circuit breaker status, Fault detection/pickup logic, Tripping logic.

6.13.1 Switch-in Recognition


When a protected object is switched in, several measures may be necessary or desirable; e.g. for manual closure onto a fault usually instantaneous tripping is desired. This is done in overcurrent protection by bypassing the delay of one current stage. For every short-circuit protection function which can be delayed, at least one stage can be selected that is instantaneously active in the event of a manual closing, as mentioned in the relevant sections. Also see Section 6.1.3 under the subtitle Circuit Breaker Status, page 6-17. The manual closing command must be transmitted to the device via a binary input. The command is set to a defined length (to be set under address $ 6, 7LPH 0DQ&O) to be independent of the actual duration of an individual manual closing operation. Figure 6-61 shows the logic diagram.

FNr 356

$ TDUvrHh8y
FNr 561

>Manual Close
FNr 2851

&

Man.Clos.Detect.

AR Close Figure 6-61 Logic diagram of the manual closing procedure

If the 7SD610 is equipped with an integrated auto-reclosure function, the integrated manual closing logic differentiates automatically between an external control command via the binary input and an automatic reclosure through the internal auto-reclose function. Thus the binary input !0DQXDO &ORVH can be connected directly to the closing coil of the circuit breaker (Figure 6-62). If, however, external closing commands are possible which must not activate the manual closing function (e.g. external reclosure device), the binary input !0DQXDO &ORVH must be activated by a separate contact of the control-discrepancy switch (Figure 6-63).

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-127

Functions

L+
Control discrep. switch

7SD610
FNr 356 >Manual FNr 2851

Close

AR Close CB
CBC
Legend: CB Circuit breaker CBC Circuit breaker closing coil

L
Figure 6-62

Manual closing with internal auto-reclosure function

L+ External AR device
Reclose command
Control discrep. switch

7SD610
FNr 356 >Manual

Close

CB

CBC
Legend: CB Circuit breaker CBC Circuit breaker closing coil

L
Figure 6-63 Manual closing with external auto-reclosure device

6.13.2 Recognition of the Circuit Breaker Status


Several protection and ancillary functions require information on the status of the circuit breaker for proper functioning. This is e.g. helpful for the conditions when connecting the protected object (cf. Sub-section 6.7.1), start of the dead times before auto-reclosure (cf. Sub-section 6.9.1), plausibility check before auto-reclosure (cf. Sub-section 6.9.1), the enabling condition for the high-current switch-on-to-fault protection (I>>> stage, cf. 6.7.1), also for all ends of the protected object, the circuit breaker failure protection (cf. Sub-section 6.10.1), the verification of the reset conditions for the tripping command (cf. Sub-section 6.13.4), the trip circuit check with the help of the TRIPCLOSEtest cycle (cf. Sub-section 6.13.5).

6-128

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Function Control

The device is equipped with a circuit breaker position logic (Figure 6-64), which offers different options depending on which auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker are available and on how they are connected to the device. In most cases it is sufficient to have the status of the circuit breaker signalled by its auxiliary contact to the device via a binary input. This is valid if the circuit breaker is always operated three-pole. In this case the make contact of the auxiliary contact is to be connected to a binary input which must be allocated to the input function !&% S &ORVHG (FNo ). Then the other inputs are not assigned and the logic is limited to the transmission of this input information. If the breaker poles can be operated individually and e.g. only the series-connected break contacts are available, the associated binary input is also allocated to function !&% S 2SHQ (FNo ). The other inputs are not assigned either in that case. If the breaker poles can be closed individually and the auxiliary contacts are accessible individually, each auxiliary contact should be assigned its own binary input as far as possible if the device can and is supposed to perform single-pole tripping. With the help of this connection, the device can process a maximum amount of information. Three binary inputs are necessary for this: !&% $X[ / (FNo ), for the auxiliary contact of pole L1, !&% $X[ / (FNo ), for the auxiliary contact of pole L2, !&% $X[ / (FNo ), for the auxiliary contact of pole L3, The entries FNo  and FNo  are not used in this case. If the breaker poles can be closed individually, two binary inputs are sufficient if both the series-connected make contacts and the series-connected break contacts of the auxiliary contacts of the three poles are available. The series circuit of the make contacts is allocated on the input function !&% S &ORVHG (FNo ) and the series circuit of the closing contacts on the input function !&% S 2SHQ (FNo ) in this case. Please note that Figure 6-64 shows the entire logic of all connection possibilities. Only a part of the inputs is used for the respective application as described above. The 8 output signals of the circuit breaker status logic can be processed by the individual protection and ancillary functions. The output signals are blocked if the signals transmitted from the circuit breaker are not plausible: for example, the circuit breaker cannot be open and closed at the same time, or an open circuit pole cannot be live. In 7SD610 the position of the circuit breaker poles recognized by the device is also transmitted to the remote end device. This way the position of the circuit breaker poles is also recognized by at the other end. The high-current switch-on-to-fault protection (see 6.7.1) makes use of this function. Special binary inputs are available for the auto-reclosure function and for the circuit breaker check; they are to be handled in the same way and additionally allocated if necessary. These inputs have an analogue meaning to the inputs described above and are identified with /6 ... for easier distinction: !&% S &ORVHG (FNo ) for the series circuit of the make contacts of the auxiliary contacts, !&% S 2SHQ (FNo ) for the series circuit of the closing contacts of the auxiliary contacts, !&% 3ROH / (FNo ) for the auxiliary contact of pole L1, !&% 3ROH / (FNo ) for the auxiliary contact of pole L2,

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-129

Functions
!&% 3ROH / (FNo ) for the auxiliary contact of pole L3.

CB auxiliary contacts:

L1

L2

L3

FNo 380

R380

(Series-connected break contacts)

>CB 3p Open
R380

1 &
any pole closed

L1

FNo 351

R351

>CB Aux. L1

&

L1 closed

R351

&

L1 open

L2

FNo 352

R352

>CB Aux. L2

&

L2 closed

R352

&

L2 open

L3

FNo 353

R353

>CB Aux. L3

&

L3 closed

R353

&

L3 open

L1

L2

L3

FNo 379

R379

(Series-connected make contacts)

>CB 3p Closed

1 &
R379

any pole open

L1, L2, L3 FNr ... R ...

Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts Binary input with FNo Binary input is allocated

IRES
3

Plausibility check

Figure 6-64

Circuit breaker position logic

6-130

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Function Control

6.13.3 Fault Detection Logic of the Entire Device


Phase-segregated Pickup The fault detection logic combines the pickup signals of all protection functions. For those protection functions which allow phase-segregated pickup, the pickup is output per phase. When a protection function detects a ground fault, a device group alarm is output. Thus the alarms 5HOD\ 3,&.83 /, 5HOD\ 3,&.83 /, 5HOD\ 3,&. 83 / and 5HOD\ 3,&.83 ( are available. These alarms can be allocated to LEDs or output relays. Some protection functions can also indicate the phase pickup as a group signal for the local displaying of fault messages and for the transmission of the messages to a PC or a central control system, e.g. 'LII)OW /( for differential protection pickup L1L2E; only one of these is displayed at a time and represents the entire pickup image. General Pickup The pickup signals are ORed and lead to a general pickup of the device. It is signalled with the alarm 5HOD\ 3,&.83. If no protection function of the device has picked up any longer, 5HOD\ 3,&.83 disappears (message: *RLQJ). The general pickup is the precondition for a number of internal and external sequence functions. Among these functions, which are controlled by the general pickup, are: Start of a fault log: All fault messages are entered into the fault log from the beginning of the general pickup to the drop-off. Initialization of the fault recording: The recording and availability of fault wave form can additionally be made subject to the presence of a trip command. Creation of spontaneous messages: Certain fault messages can be displayed as so called spontaneous messages (see Spontaneous Alarms below). This display can additionally be made subject to the presence of a trip command. Start of the action time of the auto-reclosure (if available and used). External functions can be controlled via an output contact. Examples are: Reclosure devices, Further additional devices or similar. Spontaneous Alarms Spontaneous alarms are alarms that are displayed automatically after a general pickup of the device or after the trip command of the device. In the case of 7SD610 they are the following: 5HOD\ 3,&.83: pickup of the differential protection with phase indication; 38 7LPH: 75,3 7LPH: the operating time from the general pickup to the dropoff of the device, the time is given in ms; the operating time from the general pickup to the first trip command of the device, the time is given in ms.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-131

Functions

6.13.4 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device


Three-pole Tripping Three-pole tripping is the usual action of the device in the event of a fault, single-pole tripping, however, is also possible depending on the version ordered (see below). If a single-pole tripping is generally not possible or not desired, the output function 5HOD\ 75,3 / is used for the output of commands to the circuit-breaker. In these cases the following subtitle on Single-pole Tripping is not relevant. Single-pole tripping is advisable only for overhead lines on which auto-reclosures are to be executed and which are equipped with circuit breakers suitable for single-pole tripping on both ends. In this case the faulty phase can be tripped single-pole with subsequent reclosure in the event of a single-phase fault; in the event of two-phase or three-phase faults with or without ground fault a three-pole tripping is effected in general. Preconditions for pole-segregated tripping concerning the device are, that the device is suitable for pole-segregated tripping (according to the order specification), that the tripping protection function is suitable for pole-segregated tripping (for example, not for overload protection), that the binary input !S 7ULS 3HUP is allocated and activated or that the internal auto-reclosure function is ready for auto-reclosure after single-pole tripping. In all other cases tripping will be three-pole. The binary input !S 7ULS 3HUP is the logic inversion of a three-pole coupling and is activated by an external auto-reclosure device as long as this is ready for a single-pole auto-reclosure cycle. With the 7SD610, three-pole coupling of the trip command is also possible if tripping only concerns one phase but more than one phase has picked up. This can be the case e.g. if two short-circuits occur in two different places of which only one is within the range of the differential protection zone. This is achieved with the help of setting parameter SROH FRXSOLQJ which can be set to ZLWK 3LFNXS (each multiphase pickup leads to three-pole tripping) or ZLWK 7ULS (three-pole tripping in the event of a multi-pole trip command). The tripping logic combines the trip signals of all protection functions. Trip commands are output per phase if the protection functions allow single-pole tripping. The relevant alarms are 5HOD\ 75,3 /, 5HOD\ 75,3 / and 5HOD\ 75,3 /. These alarms can be allocated to LEDs or output relays. In the event of a three-pole tripping all three messages are displayed. If single-pole tripping is possible, the protection functions can also output a group signal for the local displaying of alarms and for the transmission of the alarms to a PC or a central control system, e.g. 'LII 75,3 S /, 'LII 75,3 S /, 'LII 75,3 S / for single-pole tripping by the differential protection and 'LII 75,3 / for three-pole tripping. Only one of these alarms is displayed at a time. The alarms are also used for the commands to the circuit breaker.

Single-pole Tripping

6-132

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Function Control

Single-pole Tripping after a Two-phase Fault

The single-pole tripping after a two-phase fault is a special case. If a phase-to-phase fault clear of ground occurs in a grounded system, the fault may be cleared by a singlepole auto-reclosure, since this is sufficient to interrupt the short-circuit current loop. The phase selected for this must be the same on both line ends and should be the same everywhere else within the system. The setting parameter 7ULSSK)OW allows to select whether this tripping should be SROH OHDGLQJ , i.e. single-pole tripping of the leading phase, or SROH ODJJLQJ , i.e. single-pole tripping of the lagging phase. Standard setting is SROH, i.e. threepole tripping after two-phase faults (default setting). Table 6-6 shows a summary of the conditions for single-pole or three-pole tripping.

Table 6-6

Single- and three-pole tripping depending on the type of fault Parameter Output signals for tripping 5HOD\ 75,3 S/ X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 5HOD\ 75,3 S/ 5HOD\ 75,3 S/ 5HOD\ 75,3 SK

Type of fault (of protection functions) L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L1 L1 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L1 L1 L1 L1 L2 L2 L1 L1 L1 L2 L2 L3 L3 L3 L3 E E L3 L3 L3 L3 L3 L3 E E E E E E

7ULSSK)OW
(any) (any) (any) (any) (any) (any) SROH SROH OHDGLQJ SROH ODJJLQJ SROH SROH OHDGLQJ SROH ODJJLQJ SROH SROH OHDGLQJ SROH ODJJLQJ (any) (any) (any) (any) (any) (any)

General tripping

All tripping signals of the protection functions are ORd and lead to the alarm 5HOD\ 75,3. This can be allocated to an LED or output relay.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-133

Functions

Terminating the Trip Command

Once a trip command is output, it is stored separately for each pole (each of the three poles after three-pole tripping, see Figure 6-65). At the same time a minimum trip command duration 70LQ 75,3 &0' is started to ensure that the command is sent to the circuit breaker long enough if the tripping protection function should drop off too quickly. The trip commands cannot be terminated until the last protection function has dropped off (no function activated) AND the minimum trip command time is over. Another condition for terminating the trip command is that the circuit breaker is open (with single-pole tripping the relevant circuit breaker pole). The current must have fallen below the value that corresponds to the setting value 3ROH2SHQ&XUUHQW (address $, refer to Circuit Breaker Status in Section 6.1.3, page 6-17) plus 10 % of the fault current.

AI$&
from protection fucntions Trip L1 CB open L1 & S R Q Dev. Trip L1

AI$'
Trip L2 CB open L2 & S R Q Dev. Trip L2

AI$(
Trip L3 CB open L3 & S R Q Dev. Trip L3

&

UHvUSDQ8H9 !#
1
T

Figure 6-65Storage and termination of the trip command

Reclosure Interlocking

When tripping the circuit breaker with a protection function the manual reclosure must often be blocked until the cause for the protection function operation is found. 7SD610 therefore provides the integrated reclosure interlocking function. The interlocking state (/2&.287) is realized by a RS flipflop which is protected against auxiliary voltage failure (see Figure 6-66). The RS flipflop is set via a binary input !/RFNRXW 6(7 (FNo ). With the output alarm /2&.287 (FNo ), if interconnected correspondingly, a reclosure of the circuit breaker (e.g. for automatic reclosure, manual close signal, synchronization, closing via control) can be blocked. Only once the cause for the protection operation is known, should the interlocking be reset by a manual reset via binary input !/RFNRXW 5(6(7 (FNo ).
AI"'$ AI$"
S R Q LOCKOUT

>Lockout Set >Lockout Reset

AI"'%

Figure 6-66

Reclosure lockout

6-134

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Function Control

Conditions which cause reclosure interlocking and control commands which have to be interlocked can be set individually. The two inputs and the output can be wired via the correspondingly allocated binary inputs and outputs or be linked via user-defined logic functions (CFC). If, for example, each trip by the protection function has to cause a reclosing lock-out, then combine the tripping command 5HOD\ 75,3 (FNo ) with the binary input !/RFNRXW 6(7 (FNo ). If automatic reclosure is applied, only the final trip of the protection function should establish reclosing lock-out. Then combine the output alarm )LQDO 7ULS (FNo ) with the interlocking input !/RFNRXW 6(7 (FNo ), so that the interlocking function is not established when an automatic reclosure is still expected to come. In the most simple case the output alarm /2&.287 (FNo ) can be allocated to the output which trips the circuit breaker without creating further links. Then the tripping command is maintained until the interlock is reset via the binary reset input. Naturally it has to be ensured in advance that the close coil at the circuit breaker as is usually done is locked as long as a tripping command is maintained. The output alarm /2&.287 can also be applied to interlock certain closing commands (externally or via CFC), e.g. by combining the output alarm with the binary input !&ORVH&PG%OR (FNo ) or by connecting the inverted alarm with the bay interlocking of the branch. The reset input !/RFNRXW 5(6(7 (FNo ) resets the interlocking state. This input is initiated by an external device which is protected against unauthorized or unintentional operation. The interlocking state can also be controlled by internal sources, e.g. a function key, operation of the device or using DIGSI 4 on a PC. For each case please make sure the corresponding logical combinations, security measures, etc. are taken into account for the routing of the binary inputs and outputs (Section 5.2) and are also considered for the setting of user-defined logic functions (Section 5.3), if necessary. No Trip no Flag The storage of alarms allocated to local LEDs and the availability of spontaneous alarms can be made dependent on the device sending a trip command. Fault event information is then not output when one or more protection functions have picked up due to a fault but no tripping occurred because the fault was removed by another device (e.g. on a different line). The information is thus limited to faults on the protected line no trip no flag. Figure 6-67 shows the logic diagram of this function.

%  )OW'LVS/('/&' vuQvpx
1

vuUv

Device TRIP Device dropoff

&

Reset LED and spontaneous alarms

Figure 6-67

Logic diagram of the notripnoflag function (command-dependent alarms)

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-135

Functions

CB Operation Statistics

The number of trips caused by the device 7SD610 is counted. If the device is to be used for single-pole tripping, this number is counted for each CB pole individually. Furthermore, the current switched for each pole is acquired, output as an alarm and summated in a memory. If the device is equipped with an integrated auto-reclosure function, the automatic closing commands are counted, separately for reclosure after single-pole trip, after three-pole trip, as well as separately for the first reclosure cycle and further reclosure cycles. The levels of these counted and metered values are buffered against auxiliary voltage failure. They can be set to zero or to any other initial value. For further information see Section 7.1.2.

6.13.5 Circuit Breaker Test


The differential protection 7SD610 allows an easy check of the trip circuits and the circuit breakers. The test programs according to Table 6-7 are available for the test. Of course, singlepole tests are available only if the device is suitable for single-pole tripping. The output alarms mentioned must be allocated to the relevant command relays (according to Section 5.2.4) that are used for controlling the circuit breaker coils. The test is started via the operation panel on the front of the device or via the PC with DIGSI 4. To know how to proceed refer to Section 7.3. Figure 6-68 shows the chronological sequence of one TRIPCLOSE test cycle. The set times are those stated in Section 6.1.1 for Trip Command Duration and Circuit Breaker Test. Where the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts transmit the status of the circuit breaker or of its poles to the device via binary inputs, the test cycle can only be initiated if the circuit breaker is closed. The information on the circuit breaker status during the circuit breaker test is not automatically adopted by the position logic according to 6.13.2 (Figure 6-64). It is rather that for the circuit breaker test special binary inputs are provided for the status feedbacks that are to be taken into consideration when allocating the binary inputs, as described in Section 6.13.2. (Page 6-129). The device displays the states of the test sequence with the relevant alarms.

6-136

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Function Control

Table 6-7 Consec. no. 1 2 3 4 L1

Circuit breaker test programs Test programs Circuit breaker Output alarms (FNo)

Single-pole OFF/ON cycle phase Single-pole OFF/ON cycle phase


L2 LS 1

CB1-TESTtrip L1 (7325) CB1-TESTtrip L2 (7326) CB1-TESTtrip L3 (7327) CB1-TESTtrip 123 (7328) CB1-TEST close (7329)

Single-pole OFF/ON cycle phase


L3

Three-pole OFF/ON cycle Associated close command

TRIP CLOSE
UHvUSDQ8H9 UU87rqrhq !# !#!
Figure 6-68 TRIPCLOSE test cycle

UHh8GPT@8H9 !#

6.13.6 Setting the function parameters


The parameters for the tripping logic of the entire device and the circuit breaker test have already been set in Sections 6.1.3 and 6.1.1. Address  )OW'LVS/('/&' still decides whether the alarms that are allocated to local LEDs and the spontaneous alarms that appear on the local display after a fault should be stored on every pickup of a protection function ('LVSOD\ 7DUJHWV RQ HYHU\ SLFNXS) or whether they should be stored only when a tripping command is given ('LVSOD\ 7DUJHWV RQ 75,3 RQO\).

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-137

Functions

6.13.7 Setting Overview


Fault Display
Addr. 610 Setting Title FltDisp.LED/LCD Setting Options Default Setting Comments Fault Display on LED / LCD

Display Targets on every Pickup Display Targets on every Display Targets on TRIP only Pickup

6.13.8 Information Overview


Circuit Breaker Test
F.No. 7325 7326 7327 7328 7329 7345 7346 7347 7348 7349 7350 Alarm CB1-TESTtrip L1 CB1-TESTtrip L2 CB1-TESTtrip L3 CB1-TESTtrip123 CB1-TEST close CB-TEST running CB-TSTstop FLT. CB-TSTstop OPEN CB-TSTstop NOTr CB-TSTstop CLOS CB-TST .OK. CB1tst L1 CB1tst L2 CB1tst L3 CB1tst 123 Comments CB1-TEST TRIP command - Only L1 CB1-TEST TRIP command - Only L2 CB1-TEST TRIP command - Only L3 CB1-TEST TRIP command L123 CB1-TEST CLOSE command CB-TEST is in progress CB-TEST canceled due to Power Sys. Fault CB-TEST canceled due to CB already OPEN CB-TEST canceled due to CB was NOT READY CB-TEST canceled due to CB stayed CLOSED CB-TEST was succesful CB1-TEST trip/close - Only L1 CB1-TEST trip/close - Only L2 CB1-TEST trip/close - Only L3 CB1-TEST trip/close Phases L123

6-138

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Commissioning Tools

6.14

Commissioning Tools

6.14.1 Function Description


The device is provided with a large commissioning and monitoring tool that checks the communication and the whole differential protection system. Using a personal computer in conjunction with a web-browser this tool enables the user to chart the state of the system and the communication of the differential protection precisely. The necessary operator software is integrated in the device; online-help can be found on the DIGSI 4CD and is also available in the Internet. To ensure a proper communication between the device and the PC browser the transmission speed must be equal for both. Furthermore, the user must set an IP-address so that the browser can identify the device. Thanks to the IBS-tool the user is able to operate the device with the PC. On the PCscreen the front panel of the device is simulated, a function that can also be deactivated.

6.14.2 Setting Parameters


The parameters of the IBS-tool can be set separately for the front operating interface and the rear service interface. The addresses corresponding to the interface that enable the communication with the PC and the IBS-tool are the most relevant ones. Addresses  to  are to configure the front interface. The 12-digit IP-address is formatted as follows: ***.***.***.***. There is a 3-digit block in each of the following setting addresses:  ,3$ $[[[ ,  ,3% [%[[ ,  ,3& [[&[ and  ,3' [[[' . The address  180 /2&. determines if the differential protection device should be operated with the IBStool from the PC. When setting <HV, the devices cannot be operated by the simulation of the PC. This is the normal state during operation. Once this address is set to 1R during commissioning, all device parameters can be changed to correct, for example, false or inconsistent settings. In address  /&31&3 set if your PC-interface supports LCP (Link Control Protocol) and NCP (Network Control Protocol). To make possible the long-distance data transmission for a point-to-point connection the setting must be <HV (default setting). When using a star coupler only one device (master-device) requires the setting <HV, the other device requires 1R. Addresses  ,3$ $[[[ ,  ,3% [%[[ ,  ,3& [[&[ and  ,3' [[[' ,  180 /2&. and  /&31&3 are to configure the rear interface.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-139

Functions

6.14.3 Setting Overview


Addr. 4401 4402 4403 4404 4405 4406 4411 4412 4413 4414 4415 4416 Setting Title IP-A (A.x.x.x) IP-B (x.B.x.x) IP-C (x.x.C.x) IP-D (x.x.x.D) NUM LOCK LCP/NCP IP-A (A.x.x.x) IP-B (x.B.x.x) IP-C (x.x.C.x) IP-D (x.x.x.D) NUM LOCK LCP/NCP Setting Options 0..255 0..255 0..255 0..255 YES NO NO YES 0..255 0..255 0..255 0..255 YES NO NO YES Default Setting 141 142 255 150 YES YES 141 142 255 160 YES YES Comments IP-address .xxx.xxx.xxx(Position 1-3) IP-address xxx..xxx.xxx(Position 4-6) IP-address xxx.xxx..xxx(Position 7-9) IP-address xxx.xxx.xxx.(Pos. 10-12) Num Lock Front interface supports LCP/NCP mode IP-address .xxx.xxx.xxx(Position 1-3) IP-address xxx..xxx.xxx(Position 4-6) IP-address xxx.xxx..xxx(Position 7-9) IP-address xxx.xxx.xxx.(Pos. 10-12) Num Lock Service interface supports LCP/NCP mode

6-140

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Ancillary Functions

6.15

Ancillary Functions
The auxiliary functions of the 7SD610 relay include: processing of messages, processing of operational measured values, storage of fault record data.

6.15.1 Processing of Messages


For the detailed fault analysis, the information regarding the reaction of the protection device and the measured values following a system fault are of interest. For this purpose, the device provides information processing which operates in a threefold manner: Indicators (LEDs) and Binary Outputs (Output Relays) Important events and states are indicated with optical indicators (LED) on the front plate. The device furthermore has output relays for remote indication. Most of the signals and indications can be marshalled, i.e. routing can be changed from the presetting with delivery. In Section 5.2 the state of the delivered relay (presetting) and marshalling facilities are extensively discussed. The output relays and the LEDs may be operated in a latched or unlatched mode (each may be individually set). The latched state is saved against loss of auxiliary supply. It is reset: locally by operation of the key LED reset on the front of the device, from remote via a binary input, via one of the serial interfaces, automatically on detection of a new fault. Condition messages should not be latched. Also, they cannot be reset until the criterion to be reported has reset. This applies to e.g. messages from monitoring functions, or similar. A green LED indicates that the device is in service (RUN); it can not be reset. It extinguishes if the self-monitoring of the microprocessor recognizes a fault or if the auxiliary supply fails. In the event that the auxiliary supply is available while there is an internal device failure, the red LED (ERROR) is illuminated and the device is blocked. Information on the Integrated Display (LCD) or to a Personal Computer Events and states can be obtained from the LCD on the front plate of the device. A personal computer can be connected to the front interface or the service interface for retrieval of the information. In the quiescent state, i.e. as long as no system fault is present, the LCD can display selectable operational information (overview of the operational measured values). In

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-141

Functions

the event of a system fault, information regarding the fault, the so-called spontaneous messages, are displayed instead. The quiescent state information is displayed again once the fault messages have been acknowledged. The acknowledgement is identical to the resetting of the LEDs (see above). The device in addition has several event buffers for operational messages, switching statistics, etc., which are saved against loss of auxiliary supply by means of a battery buffer. These messages can be displayed on the LCD at any time by selection via the keypad or transferred to a personal computer via the serial service or PC interface. The retrieval of events/alarms during operation is extensively described in Sub-section 7.1.1. Following a system fault, it is possible to for example retrieve important information regarding its progress, such as pick-up and trip. The start of the fault is time stamped with the absolute time of the internal system clock. The progress of the disturbance is output with a relative time referred to the instant of fault detection (first pickup of a protection function), so that the duration of the fault until tripping and up to reset of the trip command can be ascertained. The resolution of the time information is 1 ms. With a PC and the protection data processing program DIGSI 4 it is also possible to retrieve and display the events with the convenience of visualisation on a monitor and a menu-guided dialogue. The data may be printed or stored for evaluation at a later time and place. The protection device stores the messages of the last eight system faults; in the event of a ninth fault, the oldest is erased. A system fault starts with the recognition of the fault by the fault detection, i.e. first pickup of any protection function, and ends with the reset of the fault detection, i.e. dropout of the last protection function, or after the expiry of the auto-reclose reclaim time, so that several unsuccessful auto-reclose cycles are also stored cohesively. Accordingly a system fault may contain several individual fault events (from fault detection up to reset of fault detection). Information to a Control Centre If the device has a serial system interface, stored information may additionally be transferred via this interface to a centralised control and storage device. Several communication protocols are available for the transfer of this information.

6.15.2 Measurement during Operation


Displaying of Measured Values A number of measured values and the values derived from these are available for a query in site or for data transmission (see Table 6-8). Precondition for a correct display of primary and percentage values is the complete and correct entry of the nominal values of the instrument transformers and the power equipment as well as the transformation ratio of the current and voltage transformers in the ground paths according to Section 6.1.1. Depending on the version ordered, the connection of the device, and the configured protection functions, only a part of the measured operating values listed in Table 6-8 is available. The residual voltage 3U0 is the e-n-voltage multiplied by 3 if Uen is connected or calculated from the phase-to-ground-voltages 3U0 = UL1 + UL2 + UL3. 6-142

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Ancillary Functions

For this the three voltage inputs phase-to-ground must be connected. Overload measured values can appear only if the overload protection was configured ([LVW.

Table 6-8

Operational measured values of the local device Measured values primary A A A kV kV kV kV MVA, MW, MVAR (abs) Hz % % secondary A A A V V V V (abs) Hz

IL1, IL2, IL3 3I0 (IL1IL2), (IL2IL3), (IL3IL1) I1, I2 UL1L2, UL2L3, UL3L1 UL1E, UL2E, UL3E 3U0 (UL1UL2), (UL2 UL3), (UL3UL1) (UL1IL1), (UL2IL2), (UL3IL3) U1, U2 S, P, Q cos f L1/TRIP, L2/TRIP, L3/TRIP /TRIP

Phase currents Ground current (residual current) Phase angle of the phase currents towards each other Positive and negative sequence component currents Phase-to-phase voltages Phase-to-ground voltages Displacement voltage (Residual voltage) Phase angle of the phase voltages towards each other Phase angle of the phase voltages towards the phase currents Positive and negative sequence component voltages Apparent, active and reactive power Power factor Frequency

Thermal value of each phase, referred to the tripping value Thermal resultant value, referring to the tripping value, calculated according to the parameterized method

The operational measured values are also calculated in the event of a running fault and approximately every 0.2 s. Differential Protection Values The differential and stabilization values of the differential protection are listed in Table 6-9.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-143

Functions

Table 6-9

Measured values of the differential protection Measured values % referring to

IDiffL1, IDiffL2, IDiffL3 IStabL1, IStabL2, IStabL3


1)

Calculated differential currents of the three phases

Rated operating current 1)

Calculated restraint currents Rated operating current 1) of the three phases for lines according to address # (see Section 6.1.3), for transformers calculated from address % (see Section 6.1.3) IN = SN /(3UN)

Remote Measured Values

During communication, the data of the opposite end of the protected object can also be read out. The currents and voltages involved as well as phase shifts between the local and transfer measured quantities can be displayed. This is especially helpful for checking the correct and coherent phase allocation at both line ends and for the verification of the vector group if a power transformer is within the protected zone. Furthermore, the device address of the other device is transmitted so that all important data of both ends are available in the substation. All possible data are listed in Table 6-10.

Table 6-10

Operational measured values transmitted from the other end and compared with the local values Data % referring to (abs)

Device ADR IL1, IL2, IL3 remote IL1, IL2, IL3 local (IL1), (IL2), (IL3) UL1, UL2, UL3 remote UL1, UL2, UL3 local

Device address of the remote device Phase currents of the remote device Phase currents of the local device Phase angles between the remote and the local phase currents Voltages of the remote device Voltages of the local device

Rated operat. current 1) Rated operat. current 1)

Rated operat. voltage/3 2) Rated operat. voltage/3 2)

(UL1), (UL2), (UL3) Phase angles between the remote and the local voltages
1

) for lines according to address # (see Section 6.1.3), % (see Section 6.1.3) IN = SN /(3UN) for transformers calculated from address 2 ) according to address " (see Section 6.1.3)

Transmission Statistic

In 7SD610 the protection communication is registered in statistics. The delay times of the information between the devices via interfaces (run and return) are measured steadily. The values are kept stored in the Statistic folder. The availability of the transmission media is also specified. The availability is indicated in %/min and %/h. This allows the user to assess the transmission quality.

6-144

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Ancillary Functions

IBS-tool

The IBS-tool enables the user to chart on a PC-screen the currents, voltages (if connected to the system) and their phase angles for both devices connected to the differential protection system. In addition to phasor diagrams showing the measured values also numerical values, frequency and device addresses are indicated. For more details refer to Section 7.1.3.2.

6.15.3 Fault Recording


The differential protection 7SD610 is equipped with a fault recording function. The instantaneous values of the measured quantities iL1, iL2, iL3, 3 i0, uL1, uL2, uL3, 3 u0 and IdiffL1, IdiffL2, IdiffL3, IstabL1, IstabL2, IstabL3 (voltages depending on the connection) are sampled at 1 ms intervals (for a frequency of 50 Hz) and stored in a cyclic buffer (20 samples per period). During a system fault these data are stored over a time span that can be set (5 s at the longest for each fault record). Up to 8 faults can be stored. The total capacity of the fault record memory is approx. 15 s. The fault recording buffer is updated when a new fault occurs, so that acknowledging is not necessary. Fault recording can be initiated, additionally to the protection pickup, via the integrated operator panel, the serial operator interface and the serial service interface. For the differential protection system of a protected object both fault records of both ends are synchronized by time management. This ensures that all fault records operate with exactly the same time basis. Therefore equal measured values are coincident at both ends. The data can be retrieved via the serial interfaces by means of a personal computer and evaluated with the protection data processing program DIGSI 4 and the graphic analysis software DIGRA 4. The latter graphically represents the data recorded during the system fault and calculates additional information such as the impedance or RMS values from the measured values. A selection may be made as to whether the currents and voltages are represented as primary or secondary values. Binary signal traces (marks) of particular events e.g. fault detection, tripping are also represented. If the device has a serial system interface, the fault recording data can be passed on to a central device via this interface. The evaluation of the data is done by applicable programs in the central device. Currents and voltages are referred to their maximum values, scaled to their rated values and prepared for graphic representation. In addition, internal events are recorded as binary traces (marks), e.g. fault detection, tripping. In the event of transfer to a central device, the request for data transfer can be executed automatically and can be selected to take place after each fault detection by the protection, or only after a trip.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-145

Functions

6.15.4 Setting the Function Parameters


Data Storage for Fault Recording The configuration of the fault recording memory is done in the sub-menu 2VFLOOR JUDSKLF )DXOW 5HFRUGLQJV of the menu 6HWWLQJV. A distinction is made between the reference instant and the storage criterion of the fault recording (address  :$9()250 &$3785(). Normally the reference instant is the occurrence of device fault detection, i.e. the pickup of any protection function is allocated with the time stamp 0. The pickup can also be the storage criterion (6DYH Z 3LFNXS) or the device trip command (6DYH Z 75,3) can be the storage criterion. The device trip command can also be used as reference time (6WDUW Z 75,3); in this case it is also the storage criterion. A fault event starts with the fault detection of any protection function and ends with the reset of the last fault detection. Usually this is also the extent of a fault recording (address  6&23( 2) :$9()250 '$7$ = )DXOW HYHQW). If automatic reclosure is implemented, the entire system disturbance possibly with several reclose attempts up to the ultimate fault clearance can be stored (address  6&23( 2) :$9( )250 '$7$ = 3RZHU 6\VWHP IDXOW). This facilitates the representation of the entire system fault history, but also consumes storage capacity during the auto-reclosure dead time(s). The actual storage time encompasses the pre-trigger time 35( 75,* 7,0( (address ) ahead of the reference instant, the normal recording time and the post-fault time 3267 5(& 7,0( (address ) after the storage criterion has reset. The maximum permissible storage period per fault recording 0$; /(1*7+ is set in address . A maximum recording time of 5 s is available per fault recording. In total up to 8 fault records with a total recording time of max. 15 s can be stored. The fault recording can also be triggered via a binary input, via the keypad on the front of the device or with a PC via the operation or service interface. The storage is then dynamically triggered. The length of the fault recording is set in address  %LQ,Q &$377,0( (maximum length however is 0$; /(1*7+, address  . The preand post-fault times are additive. If the time for the binary input is set to , the duration of the storage is as long as the binary input is initiated (static), the maximum length however still is 0$; /(1*7+ (address ).

6-146

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Ancillary Functions

6.15.5 Setting Overview


Addr. 402A Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Save with Pickup Comments Waveform Capture

WAVEFORMTRIGGER Save with Pickup Save with TRIP Start with TRIP WAVEFORM DATA MAX. LENGTH PRE. TRIG. TIME POST REC. TIME BinIn CAPT.TIME Fault event Power System fault 0.30..5.00 sec 0.05..0.50 sec 0.05..0.50 sec 0.10..5.00 sec;

403A 410 411 412 415

Fault event 1.00 sec 0.10 sec 0.10 sec 0.50 sec

Scope of Waveform Data Max. length of a Waveform Capture Record Captured Waveform Prior to Trigger Captured Waveform after Event Capture Time via Binary Input

6.15.6 Information Overview


F.No. 4 203 Alarm >Trig.Wave.Cap. Wave. deleted FltRecSta >Trigger Waveform Capture Waveform data deleted Fault Recording Start Comments

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-147

Functions

6.16
General

Processing of Commands
In addition to the protective functions described so far, a control command process is integrated in the SIPROTEC 7SD610 to coordinate the operation of circuit breakers and other equipment in the power system. Control commands can originate from four command sources: Local operation using the keypad on the local user interface of the device Local or remote operation using DIGSI 4, Remote operation via system interface IEC (e.g. SICAM), Automatic functions (e.g. using a binary input). The number of switchgear devices that can be controlled is basically limited by the number of available and required binary inputs and outputs. For the output of control commands it has be ensured that all the required binary inputs and outputs are configured and provided with the correct properties (see also Subsection 5.2.4 under Binary Outputs for Switching Devices). If specific interlocking conditions are needed for the execution of commands, the user can program the device with bay interlocking by means of the user-defined logic functions (CFC) (see Section 5.3). The Control of Switchgear is described in Section 7.4.

6.16.1 Types of Commands


Two types of commands can be issued with this device: Control commands, Internal / pseudo commands. Control Commands These commands operate binary outputs and change the power system status: Commands for the operation of circuit breakers (asynchronous) as well as commands for the control of isolators and earth switches, Step commands, e.g. for raising and lowering transformer taps, Tap change commands with configurable time settings (Petersen coils). Internal / Pseudo Commands These commands do not directly operate binary outputs. They serve to initiate internal functions, simulate or acknowledge changes of state. Manual entry execution to change the feedback indication of plant such as the status and switching condition, for example in the case of the physical connection to the auxiliary contacts is not available. A manual entry execution is captured and can be displayed accordingly.

6-148

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Processing of Commands
Additionally, tagging commands can be issued to establish internal settings, such as switching authority (remote / local), parameter set changeover, data transmission inhibit and metering counter reset or initialization. Acknowledgment and resetting commands for setting and resetting internal buffers. Status information commands for setting / deactivating the information status for the information value of an object: Controlling activation of binary input status, Blocking binary outputs.

6.16.2 Steps in the Command Sequence


Safety mechanisms in the command sequence ensure that a command can only be released after a thorough check of preset criteria has been successfully concluded. Additionally, user-defined interlocking conditions can be configured separately for each device. The actual execution of the command is also monitored afterwards. The entire sequence of a command is described briefly in the following: Check Sequence Command entry (e.g. using the keypad on the local user interface of the device) Check password access rights; Check switching mode (interlocking activated/deactivated) selection of deactivated interlocking status. User configurable interlocking checks that can be selected for each command Switching authority (local, remote), Switching direction control (target state = present state), Zone controlled/bay interlocking (logic using CFC), System interlocking (centrally via SICAM), Double operation (interlocking against parallel switching operation), Protection blocking (blocking of switching operations by protective functions). Fixed commands Timeout monitoring (time between command initiation and the beginning of the execution can be controlled), Configuration in process (if setting modification is in process, commands are rejected or delayed), Equipment not present at output (if controllable equipment is not assigned to a binary output, then the command is denied), Output block (if an output block has been programmed for the circuit breaker, and is active at the moment the command is processed, then the command is denied), Component hardware malfunction,

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-149

Functions
Command in progress (only one command can be processed at a time for each circuit breaker or switch), 1- out of -n-check (for schemes with multiple assignments, such as common ground, it is checked whether a command has already been initiated for the affected output relay). Monitoring the Command Execution Interruption of a command because of a cancel command, Running time monitor (feedback message monitoring time).

6.16.3 Interlocking
Interlocking is executed by the user-defined logic (CFC). The interlocking checks of a SICAM/SIPROTEC-system are classified into: System interlocking checked by a central control system (for a busbar) Zone controlled/bay interlocking checked in the bay device (for the feeder) System interlocking relies on the system data base in the central control system. Zone controlled/bay interlocking relies on the status of the circuit breaker and other switches that are connected to the relay. The extent of the interlocking checks is determined by the configuration and interlocking logic of the relay. Switchgear which is subject to system interlocking in the central control system is marked with a parameter (in the routing matrix). For all commands the user can select the operation mode with interlocking (normal mode) or without interlocking (test mode): for local commands by reprogramming the settings with password check, for automatic commands via command processing with CFC, for local / remote commands by an additional interlocking command via Profibus.

6.16.3.1 Interlocked/Non-Interlocked Switching The command checks that can be selected for the SIPROTEC-relays are also referred to as standard interlocking. These checks can be activated (interlocked) or deactivated (non interlocked) via DIGSI 4. Deactivated interlock switching means the configured interlocking conditions are not checked in the relay. Interlocked switching means that all configured interlocking conditions are checked in the command check. If a condition could not be fulfilled, the command will be rejected by a message with a minus added to it (e.g. CO-), immediately followed by an oper-

6-150

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Processing of Commands

ation response information. Table 6-11 shows some types of commands and messages. For the device the messages designated with *) are displayed in the event logs, for DIGSI 4 they appear in spontaneous messages.

Table 6-11

Types of command and messages


Type of command Abbrev. CO MT IB OB CA Message CO+/ MT+/ IB+/ *) OB+/ *) CA+/

Control issued Manual tagging (positive / negative) Input blocking Output blocking Control abortion

The plus appearing in the message is a confirmation of the command execution: the command execution was as expected, in other words positive. The minus is a negative confirmation, the command was rejected. Figure 6-69 shows the messages relating to command execution and operation response information for a successful operation of the circuit breaker. The check of interlocking can be programmed separately for all switching devices and tags that were set with a tagging command. Other internal commands such as manual entry or abort are not checked, i.e. carried out independent of the interlocking.

(9(17 /2*    4 &2 FORVH   4 )% FORVH
Figure 6-69 Example of a message when closing the circuit breaker Q0

Standard Interlocking

The standard interlocking includes the checks for each device which were set during the configuration of inputs and outputs, see Subsection 5.2.4 under Binary Outputs for Switching Devices. An overview for processing the interlocking conditions in the relay is shown by Figure 6-70.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-151

Functions

Device with Source of Command = LOCAL SAS REMOTE ), DIGSI AUTO Switching Authority (Local/Remote)
1

Switching Authority On/Off

Switching Mode

&
Local

Local

&

&
Remote

&

&
Switching Authority DIGSI DIGSI

DIGSI

or
&
Remote

Switching Mode Local

Non-Interlocked

&
Switching Mode Remote

or

SCHEDULED=ACT .y/n

Interlocked

&

or

feedback Indication On/Off Protection Blocking 52 Close 52 Open

SCHEDULED=ACT.y/n System Interlock.*)y/n Field Interlocking y/n Protection Blockingy/n Double Oper. Blocky/n SW. Auth. LOCA> y/n Sw. Auth. REMOTEy/n

or

Command Output to Relay

Event Condition

*) Starting With Version 4.2

1)

Source REMOTE also includes SAS.

LOCALCommand via substation controller. REMOTECommand via telecontrol system to substation controller and from substation controller to device.
Figure 6-70

Standard Interlocking Arrangements

The display shows the configured interlocking reasons. The are marked by letters explained in the following table 6-12.

Table 6-12

Interlocking commands Interlocking commands Abbrev. L S Message L S

Control authorization System interlock

6-152

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Processing of Commands

Interlocking commands Zone controlled Target state = present state (check switch position) Block by protection

Abbrev. Z P B

Message Z P B

Figure 6-71 shows all interlocking conditions (which usually appear in the display of the device) for three switchgear items with the relevant abbreviations explained in table 6-12. All parameterized interlocking conditions are indicated (see Figure 6-71).

,QWHUORFNLQJ  

4 &ORVH2SHQ 6 = 3 % 4 &ORVH2SHQ 6 = 3 % 4 &ORVH2SHQ 6 = 3 % Figure 6-71 Example of configured interlocking conditions

Control Logic using CFC

For zone controlled/field interlocking, control logic can be programmed, using the CFC. Via specific release conditions the information released or bay interlocked are available.

6.16.4 Recording and Acknowledgement of Commands


During the processing of the commands, independent of the further message routing and processing, command and process feedback information are sent to the message processing centre. These messages contain message cause indication. The messages are entered in the event list. Acknowledgement of Commands to the Device Front Acknowledgement of Commands to Local/Remote/Digsi All messages which relate to commands that were issued from the device front Command Issued = Local are transformed into a corresponding response and shown in the display of the device. The messages which relate to commands with the origin Command Issued = Local/ Remote/DIGSI must be send independent of the routing (configuration on the serial digital interface) to the initiating point. The acknowledgement of commands is therefore not executed by a response indication as it is done with the local command but by ordinary command and feedback information recording.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

6-153

Functions

Monitoring of Feedback Information

The processing of commands monitors the command execution and timing of feedback information for all commands. At the same time the command is sent, the monitoring time is started (monitoring of the command execution). This time controls whether the device achieves the required final result within the monitoring time. The monitoring time is stopped as soon as the feedback information arrives. If no feedback information arrives, a response Timeout command monitoring time appears and the process is terminated. Commands and information feedback are also recorded in the event list. Normally the execution of a command is terminated as soon as the feedback information (FB+) of the relevant switchgear arrives or, in case of commands without process feedback information, the command output resets. The plus appearing in a feedback information confirms that the command was successful, the command was as expected, in other words positive. The minus is a negative confirmation and means that the command was not fulfilled as expected.

Command Output and Switching Relays

The command types needed for tripping and closing of the switchgear are described in Section 5.2 and Subsection 5.2.1.

6.16.5 Information Overview


F.No. Cntrl Auth ModeLOCAL ModeREMOTE Alarm Control Authority Control mode LOCAL Control mode REMOTE Comments

6-154

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Control During Operation

This chapter describes interaction possibilities with the SIPROTEC 7SD610 device during operation. The information that can be obtained and the procedure for retrieving the data are discussed. Methods of influencing the device functions during operation and controlling the system using the device are covered. Detailed knowledge about the device functions is not required at this point. However, the configuration of the device covered in Chapter 5 especially configuration of the input and output functions is assumed to have already taken place. Please note that the examples shown are general and may differ in wording or details from the device at hand. Also, depending on the model variant, some of the functions discussed below may not be available.

7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4

Read-out of Information Control of Device Functions Circuit Breaker Test Function Control of Switchgear

7-2 7-28 7-41 7-45

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-1

Control During Operation

7.1
General

Read-out of Information
The device provides a great deal of information that can be obtained on-site or from data transfer: Messages, Operating measurement and metered values, Waveform data in oscillographic fault records. This information is individually discussed below. Methods for viewing, retrieving, acknowledging, and storing this information on a PC are also explained.

7.1.1
7.1.1.1

Messages
Output of Messages Messages provide operating information about the power system, the device, and the measurements. Other messages give an overview of important events such a network fault and the operation of device functions. The information provided is useful in checking overall operation of the device during testing and commissioning. Password entry is not required to read messages. The messages generated in the device can be presented in various ways: Display using light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on the front of the device, Operation of output relays connected to external signalling equipment, Display in the LCD on the front of the device, Display on the screen of a PC running the DIGSI 4 program, connected to the operating or service interface of the device, Transfer to a master station using one of the serial system interfaces (if available).

Light-Emitting Diodes

The green light-emitting diode with the label RUN lights continuously during normal operation. The red LED with the label ERROR indicates that the processor system has recognized an internal problem. If this LED lights up, then the device is not operational. Chapter 9 discusses steps to take if a failure occurs in the device. The other LEDs on the front of the device display the messages in accordance with the configuration, as discussed in Chapter 5. The description of each LED illumination should then be indicated on the label strips. If the messages for the LEDs are latched, then the memory can be reset with the LED key LED . This key simultaneously serves as a functional check for all of the LEDs except the RUN and ERROR LEDs. While the key is pressed, all of these LEDs must light.

7-2

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Read-out of Information

LEDs that display a condition should light for as long as the condition is maintained. The LED action is therefore generally not latched. Of course, these LEDs are also included in the function check with the LED key LED . Output Relays Indications can be configured to output relays for external indication (e.g. annunciator, sequence-of-events recorder, RTU, etc), and operate like LEDs. See also Chapter 5 for details. To retrieve messages using the front panel: First press the 0(18 key MENU. The 0$,1 0(18 appears. The first menu item $QQXQ FLDWLRQ) is marked. All menus and message lists begin with a title. The number in the upper right corner of the display indicates presently selected menu entry or message, and, behind the slash, the total number of menu entries or messages (see Figure 7-1, each first line). Press the key to go to the $1181&,$7,21 sub-menu, as shown in Figure 7-1. In this menu the messages can be reached by entering the associated selection number, or by selecting the desired entry using the and keys and moving further with the key. This procedure is described in more detail below.

Front Panel

0$,1 0(18   !$QQXQFLDWLRQ !  0HDVXUHPHQW ! 

$1181&,$7,21   !(YHQW /RJ !  7ULS /RJ ! 

Figure 7-1

Selection of messages on the operator control panel example

PCInterfaces

A personal computer running the DIGSI 4 program can be connected to the operating interface on the front of the device to retrieve the messages. A PC can also be connected to the service interface on the back of the device. This connection typically applies when the PC is hard-wired with several devices, using a data bus (station computer) or modem. Details about the operation of DIGSI 4 are contained in the DIGSI 4 Device Operation handbook, order no. E50417-H1176-C097.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-3

Control During Operation

Figure 7-2

Function selection screen in DIGSI 4 example

If the DIGSI 4 2QOLQH directory is opened with a double-click, the operating functions for the device appear in the navigation window (Figure 7-2). By double clicking on $QQXQFLDWLRQ, the tree structure expands and shows the individual message groups. The groups are described in detail below. System (SCADA) Interface Division of Messages The system interface (if available) is generally hardwired and transfers all device information to a master station via data cable or optical fibre cable. The messages are categorized as follows: Event Log: these are operating messages that can occur during the operation of the device. They include information about the status of device functions, measurement data, system data, and similar information. Trip Log: these are fault messages from the last eight network faults that were processed by the device. Switching statistics; these messages count the trip commands initiated by the device, close commands, values of accumulated circuit currents and interrupted currents. Erasing and setting the messages named above. A complete list of all message and output functions that can be generated by the device, with the associated information number (FNo), can be found in the Appendix. The lists also indicate where each message can be sent. The lists are based on a SIPROTEC 4 device with the maximum complement of functions. If functions are not present in the specific version of the device, or if they are set as 'LVDEOHG in device configuration, then the associated messages cannot appear.

7-4

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Read-out of Information

7.1.1.2

Event Log (Operating Messages) Operating messages contain information that the device generates during operation and about the operation. Up to 200 operating messages are stored in chronological order in the device. New messages are added at the end of the list. If the memory has been exceeded, then the oldest message is overwritten for each new message. Faults in the power system are indicated with 1HWZRUN )DXOW and the present fault number. The fault messages (7ULS /RJ) contain details about the history of faults. This topic is discussed in Subsection 7.1.1.3. All predefined operating messages are listed and explained in a table in Appendix A.7. In a specific case, of course, only the appropriate messages appear in the display. The appendix also shows whether the message is only issued as ON (to indicate an event), or as ON and OFF (to designate the beginning and end of a condition).

From the Device Front

With the device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears. The first menu item ($QQXQFLDWLRQ) is marked. Press the key to enter the $1181&,$7,21 menu (see Figure 7-1). Here, select the menu item (YHQW /RJ (already marked). The (9(17 /2* table appears. If no messages are present, then the text OLVW LV HPSW\ appears. Otherwise important events and changes in conditions are listed in chronological order (see Figure 7-3 as an example). Upon entering the menu, the newest (last) message is displayed at first. The applicable date and time are noted in the display line directly above the message. If the memory for the operating messages is not full, then the end of the entries is indicated by (1'.

(9(17 /2*     5HVHW /(' 21


Figure 7-3

Example of an operating message in the operating field of the device

The [

and
MENU

keys can be used to move up and down in the Event Log. key to return to the 0$,1 0(18.

Press the From PC with DIGSI 4

Click on $QQXQFLDWLRQ. The options appear in the data window (Figure 7-4). Double click on the desired message group in the data window, in this case (YHQW /RJ. A date and time appear in the data window as shown in Figure 7-4. Double click on the date and time and the contents of the message group are displayed in another window.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-5

Control During Operation

Figure 7-4

Selection of operational messages in DIGSI 4 example

Figure 7-5

Example of operational messages in DIGSI 4

7.1.1.3

Trip Log (Fault Messages) The spontaneous messages appear automatically in the display, after a general pickup of the device. The most important data about a fault can be viewed on the device front in the sequence shown in Figure 7-6. The spontaneous messages can be acknowledged by pressing the knowledgement, the default display is shown.
LED

Spontaneous Messages

key. After ac-

7-6

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Read-out of Information

'LII 3LFNXS /( 38 7LPH  PV 75,3 7LPH  PV

Protection function that had picked up first, e.g. differencial protection, with phase information; Elapsed time from pick-up until drop-off; Elapsed time from pick-up until the first trip command of a protection function; differential protection mostly 0

Figure 7-6

Display of spontaneous messages in the display

Retrieved messages

The messages for the last eight network faults can be retrieved. The definition of a network fault is such that the time period from fault detection up to final clearing of the system fault is considered to be one network fault. If auto-reclosure occurs, then the network fault ends after the last reclosing shot, which means after a successful or finalunsuccessful reclosing. Therefore, the entire clearing process, including the reclosing attempt (or all reclosing attempts), occupies only one fault log buffer. Within a network fault, several fault events can occur (from the first pick-up of a protective function to the last drop-out of a protective function). Without auto-reclosing, every fault event is a network fault. Altogether up to 600 indications can be stored. Oldest data are erased for newest data when the buffer is full. All available indications are displayed and explained in the Appendix A.7. In a specific case, of course, only the applicable messages appear on the display.

From the Device Front

With a device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears. The first menu item ($QQXQFLDWLRQ) is marked. Press the key to enter the $1181&,$7,21 sub-menu (see Figure 7-1). Using the key, select the sub-menu item 7ULS /RJ and move to the Trip Log submenu using the key. The 75,3 /2* selection appears. In this sub-menu, the indications for the last 8 network faults can be selected, again using the and keys. See the example in Figure 7-7. If no messages are present for a fault, then entrance is denied and /LVW (PSW\ is displayed. The messages within a fault record are listed in chronological order and numbered, from the oldest to the newest. The inception of a fault is identified with the date and time in hours, minutes, and seconds (resolution to ms). See the example in Figure 7-7. The individual messages that are associated with the fault are tagged with a relative time. At least one complete individual message always appears in the display.

75,3 /2*   !/DVW )DXOW !  !QG /DVW )DXOW !  etc
Figure 7-7

/$67 )$8/7     1HWZRUN )DXOW  21

Example of fault messages in the front display

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-7

Control During Operation

Use the

and

keys to move up and down in the fault messages.

Use the key to move back into the 75,3 /2* level; or press the MENU key to go back to the 0$,1 0(18. From PC with DIGSI 4

Click on $QQXQFLDWLRQ. The options appear in the data window (see Figure 7-2). Double click on the desired message group in the data window, in this case the 7ULS /RJ. A list appears in the data window, as shown in Figure 7-8. By double clicking on an entry in the list view, the associated contents of the network fault is displayed in another window. The entries are chronologically listed with the newest message appearing first.

Figure 7-8

Selection of fault messages in DIGSI 4 example

7-8

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Read-out of Information

Figure 7-9

Example of fault messages in DIGSI 4

7.1.1.4

Saving and Erasing the Messages Normally, erasing the messages is not necessary because the oldest messages are automatically erased when new events are entered, if the memory is full at the time. However, erasure of the stored messages may be useful, for instance, after revision of the plant, so that in the future the memory only contains information about actual events. Erasing the memory takes place separately for each of the message groups.

Note:
When the Trip Log (fault messages) is erased, then the fault records are erased, too, and all corresponding counters are set to zero. If, however, a fault record is erased (cf. Sub-section 7.1.4), the fault messages are unaffected. If erasure is desired, first press the MENU key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears. The first menu item $QQXQFLDWLRQ is marked. Press the Using the key. key to enter the $1181&,$7,21 menu (see Figure 7-1). key, select the item 6HW5HVHW, and switch to the sub-menu using the key, and then press the

From the Device Front

Here, select the message group to be erased using the ENTER key. See Figure 7-10 as an example.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-9

Control During Operation

Password No. 5 (for setting changes) is required at this point. After entering the password and confirming with the ENTER key, the safety question $UH \RX VXUH? appears. The response <(6 is the default (Figure 7-10). Confirm with the ENTER key, if the message group should really be erased. If the message group should not be erased, press the key so that the response 12 is highlighted, and confirm this answer with the ENTER key. Before confirming with the ENTER key, the responses can be toggled between <(6 and 12 using the and keys. Alternatively, the ESC key can be pressed to cancel the erasure procedure.

6(75(6(7   !(YHQW /RJ  !7ULS /RJ  Etc 3: 6HWWLQJV" 
ENTER

Select the associated message group or press the associated number key to select the messages to be erased.

Enter Password No. 5 (for setting change) and confirm with ENTER

$UH \RX VXUH" !<HV 1R


Figure 7-10

Confirm <HV with the ENTER key and complete the erasing of the selected messages, or switch to 1R with the key and cancel the erasure with the ENTER key.

Erasing messages from the front panel

From PC with DIGSI 4

Operating the device from the PC via DIGSI 4 enables the user to save the above described messages on your hard disc before clearing them from the device. Proceed as if reading out the messages. However, instead of opening the information list by making a double-click on the event group, select the option File > Save in the menu of the DIGSI window. Then DIGSI automatically creates a directory for the event group. For more details also refer to the instruction manual of DIGSI 4, ordering no. E50417H1100-C097, Section 9.4. If all event groups required are stored in the PC, they can be deleted from the device - as before described - via the front panel. Naturally all messages stored via DIGSI 4 can be deleted from your hard disc like any other object.

7.1.1.5

General Interrogation

From PC with DIGSI 4

The present condition of a SIPROTEC device can be examined by using DIGSI 4 to view the contents of the General Interrogation annunciation. The messages are found by double-clicking on $QQXQFLDWLRQ (see Figure 7-2), double-clicking on *HQHUDO ,QWHUURJDWLRQ, and double-clicking on the date and time that appear in the right window. All of the messages that are needed for a general interrogation are shown along with the actual values and states.

7-10

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Read-out of Information

7.1.1.6

Spontaneous Messages

From PC with DIGSI 4

The spontaneous messages that can be displayed via DIGSI 4 are refreshed immediately. Find the message groups by clicking on $QQXQFLDWLRQ (Figure 7-2). Double click 6SRQWDQHRXV $QQXQFLDWLRQ in the data window. The date and time appear in the data window. By double clicking on them, the Spontaneous Annunciation window opens, as shown in the following figure. Each entering message appears immediately, without requiring that an update be initiated.

Figure 7-11

Spontaneous annunciation window example

7.1.2

Switching Statistics
The messages in switching statistics are counters for the accumulation of interrupted currents by each of the breaker poles, the number of trips issued by the device to the breaker. The interrupted currents are in primary terms. Switching statistics can be viewed on the LCD of the device, or on a PC running DIGSI 4 and connected to the operating or service interface. A password is not required to read switching statistics; however, a password is required to change or delete the statistics. In 7SD610 the statistics register the data of the protection communication. The transmission time of the information from device to device via protection data interfaces (coming and going) is measured steadily and registered in the folder Statistic. The availability of the means of transmission is also indicated. The availability is indicated in %/min and %/h. This enables the user to assess the transmission quality.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-11

Control During Operation

7.1.2.1

Viewing the Switching Statistics For each trip command initiated by a protective element of the device, the magnitude of interrupted current for each circuit breaker pole is determined and stored. The current magnitudes are added to previously interrupted currents, and the accumulated values are stored.

From the Device Front

With a device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears. The first menu item $QQXQFLDWLRQ is marked. Press the Use the using the key to enter the $1181&,$7,21 sub-menu (see Figure 7-1). key to select the item 6WDWLVWLF, and switch to the list of statistics values key. The 67$7,67,& list appears. See Figure 7-12.

67$7,67,&6   ,/ N$ ,/ N$


Etc. Figure 7-12 Switching statistics viewed from the front display example

From PC with DIGSI 4

Under $QQXQFLDWLRQ (Figure 7-2), the switching statistics can be found by double clicking. Double click on 6WDWLVWLF. The contents of the statistic counters is displayed in another window. See Figure 7-13.

Figure 7-13

List of statistic values in DIGSI 4 example

7-12

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Read-out of Information

7.1.2.2

Resetting and Setting the Switching Statistics The memories and counters for switching statistics are secured against a loss of power supply voltage. The values can, however, be set to zero, or to any desired value within certain setting limits.

From the Device Front

In the 67$7,67,& (see previous sub-section) sub-menu (see previous sub-section), select the value to be set by using the key, and then press the ENTER key. See Figure 7-14 for an example of changing the trip counter. After a password is entered, the cursor blinks and the number value is highlighted in a box. The number can be overwritten using the number keys. If the new value is outside of the allowable range, either above or below, then the maximum or minimum limit value appears at the bottom edge of the screen. Confirm the change with the ENTER key.

67$7,67,&6   ,/ N$ 7ULS &RXQW !

ENTER

7ULS +UV 2SHU&RXQW 0D[

 

2147483648

Figure 7-14

Setting statistics values from the device front example

From PC with DIGSI 4

In the 6WDWLVWLF window (see previous sub-section), mark the value that is to be set. With the right mouse button, open a context menu and select 6HW. See Figure 7-15. After the password for individual settings is entered, the previous value in the window can be overwritten.

Figure 7-15

Setting statistic values in DIGSI 4 example

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-13

Control During Operation

7.1.3

Measured Values
Operating measured values are determined in the background by the processor system. They can be called up at the front of the device, read out via the operating interface using a PC with DIGSI 4, or transferred to a central master station via the system interface (if available). No password entry is required to view the measured values. The values are updated every few seconds. Most measured values can be displayed in primary quantities, secondary quantities, and percentages based on nominal values. A precondition for correct display is that the nominal values be correctly set in the power system data.

7.1.3.1

Measured Values Under normal conditions, the so-called default display is the default image in the relay display. It shows measured values of the protected equipment. Depending on the relay type, a number of predefined basic displays are available. Using the and keys, one of the displayed images may be selected (see example in Figure7-16).

Default Display

, 8/( 8// /    /    /   
Figure 7-16 Default displays example

Read-out of Measured Values

In the 7SD610 with maximum functionality the measured values as shown in Table 71 to 7-3 are available. The displacement voltage 3U0 is either measured directly (3U0 = 3Uen, if Uen is connected to the voltage input U4) or calculated (from 3U0 = |UL1-E + UL2-E + UL3-E|). The power measurements P, Q are positive, if real power or inductive reactive power flows into the protected object. This is assuming that this direction has been parameterized as forward. The sign of the power factor cos corresponds to the sign of the real power. In addition to those measured values listed in the table, it is possible to retrieve user defined measurement, metering and set points, if these were generated during the configuration of the device according to Section 5.2 and/or 5.3. The differential and stabilization values of the differential protection according to Table 7-2 can also be read out. Remote measured values come from the remote end of the protected object. Currents, voltages and the phase displacement between local and remote measured values can be viewed. Furthermore the address of the partner device is transmitted to the substa-

7-14

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Read-out of Information

tion. Thus all important data are available in one place. The remote measured values are listed in Table 7-3.

Table 7-1

Operational measured values of the local device Measured values primary A A A kV kV kV kV MVA, MW, MVAR (abs) Hz % % secondary A A A V V V V (abs) Hz

IL1, IL2, IL3 3I0 (IL1IL2), (IL2IL3), (IL3IL1) I1, I2 UL1L2, UL2L3, UL3L1 UL1E, UL2E, UL3E 3U0 (UL1UL2), (UL2UL3), (UL3UL1) (UL1IL1), (UL2IL2), (UL3IL3) U1, U2 S, P, Q cos f L1/trip, L2/trip, L3/trip /trip

phase currents earth currents phase angles of phase currents in relation positive and negative sequence currents line voltages phaseearth voltages displacement voltage phase angles of phase voltages in relation phase angles of phase voltages in relation to phase currents positive and negative sequence voltages apparent, real, and reactive power power factor frequency thermal value of each line related to trip value thermal value, related to trip value, calculated according to the configured method

Table 7-2

Measured values of the differential protection Measured values % referred to operational nominal current 1) operational nominal current 1)

IDiffL1, IDiffL2, IDiffL3

calculated differential currents of the three lines

IStabL1, IStabL2, IStabL3 calculated stabilization currents of the three lines


1

) for lines acc. to address # (refer to Subsection 6.1.3), for transformers acc. to address % (refer to Subsection 6.1.3) IN = SN /(3UN)

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-15

Control During Operation

Table 7-3

Operating measured values transmitted from the other end in comparison with the local operating measured values Data % referred to (absolute) operating nominal current 1) operating nominal current 1) operating nominal voltage /3 2) operating nominal voltage / 3 2)

Device ADR IL1, IL2, IL3 remote IL1, IL2, IL3 local (IL1), (IL2), (IL3)

device address of the remote device phase currents of the remote device phase currents of the local device phase angles between remote and local phase currents

UL1, UL2, UL3 remote voltages of remote device UL1, UL2, UL3 local voltages of local device (UL1), (UL2), (UL3) phase angles between remote and local voltages
1

) for lines acc. to address # (refer to Subsection 6.1.3), for transformers acc. to address % (refer to Subsection 6.1.3) IN = SN /(3UN) ) acc. to address

" (refer to Subsection 6.1.3)

From the Device Front

With a device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears. Use the key to select the menu item 0HDVXUHPHQW, and switch to the list of measured values using the key. The 0($685(0(17 selection appears. See figure 7-17.

0$,1 0(18   $QQXQFLDWLRQ !  !0HDVXUHPHQW ! 

0($685(0(17   !2SHUDWLRQ SUL  !2SHUDWLRQ VHF 


Etc.

Figure 7-17

Selection of measured values on the front example

The measured values are divided into the following groups: 01 2SHUDWLRQ SUL 11 2SHUDWLRQ VHF 21 3HUFHQW 51 8VHU 'HILQHG 61 6HW 3RLQWV Operating measured values, primary. Operating measured values, secondary. Operating measured values, in percent of nominal quantities. Measured values that are defined by the user during initial setting of the device (see Section 5.3). Impulse counter generated by the user defined logic CFC (according to section 5.3).

7-16

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Read-out of Information
71 6HW SRLQWV 09 Threshold values generated by the user defined logic CFC (according to section 5.3). If a measured value is not available, then instead of the measured value, 3 dots appear. If the value is undefined (e.g., cos , when no current is flowing), then appears (3 horizontal bars). If a measured value overruns, then (3 asterisks) is displayed. Use the key to select the measured value group that has the values desired, and switch to the display of this group with the key. Figure 7-18 shows an example for the display of operating measured values.

0($685(0(17   !2SHUDWLRQ SUL  !2SHUDWLRQ VHF 


Etc.

23(5$7,21 35,   !,/ $ !,/ $


Etc.

Figure 7-18

Viewing operating measured values on the front display

Move up and down in the table of measured value groups using the

and

keys.

Use the key to return to the 0($685(0(17 sub-menu. Use the MENU key to return to the 0$,1 0(18. From PC with DIGSI 4

The measured value groups are found under Measurement (Figure 7-2) with a double click, as shown in Figure 7-19, left.

Figure 7-19

Measurement window in DIGSI 4

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-17

Control During Operation

The measured values are divided into the following groups: 3ULPDU\ ORFDO with 2SHUDWLRQDO YDOXHV SULPDU\, 6HFRQGDU\ ORFDO with 2SHUDWLRQDO YDOXHV VHFRQGDU\, 5DWHG LQ ORFDO UHPRWH with 'LIIHUHQWLDO DQ 5HVWUDLQW &XUUHQW $QJOHV 0HDVXUHPHQWV IURP UHOD\  0HDVXUHPHQWV IURP UHOD\ , related to nominal operational values. 2WKHUV with 7KHUPDO RYHUORDG YDOXHV, 8VHU GHILQHG PHDVXUHG YDOXHV, 8VHU GHILQHG FRXQWHU, 6HW SRLQW YDOXH RI PHDVXUHG YDOXH, i.o.w. only such values that were generated in the configuration (according to Section 5.2) and/or with the user definable logic CFC (according to Section 5.3). If a measured value is not available, then instead of the measured value, 3 dots appear. If the value is undefined (e.g., cos , when no current is flowing), then appears (3 horizontal bars). If the measured value overruns, then (3 asterisks) are displayed. Double click on the desired measure value group; e.g. 3ULPDU\ ORFDO . The next sub-group is displayed. Double click on the desired sub-group; e.g. 2SHUDWLRQDO YDOXHV SULPDU\. By double clicking on an entry in the list on the right side of the window, the associated contents of the measured value group are displayed in another window, as shown in Figure 7-20.

Figure 7-20

Example of measured values shown in DIGSI 4

7-18

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Read-out of Information

7.1.3.2

Illustrating Measured Values The IBS-tool allows to illustrate the measured values of both ends of the protected object during commissioning and during operation. The IBS-tool offers a wide range of commissioning and monitoring functions that allows a detailed illustration of the differential protection communication and the power system conditions via a personal computer equipped with a browser. For more details refer to the Online Help for the IBStool. The Online Help can be downloaded from the INTERNET download area under http://www.ev.siemens.de/en/pages/siprote1.htm. With the IBS-tool the user can view the remote measured values according to Table 7-4 on the PC-screen. Currents and voltages appear as vector diagrams and are indicated as numerical values (such as angles and frequency). See Figure 7-21.

The IBS-Tool

Local Measured Values

Table 7-4

Operational measured values of the local device Measured values primary A A kV kV Hz secondary A A V V Hz

IL1, IL2, IL3 3I0 (IL1IL2), (IL2IL3), (IL3IL1) UL1E, UL2E, UL3E 3U0 (UL1UL2), (UL2UL3), (UL3UL1) (UL1IL1), (UL2IL2), (UL3IL3) f

phase currents earth current phase angles of phase currents in relation phaseearth voltages displacement voltage phase angles of phase voltages in relation phase angles of phase voltages in relation to phase currents frequency

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-19

Control During Operation

Local Measurement Primary Values


Currents: +90 Voltages: +90

180

0 180

90 Address: 2 IL1 = IL2 = IL3 = 3I0 = 199.71 A, 200.44 A, 199.34 A, 0.17 A, 0.0 119.6 120.1 159.9

90 Frequency: 50.00 Hz UL1E = 132.71 kV, 10.4 UL2E = 133.44 kV, 109.3 UL3E = 132.34 kV, 130.3 0.00 kV, 3U0 = 0.0

Figure 7-21

Local measured values example for voltages and currents

Remote Measured Values

For the remote device; the local measured values can be compared with the remote measured values, refer to Table 7-5. Figure 7-22 gives an example.

Table 7-5

Operating measured values transmitted from the other ends in comparison with the local operating measured values Data % referred to (absolute) operating nominal current 1) operating nominal current 1)

Device ADR IL1, IL2, IL3 remote IL1, IL2, IL3 local (IL1), (IL2), (IL3)
1

device address of the remote device phase currents of the remote device phase currents of the local device phase angles between remote and local phase currents

) for lines acc. to address # (refer to Subsection 6.1.3), for transformers acc. to address % (refer to Subsection 6.1.3) IN = SN /(3UN) acc. to address

2)

" (refer to Subsection 6.1.3)

7-20

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Read-out of Information

Table 7-5

Operating measured values transmitted from the other ends in comparison with the local operating measured values Data % referred to operating nominal voltage /3 2) operating nominal voltage / 3 2)

UL1, UL2, UL3 remote UL1, UL2, UL3 local

voltages of remote device voltages of local device

(UL1), (UL2), (UL3) phase angles between remote and local voltages
1) 2

for lines acc. to address # (refer to Subsection 6.1.3), % (refer to Subsection 6.1.3) IN = SN /(3UN) for transformers acc. to address

) acc. to address

" (refer to Subsection 6.1.3)

Remote Measurement
Currents: +90 Voltages: +90

180

0 180

90 Local Address: 2 IL1L = IL2L = IL3L = 24.96 %, 25.06 %, 24.92 %, 0.0 119.9 120.1

90

UL1EL = 99.94 %, 10.4 UL2EL = 100.50 %, 109.3 UL3EL = 99.66 %, 130.4

Remote Address: 1 IL1R = IL2R = IL3R = 23.22 %, 23.30 %, 23.17 %, 172.2 52.4 67.7 UL1ER = UL2ER = UL3ER = 94.94 %, 4.7 94.68 %, 115.0 95.48 %, 124.7

Constellation Data: IdiffL1 = IdiffL2 = IdiffL3 = 2.63 % 3.21 % 2.72 % Frequency = 50.00 Hz

Figure 7-22

Local and remote measured values example for voltages and (flowing) currents

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-21

Control During Operation

Values Measured by the Differential Protection

The differential protection and stabilization values are listed below the local and remote addresses (Figure 7-22). Additionally the position of the differential and stabilization values can be viewed in the pickup characteristic. See Figure 7-23.

Tripping Characteristics
Differential % of IN
150 %

Parameter IDIFF> :

20.00 %

100 %

50 %

Adaptive Stabilization % of IN
50 % 100 % 150 %

IdiffL1 = IdiffL2 = IdiffL3 = Figure 7-23

3.30 % 1.74 % 7.10 %

IstabL1 = IstabL2 = IstabL3 =

33.30 % 30.74 % 32.10 %

Pickup characteristic of the differential protection - example showing an operating state

7-22

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Read-out of Information

7.1.3.3

Setting and Retrieval of User Defined Set-points In the 7SD610 measured value set-points can be configured with the user definable logic CFC (see Section 5.3). If during normal operation a measured value reaches one of these set-points, the device generates an alarm which is indicated as an operational event. As is the case for all operational messages, it is also possible in this case to output the information to LED and/or output relay and via the interfaces. If such set-points were defined during the configuration of the device, they can be viewed and with password No. 5 they can be changed:

From the Device Front

With the device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears. Use the key to select the menu item 0HDVXUHPHQW, and switch to the list of measured values using the key. The 0($685(0(17 selection appears. There, select the menu item 6HW 3RLQWV 09 with the list of limit values using the key (see Figure 7-24). key, and switch to the

0HDVXUHPHQW   !6HW 3RLQWV 09  5HVHW 

6(7 32,176 09   ,/ /LPLW  $ ,/ /LPLW  $ u.s.w.

3: 6HWWLQJV" 

ENTER

Enter password Nr. 5 (for individual parameters) and confirm with ENTER

,/ /LPLW $UH \RX VXUH" !<HV 1R (VFDSH


Figure 7-24



ENTER

ENTER

Setting of set-points on the device front example

With the keys

and

paging up and down in the set-point table is possible. and and sub-

To change a set-point, it must be marked by means of the keys sequently the key ENTER must be pressed.

A prompt for the entry of password No. 5 (for individual parameters) appears. After entry of the password and confirmation thereof with ENTER , the current value appears in a frame with a flashing cursor. The current value must be overwritten with the desired new value with the numeric keys. If the permissible range for the setting value is exceeded to the top or the bottom, the maximum or minimum set point value appears at the bottom of the display when the value is entered. Press the
ENTER .key.

The new value now appears in the list of set point values.

In the same way, further set points, if available, can be modified.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-23

Control During Operation


If this level is exited with the key or MENU the query $UH \RX VXUH", with the default answer <HV appears (Figure 7-23). Confirm with the key ENTER , if the modified value must be accepted. If the value must not be modified the key, so that the answer 1R is marked, and confirm with the ENTER key. If the value is to be modified once more, mark $ERUW, confirm this with the ENTER key and re-enter the value. From PC with DIGSI 4

Set points are only available in online-mode. The metered value groups are found under 0HDVXUHPHQW (Figure 7-25) with a double click. Select 2WKHU and then 6HW 3RLQWV 0HDVXUHG 9DOXHV Figure 7-25). By double clicking on an entry in the list view in the right side of the window, the limit values are loaded. Mark the number of the value that is to be changed. With the right mouse button, open the context menu and click on 6HW, as shown in Figure 7-25. A password inquiry (password no. 5 for individual settings) occurs. Next, the dialogue field 6HW 0HWHUHG 9DOXH is opened. Enter the desired value in the entry field. Then click on 2.. The entered value is transferred to the device and the display within the window in Figure 7-25 is updated.

Figure 7-25

Setting of set-points in DIGSI 4 example

7.1.3.4

Retrieval and Resetting of User Defined Pulse Metered Values (PMV) In the 7SD610 it is possible to define pulse metered values with the user definable logic (CFC) (see Section 5.3). If such pulse metered values were defined during the configuration of the device, they can with password No. 5 be reset to 0:

7-24

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Read-out of Information
With the device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears. Use the key to select the menu item 0HDVXUHPHQW, and switch to the list of measured values using the key. The 0($685(0(17 selection appears. There select with key the menu item 8VHU 'HILQHG &RXQWHU and switch to the 5(6(7 option with the key (refer to Figure 7-26).

From the Device Front

5HVHW  0HWHU UHV ! 


Figure 7-26 Resetting of pulse metered values on the device front

With the keys are available.

and

you may page up and down in the table, if several positions and , and then se-

If one of the memories should be reset, mark it with the keys lect it by pressing the ENTER key.

A prompt to enter the password No. 5 (for individual parameters) appears. After entry of the password and confirmation with ENTER , the reset command is executed. Press the
ENTER

key. The display confirms the entry with &KDQJH 2. &RQWLQXH.
ENTER

Confirm again by pressing the

key. The resetting is complete.

If further counters are available, they can be reset in the same manner. With the key, a return to the level 0HDVXUHPHQW is possible, with the MENU key, you may jump to the 0$,1 0(18. From PC with DIGSI 4

Double click on 0HDVXUHPHQW (Figure 7-2). Select 2WKHU and then 8VHU 'HILQHG. By double clicking on an entry in the list view in the right side of the window, the limit values are loaded. Mark the number of the value that is to be changed. With the right mouse button, open the context menu and click on 6HW. A password inquiry (password for individual settings) occurs. Next, the dialogue field 6HW 9DOXH is opened. Enter the desired value in the entry field, if applicable, the value . Then click on 2.. The new value is transferred to the relay.

7.1.4

Fault Records
Waveform or rms data is stored in the device and can be graphically represented on a personal computer using DIGSI 4, together with the graphic program DIGRA 4. The settings associated with fault recording such as duration and pre- and post-trigger times had been are set according to Chapter 6.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-25

Control During Operation

7.1.4.1

Viewing Fault Records

From PC with DIGSI 4

To view the fault recording data on a screen, one of the programs DIGRA 4 or Comtrade Viewer (included with SIMATIC Manager) is needed. Do the following: Double click on 2VFLOORJUDSKLF 5HFRUGV (Figure 7-27). The folders listed in the right window show an overview of oscillographic records. The records are identified with a network fault number, a fault record number, and the date and time. By double clicking on an fault record in the list view in the right side of the window, one of the above programs is opened, and the selected waveform data are loaded. (See also DIGSI 4, Operating Handbook, order no. E50417H1176C097, Subsection 8.3.3).

Figure 7-27

Retrieval of fault records in DIGSI 4 example

DIGRA 4 provides support in the analysis of faults on the power system. The program graphically prepares the data recorded during a fault, and calculates additional measurement quantities, such as impedances or rms values. The quantities can be represented in these views: Time signals Phasor diagrams Locus diagrams Harmonics Selection takes place using the menu bar (9LHZ), or clicking in the symbol bar above the represented switching fields. Figure 7-28 shows all four views simultaneously. The recorded data read into the PC memory are first shown in full on the screen. Current, and possibly voltage, for each phase and the ground are represented separately. The fault number, data and time, network, and feeder are also displayed. Representation of primary or secondary quantities can be selected. The base values for currents and voltages are the nominal values of the transformers (CTs or VTs). An identical scale is used for all currents, relative to the largest occurring current value, and for all voltages, relative to the largest occurring voltage value.

7-26

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Read-out of Information

Figure 7-28

DIGRA 4 Diagrams in the four possible views

During configuration any signal can be selected in its properties to be displayed in the fault record. (See chapter 5.2.3.) Further details about the many possibilities that DIGRA 4 offers can be found in the DIGRA handbook (Order No. E50417H1176C070).

7.1.4.2

Saving the Fault Records Oscillographic records that are received from the device are not automatically saved in the PC. The data can, however, be saved in files. For more details, see the DIGSI 4 Operating Handbook, Order No. E50417H1176 C097, Section 9.4. The oscillographic records stored in the device do not need to be erased, since the data are stored in a revolving buffer. The oldest data are automatically overwritten by the newest data.

Storage of Fault Recording Data

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-27

Control During Operation

7.2

Control of Device Functions


You may change individual functions and messages in a 7SD610 while the device is in-service. Some examples are given above, including erasing stored information (Sub-section 7.1.1.4) and setting/resetting counters and set-points (Sub-sections 7.1.2.2 and 7.1.3.4). In this section, three other control capabilities are discussed. They are correcting the date and time, changing the settings group, and affecting information at the system interface during test operations.

7.2.1

Read and Set Date and Time


Whether and by which synchronization source the internal clock should be set was already determined in Section 5.5, Date and Time Stamping. Once the device is not supplied with power, the internal time clock (RTC) continues working by taking its power from the integrated buffer battery. Right after the running up of the device it displays a plausible time. The time then is changed automatically by the synchronization source linked to the device or is altered manually. Before initiating a synchronization process which is going to stamp a valid time, different types of time indication in the device display are possible. The following paragraph gives you more details about this matter. In a differential protection system with 7SD610 devices the time is usually synchronized by only one device, the so-called Absolute time master. Generally it is the device with index 1. It synchronizes the partner-device via the protection communication. The time can therefore only be changed in this device. However, the state and time can be read out in all devices of a differential protection system at any time.

Time Status

Besides the display of date and time, the status of these readings is also provided. The text of the status display can have the appearances given in Table 7-6, under regular conditions of time control.

Table 7-6 Status Bits

Time Status No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 not synchronized synchronized

       67   (5    (5 67  16 (5   16  

7-28

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Control of Device Functions

The text symbols, or status bits, for the time status have the following meanings: 16 (5 67 Not synchronized Time error Daylight savings time Time was neither set manually nor synchronized after power-up. At the moment, there is no cyclical synchronization within the tolerance times (time can jump) The latest synchronization signal received supplied a daylight savings time bit

Representation of the Time

Various representations of the date and time stamp may be given in the '$7(7,0( sub-menu and in all messages stamped with the date and time. The year number stored in the device and the values of the status bits Not synchronized and Time error determine the representations. The possible representations and the associated causes are listed in Table 7-7.
Table 7-7 Item Representations of Date and Time: Display (Example) Date 1 2 3 4 5 Time " " "  " 1990<Year<2090 Year = 1990 Yes Yes No No irrelevant No Yes No Yes Year Time Error Time Invalid

HHHHHHHH
 " 

HH"HHHHHH

? appearing in the date and time field indicate that the clock synchronisation has been lost. Item 1 appears if the internal clock RTC did not have a valid time upon start-up. The messages in the memory buffers are dated 01/01/1990. Corrective action: Set the date and time manually (see margin header Changing the Time below). Item 2 appears if the time was actually set, but not synchronized. This can happen: briefly upon device power-up, if synchronization is lost; that is, if the cyclical synchronization is interrupted for a time longer than the set tolerance time. Corrective action: If an external synchronizing source is being used, check the source and the connection. Item 3 is displayed if the RTC had a valid value upon device start-up but the time was neither manually set nor synchronized since. Corrective action: Set the date and time manually, or wait until the cyclical synchronization takes effect.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-29

Control During Operation


Item 4 displays the normal condition; that is, the time is synchronized cyclically according to the type of operation. Item 5 is displayed if synchronization via the system interface is marked as invalid. Changing the Time The time can be changed by setting the time manually, using the integrated control panel or DIGSI 4, by adjusting the settings for time control. The date and time can be manually set during operation, provided the device allows this. A precondition is that the appropriate type of operation for time control must be selected (see Section 5.7). When the source of time synchronization is internal or pulse via binary input the date and time can be manually set during operation at any instant. The annunciations time error ON and time error OFF appear in the annunciation log to indicate time synchronization and loss of time synchronization, respectively. In the other operating modes, manual adjustments are only accepted if the synchronization is momentarily lost. The messages time error ON and time error OFF are given when manually changing the year in the IRIG B mode. Without healthy or external time synchronisation the free running date and time can also be relatively adjusted (+/ 23:59:59) using the entry field 'LIIWLPH. This input possibility is not to be confused with the parameter 2IIVHW (see Section 5.7), which affects the specific general offset to the received synchronization time of the radio clock receiver (e.g. local time vs. GMT time). From the Device Front With a device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears. Select 6HWWLQJV, and in the sub-menu 6(783(;75$6. To set the date and time manually, choose the selection 'DWH7LPH and move to the '$7(7,0( display using the key. See Figure 7-29.

6(783(;75$6   !'DWH7LPH !  !&ORFN 6HWXS ! 

'$7(7,0( 6WDWXV    !  'LIIWLPH 

Figure 7-29

Manual date and time adjustment from the front panel

To change one of the previous settings (date, time, differential time), mark the item using the and keys, and then press the ENTER key. The actual setting appears in a frame with a blinking cursor. Overwrite this setting with the desired new one using the number keys. Be careful to enter the format properly. Confirm the change with the
ENTER

key.

To change the time offset or the tolerance time for a clock error signal, select &ORFN 6HWXS under 6(783(;75$6, as shown in Figure 7-30. Under 2IIVHW, the time offset can be changed. Under (UURU 7LPH, the time delay for the alarm can be adjust-

7-30

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Control of Device Functions

ed. These adjustments are done in the same manner as setting the time, by overwriting the displayed values and confirming with the ENTER key. To return to the S(783(;75$6 level, press the return to the 0$,1 0(18, press the MENU key. key, several times if necessary. To

6(783(;75$6   !'DWH7LPH !  !&ORFN 6HWXS ! 

&/2&. 6(783   2IIVHW !PLQ (UURU 7LPH PLQ 6RXUFH ,QWHUQDO

Figure 7-30

Date and time settings from the front panel

From PC with DIGSI 4

To manually change the date and time of the device: Click on 'HYLFH in the menu bar as shown in Figure 7-31. Select the command 6HW &ORFN.

Figure 7-31

Selecting the command 6HW &ORFN in DIGSI 4

A dialog field, 6HW FORFN GDWH LQ GHYLFH, is opened. The displayed values are the present date and time. The day of the week is automatically derived from the date and cannot be edited. Edit the input fields 'DWH and 7LPH. The format depends on your regional settings of the PC. See Figure 7-32. Date: mm/dd/yyyy or dd.mm.yyyy Time: hh.mm.ss Click on 2. to transfer the entered values into the device. The previous values are changed and the dialog field is closed.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-31

Control During Operation

Figure 7-32 Dialog Field: 6HW FORFN

GDWH LQ GHYLFH

To change the time offset or tolerance time for clock signal error, double click on 6HWWLQJV in the navigation window. See Figure 7-33.

Figure 7-33

Setting window in DIGSI 4

Double click on 7LPH 6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ in the data window. This give access to change (Figure 7-34): Source of time synchronisation, Monitoring (Time delay for alarm), Time format for display, Time correction (offset to the time signal).

7-32

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Control of Device Functions

Figure 7-34

Time synchronization and time format settings in DIGSI 4

If you realize during operation that the time offset and tolerance time are set too sensitive, these parameters settings can be changed according to the description in Section 5.5.

7.2.2

Changeover of Setting Groups


Four different setting groups for the protective functions are available. The active group can be changed onsite while the 7SD610 is in-service by using the integrated operating field on the device or the operating interface on a PC running DIGSI 4. Alternatively, you may decide that the active setting group be remotely controlled via binary inputs or the system (SCADA) interface. Password No. 5 (password for individual settings) is required to change setting groups. The first setting group is called group A. The others are groups B, C, and D. If setting group changing is to be used, then settings for the groups to be employed must have been entered (see Section 6) and the switching process must be (QDEOHG under Address  *US &KJH 237,21.

From the Device Front

When the device is ready for operation, first press the pears.

MENU

key. The 0$,1 0(18 ap-

Using the key, select the menu item 6HWWLQJV and switch to the settings with the key. The selection 6(77,1*6 appears. Using the with the key, select the item &KDQJH *URXS and move to the selection of groups key. The sub-menu &+$1*( *5283 appears, as shown in Figure 7-35.

The first Address  is marked. The address displays the setting group presently in effect (in Figure 7-35, the active group is *URXS $).

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-33

Control During Operation


key, select Address  and confirm with the

Using the

ENTER

key.

Enter the password for individual settings, and confirm. Using the source. key, select one of the four groups A, B, C, or D, or give control to another

If %LQDU\ ,QSXW (activation using binary inputs) is selected, setting group switching is controlled by binary inputs, provided appropriate configuration has been done and the necessary physical connections are present (see Section 5.2). If YLD 3URWRFRO is chosen, setting group changes can be controlled via the system serial interface.

&+$1*( *5283    $&7,9( *5283 *URXS $  &+$1*( WR !*URXS $ !*URXS $ *URXS % *URXS & *URXS ' YLD %LQDU\ ,QSXW YLD 3URWRFRO $UH \RX VXUH" <HV 1R

The currently-active setting group is displayed under Address .

The setting group can be changed under Address : by pressing the ENTER key, after entering the password, two possible alternatives are displayed in a new window each time:

Using the keys, select one of the alternatives and confirm with the ENTER key; The next question ($UH \RX VXUH") is answered with <HV and the selected alternative is confirmed, or is answered with 1R using the key and the change is cancelled with the ENTER key.

ENTER

Figure 7-35

Switching setting groups from the front panel

Control of the setting groups can always be regained by switching to one of the groups A through D. The key can be used to return to the 6(77,1*6 sub-menu; the pressed to returns to the 0$,1 0(18. From PC with DIGSI 4
MENU

key can be

By opening the 2QOLQH directory with a double click in DIGSI 4, the operating functions for the device appear in the left part of the window. See Figure 7-36.

7-34

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Control of Device Functions

Figure 7-36

Function selection window in DIGSI 4 - example

Double click on 6HWWLQJV to find &KDQJH *URXS in the data window (Figure 7-36 right). Double click on &KDQJH *URXS. The &KDQJH *URXS window is opened, as shown in Figure 7-37.

Figure 7-37

Setting group switching in DIGSI 4

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-35

Control During Operation

The active setting group is displayed. To switch to another setting group, click on the field 9DOXH and select the desired option from the drop-down list. Before closing the window, transfer the change to the device. This is done by clicking on the button 'LJVL 'HYLFH. A request for Password No. 7 (password for setting groups) is given. Enter the correct password, and then click on 2..

7.2.3

Test Messages to the System (SCADA) Interface during Test Operation


Depending on the type of protocol, all messages and measured values transferred via the system (SCADA) interface can be identified with an added message test operation- bit while the devive is being tested onsite (test mode). This identification prevents the messages from being incorrectly interpreted as resulting from an actual power system event. As another option, all messages and measured values normally transferred via the SCADA interface can be blocked during the testing (Block data transmission). A password for test and diagnostics is required (password no. 4) to block the messages and measured values. Data transmission block can be accomplished by controlling binary inputs, by using the operating panel on the device, or via DIGSI 4. If binary inputs are used, then the appropriate inputs must have been configured.

From the Device Front

With the device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears. Using the key, highlight the menu item 7HVW'LDJQRVH, and then press the key to enter sub-menu. 7(67',$*126( will appear at the top of the menu. At this point, highlight the menu item 7HVW (QDEOH using the key, and then press the key to enter sub-menu. 7(67 (1$%/( will appear at the top of the menu. See Figure 7-38.

7(67 ',$*126(   'HYLFH 5HVHW !  !7HVW (QDEOH !  %ON 'DWD 7UDQV!  +DUGZDUH 7HVW !  6HW5HVHW !  6,(0(16 ,QWHUQ 
Figure 7-38 Applying test mode from the front panel

7(67 (1$%/(  !7HVW PRGH 2))

To switch to test mode, press the ENTER key, enter the password for test and diagnostics, and confirm with the ENTER key. A new window appears with the options 21 and 2)). Use the and keys to select the desired mode, and press the ENTER key. The question $UH \RX VXUH" is displayed. Highlight the desired response and press the ENTER key. If the mode is changed, the device responds with the message &RQ WURO ([HFXWHG.

7-36

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Control of Device Functions


Use the key to return to the 7(67',$*126( level; press the MENU key to return to the 0$,1 0(18. The procedure for changing the Block Data Transmission mode is the same. See Figure 7-39 (simplified).

7(67',$*126(   !%ON 'DWD 7UDQV!  +DUGZDUH 7HVW ! 

%/. '$7$ 75$16  !'DWD6WRS 2))

Figure 7-39

Applying data transmission block from the front panel (simplified)

The settings for the test mode and the data transmission block are normally 2)). Definitions: 7HVW PRGH With the 21 setting, the test mode-bit is transferred for messages compatible with IEC 608705103. 'DWD6WRS With the 21 setting, no messages or measured values are transferred (data tranmission block).

From PC with DIGSI 4

Click on 'HYLFH in the menu bar to reach the commands %ORFN 'DWD 7UDQVPLV VLRQ or 7HVW 0RGH. See Figure 7-40.

Figure 7-40

Applying Test Mode or Block Data Transmission in DIGSI 4

Click on %ORFN 'DWD 7UDQVPLVVLRQ to activate or deactivate the transfer block. After entry of Password No. 4 for test and diagnostics, and confirmation with 2., the setting change is complete. Activation is indicated with a check mark in front of the command.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-37

Control During Operation


Follow the same procedure for the command 7HVW 0RGH, if this option is desired.

Note:
Remember to change the settings for Test Mode or Block Data Transmission back to the desired, in-service settings (both typically 2))) when the tests are complete.

7.2.4

Changeover of Operating Mode


During testing and station revision it is possible to change the operating mode of a device in order to perform such work with minimum effect on running operation. The following modes are available: Log out device: logging out a device from the differential protection system with the circuit breaker being switched off. The device at the other end remains in operation; thus, the other end may remain switched on. As the local circuit breaker is open (as well as the outgoing disconnector) revision work can be done at the local feeder without affecting operation at the other end. Test mode: All currents from the other device are set to zero in the local device. Thus the local device has been isolated from the differential protection system and can be checked. If the device had been logged off before (see above), all the other device can operate normally. Otherwise, the differential protection system is blocked in both devices. Emergency operation with time overcurrent protection is feasible. Commissioning mode: All tripping commands of the differential protection system are blocked. The differential system as an entity can be checked using primary or secondary values. The first two modes are in particular relevant for operation. For mode changeover Password No. 2 is required (for switching/tagging/manual overwriting). Every mode that has been changed is stored in the device safe from an auxiliary voltage failure.

From the Device Front

With a device ready for operation first press the

MENU

key. The MAIN MENU appears.

Select the item &RQWURO with and move to the selection of control options using . The selection &21752/ appears. With select the item 7DJJLQJV and move to the selection of 7$**,1*6 (see Figure 7-41) using . Then select the item Set with 7-41). and move to the next display 6(7 with (see Figure

7-38

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Control of Device Functions

7$**,1*   'LVSOD\ !  !6HW ! 

6(7   !/RJ RXW 2)) 7HVW PRGH 2))

Figure 7-41

Set taggings at the front cover example

Using the

and

keys you can select the mode to be set.

With you indicate your intention to change the corresponding mode. The password for interlocked switching (No. 2) will then be requested. Having entered and confirmed the password with ENTER , you can change over to: 21 for mode setting, 2)) for deleting this mode. Every mode can be determined separately. Press the ENTER .
ENTER

key. Answer the question $UH \RX VXUH" with Yes, confirm with

If the feeder is still current-carrying, or if the circuit breaker is signalled to be closed by the auxiliary contacts, the device will refuse tag setting for this mode and will show a corresponding message on the display. When the mode has been confirmed, testing and revision works can be done as described above. As the mode set has been saved as tag message, the auxiliary voltage may also be switched off. With the key you return to the 0($685(0(17 level, with MENU you can return to the 0$,1 0(18. In order to change to normal operation proceed in the same way and set the corresponding modes to 2)). From PC with DIGSI 4

When you double-click to open the 2QOLQH directory in DIGSI 4 you will see the operating functions in the left part of the display window (Figure 7-42).

Figure 7-42

Function selection window in DIGSI 4 example

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-39

Control During Operation


In the Control subdirectory you can click on the Taggings under )XQFWLRQ 6HOHF WLRQ in the right window. Double-click 7DJJLQJV. A dialogue box 7DJJLQJ is opened. (Figure 7-43).

Figure 7-43

Tagging dialogue box

In the 1DPH column the different modes have been listed, 6WDWXV refers to the current state with 2)) meaning that the mode is not effective, 21 meaning that it is effective. By clicking one of buttons under 6FKHGXOHG you can change the desired mode. In a security query you will be requested to confirm this. Then you will be requested to enter the password for switching/tagging/substituting. If you want to make multiple changes, you only have to enter the password before implementing the first action. Having entered the password, confirm with the 2. button. If the feeder is still current-carrying, or if the circuit breaker has been signalled closed by the auxiliary contacts, the device refuses tag setting for this mode and displays a corresponding message on the monitor. When the mode has been confirmed, testing and revision works can be done as described above. As the mode set has been saved as tag indication, the auxiliary voltage may also be switched off.

7-40

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Circuit Breaker Test Function

7.3

Circuit Breaker Test Function


The circuit breaker and the trip circuits can be tested during normal operation by execution of a TRIP and CLOSE command via the device. A prerequisite for this test is that the required test commands were allocated to the corresponding command relays during the configuration of the device. It is also possible to test the individual circuit breaker poles, provided that the device is capable of singlepole tripping, the circuit breaker is capable of single-pole tripping and that the wiring and routing has been done accordingly. A maximum of 4 test programs is available (refer to Table 7-8). For the circuit breaker CB1 it may be possible to initiate single- and three-pole TRIP/CLOSE cycles. In the event of three-pole tripping, only item 4 is important.

Table 7-8 Item 1 2 3 4

Circuit breaker test programs Test Program 1-pole TRIP/CLOSEcycle phase L1 1-pole TRIP/CLOSEcycle phase L2 1-pole TRIP/CLOSEcycle phase L3 3-pole TRIP/CLOSEcycle associated close command Operational Messages &%7(67 75,3 FRPPDQG 2QO\ / &%7(67 75,3 FRPPDQG 2QO\ / &%7(67 75,3 FRPPDQG 2QO\ / &%7(67 75,3 FRPPDQG / &%7(67 &/26( FRPPDQG

In the event that circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are used to derive the switching state of the circuit breaker via binary inputs to the device, the test cycle can only be initiated when the circuit breaker is in the closed position. A further prerequisite for the initiation of the test is that no protection function in the device has picked up, and that the circuit breaker is ready. The device indicates the status of the test sequence with corresponding messages in the display or on the monitor of a PC. If the device refuses to run or terminates the test sequence, it is likely that one of the preconditions for the execution of the test cycle has not been satisfied. The reason for the refusal or termination is also shown in the front display or monitor of the PC.
&%7(67 UXQQLQJ &%767VWRS )/7 &%767VWRS 23(1 &%767VWRS 127U &%767VWRS &/26 &%767 2. Circuit breaker test in progress Circuit breaker test cannot be started as a system fault is present Circuit breaker test cannot be started as the circuit breaker is not closed Circuit breaker test cannot be started as the circuit breaker is not ready Circuit breaker test has been terminated as the CB is still closed (prior to CB test reclosure) Circuit breaker test cycle has been completed successfully

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-41

Control During Operation

The following diagram shows the test sequence in principal:

TRIP CLOSE
T TRIP CMD.MIN. T PAUSE TEST T CLS. CMD MAX.

Figure 7-44

TRIP-CLOSE test cycle

The initiation of the test is done via the keypad and display on the front of the device or with a PC running DIGSI 4. Entry of the password (password No. 4 for test and diagnostics) is required.

DANGER!
A successful initiation of a test cycle may cause closure of the circuit breaker if an external reclose device is available!

From the Device Front

With the device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears. Select the 7HVW'LDJQRVH option using the ',$*126( with the key. With the with the key and enter the sub-menu 7(67

key, the &% WHVW (21) is now marked and the test program is selected key.

A prompt for entry of password No. 4 (test and diagnostics) appears. After entry of the password and confirmation with ENTER , the query %UHDNHU FORVHG" appears, with the default response Yes (Figure 7-45). This must be confirmed by pressing the ENTER key if the circuit breaker is definitely closed. If circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are connected and marshalled, the device rejects the test cycle when the auxiliary contacts indicate that the circuit breaker is not closed, even if the operator confirms the opposite. Only if no auxiliary contacts are marshalled, will the device rely on the confirmation by the operator. If the test cycle should be cancelled, press the key in response to the above query, so that the answer 1R is marked. This must be confirmed with the ENTER key. Prior to the confirmation with the ENTER it is possible to toggle between Yes and 1R with the and keys. Alternatively, the test sequence may also be cancelled by pressing the ESC key.

7-42

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Circuit Breaker Test Function

0$,1 0(18   !6HWWLQJV  >7HVW'LDJQRVH 

7(67',$*126(   !6,(0(16 LQWHUQ  !&% WHVW 

&% 7HVW   !&%WVW /  >&%WVW /  u.s.w. 6 3: 7HVW'LDJQRVH" 


ENTER

Select the desired test program or press the relevant numeric key to select the desired test sequence.

Enter password Nr. 4 (for test and diagnostics) and confirm with ENTER .

%UHDNHU FORVHG" !<HV 1R

Press the ENTER to confirm with <HV and thereby execute the selected breaker test cycle, or change to 1R with the key to terminate the test when ENTER is pressed.

&% 7HVW   !&%WVW /  &RQWURO ([HFXWHG


Figure 7-45

After confirmation that the CB is closed, the CB test cycle is executed, subsequently a feedback message stating successful completion of the test , or a relevant alarm appears.

Circuit breaker trip test cycle from the front of the device

From PC with DIGSI 4

If the 2QOLQH directory in DIGSI 4 is opened with a double click, the operation functions of the device appear in the left hand side of the window. By clicking on the 7HVW IXQFWLRQ, a list of the available functions appears on the right hand side of the display (Figure 7-46). By a double click on the &LUFXLW EUHDNHU WHVW, a dialogue window is opened in which the desired test sequence can be marked for selection. Following a double click, a prompt for the entry of password No. 4 (for test and diagnosis) appears. After entry of the password and confirmation with 2N the test sequence is executed. In the spontaneous event window, the execution of the test is displayed with the corresponding control responses and messages.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-43

Control During Operation

Figure 7-46

Circuit breaker trip test in DIGSI 4

7-44

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Control of Switchgear

7.4

Control of Switchgear
A SIPROTEC 4 device 7SD610 contains control functions that allow for opening and closing of power system switching devices (i.e. circuit breakers). Local control is possible utilizing different elements of the 7SD610. Breaker control from a remote location is also possible using the SCADA interface or DIGSI 4. (Performing control functions with a PC running DIGSI 4, connected to the front serial port, is considered a remote operation for breaker control purposes.) Some control actions from a 7SD610 include unsynchronized commands for circuit breakers, disconnectors, ground switches, etc. Safety mechanisms in the command path ensure a command can only take place if the check of previously defined safety criteria is concluded positively.

Note:
It is an important precondition for the switchgear control that the corresponding binary inputs and outputs were allocated during the configuration (according to Section 5.2). Furthermore the lockout conditions must have been made available for the device by means of user-definable logic functions (according to Section 5.3). If a power system switching device has auxiliary contacts that indicate the position of the device and these contacts are connected to the 7SD610 and configured as double-point indications then the switching device provides feedback indication that are monitored for plausibility of control actions. If a switching device does not indicate either the closed or open position, the display for the switching device indicates an invalid position in the 7SD610. All subsequent control operations to the equipment are interlocked. Control from a 7SD610 to a power system equipment can originate from four sources: Local operation using the operator control panel, Binary inputs, Remote operation using the SCADA interface, Operation with a PC, via the operating interface and DIGSI 4. Switching priority for the four command sources is set using the Switching Authority. For Interlocked Switching, all programmed interlocking conditions are checked before a control operation is performed. If one of the conditions is not met, then the command is rejected and an error message is recorded and displayed. The following tests can be activated (on) or deactivated (off) for a switching device: Switching authority (Local/Remote), Zone controlled (Field interlocking e.g., logic in CFC), Substation controller, to be implemented with Version 4.2, Double operation (blocking of multiple control operations), Blocking by protection (control operations blocked by protective functions), Device position (check SCHEDULED = ACTUAL comparison).

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-45

Control During Operation

7.4.1

Display Equipment Position and Control


With a device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears. Using the key, select the menu item &RQWURO, and go to editing the control functions with the key. The selection &21752/ appears (See Figure 7-47).

From the Device Front

0$,1 0(18   0HVVXUHPHQW !  !&RQWURO ! 

&21752/   !%UHDNHU6ZLWFK !  7DJJLQJ ! 

Figure 7-47

Control selections from the front panel

Select, by means of the key, the item %UHDNHU6ZLWFK, and continue with the item by pressing the key. The selection %5($.(56:,7&+ appears. See Figure 7-48. Select 'LVSOD\ (default) and press the key. The selection ',63/$< appears, in which the positions of all planned switching devices can be read out.

%5($.(56:,7&+   !'LVSOD\ !  !&RQWURO ! 

',63/$<   !%UHDNHU 23(1 !'LVF6ZLW &/26

Figure 7-48

Display of switch positions in the HMI (example)

The

key can be used to return to %5($.(56:,7&+.

To control a switching device, select the option &RQWURO in the %5($.(56:,7&+ sub-menu and press the key to go to the table of operating resources that can be controlled. See Figure 7-49. All planned switching devices appear. The actual position of each switch is displayed first. Use the and keys to move to the desired switch.

%5($.(56:,7&+   !'LVSOD\ !  !&RQWURO ! 

&21752/   %UHDNHU !&/26 'LVF6ZLW &/26 *QG6ZLW 2))

Figure 7-49

Control of switching devices from the operator control panel (example)

7-46

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Control of Switchgear

Select the switch to be controlled using the

and

keys and press the

ENTER

key.

Enter Password No. 1 (for interlocked switching) and acknowledge with the ENTER key. Note: if the switching mode is 121,17(5/2&.(' 7HVW (Sub-section 7.4.7), all switching operations are only possible with Password No. 2 (for non-interlocked switching). A new window appears. Depending on the operating and command type of the selected switching device, various options are offered. Move between them using the and keys.

&2175  !23(1 36 ! &/26( 7UH (VFDSH


Figure 7-50

  21 21

Selection window for control operations on the front panel (example)

To perform control, confirm with the ENTER key. A safety inquiry appears, $UH \RX VXUH". If the response is <(6, the switching operation is initiated (provided the Local command is allowed). A message is displayed and recorded indicating the results of the control action. Acknowledge this by pressing the ENTER key once again. The command is not executed if the switching operation is restricted. The operation may be restricted for reasons pertaining to, for example, switching authority (see Subsection 7.4.6) or interlocking (see Sub-section 7.4.7). A message is displayed and recorded indicating the results of the control action. Acknowledge the message by pressing the ENTER key. Parameters to set control properties can be examined in the display. Refer to Sub-section 7.4.4. The key can be used to return to %5($.(56:,7&+. Press the to the 0$,1 0(18. From PC with DIGSI 4
MENU

key to return

When the 2QOLQH window in DIGSI 4 is opened with a double click, the operating functions for the device appear in the left part of the window (Figure 7-36). Clicking on &RQWURO displays the associated function selection in the data window. See Figure 751.

Figure 7-51

Window for control of operating resources in DIGSI 4 (example)

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-47

Control During Operation


By double clicking on %UHDNHU6ZLWFKHV, a dialog field is opened in which the present status of each switch is visible. See Figure 7-52. Control can be performed from this dialog box provided the switching authority is set to 5(027(. The switching authority is first transferred to DIGSI 4 at the moment the control window shown in Figure 7-52 is opened. The configuration matrix discussed in Section 5.2 determines the control devices that have information displayed in this field.

Figure 7-52

Dialog box for performing control in DIGSI 4 (example)

A description of the switching device is displayed in the left column of the dialog field. This represents the contents of the /RQJ 7H[W column within the configuration matrix. The actual position of the switch is displayed in the 6WDWXV column (23(1, &/26(, ,QWHUPHGLDW). The switching possibilities are displayed in the 6FKHGXOHG column. Four control fields are shown in the right part of the dialog field. If a check mark is displayed in one of these fields, $% (Access Block = Block Input Acquisition), 7% (Transmission Block = Serial Interface Blocked), 75 (Manual Overwriting), and &% (Chatter Block), the associated block function is set or the feedback indications of the device have been simulated. Normally, operating devices are switched in the LQWHUORFNHG 1RUPDO mode. The configured interlocking conditions are checked before a control command is carried out. As soon as a control command is entered in the 6FKHGXOHG column, Password No. 1 for interlocked switching is requested for safety reasons. Further control possibilities remain possible until the control dialog field is closed, or the switching mode is changed. If a control command is successfully executed, then the display of the actual condition of the affected switch is updated in the window. Operating resources can be switched without interlocking condition checks; however, the correct Password No. 2 for non-interlocked switching must be entered. Mark the option 8QORFN by clicking on the field.

7-48

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Control of Switchgear

DANGER!
Only highly qualified personnel who have an exact knowledge of the power system conditions shall perform non-interlocked switching. Inappropriate switching operations can lead to death, serious personnel injury and property damage.

7.4.2

Manual Overwriting
When using the Control with Feedback feature, the device checks the feedback indications before and after a control command is issued. If for some reason, the physical connection from a circuit breaker auxiliary contact to the binary inputs of the device is broken, inadvertently shorted, or disconnected, commands may be blocked. If this situation occurs, and the affected switching device is to be operated, the desired device position indication can be simulated through manual overwriting (Input Tagging). The entered device position indication in the 7SD610 can be used to simulate and check interlocking conditions. To accomplish manual overwriting in the 7SD610 the binary inputs of the affected device must be decoupled first. $% (Access Block = Block Input Acquisition) This decoupling of the system is accomplished by setting the respective status. The decoupling is discussed in Sub-section 7.4.3.

From the Device Front

To enter the desired position indication for a switching device: With a 7SD610 ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears. Using the key, select the menu item &RQWURO and go to the control functions with the key. The selection &21752/ appears. By pressing the 53). key, the %5($.(56:,7&+ sub-menu is entered (see Figure 7-

Select the item 0DQ 2YHUZULWH using the key, and move to the next selection using the key. 0$1 29(5:5,7( appears, as shown in Figure 7-53. The actual position of each switching device is displayed. Move to the desired switch using the and keys.

%5($.(56:,7&+   'LVSOD\ !  &RQWURO !  !0DQ 2YHUZULWH !  6HW VWDWXV ! 

0$1 29(5:5,7(   %UHDNHU !23(1 'LVF6ZLW &/26 *QG6ZLW 23(1

Figure 7-53

Manual overwriting for switching devices from the front panel

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-49

Control During Operation

By pressing the ENTER key, a selection window is opened for the marked switch, in which manual overwriting can be done with the options 23(1&/26(. See Figure 754. Make the selection using the and keys, and confirm with the
ENTER

key.
ENTER

Enter Password No. 2 (for non-interlocked switching) and acknowledge with the key.

0$1 2  !23(1 !%UH &/26 !'LVF


Figure 7-54

  !23(1 &/26

Selection window for manual overwriting of a switch position, front panel

A safety inquiry appears: $UH \RX VXUH" Provided manual overwriting is allowed, a response of <(6 results in an appropriate message on the display. Acknowledge the message by pressing the ENTER key again. Manual overwriting is cancelled if the process is restricted because, for example, LQ SXW LJQRUHG is not set (see Subsection 7.4.3). Manual overwriting is also canceled if the user aborts the procedure. The display provides an appropriate message if manual overwriting is canceled. Acknowledge the message by pressing the ENTER key. Return to the %5($.(56:,7&+ sub-menu using the pressing the MENU key. From PC with DIGSI 4 key, or the 0$,1 0(18 by

For safety reasons, manual overwriting is only possible locally using the keypad on the front panel of the device. The feature is not available in DIGSI 4.

7.4.3

Set Status
A feature of the 7SD610 that is especially useful during testing and commissioning of the device is the capability of temporarily removing the coupling between a switching device and the 7SD610, or between the SCADA and the 7SD610, without physically disconnecting the equipment. This type of separation is also necessary, for instance, if a switch position feedback message is not functioning properly (refer to Sub-section 7.4.2). The menu item 6(7 67$786 is used to perform the decoupling. The menu displays a list of all planned switching devices and associated status information identified by a letter. The letters have the following meanings: T Device is tagged (manually overwritten). I Input ignored, which means the acquisition of an input status is de-coupled from the process (from the switch-gear). B Blocked, which means data transmissions to the central device (or SCADASCADA) are blocked.

7-50

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Control of Switchgear
C Chatter block active, which means, because of frequent message changes, the chatter block was set. O Output block active, which means the command output is de-coupled from the process (from the system). None of the listed limitations is in effect.

Note:
Input ignored only works for physical inputs! Do not set the block for indications created by CFC. key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears.

From the Device Front

With a device ready for operation, first press the

MENU

Using the key, select the menu item &RQWURO and go to editing the control functions with the key. The selection &21752/ appears. Enter the %5($.(56:,7&+ menu by pressing the key. Select the item 6HW 6WDWXV with the key and switch to the next option using the key. 6(7 67$786 appears, as shown in Figure 7-55.

%5($.(56:,7&+   'LVSOD\ !  &RQWURO !  !0DQ 2YHUZULWH !  !6HW VWDWXV ! 

6(7 67$786   %UHDNHU 7 ,   2 'LVF6ZLW!    *QG6ZLW     

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Column
Figure 7-55 Set status at the front panel (example)

Move the cursor, using the and keys, to each of the second (Input Ignore) and fifth (Control Block) columns of the switching device for which a status change is desired. Entries in this table can only be made in these two columns. Press the ENTER key. A selection window is opened that displays the meaning of the field and the change options that are available. The second column is reserved for setting Input Ignore (I); the fifth for setting the output block (O). The first, third, and fourth columns can only be read in this menu. The example in Figure 7-55 shows the position for the circuit breaker (52) was tagged (T) after the input ignore (I) was set, which means the message input was de-coupled from the system. The output block is active (O), so the command output is also decoupled from the system. For the disconnect switch and the ground switch, no limitations are set. Select the desired changes using the and keys, and confirm with the
ENTER

key.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-51

Control During Operation

Enter Password No. 2 (for non-interlocked switching) and acknowledge with the key.

ENTER

A safety inquiry appears: $UH \RX VXUH" If the response is <(6, and provided the return routing is allowed, then the display gives an appropriate message. To return to the %5($.(56:,7&+ level, press the MENU key to return to the 0$,1 0(18. From PC with DIGSI 4 key as necessary. Press the

For safety reasons, Status changes are only possible locally using the keypad on the front panel of the device. Status changes are not possible in DIGSI 4.

7.4.4

Interlocking
Operating equipment such as circuit breakers, disconnectors and ground switches can be subject to interlocking conditions. These conditions can be viewed at the device under the menu item ,17(5/2&.; however, the conditions cannot be changed. The Interlock display has an object table similar to the one described for Set Status. The table provides the set interlocking conditions, which prevent, or could prevent, a local control operation. Letters identify the interlocking conditions. The meanings of the letters are: L S Z P Local/Remote (Switching Authority), Equipment is subject to System Interlocking (in Substation Controller). Commands entered locally are sent to the central computer or controller, Zone controlled (Field- or Bay-Interlocking), Check switch position (test actual vs. scheduled),

B Blocking by picked-up protection elements, Non-Interlocked.

From PC with DIGSI 4

With a device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears. Using the key, select the menu item &RQWURO and move to editing the control functions with the key. The selection &21752/ appears. Select the item ,QWHUORFN with the key and switch to the next selection using the key. The selection ,17(5/2&. appears. See Figure 7-56.

7-52

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Control of Switchgear

&21752/   !7DJJLQJ !  ! !,QWHUORFN ! 

,17(5/2&.   !%UHDNHU / = 3 % !'LVF6ZLW / = 3 % *QG6ZLW / = 3 % 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Column

Figure 7-56

Example of interlocking conditions for switching equipment, front panel

From PC with DIGSI 4

Interlocking is set for each switching device during project planning (see Sub-section 5.2.4) using the matrix and the dialog box Object Properties. Readout of the actively set interlocking is always possible, across the entire path, without a password. If the 2QOLQH window in DIGSI 4 is opened with a double click, the operating functions for the device appear in the left part of the window (Figure 7-36). Double clicking on 6HWWLQJV brings up the function selection in the right side of the window. By double clicking on 0DVNLQJ ,2, the matrix is opened. Mark the switching device (in the line for the operating message of the switching device). Using the right mouse key, the properties of the switching device can now be called up. The conditions for ,QWHU ORFN 6ZLWFKLQJ, among other items, are recognizable in the dialog box that opens. Active test conditions are identified with a check mark.

7.4.5

Tagging
To identify unusual operating conditions in the power system, tagging can be done. The tagging can, for example, be entered as additional operating conditions in interlocking checks, which are set up with CFC. Tagging is configured in the same way as for operating devices.

From PC with DIGSI 4

With a device ready for operation, first press the

MENU

key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears.

Using the key, select the menu item &RQWURO and move to editing the control functions with the key. The selection &21752/ appears. Select the item 7DJJLQJ with the key and switch to the next selection using the key. The selection 7$**,1* appears. See Figure 7-57. The status of the tagging is displayed 7DJJLQJ 'LVSOD\, or changed using 7DJJLQJ 6HW.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-53

Control During Operation

0$,1 0(18   $QQXQFLDWLRQ !  0HDVXUHPHQW !  &RQWURO ! 

&21752/   %UHDNHU6ZLWFK !  7DJJLQJ !  ,QWHUORFN ! 

7$**,1*   'LVSOD\ !  6HW ! 

Figure 7-57

Tagging equipment from the HMI

From PC with DIGSI 4

For safety reasons, tag only locally using the keypad on the front panel of the device. Do no tag with DIGSI 4.

7.4.6

Switching Authority
Switching authority determines the command sources that are permitted for control.

From the Device Front

With a device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears. Using the key, select the menu item &RQWURO and move to editing the control functions with the key. The selection &21752/ appears. Here, select the menu item &RQWURO $XWK with the key and switch to the next selection using the key. The selection &21752/ $87+ appears (see Figure 7-58). Pressing the are offered.
ENTER

key opens a selection window in which the options /2&$/5(027(

&21752/   !,QWHUORFN > 3 >&RQWURO $XWK > 4

&21752/ $87+  6ZLWFK $XWK! /RFDO

3: 8QORFN &RQWURO" 

ENTER

Enter password No. 2 (for non-interlocked switching) and acknowledge with ENTER

&21752  !5HPRWH  6ZLWF /RFDO /RFDO


Figure 7-58 Setting switching authority with the operator control panel

ENTER

7-54

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Control of Switchgear

Choose the desired option using the

and

keys, and confirm with the


ENTER

ENTER

key.

Acknowledge the subsequent message pressing the Use the 0(18. From PC with DIGSI 4

key.

key to return to the 6:,7&+ $87+ level; the MENU key to return to the 0$,1

For safety reasons, switching authority can only be changed locally using the keypad on the front panel of the device. Switching authority cannot be changed with DIGSI 4. To perform control with DIGSI 4, switching authority at the device must be set to 5( 027(, or the test conditions for remote control of switching authority must not be set to active. Switching authority is first transferred to DIGSI 4 when the control window (see Figure 7-52) is opened.

7.4.7

Switching Mode
The switching mode can be changed during operation; so, for example, non-interlocked switching can be enabled during the commissioning of the installed equipment.

DANGER!
Only highly qualified personnel who have an exact knowledge of the power system conditions shall perform non-interlocked switching. Inappropriate switching operations can lead to death, serious personnel injury and property damage. key. The 0$,1 0(18 appears.

From the Device Front

With a device ready for operation, first press the

MENU

Using the key, select the menu item &RQWURO and move to editing the control functions with the key. The selection &21752/ appears. Here, select the menu item 6ZLWFK 0RGH with the key and switch to the next selection using the key. The selection 6:,7&+ 02'( appears (see Figure 7-59).

&21752/   !6ZLWFK $XWK !  !6ZLWFK 0RGH ! 


Figure 7-59

6:, !,17(5/2&.('  ,1 121,17(5/2&.(' 12

Operating menu for switching mode using front panel

Pressing the ENTER key opens a selection window in which the options ,17(5/2&.(' 121,17(5/2&.(' are offered. Make the choice using the and keys, and confirm with the
ENTER

key.

Acknowledge the safety inquiry that follows by again pressing the ENTER key. Use the key to return to the &21752/ level. Press the MENU key to return to the 0$,1 0(18.
7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

7-55

Control During Operation

From PC with DIGSI 4

When the 2QOLQH window in DIGSI 4 is opened with a double click, the operating functions for the device appear in the left part of the window (Figure 7-36). Clicking on &RQWUROV brings up the function selection in the right side of the window (Figure 751). By double clicking on %UHDNHU6ZLWFKHV, a dialog field is opened in which, among other options, the option for interlocked and non-interlocked (Unlock) switching is offered. To switch operating resources without a check of the associated interlocking conditions, mark the option 8QORFN by clicking in that field, see section 7.3.1. To set the switching mode for interlocked switching, the aforementioned option field must not be marked. The marking is removed by clicking in the field again. Further switching operations are possible until the dialogue field %UHDNHU6ZLWFK HV is closed, or the switching mode is changed.

7.4.8

Control Messages
In the course of system control, the device generates several messages that document the process. For example, messages may be given to report the end of a command or provide the reason for a command denial.

7.4.9

Other Commands
If the device is equipped with a serial interface for connection to the System (SCADA) interface. it can receive standardized commands (according to the supported protocol) and transmit them to the respective switching devices, or activate internal functions, e.g. block inputs/outputs or set tags (manual overwrite), or release processing of functions in the CFC. This command processing is determined during project planning and configuration of the matrix. n

7-56

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Installation and Commissioning

This section is primarily for personnel who are experienced in installing, testing, and commissioning protective and control systems, and are familiar with applicable safety rules, safety regulations, and the operation of the power system. Installation of the 7SD610 is described in this section. Hardware modifications that might be needed in certain cases are explained. Connection verifications required before the device is put in service are also given. Commissioning tests are provided. Some of the tests require the protected object (line, transformer, etc.) to carry load.

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4

Mounting and Connections Checking the Connections Commissioning Final Preparation of the Device

8-2 8-20 8-25 8-49

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-1

Installation and Commissioning

8.1

Mounting and Connections

Warning!
The successful and safe operation of the device is dependent on proper handling, installation, and application by qualified personnel under observance of all warnings and hints contained in this manual. In particular the general erection and safety regulations (e.g. IEC, ANSI, DIN, VDE, EN or other national and international standards) regarding the correct use of hoisting gear must be observed. Non-observance can result in death, personal injury, or substantial property damage.

Preconditions

Verification of the ratings of the 7SD610 according to Sub-section 3.2.1 as well as matching to ratings of the external equipment must have been completed.

8.1.1

Installation

Panel Flush Mounting

q Removal of the 4 covering caps located on the corners of the front cover, reveal the
4 slots in the mounting flange.

q Insert the device into the panel cut-out and fasten with four screws. Refer to Figure
10-5 in Section 10.13 for dimensions.

q Replace the four covers. q Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the

panel. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2. vice according to the wiring diagram for the panel. When using forked lugs or directly connecting wires to screwed terminals, the screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before the lugs or wires are inserted. A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. Section 2.1 has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc.

q Connect the plug terminals and/or the screwed terminals on the rear side of the de-

8-2

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Mounting and Connections

Elongated holes

SIEMENS
RUN

SIPROTEC
ERROR

7SD610

C6VQUH@IV $ Hryqtr Hrrr!

MENU

LED

ESC

ENTER

Meldungen Messwerte Strfallmeldung

F1 F2 F3 F4

7 4 1

8 5 2 0

9 6 3 +/-

Figure 8-1

Panel mounting of a 7SD610

Rack Mounting and Cubicle Mounting

To install the device in a frame or cubicle, two mounting brackets are required. The ordering codes are stated in the appendix in Section A.1.1.

q Loosely screw the two mounting brackets in the rack with four screws. q Remove the 4 covers at the corners of the front cover. The 4 slots in the mounting
flange are revealed and can be accessed.

q Fasten the device to the mounting brackets with four screws. q Replace the four covers. q Tighten the mounting brackets to the rack using eight screws. q Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the

rack. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-3

Installation and Commissioning

Mounting bracked
SIEMENS
RUN

SIPROTEC
ERROR

7SD610

C6VQUH@IV $ Hryqtr Hrrr!

MENU

LED

ESC

ENTER

Meldungen Mewerte Strfallmeldung

F1 F2 F3 F4

7 4 1

8 5 2 0

9 6 3 +/-

Mounting bracked

Figure 8-2

Installing a 7SD610 in a rack or cubicle

q Connect the plug terminals and/or the screwed terminals on the rear side of the device according to the wiring diagram for the rack. When using forked lugs or directly connecting wires to screwed terminals, the screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before the lugs or wires are inserted. A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits in the hole of the lug. Section 2.1 has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc.

Panel Surface Mounting

q Secure the device to the panel with four screws. Refer to Figure 10-6 in Section
10.13 for dimensions.

q Connect the ground of the device to the protective ground of the panel. The crosssectional area of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.

q Solid, low-impedance operational grounding (cross-sectional area 2.5 mm2) must


be connected to the grounding surface on the side. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. wiring diagram for the panel. Section 2.2 has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc.

q Connect the screwed terminals on the top and bottom of the device according to the

8-4

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Mounting and Connections

8.1.2

Termination variants
Outline diagrams are shown in Appendix A.2. Connection examples for current and voltage transformer circuits are provided in Appendix A.3. It must be checked that the setting configuration of the 3RZHU 6\VWHP 'DWD  36\VWHP 'DWD  corresponds with the connections to the device.

Currents

The Figures A-3 and A-4 show examples of the current transformer connection options. For the normal connection according to Figure A-3 address  must be set to , WUDQVIRUPHU = ,Q SURW OLQH, and furthermore address  must be set to , ,SK &7 = . For the connection as shown in Figure A-4 the setting of address  must also be , WUDQVIRUPHU = ,Q SURW OLQH. The factor  ,,SK &7 may deviate from 1. For notes on how to calculate the factor, refer to Subsection 6.1.1 under Connection of the Currents.

Voltages

This Section is only relevant if the measured voltages are connected to the device, a condition which was already set during the configuration (address , see Section 5.1). The Figures A-5 and A-6 show examples of the voltage transformer connection options. For the normal connection as shown in Figure A-5 the fourth voltage measuring input U4 is not used. Correspondingly address  must be set to 8 WUDQVIRUPHU = 1RW FRQQHFWHG. The factor in address  8SK  8GHOWD must however be set to 1.73 (this factor is used internally for the conversion of measurement and fault recording values). Figure A-6 shows the additional connection of an e-n-winding of the voltage transformer set. Address  8 WUDQVIRUPHU = 8[ WUDQVIRUPHU must be set. The factor in address  8SK  8GHOWD depends on the transformation ratio of the e-n-winding. For more information refer to Connecting the Voltage in Subsection 6.1.1.

Binary Inputs and Outputs

The configuration of the binary inputs and outputs, i.e. the individual adaptation to the system conditions, is described in Section 5.2. The preset allocation of the binary inputs and outputs of the device can be found in Tables A-1 and A-2 in Section A.4 of Appendix A. Also check if the labels on the front panel correspond to the configured message functions. If binary inputs are used to switch setting groups, note: Two binary inputs must be dedicated to the purpose of changing setting groups when four groups are to be switched. One binary input must be set for !6HW *URXS %LW , the other input for !6HW *URXS %LW . If either of these input functions is not assigned, then it is considered as not controlled. To control two setting groups, one binary input set for !6HW *URXS %LW  is sufficient since the binary input !6HW *URXS %LW , which is not assigned, is considered to be not controlled.

Changing Setting Groups with Binary Inputs

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-5

Installation and Commissioning


The status of the signals controlling the binary inputs to activate a particular setting group must remain constant as long as that particular group is to remain active. Table 8-1 shows the relationship between !6HW *URXS %LW , !6HW *URXS %LW , and the setting groups A to D. Principal connection diagrams for the two binary inputs are illustrated in Figure 8-3. The figure illustrates an example in which both Set Group Bits 0 and 1 are configured to be controlled (actuated) when the associated binary input is energized (high).

Table 8-1

Setting group selection with binary inputs example

Binary Input Events !6HW *URXS %LW  !6HW *URXS %LW  no yes no yes
no = not energized yes= energized

Active Group Group A Group B Group C Group D

no no yes yes

Selector switch for setting group A B C D L


Binary input set for: & 3TrB7v, High

L+

L+

A B C D

7SD610
L
Binary input set for: ' 3TrB7v , High

Figure 8-3

Connection diagram (example) for setting group switching with binary inputs

Trip Circuit Supervision

It must be noted that two binary inputs or one binary input and one bypass resistor R must be connected in series. The pick-up threshold of the binary inputs must therefore be substantially below half the rated control DC voltage. If two binary inputs are used for the trip circuit supervision, these binary inputs must be volt-free i.o.w. not be commoned with each other or with another binary input. If one binary input is used, a bypass resistor R must be employed (refer to Figure 84). This resistor R is connected in series with the second circuit breaker auxiliary contact (Aux2), to also allow the detection of a trip circuit failure when the circuit breaker auxiliary contact 1 (Aux1) is open, and the command relay contact has reset. The value of this resistor must be such that in the circuit breaker open condition (therefore

8-6

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Mounting and Connections

Aux1 is open and Aux2 is closed) the circuit breaker trip coil (TC) is no longer picked up and binary input (BI1) is still picked up if the command relay contact is open.

L+

UCTR UBI 7SD610

7SD610

3SU8Th

RTC

Legend:

R CB
TC Aux1 Aux2

RTC CB TC Aux1

Relay Tripping Contact Circuit Breaker circuit breaker Trip Coil circuit breaker Auxiliary contact (closed when CB is closed) Aux2 circuit breaker Auxiliary contact (closed when CB is open) R bypass Resistor UCTR Control voltage (trip voltage) input voltage for Binary Input UBI

L
Figure 8-4

Trip circuit supervision with one binary input

This results in an upper limit for the resistance dimension, Rmax, and a lower limit Rmin, from which the optimal value of the arithmetic mean should be selected. R max + R min R = --------------------------------2 In order that the minimum voltage for controlling the binary input is ensured, Rmax is derived as: U CRT U BI min R max = ------------------------------------- R CBTC I BI (High) So the circuit breaker trip coil does not remain energized in the above case, R min is derived as: U CTR U TC (LOW) R min = R TC ---------------------------------------------- U TC (LOW)
IBI (HIGH) UBI min Constant current with BI on (=1.7 mA) Minimum control voltage for BI =19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 24/48/60 V =88 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 110/125/220/250 V Control voltage for trip circuit DC resistance of circuit breaker trip coil Maximum voltage on the circuit breaker trip coil that does not lead to tripping

UCTR RCBTC UCBTC (LOW)

If the calculation results that Rmax < Rmin, then the calculation must be repeated, with the next lowest switching threshold UBI min, and this threshold must be implemented in the relay using plug-in bridges (see Sub-section 8.1.3). For the power consumption of the resistance: 2 U CTR 2 P R = I R = --------------------------- R R + R CBTC

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-7

Installation and Commissioning

Example:
IBI (HIGH) UBI min UCTR RCBTC 1.7 mA (from SIPROTEC 7SD610) 19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage 24/48/60 V 88 V or delivery setting for nominal voltage 110/125/220/250 V 110 V from trip circuit (control voltage) 500 from trip circuit (resistance of CB trip coil)

UCBTC (LOW) 2 V from trip circuit (max. voltage not to trip breaker)

110 V 19 V R max = --------------------------------- 500 1.7 mA 110 V 2 V R min = 500 ----------------------------- 500 2V R max = 53 k R min = 27 k R max + R min R = ------------------------------- = 40 k 2 The closest standard value of 39 k is selected; the power is:
2 110 V P R = --------------------------------------- 39 k 39 k + 0.5 k

P R 0.3 W

8-8

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Mounting and Connections

8.1.3
8.1.3.1

Hardware Modifications
General Hardware modifications might be necessary or desired. For example, a change of the pick-up threshold for some of the binary inputs might be advantageous in certain applications. Terminating resistors might be required for the communication bus. In either case, hardware modifications are needed. If modifications are done or interface modules are replaced, please observe the details in Subsections 8.1.3.2 to 8.1.3.5.

Power Supply Voltage

There are different input ranges for the power supply voltage. Refer to the data for the 7SD610 ordering numbers in Section A.1 of Appendix A. The power supplies with the ratings 60/110/125 VDC and 110/125/220/250 VDC / 115 VAC are interconvertible. Jumper settings determine the rating. The assignment of these jumpers to the supply voltages are illustrated below in Section 8.1.3.3 under subtitle Processor board CPU. When the relay is delivered, these jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker. Generally, they need not be altered. Jumper settings determine the rating of the current input transducers of the device. When the relay is delivered, these jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker to 1 A or 5 A. The physical arrangements of these jumpers that correspond to the different current ratings are described below in Section 8.1.3.3 under subtitle Input/Output Board I/O11.

Nominal Currents

Note:
If nominal current ratings are changed exceptionally, then the new ratings must be recorded under address  &7 6(&21'$5< in the 3RZHU 6\VWHP 'DWD  36\VWHP 'DWD  (see Sub-section 6.1.1).

Control Voltages for Binary Inputs

When the device is delivered from the factory, the binary inputs are set to operate with a voltage that corresponds to the rated voltage of the power supply. In general, to optimize the operation of the inputs, the pick-up voltage of the inputs should be set to most closely match the actual control voltage being used. Each binary input has a pick-up voltage that can be independently adjusted; therefore, each input can be set according to the function performed. A jumper position is changed to adjust the pick-up voltage of a binary input. The physical arrangement of the binary input jumpers in relation to the pick-up voltages is explained below in Section 8.1.3.3 under Processor board CPU and Input/Output Board I/O11.

Note:
If the 7SD610 performs trip circuit monitoring, two binary inputs, or one binary input and a resistor, are connected in series. The pick-up voltage of these inputs must be less than half of the nominal DC voltage of the trip circuit.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-9

Installation and Commissioning

Interface Modules

The serial interface modules can be replaced. Which kind of interfaces and how the interfaces can be replaced is described in Interface Modules, Section 8.1.3.4. If the device is equipped with a serial RS 485 port, the RS 485 bus must be terminated with resistors at the last device on the bus to ensure reliable data transmission. For this purpose, terminating resistors are provided on the CPUboard and on the interface modules. The physical arrangement and jumper positions on the CPUboard are explained in Subsection 8.1.3.3 under Processor board CPU, for the interface modules see Subsection 8.1.3.4 under Serial Interfaces with Bus Capability. As delivered from the factory, the resistors are switched out.

Termination of Serial Interfaces

8.1.3.2

Disassembling the Device If changes to jumper settings are required to modify the rating of the power supply, the nominal rating of the current inputs, the pick-up voltage of binary inputs, or the state of the terminating resistors, proceed as follows:

Caution!
Jumper-setting changes that affect nominal values of the device render the ordering number and the corresponding nominal values on the nameplate sticker invalid. If such changes are necessary, the changes should be clearly and fully noted on the device. Self-adhesive stickers are available that can be used as replacement stickers.

Prepare area of work. Provide a grounded mat for protecting components subject to damage from electrostatic discharges (ESD). The following equipment is needed: screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm wide tip, 1 Philips screwdriver, 4.5 mm socket or nut driver.

o o o o o

Unfasten the screw-posts of the D-subminiature connector on the back panel at location A. This activity does not apply if the device is for surface mounting. If the device has more communication interfaces on the rear, the screws located diagonally to the interfaces must be removed. This activity is not necessary if the device is for surface mounting. Remove the four caps on the front cover and loosen the screws that become accessible. Carefully pull off the front cover. The front cover is connected to the CPU board with a short ribbon-cable. Refer to Figures 8-5 for the physical arrangement of the printed boards.

8-10

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Mounting and Connections

Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, plugs, and jumpers must be avoided. Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred. Otherwise, first touch a grounded metal part.

o o o o

At one end, disconnect the ribbon-cable between the front cover and the CPU board (). To disconnect the cable, push up the top latch of the plug connector and push down the bottom latch of the plug connector. Carefully set aside the front cover. Disconnect the ribbon-cables between the CPU board () and the I/O-11 board (). Remove the boards and set them on the grounded mat to protect them from electrostatic damage. A greater effort is required to withdraw the CPU board, especially in versions of the device for surface mounting, because of the plug connectors. Check the jumpers according to Figures 8-6 to 8-10 and the following notes. Change or remove the jumpers as necessary.

The order of the boards is shown in Figure 8-5.

Processor printed circuit board CPU Prozessorbaugruppe with power supply Input/output printed circuit board I/O-11

Slot 5
1

Slot 19
2

BI1 to BI5
Figure 8-5

BI6 and BI7

Binary inputs (BI)

Front view of the device after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down)

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-11

Installation and Commissioning

8.1.3.3

Jumper Settings on Printed Circuit Boards The design of a jumper setting for the processor board CPU is shown in Figure 8-6. The preset rated voltage of the integrated power supply is checked according to Table 8-2, the quiescent state of the life contact is checked according to Table 8-3, the pick-up voltages of the binary inputs BI1 through BI5 are checked according to Table 8-4, and the integrated RS232/RS485 interface is checked according to Tables 8-5 to 8-7. Before the jumpers of the RS232/RS485 can be checked, the interface modules (if available) must be removed.

Processor board CPU

2 1 X51

F1

1 2 3 X53

1 2

X55

X52

3 4

3 2 1 X103

123

Operator interface

X109

X105

X90

321 321

321

1 2 3X

X111 X110 108

X107

X104 X106

1 2 3

X25 4 3 2 1 4 3 X24 2 1 4 3 2 1 X23

X22 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 X21

X40

Service interface (Port C)

Time synchronization (Port A)

+
G1

Figure 8-6 Processor board CPU with representation of the jumper settings required for the module configuration

8-12

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Mounting and Connections

Table 8-2 Jumper

Jumper settings for the nominal voltage of the integrated power supply on the processor board DC 60/110/125 V Nominal voltage DC 110/125/220/250 V AC 115 V 23 23 23 12 Can be interchanged Not changeable not fitted DC 24/48 V

X51 X52 X53 X55

12 12 and 34 12 not fitted

Table 8-3

Jumper setting for the quiescent state of the life contact on the processor

board CPU
Jumper X40 Open in the quiescent state Closed in the quiescent state 12 23 Presetting 23

Table 8-4

Jumper settings for the pick-up voltages of the binary inputs BI1 through BI5 on the processor board CPU Jumper X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 19 VDC Pick-up 1) 12 12 12 12 12 88 VDC Pick-up 2) 23 23 23 23 23

Binary Inputs BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5


1) 2

Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC ) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and 115 VAC

RS485 interface can be changed to RS232 interface and versa by setting of jumpers. Jumpers X105 through X110 must be set on the same position!
Table 8-5 Jumper setting for the RS232/RS485 service interface on the processor board CPU RS232 12 12 RS485 12 23

Jumper X103 and X104 X105 to X110

When the device is delivered from the factory, the jumper setting corresponds to the configuration ordered.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-13

Installation and Commissioning

Table 8-6 Jumper X111

Jumper setting for the CTS (Clear-To-Send) on the processor board CPU /CTS from RS232 interface 12 /CTS controlled by /RTS 23

When the device is delivered from the factory, the jumper setting corresponds to the configuration ordered. With RS232 (12th digit of ordering code = 0, 1): position 12 With RS485 (12th digit of ordering code = 2: Jumper X90 has no function. It is set 12. The last device on a serial RS 485 bus must be terminated with resistors via the jumpers X103 and X104 unless they are terminated by external means. position 23

Table 8-7

Jumper setting for the termination resistors o the RS485 port on the processor board CPU Termination resistor effective (on) 23 23 Termination resistor ineffective (off) 12 12 as delivered 12 12

Jumper X103 X104

Note: Both jumpers X103 and X104 must be set on the same position!
Terminating resistors can also be implemented outside the device (e.g. in the plug connectors, see Table 8-11 for pin-assignment) as shown in Figure 8-7. In that case the terminating resistors provided on the interface card or on the processor board CPU must be switched out (X103 and X104 in position 12).

+5 V 392 A/A 221 B/B 392


Figure 8-7 External terminating resistors

8-14

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Mounting and Connections

Input/Output Board I/O11

The design of a jumper setting for the input/output board I/O11 is shown in Figure 88. The pick-up voltages of the binary inputs BI6 and BI7 are controlled according to Table 8-8.

(AD2) (AD1) (AD0)

T10
1 2 3

LMH LMH 1A 5A
1 2 3

X21
1

X22 X60 1A 5A X61


1 2 3

T9

X62

Figure 8-8

3 3 L 2 2 1 1 H X73 X72 X71

Input/output board I/O11 with representation of the jumper settings required for the module configuration

1A 5A X63 1A 5A

T11
1 2 3

T8
X64 1A 5A
1 2 3

X65 IEE IE

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-15

Installation and Commissioning

Table 8-8

Jumper settings for the pick-up voltages of the binary inputs BI6 and B7 on the input/output board I/O11 Jumper X21 X22 19 VDC Pick-up 1) 12 12 88 VDC Pick-up 2) 23 23

Binary Inputs BI6 BI7


1 2

) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC ) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and 115 VAC

The preset rated currents of the current transformer are checked on the input/output board I/O11. All jumpers must be set unitary for one rated current, i.e. one jumper (X61 to X64) for each current transformer, additionally there is one common jumper X60. The jumper X65 is in position IE.

Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the input/output board I/O11 are used to set the bus address and must not be changed. Table 8-9 shows the factory setting of the jumpers.

Table 8-9 Jumper X71 X72 X73

Factory jumper setting for module identification on the input/output board I/O11 Presetting 12 (H) 12 (H) 23 (L)

8-16

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Mounting and Connections

8.1.3.4

Interface Modules The interface modules are located on the processor board CPU ( in Figure 8-5). Figure 8-9 shows the CPU board and the location of the interface modules.

Port (Rear Side)

Protection Data Interface 1

System Interface

Figure 8-9

Processor board CPU with interface modules

Serial Interfaces with Bus Capability

Using interfaces with bus capability requires a termination for the last device at the bus, i.e. terminating resistors must be switched to the line. Talking about the 7SD610 this refers to the version with the RS485 interface. The terminating resistors are connected to the corresponding interface module that is mounted to the processor input/output board CPU ( in Figure 8-5). Figure 8-9 shows the printed circuit board of the CPU and the allocation of the modules.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-17

Installation and Commissioning

The module for the RS485 interface is illustrated in Figure 8-10. When it leaves the facilities the jumpers are set in such a way that the terminating resistors are switched off. The two jumpers of a module must always be plugged in the same direction. Terminating resistors can also be implemented outside the device (e.g. in the plug connectors). In that case the terminating resistors provided on the interface card or on the processor board CPU must be switched out.

1 2 3 1 2 3 X12 1 2 3 1 2 3 X11 X10 1 2 3 1 2 3 X3 X6 X7 X4 X5 1 2 3 8X

Terminating resistors Jumper X3 X4 Connected 2-3 2-3 Disconnected 1-2*) 1-2*) *) Factory Setting

X13 C53207A324-B180

Figure 8-10

Location of the jumpers for the terminating resistors of the RS485interface module

Terminating resistors can also be implemented outside the device (e.g. in the plug connectors, see Table 8-11 for pin-assignment) as shown in Figure 8-7. In that case the terminating resistors provided on the interface card must be switched out (X3 and X4 inposition 12).

Replacing Interface Modules

The interface modules can be replaced. Figure 8-9 shows the printed circuit board CPU and the interface modules. The ordering numbers of the exchange modules are listed in Appendix A.1.1, (Accessories). Please note the following: Interface modules can only be exchanged for devices with flush mounting housing. Interface modules for devices with surface mounting housing must be exchanged in our manufacturing centre. Use only interface modules that can be ordered as an option of the device (see also Appendix A.1). With interfaces with bus capability, ensure that the bus termination is correct; see head margin Serial Interfaces with Bus Capability above (page 8-17).

8-18

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Mounting and Connections

Table 8-10

Exchange interface modules for devices with flush mounting housing Interface Mounting Location Exchange Module RS232

System Interface

RS485 LWL 820 nm

Protection Data Interface 1

FO5 to FO8

8.1.3.5

To Reassemble the Device To reassemble the device, proceed as follows:

Carefully insert the boards into the housing. The installation locations of the boards are shown in Figure 8-5. For the model of the device designed for surface mounting, use the metal lever to insert the CPU board. The installation is easier with the lever. First insert the plug connectors on the ribbon cable in the input/output board I/O11 and then on the processor board CPU. Be careful not to bend any of the connecting pins! Do not use force! Insert the plug connector of the ribbon cable between the processor board CPU and the front cover in the socket on the front cover. Press the latches of the plug connectors together. Replace the front cover and secure to the housing with the screws. Replace the covers. Re-fasten the interfaces on the rear of the device housing. This activity is not necessary if the device is for surface mounting.

o o o o o o

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-19

Installation and Commissioning

8.2
8.2.1

Checking the Connections


Data Connections
The following tables list the pin-assignments for the various serial interfaces of the device and the time synchronization interface.

PC Operating Interface at Front

When the recommended communication cable is used, correct connection between the SIPROTEC device and the PC is automatically ensured. See the Appendix A, Subsection A.1.1 for an ordering description of the cable. When a serial interface of the device is connected to a central substation control system, the data connection must be checked. A visual check of the transmit channel and the receive channel is important. Each connection is dedicated to one transmission direction. The data output of one device must be connected to the data input of the other device, and vice versa. The data cable connections are designated in sympathy with DIN 66020 and ISO 2110 (see also Table 8-11): TxD RxD RTS CTS DGND data transmit data receive request to send clear to send signal/chassis ground

System (SCADA) Interface

The cable shield is to be grounded at only both ends. The physical arrangement of the connectors is illustrated in Subsection 2.1.5, Figure 2-14.

Table 8-11 Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pin-assignment of the D-subminiature ports RS232 RS485 RS485

Operating interface RxD TxD DGND RTS CTS

Shield (with shield ends electrically connected) RxD TxD DGND RTS CTS A/A' (RxD/TxDN) C/C' (DGND) *) B/B' (RxD/TxDP) B/B' (RxD/TxDP) CNTRA (TTL) C/C' (DGND) +5 V (max. load 100 mA) A/A' (RxD/TxDN)

*) Pin 7 also may carry the RS232 RTS signal to an RS485 interface. Pin 7 must therefore not be connected!

8-20

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Checking the Connections

RS 485 Termination

The RS485 interface is capable of half-duplex service with the signals A/A and B/B with a common relative potential C/C (DGND). Verify that only the last device on the bus has the terminating resistors connected, and that the other devices on the bus do not. Jumpers for the terminating resistors are on the processor p.c.b. (see Figure 8-6) and/or an the interface modules RS 485 (Figure 8-10). It is also possible that the terminating resistors are arranged externally (Figure 8-7). If the bus is extended, make sure again that only the last device on the bus has the terminating resistors switched in, and that all other devices on the bus do not.

Time Synchronization Interface

Either 5 VDC, 12 VDC or 24 VDC time synchronization signals can be processed if the connections are made as indicated in Table 8-12.

Table 8-12 Pin-No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Pin-assignment for the D-subminiature port of the time synchronization interface Designation P24_TSIG P5_TSIG M_TSIG M_TSYNC*) Screen P12_TSIG P_TSYNC*) Screen Signal meaning Input 24 V Input 5 V Return Line Return Line*) Shield potential Input 12 V Input 24 V*) Shield potential

*) occupied, but must not be connected

Optical Fibres

Refer to Subsection 8.2.2 for differential protection communication. For the system (SCADA) interface, signals transmitted over optical fibres are unaffected by interference. The fibres guarantee electrical isolation between the connections. Transmit and receive connections are identified with the symbols for transmit and for receive. The character idle state for the optical fibre interface is Light off. If this setting is to be changed, use the operating program DIGSI 4, as described in Section 5.4.

Warning!
Laser injection! Do not look directly into the fibre-optic elements!

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-21

Installation and Commissioning

8.2.2

Checking the Differential Protection Communication


The differential protection communication is conducted either directly from device to device via optical fibres or via communication converters and a communication network or a dedicated transmission medium.

Optical Fibres

The direct optical fibre connection is visually checked like the other optical fibre connections. There is one connection for each direction. Therefore the output of the one device must be connected to the input of the other device and vice versa. Transmission and receiving connections are identified with the symbols for transmit and for receive. The visual check of the assignment of the transmission and receive channels is relevant. For use of the FO5modules and the recommended fibre type for short distances, laser class 1 is valid. Higher laser powers can occur in other cases.

Warning!
Laser injection! Do not look into the LEDs or fibre-optic elements! Do not use optical instruments! Laser class 3A according to EN 608251.

Communication Converter

Optical fibres are usually used for the connections between the devices and communication converters. The optical fibres are checked in the same manner as the optical fibre direct connections. Set address  &211(&  29(5 (see also Section 6.4.2) to configure the correct type of connection.

Further connections

For further connections a visual control is sufficient for the time being. Electrical and functional controls are done during commissioning (Section 8.3.5).

8.2.3

Checking Power Plant Connections

Warning!
Some of the following test steps will be carried out in presence of hazardous voltages. They shall be performed only by qualified personnel which is thoroughly familiar with all safety regulations and precautionary measures and pay due attention to them.

Caution!
Operating the device on a battery charger without a connected battery can lead to unusually high voltages and consequently, the destruction of the device. For limit values see Sub-section 10.2.1 under Technical Data.

8-22

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Checking the Connections

Before the device is energized for the first time, the device should be in the final operating environment for at least 2 hours to equalize the temperature and to minimize humidity and avoid condensation. Connection are checked with the device at its final location. The plant must first be switched off and grounded.

o o

Protective switches (e.g. test switches, fuses, or miniature circuit breakers) for the power supply and the measured voltages must be opened. Check the continuity of all current and voltage transformer connections against the system and connection diagrams:

q Are the current transformers grounded properly? q Are the polarities of the current transformers the same? q Is the phase relationship of the current transformers correct? q Are the voltage transformers grounded properly (if used)? q Are the polarities of the voltage transformers correct (if used)? q Is the phase relationship of the voltage transformers correct (if used)? q Is the polarity for current input I4 correct (if used)? q Is the polarity for voltage input U4 correct (if used, e.g. with open delta winding)?
o
Check the functions of all test switches that may be installed for the purposes of secondary testing and isolation of the device. Of particular importance are test switches in current transformer circuits. Be sure these switches short-circuit the current transformers when they are in the test mode (open). The short-circuit feature of the current circuits of the device are to be checked. An ohmmeter or other test equipment for checking continuity is needed.

q Remove the front panel of the device (see Figure 8-5). q Remove the ribbon cable connected to the I/O11 board ( in Figure 8-5), and pull
the board out until there is no contact between the board and the rear connections of the device.

q At the terminals of the device, check continuity for each pair of terminals that receives current from the CTs.

q Firmly re-insert the I/O11 board. Carefully connect the ribbon cable. Do not bend
any connector pins! Do not use force!

q Check continuity for each of the current terminal-pairs again. q Attach the front panel and tighten the screws.
o o o o o
Connect an ammeter in the supply circuit of the power supply. A range of about 2.5 A to 5 A for the meter is appropriate. Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply. Check the polarity and magnitude of the voltage at the device terminals. The measured steady-state current should correspond to the quiescent power consumption of the device. Transient movement of the ammeter merely indicates the charging current of capacitors. Remove the voltage from the power supply by opening the protective switches. Disconnect the measuring equipment; restore the normal power supply connections.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-23

Installation and Commissioning

o o o o o o o o o o o

Apply voltage to the power supply. Close the protective switches for the voltage transformers (if used). Verify that the voltage phase rotation at the device terminals is correct. Open the protective switches for the voltage transformers (if used) and the power supply. Check the trip circuits to the power system circuit breakers. Check the close circuits to the power system circuit breakers (if used). Verify that the control wiring to and from other devices is correct. Check the signalling connections. Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply. If communication converters are used, check the auxiliary voltage supply for the communication converters. If the communication converter is connected to the communication network, its device-ready-relay (DR) picks up. This also signalizes that the clock pulse of the communication network is recognized. Further checks are performed according to Subsection 8.3.5. Please also observe carefully the documentation on the communication converter.

8-24

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Commissioning

8.3

Commissioning

Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property damage. Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the applicable safety regulations. Particular attention must be drawn to the following: The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor before any other electrical connection is made. Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply voltage or to the measuring and test quantities. Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply voltage (storage capacitors!). The limit values stated in the Technical data (Chapter 10) must not be exceeded at all, not even during testing and commissioning.

When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip and close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.

DANGER!
Current transformer secondary circuits must have been short-circuited before the current leads to the device are disconnected! If test switches are installed that automatically short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits, it is sufficient to place them into the Test position provided the short-circuit functions has been previously tested. For the commissioning switching operations have to be carried out. A prerequisite for the prescribed tests is that these switching operations can be executed without danger. They are accordingly not meant for operational checks.

Warning!
Primary tests must only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the commissioning of protection systems, the operation of the plant and the safety rules and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-25

Installation and Commissioning

8.3.1

Testing mode and transmission blocking


If the device is connected to a substation control system or a server, the user is able to modify, in some protocols, information that is transmitted to the substation (see Section A.5 Protocol Dependent Functions in Appendix A). In the WHVWLQJ PRGH all messages sent from a SIPROTEC4device to the substation are marked with an extra test bit so that the substation is able to identify them as messages announcing no real faults. Furthermore the WUDQVPLVVLRQ EORFNLQJ function leads to a total blocking of the message transmission process via the system interface in the testing mode. Refer to Subsection 7.2.3 to know how the testing mode and the transmission blocking can be enabled and disabled. Please note that it is necessary to be 2QOLQH during the configuration of the device with DIGSI 4 to be able to use the testing mode.

8.3.2

Checking the System (SCADA) Interface


Provided that the device is equipped with a system (SCADA) interface that is used for the communication with a substation, it is possible to test via the DIGSI 4 operational function if messages are transmitted correctly. Do not apply this test feature while the device is in service on a live system!

Preliminary Notes

DANGER!
The transmission and reception of messages via the system (SCADA) interface by means of the testing mode is the real exchange of information between the SIPROTEC4 device and the substation. Connected equipment such as circuit breakers or disconnectors can be operated as a result of these actions!

Note:
After termination of this test, the device will reboot. All annunciation buffers are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI 4 prior to the test. The system interface test is carried out 2QOLQH using DIGSI 4:

q Double-click on the 2QOLQH directory to open the required dialogue box. q Click on 7HVW and the functional options appear on the right side of the window. q Double-click on 7HVWLQJ 0HVVDJHV IRU 6\VWHP ,QWHUIDFH shown in the list
view. The dialogue box *HQHUDWH ,QGLFDWLRQV opens (refer to Figure 8-11). Structure of the Dialogue Box In the column ,QGLFDWLRQ, all message texts that were configured for the system interface in the matrix will then appear. In the column 6WDWXV 6FKHGXOHG the user has to define the value for the messages to be tested. Depending on the type of message different entering fields are available (e.g. message 21 / message 2))). By doubleclicking onto one of the fields the required value can be selected from the list.

8-26

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Commissioning

Figure 8-11

Dialogue box: Generate indications

Changing the Operating State

Clicking for the first time onto one of the field in column $FWLRQ you will be asked for password no. 6 (for hardware test menus). Having entered the correct password messages can be issued. To do so, click on 6HQG. The corresponding message is issued and can be read out either from the event log of the SIPROTEC4 device as well as from the central master computer. As long as the windows is open, further tests can be performed.

Test in Message Direction

For all information that is transmitted to the central station the following is to be checked under 6WDWXV 6FKHGXOHG

q Make sure that each checking process is carried out carefully without causing any
danger (see above and refer to DANGER!)

q Click on 6HQG and check whether the transmitted information reaches the central
station and shows the desired reaction. Test in Command Direction Exiting the Test Mode The information beginning with > is transmitted towards the device. This kind of information must be sent by the central station. Check whether the reaction is correct.
f

To end the system interface test, click on &ORVH. The device is briefly out of service while the processor system starting up. The dialogue box closes.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-27

Installation and Commissioning

8.3.3

Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs


The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC4 device can be individually and precisely controlled using DIGSI 4. This feature is used to verify control wiring from the device to plant equipment (operational checks), during commissioning. This test feature shall not be used while the device is in service on a live system.

Preliminary Notes

DANGER!
Changing the status of a binary input or output using the test feature of DIGSI 4 results in an actual and immediate corresponding change in the SIPROTEC device. Connected equipment such as circuit breakers or disconnectors will be operated as a result of these actions!

Note: After termination of the hardware test, the device will reboot. Thereby, all annunciation buffers are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI 4 prior to the test.
The hardware test can be done using DIGSI 4 in the online operating mode:

q Open the 2QOLQH directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device appear.

q Click on 7HVW; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen. q Double-click in the list view on +DUGZDUH 7HVW. The dialogue box of the same
name opens (see Figure 8-12).

Figure 8-12

Dialogue box for hardware test example

8-28

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Commissioning
The dialogue box is divided into three groups: %, for binary inputs, 5(/ for output relays, and /(' for light-emitting diodes. Each of these groups is associated with an appropriately marked switching area. By double-clicking in an area, components within the associated group can be turned on or off. In the 6WDWXV column, the present (physical) state of the hardware component is displayed. The binary inputs and outputs are indicated by an open or closed switch symbol, the LEDs by a dark or illuminated LED symbol. The possible intended condition of a hardware component is indicated with clear text under the 6FKHGXOH column, which is next to the 6WDWXV column. The intended condition offered for a component is always the opposite of the present state. The right-most column indicates the commands or messages that are configured (masked) to the hardware components. Changing the Hardware Conditions To change the condition of a hardware component, click on the associated switching field in the 6FKHGXOH column. Password No. 6 (if activated during configuration) will be requested before the first hardware modification is allowed. After entry of the correct password a condition change will be executed. Further condition changes remain possible while the dialog box is open. Test of the Binary Outputs Each individual output relay can be energized allowing a check of the wiring between the output relay of the 7SD610 and the plant, without having to generate the message that is assigned to the relay. As soon as the first change of state for any one of the output relays is initiated, all output relays are separated from the internal device functions, and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This implies that a switching signal to an output relay from e.g. a protection function or control command cannot be executed.

Structure of the Test Dialogue Box

q Ensured that the switching of the output relay can be executed without danger (see
above under DANGER!).

q Each output relay must be tested via the corresponding 6ROOcell in the dialog box. q The test sequence must be terminated (refer to margin heading Exiting the Procedure), to avoid the initiation of inadvertent switching operations by further tests. Test of the Binary Inputs To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs of the 7SD610 the condition in the plant which initiates the binary input must be generated and the response of the device checked. To do this, the dialogue box +DUGZDUH 7HVW must again be opened to view the physical state of the binary inputs. The password is not yet required.

q Each state in the plant which causes a binary input to pick up must be generated. q The response of the device must be checked in the 6WDWXVcolumn of the dialogue
box. To do this, the dialogue box must be updated. The options may be found below under the margin heading Updating the Display. If however the effect of a binary input must be checked without carrying out any switching in the plant, it is possible to trigger individual binary inputs with the hardware test function. As soon as the first state change of any binary input is triggered and the

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-29

Installation and Commissioning

password nr. 6 has been entered, all binary inputs are separated from the plant and can only be activated via the hardware test function.

q Terminate the test sequence (see above under the margin heading Exiting the Procedure). Test of the LEDs The LEDs may be tested in a similar manner to the other input/output components. As soon as the first state change of any LED has been triggered, all LEDs are separated from the internal device functionality and can only be controlled via the hardware test frunction. This implies that no LED can be switched on anymore by e.g. a protection function or operation of the LED reset key. When the dialog box +DUGZDUH 7HVW is opened, the present conditions of the hardware components at that moment are read in and displayed. An update occurs: for each harware component, if a command to change the condition is successfully performed, for all hardware components if the 8SGDWH button is clicked, for all hardware components with cyclical updating if the $XWRPDWLF 8SGDWH VHF field is marked. Exiting the Procedure To end the hardware test, click on &ORVH. The dialog box closes. The device becomes unavailable for a brief start-up period immediately after this. Then all hardware components are returned to the operating conditions determined by the plant settings.

Updating the Display

8.3.4

Checking for Breaker Failure Protection


If the device is equipped with the breaker failure protection and this function is used, the interaction with the breakers of the power plant must be tested. Because of the manifold application facilities and various configuration possibilities of the power plant it is not possible to give detailed description of the test steps necessary to verify the correct interaction between the breaker failure protection and the breakers. It is important to consider the local conditions and the protection and plant drawings. It is advised to isolate the circuit breaker of the tested feeder at both sides, i.e. to keep the busbar disconnector and the line disconnector open, in order to ensure operation of the breaker without risk.

Caution!
Tripping of the complete busbar or busbar section may occur even during tests at the local feeder breaker. Therefore, it is recommended to interrupt the tripping commands to the adjacent (busbar) breakers e.g. by switch-off of the associated control voltage. Nevertheless ensure that trip remains possible in case of a real primary fault if parts of the power plant are in service.

8-30

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Commissioning

The trip command of the tested differential protection is made ineffective so that the local breaker can be tripped only by the breaker failure protection function. The following lists do not claim to cover all possibilities. On the other hand, they may contain items that can be bypassed in the actual application. Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts The circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s) form an essential part of the breaker failure protection system in case they have been connected to the device. Make sure that the correct assignment has been checked (Subsection 8.3.3). If the breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by external protection devices, each of the external initiation conditions must be checked. Depending on the device version and the setting on the breaker failure protection, single-pole trip or singleand three-pole trip are possible. Note that the internal pole discrepancy supervision or the pole discrepancy supervision of the breaker itself may lead to a later three-pole trip after single-pole trip during the tests. Reconsider the settings of the breaker failure protection and its ancillary functions. Refer to Subsection 6.10.2 (addresses  etc.) if more information is desired. At least the tested phase of the device must be subjected to a test current to enable initiation of the breaker failure protection. This may be a secondary injected current. Following every initiation the message %) 6WDUW (FNo ) must appear in the fault annunciations (trip log) or in the spontaneous messages. The following applies for phase segregated initiation:

External Initiation Conditions

q Start by single-pole trip command L1 of the external protection:

Binary inputs !%) 6WDUW / (FNo ) and if necessary !%) UHOHDVH (FNo ); look up in the trip log or spontaneous messages. Trip command depending on the settings. Binary inputs !%) 6WDUW / (FNo ) and if necessary !%) UHOHDVH (FNo ); look up in the trip log or spontaneous messages. Trip command depending on the settings. Binary inputs !%) 6WDUW / (FNo ) and if necessary !%) UHOHDVH (FNo ); look up in the trip log or spontaneous messages. Trip command depending on the settings.

q Start by single-pole trip command L2 of the external protection:

q Start by single-pole trip command L3 of the external protection:

q Start by three-pole trip command L1, L2, L3 of the external protection via all three

binary inputs: Binary inputs !%) 6WDUW / (FNo ) and !%) 6WDUW / (FNo ) and !%) 6WDUW / (FNo ), and if necessary !%) UHOHDVH (FNo ); look up in the trip log or spontaneous messages. Trip command three-pole.

The following applies for common phase initiation:

q Start by three-pole trip command L123 of the external protection:

Binary inputs !%) 6WDUW SROH (FNo ) and if necessary !%) UHOHDVH (FNo ); look up in the trip log or spontaneous messages. Trip command three-pole (dependent on settings).

Switch off test current.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-31

Installation and Commissioning

The following applies if initiation without current flow is possible:

q Start by trip command of the external protection without current flow:

Binary inputs !%) 6WDUW ZR, (FNo ) and if necessary !%) UHOHDVH (FNo ); look up in the trip log or spontaneous messages. Trip command three-pole (dependent on settings).

Busbar trip

The most important thing is the check of the correct distribution of the trip commands to the adjacent circuit breakers in case the local breaker fails. The adjacent circuit breakers are those of all feeders which must be tripped in order to ensure interruption of the fault current should the local breaker fail. In other words, the adjacent breaker are those of all feeders which may feed the same busbar or busbar section as the faulty feeder. The identification of the adjacent feeders depends widely on the topology of the busbar and its possible arrangement or switching states. That is why a generally detailed test description cannot be specified. In particular if multiple busbars are concerned the trip distribution logic to the other breakers must be checked. It must be verified for each busbar section that all breakers connected to the same section are tripped in case the concerned feeder breaker fails, and no other breakers.

Remote Trip

If the trip command of the breaker failure protection or its ancillary functions (e.g. end fault protection) is intended to trip also the circuit breaker of the remote end of the concerned feeder, the correct transmission and reception of this remote trip must be checked. Practically, this is performed in conjunction with the transmission checks according to Subsection 8.3.8. After completion of the tests, re-establish all provisory measures which might have been taken for the above tests. Ensure that the states of all switching devices of the plant are correct, that interrupted trip commands are reconnected and control voltages are switched on, that setting values which might have been altered are reverted to correct values, and that protective function are switched to the intended state (on or off).

Termination of the Checks

8.3.5
General

Checking the Communication Topology


The communication topology can either be checked from the PC using DIGSI 4 or a web browser via the IBS-Tool. If you choose to work with the IBS-Tool, please note the Help files referring to the IBS-Tool. You can either connect the PC to the device locally using the operator interface at the front, or the service interface at the rear of the device (Figure 8-13). Or you can log into the device using a modem via the service interface (example in Figure 8-14). If you use the IBS-Tool:

8-32

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Commissioning

q Make sure that the 12-digit IP-address valid for the browser is set correctly according to the following format: ***.***.***.***. A three-digit block of the IP address is inserted into each address from  to , or 4411 to 4414.

q Set the address  or  180

/2&. to No, if you are directly interfaced to the device. You will then have the option to operate the device with the IBS-Tool.  180 /2&. to No. You will then have the option to access both devices with the IBS-Tool.

q If you are interfaced to the devices via modem you can set the address  or

7SD610

7SD610

Figure 8-13

PC interfacing directly to the device schematic example

7SD610
HP 0RG HP 0RG

7SD610

:
Figure 8-14

HP 0RG

PC interfacing via modem schematic example

Checking a Connection Using Direct Link

For two devices linked with fibre optical cables (as in Figure 8-13 or 8-14), this connection is checked as follows.

o o

Both devices at the link ends have to be switched on. Check in the Event Log (see also Subsection 7.1.1.2) or spontaneous annunciations (see Subsection 7.1.1.6) for the following:

q If the message 3, ZLWK (protection data interface 1 connected with, FNo. )
is provided with the device index of the other device, a link has been established and one device has recognized the other.

In the event of a communication link error the message 3, 'DWD IDXOW (FNo. ) or will be displayed. In this case, check the fibre optical cable link again.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-33

Installation and Commissioning

q Have the devices been linked correctly and no cables been interchanged? q Are the cables free from mechanical damage, intact. and the connectors locked? q Repeat check if necessary.
Proceed with Consistency of Topology and Parameterization. Checking a Connection with the Communication Converter If a communication converter is used, please note the instructions enclosed with the device. The communication converter has a test setting where its outputs are looped back to the inputs. Links via the communication converter are tested by means of local loop-back (Figure 8-15, left).

Local Communication Converter

Remote Communication Converter

7SD610

optical

CC1

electrical

Communication Network

electrical

CC2

optical

7SD610

Figure 8-15

local

Differential protection communication via communication converter and communication network schematic example

o o

Both devices at the link ends have to be switched on. First configure the communication converter KU1:

q Disconnect the auxiliary supply voltage from both poles.


DANGER!
Before opening the communication converter, it is absolutely necessary to isolate it from the auxiliary supply voltage at all poles! There is a danger to life by energized parts!

q Open the communication converter. q Set the jumpers to the matching position for the correct interface type and transmission rate; they must be identical with the parameterization of the 7SD610 (address  &211(&  29(5, see also Subsection 6.4.2).

q Move the communication converter into test position (jumper X32 in position 23). q Close the communication converter housing.
o o
Reconnect the auxiliary supply voltage for the communication converter. The communication network (X.21 or G.703.1) must be active and connected to the communication converter. Check this by means of the device readycontact of the communication converter (continuity at the NO contact).

8-34

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Commissioning

If the device readycontact of the communication converter does not close, check the connection between the communication converter and the net (communication device). The communication device must emit the correct transmitter clock to the communication converter. Change the interface parameters at the 7SD610 (at the device front or via DIGSI 4):

o o

q Address  &211(& q Message  3,


ON).

 29(5 = F.optic direct.

Check the Event Log (see also Subsection 7.1.1.2) or spontaneous annunciations (see also Subsection 7.1.1.6): 'DWD UHIOHF 21 (Protection interface 1 data reflection

q If the message is not transmitted check for the following:


- Has the 7SD610 fibre optical transmitting terminal output been correctly linked with the fibre optical receiving terminal input of the communication converter and vice versa (No erroneous interchanging)? - Does the 7SD610 device have the correct interface module and is it working correctly? - Are the fibre optic cables intact? - Are the parameter settings for interface type and transmission rate at the communication converter correct (see above; note the DANGER instruction!)?

q Repeat the check after correction if necessary.


o o o o
Reset the interface parameters at the 7SD610 correctly:

q Address  &211(&

 29(5 = required setting.

Disconnect the auxiliary supply voltage of the communication converter at both poles. Note the above DANGER instruction! Reset the communication converter to normal position (X32 in position 1-2) and close the housing again. Reconnect the supply voltage of the communication converter. Perform the above check at the other end with the device being connected there and its corresponding communication converter. Continue with Consistency of Topology and Parameterization.

Consistency of Topology and Parameterization

Having performed the above checks, the linking of the device pair including their communication converters if applicable has been completely tested and connected to auxiliary supply voltage. Now the devices communicate by themselves.

Now check the Event Log (see also Subsection 7.1.1.2) or spontaneous annunciations (see also Subsection 7.1.1.6) of the device where you are working:

q Message FNo.  3,

ZLWK (protection data interface 1 linked with) followed by the device index of the other device. FRPSOHWH (Topology complete) will appear.

q If the devices are connected, the message FNo.  7RSRO

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-35

Installation and Commissioning

q And if the device parameterization is also consistent, i.e. the prerequisites for setting the Configuration of the Scope of Functions (Section 5.1), the Power System Data 1 (6.1.1), the General Protection Data (6.1.3), the settings for Protection Data Interfaces and Differential Protection Topology (Section 6.4.2) have been considered, the fault message, i.e. FNo. 3229 3, 'DWD IDXOW will disappear. The communication and consistency test has now been completed.

q If the fault message of the interface being checked does not disappear, however,

the fault must be found and eliminated. Table 8-11 lists messages that indicate such faults.

Table 8-13 FNo 3233

Messages announcing inconsistency Setting Meaning / Measures

DT inconsistent Device table inconsistent: the indexing of the devices is in-

consistent (missing numbers or one number used twice, see Section 6.4.2
3234 3235 DT unequal Par. different

Device table unequal: the ID-numbers of the devices are unequal (see Section 6.4.2)
Parametrization different: different functional parameters were set for the devices. They have to be equal at both ends:

Differential protection available or not (see Section 5.1), Transformer in protected zone or not (see Section 5.1), Nominal frequency (see Section 6.1.1), Operational power or current (see Section 6.1.3)

Now, there may be no more fault messages of the protection data interfaces. IBS-Tool The topology can be displayed as a graph on the monitor using the IBS-Tool. For this you need a personal computer and a web browser. Figure 8-16 exemplifies a differential protection system for two ends. The devices have been properly linked (green shaded squares) and work as differential protection (Status: Differential Mode). The PC has been interfaced to the device with index 2 (PCconnected relay). The transmission time between device 2 and device 1 is 0.080 ms.

8-36

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Commissioning

Communication Topology
PC-connected relay Address: 17 Index: 2 0.080 ms Status: Differential Mode Status: Differential Mode Address: 16 Index: 1

Figure 8-16

Example of a topology with two ends communicating correctly

8.3.6

Checking the Instrument Transformer Connections of One Line End


Should secondary test equipment be connected to the device, it is to be removed or, if applying, test switches should be in normal operation position.

Note:
It must be taken into consideration that tripping can occur even at the opposite ends of the protected object, if connections were made wrong. Before energizing the object to be protected at any end, short-circuit protection must be ensured at least at the feeding ends. If a separate back-up protection (e.g. overcurrent protection) is available, this has to be put into operation and switched to alert first. Voltage and Rotary Field Test If the device has been connected to voltage transformers, these connections are checked using primary values. For devices without voltage transformer connection the rest of this margin header may be omitted. The voltage transformer connections are individually tested at either end of the object to be protected. At the other end the circuit breaker remains open first.

Having closed the local circuit breaker, none of the measurement monitoring functions in the device may respond.

q If there was a fault message, however, the Event Log (see also Subsection 7.1.1.2)
or spontaneous messages (see also Subsection 7.1.1.6) could be checked to investigate the reason for it.

q At the indication of symmetry monitoring there might actually be asymmetries of the


primary system. If they are part of normal operation, the corresponding monitoring function is set less sensitive (see Subsection 6.12.2 under Voltage Symmetry, page 6-118).

The voltages can be read on the display at the front, or called up in the PC via the operator or service interface, and compared with the actual measured quantities as pri-

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-37

Installation and Commissioning

mary or secondary values (refer to Subsection 7.1.3.1). Apart from the absolute values of the line-earth and line-line voltages, voltage phase differences are indicated so that the correct phase sequence and polarity reversal of individual voltage transformers can be seen. The voltages can also be read with the IBS-Tool (see below, Current Test).

The voltages should be almost equal. All the three angles (ULxULy) must be approximately 120.

q If the measured quantities are not plausible, the connections must be checked and
revised after switching off the line. If the phase difference angle between two voltages is 60 instead of 120, one voltage must be polarity-reversed. The same applies if there are phase-to-phase voltages which almost equal the phase-to-ground voltages instead of having a value that is 3 greater. The measurements are to be repeated after setting the connections right.

q In general, the phase rotation is a clockwise phase rotation. If the system has an

counter-clockwise phase rotation, this must go for both ends of the protected object. The measured value allocation must be checked and corrected, if required, after the line has been isolated. The phase rotation check must then be repeated.

Open the miniature circuit breaker of the feeder voltage transformers. The measured voltages in the operational measured values (Subsection 7.1.3.1) appear with a value close to zero (small measured voltages are of no concern).

q Check in the event log (Section 7.1.1.2) or spontaneous messages (Section

7.1.1.6) that the VT mcb trip was noticed (message !)$,/)HHGHU 97 21). A precondition is that the position of the VT mcb is connected to the device via a binary input.

Close the VT mcb: The above message appears in the event log as 2)), i. e. !)$,/)HHGHU 97 2))).

q If one of the events does not appear, the connection and routing of these signals
(Subsection 5.2.4) must be checked.

q If the 21-state and 2))-state are swapped, the contact type (H-active or L-active) must be checked and remedied (Subsection 5.2.4).

o o

The protected object is switched off. The check must be carried out for both ends.

8.3.7

Checking the Instrument Transformer Connections of Both Line Ends


The connections of the current transformers are tested with primary values. A load current of at least 5 % of the rated operational current is required. Any direction is possible. This test cannot replace visual inspection of the correct current transformer connections. Therefore, the inspection according to Section 8.2.3. is a prerequisite.

Current Test

The current transformer connections are tested at each end of the protected object. The current flows through the protected object.

8-38

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Commissioning

After closing the circuit breakers, none of the measured value monitoring functions in the 7SD610 must respond. However, in the event of a monitoring signal, the reason for this signal can be investigated in the Event Log (see Section 7.1.1.2) or in the spontaneous messages (Section 7.1.1.6).

q If current summation errors occur, check the matching factors (see Section 6.1.1,
Connection of the Currents).

q Messages from the symmetry monitoring could occur because there actually are

asymmetrical conditions in the primary system. If they are part of normal operation, the corresponding monitoring function is set less sensitive (see Section 6.12.2, Symmetry Supervision).

Currents can be viewed as primary or secondary measured values in the front display panel or via the operator or service interface with a personal computer, and compared with the actually measured values (see also Section 7.1.3.1). The absolute values as well as the phase differences of the currents are indicated so that the correct phase sequence and polarity of individual transformers can also be seen. The IBS Tool provides comfortable read-out possibilities for all measured values with visualisation using phasor diagrams (Figure 8-17).

The current amplitudes must be approximately the same. Each one of the three angles (ILxILy) must be approximately 120.

q If the measured values are not plausible, the connections must be checked and corrected after switching off the protected object and short-circuiting the current transformers. If, for example, the phase difference between two currents is 60 instead of 120, one of the currents must have a reversed polarity. The same is the case, if a substantial earth current 3I0 occurs: 3I0 phase current one or two phase currents are missing, 3I0 doubled phase current one or two phase currents have a reversed polarity.

o o

The measurements are to be repeated after setting the connections right. The previously stated tests of the measured values are to be repeated at the other end of the tested current path. The current value of the other end can also be read out locally as percentage values as well as the phase angles (cf. Subsection 7.1.3). In the IBS Tool, the local and remote measured values can be graphically displayed. Figure 8-18 shows an example.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-39

Installation and Commissioning

Local Measurement Primary Values


Currents: +90 Voltages: +90

180

0 180

90 Address: 2 IL1 = IL2 = IL3 = 3I0 = 199.71 A, 200.44 A, 199.34 A, 0.17 A, 0.0 119.6 120.1 159.9

90 Frequency: 50.00 Hz UL1E = 132.71 kV, 10.4 UL2E = 133.44 kV, 109.3 UL3E = 132.34 kV, 130.3 0.00 kV, 3U0 = 0.0

Figure 8-17

Local measured values in the IBS Tool example of plausible measured values

Polarity Check

If the device is connected with voltage transformers, the local measured values already provide a polarity test. A load current of at least 5 % of the rated operational current is required. Any direction is possible but must be known.

With closed circuit breakers, the power values can be viewed as primary and secondary measured values in the front display panel or via the operator or service interface with a personal computer (see also Subsection 7.1.3.1). Here, again, the IBS Tool is a comfortable help as the vector diagrams also show the correlation between the currents and voltages (Figure 8-18). Cyclically and acyclically swapped phases can easily be detected.

With the aid of the measured power values you are able to verify that they correlate to the load direction, reading either at the device itself or in DIGSI 4 (Figure 8-19). P positive, if active power flows into the protected object, P negative, if active power flows towards the busbar, Q positive, if (inductive) reactive power flows into the protected object, Q negative, if (inductive) reactive power flows towards the busbar.

8-40

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Commissioning

Remote Measurement
Currents: +90 Voltages: +90

180

0 180

90 Local Address: 2 IL1L = IL2L = IL3L = 24.96 %, 25.06 %, 24.92 %, 0.0 119.9 120.1

90

UL1EL = 99.94 %, 10.4 UL2EL = 100.50 %, 109.3 UL3EL = 99.66 %, 130.4

Remote Address: 1 IL1R = IL2R = IL3R = 23.22 %, 23.30 %, 23.17 %, 172.2 52.4 67.7 UL1ER = UL2ER = UL3ER = 94.94 %, 4.7 94.68 %, 115.0 95.48 %, 124.7

Constellation Data: IdiffL1 = IdiffL2 = IdiffL3 = 2.63 % 3.21 % 2.72 % Frequency = 50.00 Hz

Figure 8-18

Local and remote measured values in the IBS Tool examples for plausible measured values

Therefore, the power results and their components must have opposite signs at both ends. It must be taken into consideration that high charging currents, which might occur with long overhead lines or with cables, are capacitive, i.e. correspond to a negative reactive power into the line. In spite of a resistive-inductive load, this may lead to a slightly negative reactive power at the feeding end whereas the other end shows an increased negative reactive power. The lower the load current for the test, the higher the significance of the influence. In order to get unambiguous results, you should increase the load current if necessary.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-41

Installation and Commissioning

P
Positive active power in the direction of the line

SLoad

jQ Positive reactive power in the direction of the line Negative reactive power in the direction of the line

Figure 8-19

Complex (apparent) power

The power measurement provides an initial indication as to whether the measured values of one end have the correct polarity. If the reactive power is correct but the active power has the wrong sign, cyclic phase swapping of the currents (right) or of the voltages (left) might be the cause. If the active power direction is correct but the reactive power has the wrong sign, cyclic phase swapping of the currents (left) or of the voltages (right) might be the cause. If both the active power and the reactive power have the wrong sign, the polarity according to the address  &7 6WDUSRLQW is to be checked and corrected. The phase angles between currents and voltages must also be conclusive. Each one of the three phase angles (ULxILx) must be approximately the same and must represent the operating status. In the event of power in the direction of the protected object, they represent the current phase displacement (cos positive); in the event of power in the direction of the busbar they are higher by 180 (cos negative). However, charging currents might have to be taken into consideration (see above).

o o

The measurements may have to be repeated after correction the connections. The above described tests of the measured values also have to be performed at the other end of the tested current path. The current and voltage values as well as the phase angles of the other end can also be read out locally as percentage values (Subsection 7.1.3). Note that currents flowing through the object (without charging currents) ideally have opposite signs at both ends, i.e. turned by 180. In the IBS Tool the local and remote measured values can be shown graphically. You can see an example in Figure 8-18.

o
Polarity Check for the Current Input I4

The protected object is now switched off, i.e. the circuit breakers are opened.

If the standard connection of the device is used whereby the current measuring input I4 is connected in the starpoint of the set of current transformers (refer also to the connection circuit diagram in the Appendix, Figure A-3), then the correct polarity of the earth current path in general automatically results. If however the current I4 is derived from a separate summation CT (e.g. a core balance CT) an additional direction check with this current is necessary.

8-42

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Commissioning

The test is done with a disconnected trip circuit and primary load current. It must be noted that during all simulations that do not exactly correspond with cases that may occur in practice, the non-symmetry of measured values may cause the measured value monitoring to pick up. These must therefore be ignored during such tests.
.

DANGER!
Working on measurement transformers requires the highest precautions! Short-circuit the secondary side of the current transformers before any current connections to the device are opened!

To generate a displacement voltage, the en winding of one phase in the voltage transformer set (e.g. L1) is bypassed (refer to Figure 8-20). If no connection on the en windings of the voltage transformer is available, the corresponding phase is open circuited on the secondary side. Via the current path only the current from the current transformer in the phase from which the voltage in the voltage path is missing, is connected; the other CTs are short-circuited. If the line carries load in the first quadrant, the protection is in principle subjected to the same conditions that exist during an earth fault in the direction of the line. The same manipulation is carried out with the current and voltage transformers at the other end.

L1 Bus bar L2 L3

(alternatively disconnect here)

e
bypass one phase Ue IL1 IL2 IL3 I4 Un

n
UL1 UL2 UL3 Un

7SD610

Line Figure 8-20 Polarity testing for I4, example with current transformers configured in a Holmgreen connection

Figure 8-21 illustrates an example corresponding to the circuit in Figure 8-20, when the current flows in direction of the object to be protected. The currents IL2 and IL3 are almost zero, an earth current 3I0 of the same value as IL1 appears. Accordingly, the voltage UL1E is missing and a zero sequence voltage 3U0 appears.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-43

Installation and Commissioning

In the event of a polarity fault, 3I0 is in opposite phase with IL1 or the zero sequence voltage 3U0 supplements the other two voltages to a (here false) voltage star. Open the circuit breakers, short-circuit current transformers and set current and voltage transformer connections right. Repeat test. Having finished the test, open all circuit breakers, short-circuit current transformers and restore current and voltage transformer connections.

Local Measurement Primary Values


Currents: +90 Voltages: +90

180

0 180

90 Address: 2 IL1 = IL2 = IL3 = 3I0 = 199.71 A, 0.00 A, 0.00 A, 199.37 A, 0.0 0.0 0.3 0.1

90 Frequency: 50.00 Hz UL1E = 0.71 kV, 10.4 UL2E = 133.44 kV, 109.3 UL3E = 132.34 kV, 130.4 3U0 = 133.00 kV, -169.8

Figure 8-21

Local measured values example for single-phase, asymmetrical test

Measuring Differential and Stabilizing Currents

The test for two ends is terminated with the reading of the differential and stabilizing currents which simultaneously check that the current transformer connections have been restored correctly after the I4 test (if performed). Read out the differential and stabilizing currents. They are available for every phase at the device display or in DIGSI 4 amongst the measured values (cf. Subsection 7.1.3.1).

q The differential currents must be low, at least one scale less than the currents flowing through. If high charging currents are to be expected in long overhead lines or cables, these are additionally included in the differential currents.

8-44

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Commissioning

Remote Measurement
Differential % of IN 150 %

100 %

50 %

Adaptive Stabilization % of IN 50 % IdiffL1 = IdiffL2 = IdiffL3 = 3.30 % 1.74 % 7.10 % IstabL1 = IstabL2 = IstabL3 = 100 % 33.30 % 30.74 % 32.10 % 150 %

Figure 8-22

Differential and stabilizing currents example for plausible currents

q The stabilizing currents result from the pickup value ,',))! (address , cf.

Subsection 6.2.2) in addition to the sum of the fault currents to be tolerated: such as the locally permissible current transformer error according to address  ( $/)$/)B1 (cf. Subsection 6.1.1) the permissible current transformer faults at the other end according to that setting there, as well as the internal estimation of the system errors (frequency, synchronization and delay time difference errors). With the default values for ,',))! (0.3 IN) and ( $/)$/)B1 (5.0 % = 0.05) there is I stab I I ---------- = 0.3 + 0.05 ------- + 0.05 ------- + System Fault IN2 I NB I N1
,',))!
Set value Permiss. Local CT error Permiss. Remote CT error

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-45

Installation and Commissioning

with I INB IN1 IN2

the actual current flowing, the nominal operating current as parameterized, the primary nominal current of the local current transformers, the primary nominal current of the current transformers of the remote end.

In the IBS-Tool, the differential and stabilizing currents are displayed as a graph in a characteristics diagram. One example is illustrated in Figure 8-22.

If there is a differential current in the size of twice the through-flowing current, you may assume a polarity reversal of the current transformer(s) at one line end. Check the polarity again and set it right after short-circuiting all the three current transformers. If you have modified these current transformers, also perform a power and angle test. Finally, open circuit breaker again. If parameter settings have been changed for the tests, reset them to the values necessary for operation.

o o

8.3.8

Remote Tripping, Remote Signalling etc.


As soon as the communication between the devices has been established, the functions that depend on the transmission can be tested. This applies in particular to

q remote tripping via a binary input (cf. Section 6.3), q transmission of further remote commands or remote signals (cf. Section 6.6), q tripping of the remote circuit breaker by breaker failure protection and/or end fault
protection (cf. Subsection 8.3.4),

q verification of remote circuit breaker positions.


The IBS-Tool can be used to achieve the latter. It contains a sheet where the circuit breaker position is notified. Note that the circuit breaker position can only be indicated reliably, if the circuit breaker's auxiliary contacts have been signalled to the corresponding device via binary inputs. Without these auxiliary contacts the devices can only deduce the circuit breaker positions from the current flow. But as the current may be zero even if the circuit breaker is closed, you must expect wrong indications. The circuit breaker position is, however, always interpreted by the protection functions in such a way that it goes on the safe side if in doubt. For all the other commands and information to be transmitted, generate the source of the information and check that the desired effect is created at the receiving end. Also note the following:

DANGER!
Make sure that switching operations produced by remote command can be performed without any danger during the actual switching state!

8-46

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Commissioning

8.3.9

Testing User Defined Functions


7SD610 has a vast capability for allowing functions to be defined by the user, especially with the CFC logic. Any special function or logic added to the device must be checked. Naturally, general test procedures cannot be given. Rather, the configuration of these user defined functions and the necessary associated conditions must be known and verified. Of particular importance are possible interlocking conditions of the switchgear (circuit breakers, isolators, etc.). They must be considered and tested.

8.3.10 Trip and Close Test with the Circuit Breaker


The circuit breaker and tripping circuits can be conveniently tested by the device 7SD610. The procedure is described in detail in Section 7.3. If the check does not produce the expected results, the cause may be established from the text in the display of the device or the PC. If necessary, the connections of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts must be checked: It must be noted that the binary inputs used for the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts must be assigned separately for the CB-test. It is accordingly not sufficient that the auxiliary contacts are assigned to the binary inputs with FNo  to   and/ or  (depending on the options of the auxiliary contacts); in addition, the corresponding FNos  to  and/or  and/or  (depending on the options of the auxiliary contacts) must be configured (see also Section 6.13.2). These are exclusively used for the CB-test. In addition, the ready state of the circuit breaker for the CBtest must be indicated to the binary input FNo .

8.3.11 Stability Check and Triggering Oscillographic Recordings


At the end of commissioning, an investigation of switching operations of the circuit breaker(s), under load conditions, should be done to assure the stability of the protection during the dynamic processes. Oscillographic recordings obtain the maximum information about the behaviour of the 7SD610. Requirements Along with the capability of recording waveform data during system faults, the 7SD610 also has the capability of capturing the same data when commands are given to the device via the service program DIGSI 4, the serial interfaces, or a binary input. For the latter, the binary input must be assigned to the function !7ULJ:DYH&DS (FNo 4). Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs when the input is energized. For example, an auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker may be used to control the binary input for triggering.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-47

Installation and Commissioning

An oscillographic recording that is externally triggered (that is, without a protective element pickup or device trip) is processed by the device as a normal fault recording with the exception that data are not given in the fault messages (trip log). The externally triggered record has a number for establishing a sequence. Triggering with DIGSI 4 To trigger oscillographic recording with DIGSI 4, click on 7HVW in the left part of the window. Double click the entry 7HVW :DYH )RUP in the list in the right part of the window to trigger the recording. See Figure 8-23. A report is given in the bottom left region of the screen. In addition, message segments concerning the progress of the procedure are displayed. The DIGRA program or the Comtrade Viewer program is required to view and analyse the oscillographic data. Refer to Subsection 7.1.4

Figure 8-23

Triggering oscillographic recording with DIGSI 4

8-48

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Final Preparation of the Device

8.4

Final Preparation of the Device


Tighten the used screws at the terminals; those ones not being used should be slightly fastened. Ensure all pin connectors are properly inserted.

Caution!
Do not use force! The tightening torques according to Chapter 2 must not be exceeded as the threads and terminal chambers may otherwise be damaged!

Verify that all service settings are correct. This is a crucial step because some setting changes might have been made during commissioning. The protective settings under device configuration, input/output configuration are especially important (Section 5.1) as well as the power system data, and activated Groups A through D (if applicable). All desired elements and functions must be set 21. See Chapter 6. Keep a copy of all of the in-service settings on a PC. Check the internal clock of the device. If necessary, set the clock or synchronize the clock if it is not automatically synchronized. For assistance, refer to Subsection 7.2.1. The annunciation memory buffers should be cleared, particularly the operational messages (event log) and fault messages (trip log). Future information will then only apply for actual system events and faults. To clear the buffers, press 0$,1 0(18 $Q QXQFLDWLRQ 6HW5HVHW. Refer to Subsection 7.1.1 if further assistance is needed. The numbers in the switching statistics should be reset to the values that were existing prior to the testing, or to values in accordance with the users practices. Set the statistics by pressing 0$,1 0(18 $QQXQFLDWLRQ 6WDWLVWLF. Refer to Subsection 7.1.2 if more information is needed. Press the
ESC

key, several times if necessary, to return to the default display.

Clear the LEDs on the front panel by pressing the LED key. Any output relays that were picked up prior to clearing the LEDs are reset when the clearing action is performed. Future indications of the LEDs will then apply only for actual events or faults. Pressing the LED key also serves as a test for the LEDs because they should all light when the button is pushed. Any LEDs that are lit after the clearing attempt are displaying actual conditions. The green 581 LED must be on. The red (5525 LED must not be lit. Close the protective switches. If test switches are available, then these must be in the operating position. The device is now ready for operation. n

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

8-49

Installation and Commissioning

8-50

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Maintenance and Fault Tracing

General comments about the routine checks and maintenance activities to ensure the high reliability of the 7SD610 are given in this chapter. A procedure for replacing components such as the buffer battery is discussed. Troubleshooting advice is provided. A procedure for replacing the power supply fuse is described. Some comments concerning the return of a device to the factory are given.

9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6

General Routine Checks Maintenance Fault Tracing Corrective Action/Repairs Return

9-2 9-3 9-4 9-7 9-9 9-13

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

9-1

Maintenance and Fault Tracing

9.1

General
Siemens numerical protective and control SIPROTEC 4 devices are designed to require no special maintenance. All measurement and signal processing circuits are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output relays are hermetically sealed or provided with protective covers. Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output relays, hardware and software problems are automatically reported. The selfmonitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are not required. Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected. The live status relay drops out to provide an alarm by its breaking contact. If a problem is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides messages. Recognized software failures result in the resetting and restarting of the processor system. If such a failure is not resolved by the restart, further restart attempts are initiated. If a problem is still present after three restart attempts, the device is automatically taken out of service. Then the live status contact drops out to provide an alarm and the red ERROR LED on the front panel illuminates. The reaction of the device to failures and problems can be viewed in chronological sequence in the operational messages (event log). See Sub-section 7.1.1. The messages can be used to diagnose the problem. When the device communicates with a master control system of the substation or other central control systems, the event and alarm messages are also sent over the serial interface.

9-2

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Routine Checks

9.2

Routine Checks
Routine checks of the characteristic curves or pick-up values of the protective elements are not necessary because they form part of the continuously supervised firmware programs. The normally scheduled interval for plant maintenance can be used for carrying out operational testing of the protective and control equipment. The maintenance serves mainly to check the serial or hardwired interfaces of the device, i.e. the coupling with the plant. The steps listed below are recommended for routine checks. If a problem is detected during these checks, refer to Section 9.4.

o o o o o o

Verify that the green RUN LED is lit on the front panel and the red ERROR LED is not. Check that the states of the LEDs on the front panel give an accurate image of the conditions of the device and the plant. Investigate any problems or uncertainties. Press the LED key. All of the LEDs should temporarily light except for the ERROR LED. Only the LEDs indicating specific present conditions should remain lit. Read the measurement values and compare them to an independent source to check the measuring circuits of the 7XX999. Refer to Subsection 7.1.3 for assistance. Review the messages given in the event log. Be sure there are no reports of unknown problems or abnormal occurrences related to the device, the measuring circuits, or the power system. See Sub-section 7.1.1.2 for help. Perform a reset (reboot) of the device. A complete check of the hardware is done. The device is effectively out of service during the reset, which lasts for about 10 to 15 seconds. To perform the reset from the operator control panel, press the MENU key and use the and keys to select the 'HYLFH 5HVHW under the 7(67',$*126( submenu. Press the ENTER key, enter Password No. 4 for test and diagnostics, and answer with <HV. During the reset, the ERROR and RUN LEDs are lit. After a successful reset, the default display reappears and the LEDs return to indicate normal operation. The device is then back in-service. To perform the reset with DIGSI 4, establish the 2QOLQH mode, select 'HYLFH in the menu bar, and then 5HVHW Enter the password for test and diagnostics; then 2.. Other testing can be done with DIGSI 4 on-line. In Hardware Test under Test, the conditions of all of the binary inputs, binary outputs, and LEDs can be monitored. Compare the indicated conditions with the actual conditions. Do not change the states of the device components because the power station is immediately affected!

Warning!
Alterations of the states of the binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs must not be done with test features during normal operation. Any such change immediately affects the inputs and outputs of the device, and therefore the connected switching devices! This includes, for instance, non-interlocked primary switching!

o o

The trip and close circuits for circuit breakers and other primary equipment can be verified with operator control actions. Refer to Section 7.3 for details. The IBS-tool enables the user to check measured data and states at both ends of the protected object. For more details see Subsection 7.1.3.2.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

9-3

Maintenance and Fault Tracing

9.3
9.3.1

Maintenance
Replacing the Buffer Battery
The battery is used to retain the annunciation memories and fault recording data in the event of an interruption of the power supply. The battery also maintains the internal system clock with calendar after a loss of the power supply. The battery is checked by the processor at regular intervals. If the capacity of the battery is found to be declining, an alarm is generated. The battery should be changed when this alarm is given, or at the latest, after 10 years of service. Recommended Battery: Lithium Battery 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA. For example: VARTA Order Number 6127 101 501 The battery is located near the front edge of the CPU printed circuit board. The front panel of the device must be removed to change the battery. To replace the battery:

Save the annunciations and fault records. These are the data under the Annunciation sub-menu (all items in this sub-menu). The records and data are lost when the battery is removed. The simplest and fastest method is to use the save feature in DIGSI 4 when the program is on-line.

Note: All of the protective and control settings, including the input/output configuration and the CFC logic, are not affected by a power supply interruption. The settings are stored independently of the battery. The settings are not lost when the battery is removed, nor are the settings affected if the device operates without a battery.

Have the replacement battery ready.

Caution!
Do not short the battery! Do not reverse the polarity of the battery! Do not lay the battery on the ground mat used to protect components from electrostatic discharges! Do not recharge the battery!

Isolate the power supply by opening the protective switches for both terminals.

Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, and connectors must be avoided. Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred; otherwise, first touch a grounded metal part before handling the internal components. Do not insert or remove interface connectors under live conditions!

9-4

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Maintenance

Warning!
Hazardous voltages may exist in the device, even after the power supply is disconnected and the boards are withdrawn from the case! Capacitors can still be charged!

o o o

Remove the covers on the front panel and loosen the screws that are securing the front panel. Carefully pull off the front panel and bend it aside. The front panel is connected to the internal CPU printed circuit board with a short ribbon-cable. Disconnect the ribbon-cable that links the front panel and the CPU board (), at the side of the front panel. To disconnect the cable, push up on the top latch of the plug connector and push down on the bottom latch of the plug connector. Carefully set aside the front panel. The battery is located on the bottom-front side of the CPU () board. See Figure 9-1.

Battery grip

Battery

G1

Slot 5

Slot 19

Figure 9-1

Processor board CPU Input/output board I/O

Front view without front panel position of buffer battery (simplified and reduced)

o o o

Remove the old battery from the snap-on connector using the plastic battery grip shown in Figure 9-1. Remove the battery grip from the old battery, and place the grip on the new battery. Observing the polarity and firmly insert the new battery into the snap-on connector shown in Figure 9-1.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

9-5

Maintenance and Fault Tracing

o o o o o

Connect the ribbon-cable between the CPU () board and the front panel. Be especially careful not to bend any of the connector pins! Do not use force! Be sure that the plug connectors latch. Carefully replace the front panel being mindful of the ribbon-cable. Fasten the panel to the case with the screws. Replace the covers. Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply. After the device is operating, data saved in DIGSI 4 can be loaded back into the device. If the internal system clock is not automatically synchronized via a serial interface, then the clock should be set at this point. Refer to Subsection 7.2.1 if assistance is needed to set the clock.

Warning!
The used battery contains Lithium. Do not throw the battery into the trash! It must be disposed off in line with the applicable regulations! Do not reverse the polarity! Do not completely discharge! Do not throw the battery into a fire! Explosion hazard!

9.3.2

Replacing Interface Modules


The serial interface modules are replaceable. If an interface is suspected to be defect, the module can be replaced by a different module (only for test or definitely). The replacing procedure is described precisely in Subsection 8.1.3.4. If a module is replaced, please observe the hints for disassembly in Subsection 8.1.3.2 and reassembly of the device in Subsection 8.1.3.5.

9-6

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Fault Tracing

9.4

Fault Tracing
If a device reports a problem or failure, the procedure below is recommended. If none of the LEDs on the front panel are lit, then verify:

q Are the modules placed correctly and locked by the front panel? q Are the plug-in connectors of the ribbon cables plugged properly into the modules
and are the interlockings latched correctly?

q Are the voltage magnitude and polarity correct for the power supply? Connection
drawings are shown in Section A.2 of Appendix A.

q Has the fuse in the power supply not blown. The location of the fuse is shown in
Figure 9-5. If the fuse needs to be replaced, see Sub-section 9.5.2. If the red ERROR LED is on and the green RUN LED is off, then the device has recognized an internal fault. Re-initializing the device can be attempted (see Section 9.2). If you see the following display, the device has arrived monitor-mode. In this case you may initialize the device via DIGSI 4:

021,725   (TXLSPHQW GDWD !  8VHU LQWHUIDFH !  6\VWHP ,IDFH !  5HVHW !  6LHPHQV LQWHUQ ! 
Figure 9-2 Monitor menu in the display

q Connect the SIPROTEC 4 device to the PC and open the DIGSI 4 application in
the PC.

q Select ,QLWLDOL]H

GHYLFH in the menu 'HYLFH (Figure 9-3).

Figure 9-3

Initializing device via DIGSI 4 example

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

9-7

Maintenance and Fault Tracing

q Enter password No. 7. The display becomes blank. After a successful initialization,
the LEDs return to indicate normal operation and the default display reappears. The device settings are downloaded to the device provided they had been saved in the PC after commissioning (refer to Section 8.4). The device is then in-service. Further Assistance If these steps do not resolve the problem, please call your local Siemens representative or customer hot-line. Our customer hot-line needs the following information to assist you: the complete order number of the device (MLFB), the serial number of the device (BF ...), the firmware version, the boot system version. This information can be read out from the device panel. From the 0$,1 0(18 select 6HWWLQJV 6HWXS([WUDV. The ordering code and the serial number can also be found on the name plate sticker on the device housing. If a device file had been created on the harddisk of the PC, the information can be found in the device file using DIGSI 4 in online mode as shown in Figure 9-4.

q Open the DIGSI 4 application in the PC and select the device. q Open the device in 2IIOLQH mode. q Select )LOH 3URSHUWLHV from the menu bar. The desired information is shown.

Figure 9-4

Retrieving the device data in the device properties example

9-8

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Corrective Action/Repairs

9.5
9.5.1

Corrective Action/Repairs
Software Procedures
A restart of the processor system, as described in Section 9.2, can be done as an attempt to solve a problem. Setting changes can be made to solve simple problems, such as sporadic alarms from elements of the measured value supervision. These attempts of solving problems can be done while the device is in service. If a processor restart or setting change does not remedy the problem, then no further action should be done while the device is in service. Instead, replace the device with a tested spare.

9.5.2

Hardware Procedures
Hardware modifications or repair should be limited in scope to changes that are absolutely necessary. Some examples of hardware repair are changing the mini-fuse in the power supply and replacing a printed circuit board or module. Hardware modifications or repair should only be done by experienced personnel. Do not insert or extract a printed circuit board unless the device is completely isolated. Soldering work must not be done on the printed circuit boards.

Disassembling the Device

The device must be disassembled if work is to be done on the printed circuit boards. The procedure below should be used.

Prepare area of work. Provide a grounded mat for protecting components subject to damage from electrostatic discharges (ESD). The following equipment is needed: Screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm or 1/4 inch tip. #1 Phillips screwdriver. 4.5 mm socket or nut driver.

o o

Isolate the power supply by opening the protective switches (test switches, fuses, or miniature circuit breakers) for both terminals.
S

Disconnect all communication cables from the device. Carefully remove optical fibres from the device. Apply protective caps to the fibre ends and the communication ports on the device. These activities do not apply if the device is for surface mounting.

Warning!
Laser injection! Do not look directly into the fibre-optic elements!

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

9-9

Maintenance and Fault Tracing

o o o o

Unfasten the screw-posts of the D-subminiature connector on the back panel at location A. This activity does not apply if the device is for surface mounting. If the device has more communication interfaces at locations B and/or C on the rear, the screws located diagonally to the interfaces must be removed. These activities are not necessary if the device is for surface mounting. Remove the corner covers on the front panel and loosen the screws that are holding the front panel to the device case. Carefully pull off the front panel. The front panel is connected to the CPU board with a short ribbon-cable. On devices with detached operator panel, the front panel can be pulled off directly (without a ribbon cable).

Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, and connectors must be avoided! Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred; otherwise, first touch a grounded metal part. Do not insert or remove interface connectors under live conditions!

Warning!
Hazardous voltages may exist in the device, even after the power supply is disconnected and the boards are withdrawn from the case! Capacitors can still be charged!

At one end, disconnect the ribbon-cable that links the front panel and the CPU board (), at the side of the front panel. To disconnect the cable, push up on the top latch of the plug connector and push down on the bottom latch of the plug connector. Carefully set aside the front panel. For the surface mounted device, the 7-pin connector X16 must be disconnected from the CPU board behind the D-subminiature port, and the ribbon-cable that runs to the 68-pin connector on the back must be detached. Disconnect the ribbon-cable between the CPU board and the I/O board. The boards can be removed and laid on the grounded mat to protect them from ESD damage. A greater effort is required to remove the CPU board from the device designed for surface mounting, because of the type of connectors.

o o

Replacing the Power Supply Fuse

Keep ready replacement fuse 5 x 20 mm. Verify the correct rating, correct characteristic (T) as well as the correct coding. This data is printed on the module (see Figure 9-5). The type of fuse depends on the auxiliary supply voltage (refer to Table 9-1). The processor module CPU, which also incorporates the power supply (refer to Figure 8-5 in Sub-section 8.1.3) must be removed and placed on a surface suitable for electrostatically sensitive devices (ESD).

9-10

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Corrective Action/Repairs

Remove the defective fuse. Figure 9-5 illustrates the fuse.

2 3 4

F1
B20 T4H250V B30 B40 T2H250V

Figure 9-5

Power supply mini-fuse on the processor printed circuit board CPU

Table 9-1

Assigning of the mini-fuse rating to the device auxiliary voltage rating Rated Auxiliary Voltages 24 V to 48 V DC 60 V to 125 VDC 110 V to 250 VDC; 115 VAC Fuse Type T4H250V T2H250V T2H250V

7SD610 Version 2 4 5

o o
Reassembling the Device

Install the new fuse into the holder. Carefully install the processor board CPU in the case. To reassemble the device:

o o

Connect the ribbon-cable between the I/O board and the CPU board. Be especially careful not to bend any of the connector pins! Do not use force! Be sure the connectors latch. Connect the ribbon-cable between the CPU board and the front panel. Be especially careful not to bend any of the connector pins! Do not use force! Be sure the plug connectors latch. For a model with detached operator panel, first connect the ribbon-cable from the 68-pin connector on the back of the device to the CPU board. Then attach connector X16 under the D-subminiature port on the CPU board. The X16connector can be plugged in either direction. Carefully replace the front panel being mindful of the ribbon-cables. Fasten the front panel to the case with the screws. Replace the covers. The following steps are not applicable for the surface mount version:

o o

C53207-A324-B20C53207-A324-B30C53207-A324-B40-

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

9-11

Maintenance and Fault Tracing

o o o

Align and fix the rear interfaces again. Attach all D-subminiature plugs to the matching D-subminiature sockets. Screw in all the fibre optical connectors where applicable.

Warning!
Laser injection! Do not look directly into the fibre-optic elements!

Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply. If the green RUN LED does not light, there is a fault in the power supply. The device should be sent to the factory. See Section 9.6.

9-12

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Return

9.6

Return
Siemens strongly recommends that no further repairs on defective devices, boards, or components be done. Special electronic components are used for which procedures for preventing electrostatic discharges must be followed. Most importantly, special production techniques are necessary to avoid damaging the wave-soldered multilayer boards, the sensitive components, and the protective varnish. If a problem cannot be solved by the procedures described in Section 9.5, then the complete device (including front cover) should be returned to the factory. The original transport packaging material should be used for returning a device. If alternative packaging material is used, then the device and other contents must be provided with protection against shock and vibration according to IEC 60255211 Class 2 and IEC 60255212 Class 1. Before returning a device, retrieve and save all of the configuration, function and control settings, and any important information. Note any changes that were made to the jumpers on the internal printed circuit boards after the device was first delivered.

Note:
Repaired devices are returned from the factory with all jumpers on the printed circuit boards set in the original positions according to the ordering number. All configuration, function and control parameters have the default setting.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

9-13

Maintenance and Fault Tracing

9-14

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Technical Data

10

This chapter provides the technical data of the SIPROTEC 4 7SD610 device and its individual functions, including the limiting values that must not be exceeded under any circumstances. The electrical and functional data of fully equipped 7SD610 devices are followed by the mechanical data, with dimensional drawings.

10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 10.10 10.11 10.12 10.13

General Device Data Differential Protection Intertripping, External Direct Local and Remote Tripping

10-2 10-10 10-12

Direct Remote Trip or Transmission of Binary Information (optional) 10-12 Protection Data Interface and Differential Protection Topology Time Overcurrent Protection High-Current Switch-on-to-Fault Protection Automatic Reclosure Function (optional) Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (optional) Thermal Overload Protection Monitoring Functions Supplementary Functions Dimensions 10-13 10-14 10-19 10-19 10-20 10-21 10-23 10-24 10-26

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

10-1

Technical Data

10.1

General Device Data

10.1.1 Analog Inputs and Outputs


Nominal frequency Current Inputs Nominal current fN IN 50 Hz or 60 Hz 1 A or 5 A (adjustable)

Power consumption per phase and earth path at IN = 1 A approx. 0.05 VA at IN = 5 A approx. 0.3 VA Current overload capability per input thermal (rms) 500 A for 1 s 150 A for 10 s 20 A continuous 1250 A (half cycle)

dynamic (pulse) Requirements for Current Transformers

For a maximum fault current the current transformers must not be saturated under steady-state conditions. I F cont max The accuracy limiting factor must be n ------------------------I N prim at least 30 Maximum ratio between primary currents of current transformers at the ends of the protected object I prim max -------------------- 8 I prim min 80 V to 125 V

AND

n 30

Voltage Inputs

Nominal voltage

UN

(adjustable)

Power consumption per phase at 100 V 0.1 VA Voltage overload capability per phase thermal (rms) 230 V continuous

10.1.2 Power Supply


Direct Voltage Voltage supply via integrated DC/DC converter:
Nominal power supply direct voltage UNDC Permissible voltage ranges Nominal power supply direct voltage UNDC Permissible voltage ranges

24/48 VDC 19 to 58 VDC

60/110/125 VDC 48 to 150 VDC

110/125/220/250 VDC 88 to 300 VDC

Permissible AC ripple voltage, peak to peak Power consumption quiescent energized

15 % of the nominal power supply voltage approx. 6.5 W approx. 10 W

10-2

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

General Device Data


50 ms at UH = 48 V and UNDC 110 V 20 ms at UH = 24 V and UNDC = 60 V

Bridging time for failure/short-circuit of the power supply Alternating Voltage

Voltage supply via integrated AC/DC converter


Nominal power supply alternating voltage UNAC Permissible voltage ranges 115 VAC 92 to 132 VAC

Power consumption quiescent energized Bridging time for failure/short-circuit of the power supply

approx. 10 VA approx. 17 VA 50 ms

10.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs


Binary Inputs Number Nominal voltage Switching thresholds for nominal voltages 24/48 VDC 60/110/125 VDC for nominal voltages 110/125/ 220/250 VDC Current consumption, energized Maximum permissible voltage Input interference suppression Binary Outputs 7 (allocatable)

24 VDC to 250 VDC in 2 ranges, bipolar adjustable with jumpers Upickup 19 VDC Udropoff 14 VDC Upickup 88 VDC Udropoff 66 VDC approx. 1.8 mA independent of the control voltage 300 VDC 220 nF coupling capacitance at 220 V with recovery time >60 ms

Alarm/command relays (see also General Diagrams in Section A.2 of Appendix A) Number 3, each with 1 NO contact (commoned) 2, each with 1 NO contact (voltfree) (allocatable) MAKE BREAK 1000 W/VA 30 VA 40 W ohmic 25 W for L/R 50 ms 1, with 1 NO or NC contact (switch selectable) MAKE BREAK 1000 W/VA 30 VA 40 W ohmic 25 W for L/R 50 ms 250 V

Switching capability

Alarm relay Switching capability

Switching voltage

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

10-3

Technical Data

Permissible current per contact Permissible total current on common paths

5 A continuous 30 A for 0.5 s 5 A continuous 30 A for 0.5 s

10.1.4 Communications Interfaces


Protection Data Interface Operation Interface See Section 10.5 Connection front panel, non-isolated, RS 232 9-pin DSUB socket for connecting a personal computer with DIGSI 4 min. 4 800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud factory setting: 38400 Baud; parity: 8E1 15 m (50 ft) isolated interface for data transfer acc. ordered version with DIGSI 4

Operation Transmission speed Maximum transmission distance Service/Modem Interface (optional) RS232/RS485 Operation RS232 Connection for flush mounted case for surface mounted case i

rear panel, mounting location C 9-pin DSUB socket at the inclined housing on the case bottom shielded data cable

Test voltage Transmission speed Maximum transmission distance RS485 Connection for flush mounted case for surface mounted case

500 V; 50 Hz min. 4 800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud factory setting: 38400 Baud 15 m (50 ft)

rear panel, mounting location C 9-pin DSUB socket at the inclined housing on the case bottom shielded data cable

Test voltage Transmission speed Maximum transmission distance

500 V; 50 Hz min. 4800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud factory setting: 38400 Baud 1000 m (3300 ft)

10-4

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

General Device Data

System (SCADA) Interface (optional)

RS232/RS485/Optical acc. to ordered version RS232 Connectionfor flush mounted case for surface mounted case Test voltage Transmission speed Maximum transmission distance RS485 Connection for flush mounted case for surface mounted case Test voltage Transmission speed Maximum transmission distance Optical fibre Connector Type for flush mounted case for surface mounted case Optical wavelength Laser class 1 acc. EN 608251/ 2

floating interface for data transfer to a master terminal

rear panel, mounting location B 9-pin DSUB socket at the inclined housing on the case bottom 500 V; 50 Hz min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd factory setting: 19200 Bd 15 m (50 ft)

rear panel, mounting location B 9-pin DSUB socket at the inclined housing on the case bottom 500 V, 50 Hz min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd factory setting: 19200 Bd 1000 m (3300 ft)

STconnector rear panel, mounting location B at the inclined housing on the case bottom = 820 nm using glass fibre 50/125 m or using glass fibre 62.5/125 m

Permissible optical signal attenuation max. 8 dB, using glass fibre 62.5/125 m Maximum transmission distance Character idle state Time Synchronization Signal type Connectionfor flush mounted case for surface mounted case Nominal signal voltages Signal level and burden:
5V Nominal signal input voltage 12 V 24 V

2 km (1.2 miles) selectable; factory setting: Light off DCF77/IRIG B-Signal rear panel, mounting location A 9-pin DSUB socket at the terminal on the case bottom optional 5 V, 12 V or 24 V

UIHigh UILow

6.0 V

1.0 V at IILow = 0.25 mA

15.8 V 1.4 V at IILow = 0.25 mA

31 V 1.9 V at IILow = 0.25 mA

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

10-5

Technical Data

IIHigh RI

4.5 mA to 9.4 mA 890 at UI = 4 V 640 at UI = 6 V

4.5 mA to 9.3 mA 1930 at UI = 8.7 V 1700 at UI = 15.8 V

4.5 mA to 8.7 mA 3780 at UI = 17 V 3560 at UI = 31 V

10.1.5 Electrical Tests


Specifications Standards: IEC 60255 (Product standards) ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0; C37.90.0.1; C37.90.0.2 UL 508 DIN 57435 Part 303 See also standards for individual functions IEC 602555 and 6087021

Insulation Tests

Standards:

High voltage test (routine test) 2.5 kV (rms); 50 Hz all circuits except power supply, binary inputs, and communication/time sync. interfaces High voltage test (routine test) only power supply and binary inputs High Voltage Test (routine test) only isolated communication /time sync. interfaces Impulse voltage test (type test) all circuits except communication /time sync. interfaces, class III EMC Tests; Interference Immunity (Type Tests) Standards: 3.5 kVDC 500 V (rms); 50 Hz

5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 s; 0.5 Ws; 3 positive and 3 negative surges in intervals of 5 s IEC 602556 and 22 (Product standards) EN 500822 (Generic standard) DIN 57435 Part 303 2.5 kV (Peak); 1 MHz; = 15 ms; 400 surges per s; test duration 2 s Ri = 200 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air discharge, both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330

High frequency test IEC 60255221, class III and VDE 0435 part 303, class III Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255222 class IV and IEC 6100042, class IV

Irradiation with HF field, non-modulated10 V/m; 27 MHz to 500 MHz IEC 60255223 (report) class III Irradiation with HF field, amplitude 10 V/m; 80 MHz to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM; modulated; IEC 6100043, class III 1 kHz Irradiation with HF field, 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition frequency pulse modulated 200 Hz; duty cycle of 50 % IEC 6100043/ENV 50204, class III

10-6

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

General Device Data

Fast transient disturbance/burst IEC 60255224 and IEC 6100044, class IV High energy surge voltages (SURGE), IEC 6100045 installation class 3 power supply analogue inputs, binary inputs and outputs

4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length = 15 ms; repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities; Ri = 50 ; test duration 1 min impulse: 1.2/50 s 2 kV; 12 ; 9 F 1 kV; 2 ; 18 F 2 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F 1 kV; 42 ; 0.5 F

common mode: diff. mode: common mode: diff. mode:

Line conducted HF, amplitude 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz modulated; IEC 6100046, class III Power system frequency magnetic field; IEC 6100048, class IV; IEC 602556 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz 0.5 mT; 50 Hz

Oscillatory surge withstand capability 2.5 to 3 kV (peak value); 1 to 1.5 MHz ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 decaying wave; 50 surges per s; duration 2 s; Ri = 150 to 200 Fast transient surge withstand capability, ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 4 kV to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per s; both polarities; duration 2 s; Ri = 80

Radiated electromagnetic interference 35 V/m; 25 MHz to 1000 MHz ANSI/IEEE Std C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse modulated Damped oscillations IEC 60694, IEC 61000412 EMC Tests; Interference Emission (Type Tests) Standard: Conducted interference, only power supply voltage IECCISPR 22 Radio interference field strength IECCISPR 22 2.5 kV (peak value), polarity alternating; 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz and 50 MHz; Ri = 200 EN 50081* (Generic standard) 150 kHz to 30 MHz limit class B 30 MHz to 1000 MHz limit class B

10.1.6 Mechanical Stress Tests


Vibration and Shock During Operation Standards: Vibration IEC 60255211, class 2 IEC 6006826 IEC 6025521 and IEC 600682 sinusoidal 10 Hz to 60 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude 60 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration frequency sweep rate 1 octave/min 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes.

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

10-7

Technical Data

Shock IEC 60255212, class 1 IEC 60068227 Seismic vibration IEC 60255212, class 1 IEC 6006833

half-sine shaped acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms, 3 shocks in each direction of 3 orthogonal axes sinusoidal 1 Hz to 8 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude (horizontal axis) 1 Hz to 8 Hz: 1.5 mm amplitude (vertical axis) 8 Hz to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration (horizontal axis) 8 Hz to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration (vertical axis) Frequency sweep rate1 octave/min 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes IEC 6025521 and IEC 600682 sinusoidal 5 Hz to 8 Hz: 7.5 mm amplitude 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration Frequency sweep rate1 octave/min 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes half-sine shaped acceleration 15 g; duration 11 ms; 3 shocks in each direction of 3 orthogonal axes half-sine shaped acceleration 10 g; duration 16 ms; 1000 shocks in each direction of 3 orthogonal axes

Vibration and Shock During Transport

Standards: Vibration IEC 60255211, class 2 IEC 6006826

Shock IEC 60255212, class 1 IEC 60068227 Continuous shock IEC 60255212, class 1 IEC 60068229

10.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests


Ambient Temperatures Standards: IEC 602556 (+23 F to +131 F)

recommended operating temperature 5 C to +55 C limiting temporary (transient) operating temperature limiting temperature during storage limiting temperature during transport 20 C to +70 C (4 F to 158 F)

Visibility of display may be impaired above +55 C/130 F in quiescent state, i.e. no pickup and no indications

25 C to +55 C (13 F to 131 F) 25 C to +70 C (13 F to 158 F)

Storage and transport of the device with factory packaging! Humidity Permissible humidity mean value p. year 75 % relative humidity on 56 days per year up to 93 % relative humidity; condensation not permissible!

10-8

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

General Device Data

All devices shall be installed such that they are not exposed to direct sunlight, nor subject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause condensation to occur.

10.1.8 Service Conditions


The device is designed for use in an industrial environment or an electrical utility environment, for installation in standard relay rooms and compartments so that proper installation and electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is ensured. In addition, the following are recommended: All contactors and relays that operate in the same cubicle, cabinet, or relay panel as the numerical protective device should, as a rule, be equipped with suitable surge suppression components. For substations with operating voltages of 100 kV and above, all external cables should be shielded with a conductive shield grounded at both ends. The shield must be capable of carrying the fault currents that could occur. For substations with lower operating voltages, no special measures are normally required. Do not withdraw or insert individual modules or boards while the protective device is energized. When handling the modules or the boards outside of the case, standards for components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) must be observed. The modules, boards, and device are not endangered when the device is completely assembled.

10.1.9 Construction
Housing Dimensions Weight (mass), approx. in flush mounted case, size 1/2 in surface mounted case, size 1/2 Degree of protection acc. IEC 60529 for the device in surface mounted case in flush mounted case front rear for human safety 7XP20 see drawings, Section 10.13 5,0 kg 9,5 kg

IP 51 IP 51 IP 50 IP 2x with closed protection cover

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

10-9

Technical Data

10.2

Differential Protection
Differential currentIDIFF> 0.10 A to 20.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 A)

Pickup Values

Differential current when switching onto a fault IDIFF switch on 0.10 A to 20.00 A1) Differential current High set differential currentIDIFF>> Tolerances IDIFF>stage IDIFF>>stage
1

0.5 A to 100.0 A1) or (stage disabled) 5 % of setting value 5 % of setting value

) Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied with 5.

Tripping Time

The tripping time depends on the communication speed. Pickup/trip times of the IDIFF>>stages approx.
transmission speed minimum typical 512 kBit/s 16 ms 20 ms 128 kBit/s 18 ms 23 ms 64 kBit/s 24 ms 32 ms

Drop-off time of the IDIFF>>stages approx.


transmission speed typical 512 kBit/s 39 ms 128 kBit/s 42 ms 64 kBit/s 52 ms

Pickup / trip commands of the IDIFF>stages approx.


transmission speed minimum (50 Hz) minimum(60 Hz) typical 512 kBit/s 34 ms 32 ms 38 ms 128 kBit/s 39 ms 36 ms 44 ms 64 kBit/s 47 ms 43 ms 57 ms

Drop-off time of the IDIFF>stages approx.


transmission speed typical 512 kBit/s 30 ms 128 kBit/s 35 ms 64 kBit/s 45 ms

Delay Times

Delay time of the Delay time of the for 1-phase pickup Expiry tolerance

IDIFF>stage TI-DIFF> IDIFF>stage T3I0 1PHAS

0.00 s to 60.00 s or (stage disabled)

(steps 0.01 s)

0.00 s to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s) or (stage disabled for 1-phase pickup) 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

The times set are pure delay times

10-10

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Differential Protection

Auto-Stabilization

Current transformer error at each end of the protected object Ratio between operating accuracy limit factor and nominal accuracy limit factor n/n 1.00 to 10.00 Transformer error at n/n Transformer error at n IN (class) Further stabilizing quantities (adaptive auto-stabilization) 0.5 % to 50.0 % 0.5 % to 50.0 % (steps 0.01) (steps 0.1 %) (steps 0.1 %)

Frequency deviation, delay time differences, harmonics, synchronous quality, jitter 10 % to 45 % (steps 1 %)

Inrush Stabilization

Stabilization ratio 2nd harmonic

I2fN/IfN

Maximum current for stabilization Crossblock function Max. action time for crossblock
1

1.1 A to 25.0 A 1) (steps 0.1 A) can be enabled and disabled

CROSSB 2HM or (active until drop off)

0.00 s to 60.00 s

(steps 0.01 s)

) Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied with 5. 0 to 11 ( 30) (steps 1)

Conditioning for Transformers (optional) Emergency Operation Frequency

Vector group matching Star-point conditioning Communication failure Frequency correction within range

earthed or unearthed (for each winding) see Section 10.6 0.8 f/fN 1.2 stable when starting machine

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

10-11

Technical Data

10.3
Intertrip

Intertripping, External Direct Local and Remote Tripping


Intertripping of the opposite end when singe-end tripping Operating time, total Trip time delay Expiry tolerance The set times are pure delay times.

can be enabled and disabled approx. 12 ms 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)

External Direct Local Tripping

1 % of setting value or 10 ms

External Direct Remote Tripping

Tripping of remote end by a command that is coupled into a binary input Operating times, total approx.
transmission speed minimum typical 512 kBit/s 15 ms 18 ms 128 kBit/s 18 ms 21 ms 64 kBit/s 24 ms 31 ms

Drop-off times, total approx.


transmission speed typical 512 kBit/s 13 ms 128 kBit/s 15 ms 64 kBit/s 26 ms

Trip time delay Trip time delay Expiry tolerance The set times are pure delay times.

0.00 s to 30.00 s(steps 0.01 s) 0.00 s to 30.00 s(steps 0.01 s) 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

10.4

Direct Remote Trip or Transmission of Binary Information (optional)


Number of possible remote commands Operating times, total approx.
transmission speed minimum typical 512 kBit/s 15 ms 18 ms 128 kBit/s 18 ms 21 ms 64 kBit/s 24 ms 31 ms

Remote Commands

Drop-off times, total approx.


transmission speed typical 512 kBit/s 13 ms 128 kBit/s 15 ms 64 kBit/s 26 ms

10-12

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Protection Data Interface and Differential Protection Topology

10.5

Protection Data Interface and Differential Protection Topology


Number of devices for protected object Connection optical fibre for flush mounted case for surface mounted case 2 mounting position D on the rear side on the bottom side

Topology Protection Data Interface

Connection modules for protection data interface(s), depending on the ordering version:
Module in Device FO5 1) FO6 2) FO7 2) FO8 2) Type of Connector ST ST ST FC Type of Fibre Multimode 62.5/125 m Multimode 62.5/125 m Monomode 9/125 m Monomode 9/125 m Optical Wavelength 820 nm 820 nm Perm. Path Attenuation 8 dB 16 dB 7 dB 18 dB Distance, typical 1.5 km 3.5 km 10 km 35 km

1300 nm 1300 nm

2)

) Laser class 1 according to EN 608251/ 2 using glass fibre 62.5/125 m Laser class 3A according to EN 608251/ 2

Character idle state Protection Data Communication Direct connection: Transmission speed Type of fibre Optical wavelength Permissible path attenuation Transmission distance Connection via communication networks: Communication converter Supported network interfaces

Light off

512 kBit/s

see Table above

see Appendix A, Section A.1.1 Accessories G701.1 with 64 kBit/s; X21 with 64 or 128 or 512 kBit/s

Connection to communication converter see table above under module FO5 Transmission speed 64 kBit/s with G701.1 512 kBit/s or 128 kBit/s or 64 kBit/s with X21 0.1 ms to 30 ms 0.000 ms to 3.000 ms (steps 0.1 ms) (steps 0.001 ms)

Max. transmission time Max. transmission time difference

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

10-13

Technical Data

10.6

Time Overcurrent Protection


As emergency overcurrent protection or back-up overcurrent protection: Emergency overcurrent protection Back-up overcurrent protection operates on communication failure operates independent on any events IPh>>, 3I0>>, IPh>, 3I0> IP, 3I0P one of the characteristics according to Figure 10-1 to 10-3 can be selected (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 s)

Operating Modes

Characteristics

Definite time stages Inverse time stage

(definite) (IDMT)

Current Stages

High set stages

IPh>> (phases) 0.10 A to 25.00 A1) or (ineffective) TIPh>> (phases) 0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) 3I0>> (earth) T3I0>> (earth) 0.05 A to 25.00 A1) or (ineffective) 0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) 0.10 A to 25.00 A1) or (ineffective)

Overcurrent stages (definite time)

IPh> (phases)

TIPh> (phases) 0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) 3I0> (earth) T3I0> (earth) Overcurrent stages (inverse time acc. IEC) IP (phases) TIP (phases) 0.05 A to 25.00 A1) or (ineffective) 0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) 0.10 A to 4.00 A1) or (ineffective) 0.05 s to 3.00 s or (ineffective)

TIPadd (phases) 0.00 s to 30.00 s or (ineffective) 3I0P (earth) T3I0P (earth) 0.05 A to 4.00 A1) or (ineffective) 0.05 s to 3.00 s or (ineffective) A1 )

T3I0Padd (earth) 0.00 s to 30.00 s Overcurrent stages IP (phases) (inverse time acc. ANSI) DIP (phases) 0.10 A to 4.00 or (ineffective)

0.50 s to 15.00 s or (ineffective)

TIPadd (phases) 0.00 s to 30.00 s

10-14

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

Time Overcurrent Protection


0.05 A to 4.00 A1) or (ineffective) 0.50 s to 15.00 s or (ineffective)

3I0P (earth) D3I0P (earth)

(steps 0.01 A) (steps 0.01 s) (steps 0.01 s)

T3I0Padd (earth) 0.00 s to 30.00 s Tolerances with definite time Tolerances with inverse time (IEC) currents times currents times

3 % of set value or 1% of nominal current 1 % of set value or 10 ms Pickup 5 % 15 ms at or 1.05 I/IP 1.15; 1.05 I/3I0P 1.15 for 2 I/IP 20 and TIP/s 1; or 2 I/3I0P 20 and T3I0P/s 1 for 2 I/IP 20 and DIP/s 1; or 2 I/3I0P 20 and D3I0P/s 1

(ANSI)

times

5 % 15 ms

The set times are pure delay times with definite time protection.
1

) Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied with 5.

Further Definite Stages; Stub Protection

Overcurrent IPh >STUB (phases) TIPh STUB (phases) 3I0 >STUB (earth) T3I0 STUB (earth) Tolerances currents times

0.10 A to 25.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A) or (ineffective) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s) or (ineffective) 0.05 A to 25.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A) or (ineffective) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s) or (ineffective) 3 % of setting value or 1% of rated current 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

Enable via special binary input is necessary. The set times are pure delay times.
1

) Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied with 5.

Operating Times of Definite Stages

Pickup time, minimum Pickup time, typical Dropoff time, typical

approx. 23 ms with fN = 50 Hz approx. 21 ms with fN = 60 Hz approx. 28 ms with fN = 50 Hz approx. 26 ms with fN = 60 Hz approx. 31 ms with fN = 50 Hz approx. 27 ms with fN = 60 Hz approx. 0.95 for IP/IN 0.5

Drop-off to Pickup Ratios

Current stages

7SD610 Manual C53000-G1176-C145-1

10-15

Technical Data

100 t [s] 30 20 10 Tp 3.2

100 t [s] 30 20 10

5
3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.05 1 Normal inverse: (Type A) 2 3 5 7 10 I/Ip
0.14 t = -------------------------------- T p 0.02 1 ( I Ip ) [s]

5
1.6 0.8 0.4 0.2 0.1 0.05 3 2 1 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.2 0.1 0